(1,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 9/ 1
Foreword
Foreword
SFWAA
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this
manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its
operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such
as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the
SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the
nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU
CORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next
owner will need the information found herein.
SUBARU CORPORATION, TOKYO, JAPAN
“SUBARU” and the six-star cluster design are registered trademarks of SUBARU CORPORATION.
*
C
Copyright 2020 SUBARU CORPORATION
(2,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 9/ 1
(3,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 9/ 1
This manual describes the following vehicle types.
1) Legacy
2) Outback
(2,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 9/ 1
(1,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Table of Contents
Keys and Doors .........................................................................................................113 Chapter 2
Instruments and Controls....................................................................................... 165 Chapter 3
Climate Control ......................................................................................................... 277
Audio ........................................................................................................................... 297 Chapter 5
Interior Equipment ................................................................................................... 301 Chapter 6
Starting and Operating............................................................................................ 323 Chapter 7
Driving Tips ............................................................................................................... 417 Chapter 8
In Case of Emergency ............................................................................................. 447 Chapter 9
Appearance Care ...................................................................................................... 473 Chapter 10
Maintenance and Service ....................................................................................... 481 Chapter 11
Specifications............................................................................................................ 529 Chapter 12
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects .................................... 549 Chapter 13
Index............................................................................................................................ 567 Chapter 14
Chapter 4
Illustrated Index ...........................................................................................................13
Chapter 1Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags ..............................................................................27
Introduction ....................................................................................................................1
(2,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
(3,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
sint
*
Warranties ........................................................... 2
Warranties for U.S.A. ............................................. 2
Warranties for Canada ........................................... 2
Warranties except for U.S.A. and Canada ............... 2
*
How to Use This Owner’s Manual ..................... 2
Using Your Owner’s Manual ................................... 2
Safety Warnings .................................................... 3
Safety Symbol ....................................................... 4
Abbreviation List ................................................... 4
*
Vehicle Symbols ................................................. 5
*
Safety Precautions When Driving ..................... 5
Seatbelt and SRS Airbag........................................ 5
Child Safety........................................................... 5
Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide) ................ 6
Drinking and Driving.............................................. 7
Drugs and Driving ................................................. 7
Driving When Tired or Sleepy ................................ 8
Modification of Your Vehicle .................................. 8
Use of Cell Phones/Texting and Driving ................. 8
Driving Vehicles Equipped with Navigation
System ............................................................... 8
Driving with Pets................................................... 8
Tire Pressures....................................................... 9
On-Road and Off-Road Driving .............................. 9
Attaching Accessories .......................................... 9
*
General Information ......................................... 10
California Perchlorate Advisory ............................10
Noise from under the Vehicle ...............................10
Event Data Recorder ............................................10
Introduction
0
Introduction
(4,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Warranties
s00aa
& Warranties for U.S.A.
s00aa01
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of
America, Inc. and sold at retail by an
authorized SUBARU dealer in the United
States come with the following warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranties
. Federal Emission Control Systems
Warranties
. California Emissions Control Sys-
tems Warranties
All warranty information, including applic-
ability, details of coverage and exclusions,
is in the “Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet.” Read these warranties carefully.
& Warranties for Canada
s00aa05
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru
Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an
authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada
come with the following warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranty
. Emission Control System Warranty
All warranty information, including applic-
ability, details of coverage and exclusions,
is in the “Warranty and Service Booklet.”
Read these warranties carefully.
& Warranties except for U.S.A.
and Canada
s00aa06
All warranty information, including details
of coverage and exclusions, is in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.”
Read these warranties carefully.
How to Use This Owner’s
Manual
s00ab
& Using Your Owner’s Manual
s00ab01
Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
read this manual. To protect yourself and
extend the service life of your vehicle,
follow the instructions in this manual.
Failure to observe these instructions may
result in serious injury and damage to your
vehicle.
This manual is composed of fourteen
chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief
table of contents, so you can usually tell at
a glance if that chapter contains the
information you want.
Introduction
This chapter informs you general informa-
tion before driving.
Illustrated Index
This chapter informs you about the vehicle
layout with illustrations.
Chapter 1: Seat, Seatbelt and SRS
Airbags
This chapter informs you how to use the
seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
tions for the SRS airbags.
Chapter 2: Keys and Doors
This chapter informs you how to operate
the keys, locks and windows.
Warranties
2
(5,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Chapter 3: Instruments and Controls
This chapter informs you about the opera-
tion of instrument panel indicators and how
to use the instruments and other switches.
Chapter 4: Climate Control
This chapter informs you how to operate
the climate control.
Chapter 5: Audio
This chapter informs you about your audio
system.
Chapter 6: Interior Equipment
This chapter informs you how to operate
interior equipment.
Chapter 7: Starting and Operating
This chapter informs you how to start and
operate your SUBARU.
Chapter 8: Driving Tips
This chapter informs you how to drive your
SUBARU in various conditions and ex-
plains some safety tips on driving.
Chapter 9: In case of Emergency
This chapter informs you what to do if you
have a problem, such as a flat tire or
engine overheating.
Chapter 10: Appearance Care
This chapter informs you how to keep your
SUBARU looking good.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and Service
This chapter informs you when you need to
take your SUBARU to the dealer for
scheduled maintenance and informs you
how to keep your SUBARU running
properly.
Chapter 12: Specifications
This chapter informs you about the dimen-
sions and capacities of your SUBARU.
Chapter 13: Consumer Information and
Reporting Safety Defects
This chapter informs you about Tire
information, Uniform tire quality grading
standards and Reporting safety defects.
Chapter 14: Index
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in
this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
For EyeSight system:
For details about the EyeSight system,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for the EyeSight system.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle
shown in the illustrations may differ from
your vehicle in terms of equipment.
& Safety Warnings
s00ab02
You will find a number of WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
These safety warnings alert you to poten-
tial hazards that could result in injury to you
or others.
Please read these safety warnings as well
as all other portions of this manual care-
fully in order to gain a better understanding
of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which injury or damage to your
vehicle, or both, could result if the
caution is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE gives information or sugges-
tions how to make better use of your
vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
How to Use This Owner’s Manual
3
0
Introduction
(6,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Safety Symbol
s00ab03
You will find a circle with a slash through it
in this manual. This symbol means “Do
not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this
happen”, depending upon the context.
& Abbreviation List
s00ab04
You may find several abbreviations in this
manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-
tions are shown in the following list.
Abbreviation Meaning
ABS Anti-lock brake system
A/C Air conditioner
AKI Anti knock index
ALR Automatic locking retractor
ALR/ELR
Automatic locking retractor/
Emergency locking retractor
AVH Auto Vehicle Hold
AWD All-wheel drive
BSD Blind Spot Detection
CVT
Continuously variable trans-
mission
DRL Daytime running light
EBD
Electronic brake force distri-
bution
ELR Emergency locking retractor
GAW Gross axle weight
GAWR Gross axle weight rating
GPS Global positioning system
GVW Gross vehicle weight
GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating
INT Intermittent
Abbreviation Meaning
LATCH
Lower anchors and tethers for
children
LCA Lane Change Assist
LED Light emitting diode
MIL Malfunction indicator light
MMT
Methylcyclopentadienyl man-
ganese tricarbonyl
OBD On-board diagnostics
RAB
Reverse Automatic Braking
system
RCTA Rear Cross Traffic Alert
RON Research octane number
SI-DRIVE SUBARU Intelligent Drive
SRH
Steering Responsive Head-
light
SRS
Supplemental restraint sys-
tem
TIN Tire identification number
TPMS
Tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem
How to Use This Owner’s Manual
4
(7,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Vehicle Symbols
s00ac
There are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
For warning and indicator lights, refer to
“Warning and Indicator Lights” FP24.
Mark Name
WARNING
CAUTION
Read these instructions care-
fully
Wear eye protection
Battery fluid contains sulfuric
acid
Keep children away
Keep flames away
Prevent explosions
Safety Precautions When
Driving
s00ad
& Seatbelt and SRS Airbag
s00ad01
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle must
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers must
always wear seatbelts when in
the vehicle. The SRS (Supple-
mental Restraint System) airbag
does not do away with the need to
fasten seatbelts. In combination
with the seatbelts, it offers the
best combined protection in case
of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
. The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always sit
upright and well back in the seat
as far from the steering wheel as
practical while still maintaining
full vehicle control and the front
passenger should move the seat
as far back as possible and sit
upright and well back in the seat.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
belts” FP46.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System Airbag)” FP77.
& Child Safety
s00ad02
WARNING
. Never hold a child on your lap or
in your arms while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a
collision, because the child will
be caught between the passen-
– CONTINUED –
Vehicle Symbols
5
0
Introduction
(8,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
ger and objects inside the vehi-
cle.
. While riding in the vehicle, infants
and small children should always
be seated in the REAR seat in an
infant or child restraint system
which is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight. If
a child is too big for a child
restraint system, the child should
sit in the REAR seat and be
restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating
positions. Never allow a child to
stand up or kneel on the seat.
. Place children in the REAR seat
properly restrained at all times in
a child restraint system or in a
seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and
force and can injure or even kill
children, especially if they are not
restrained or improperly re-
strained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT
IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Always turn the child safety locks
to the “LOCK” position when
children sit in the rear seat.
Serious injury could result if a
child accidentally opens the door
and falls out. Refer to “Child
Safety Locks” FP145.
. Always lock the passengers’ win-
dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child
operating the power window. Re-
fer to “Windows” FP145.
. Never leave unattended children,
adults or animals in the vehicle.
They could accidentally injure
themselves or others through
inadvertent operation of the ve-
hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,
temperature in a closed vehicle
could quickly become high en-
ough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to them.
. Help prevent children, adults or
animals from locking themselves
in the trunk. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in the trunk
could quickly become high en-
ough to cause death or serious
heat-related injuries including
brain damage to anyone locked
inside, particularly for small chil-
dren.
. When leaving the vehicle, close
all windows and lock all doors.
Also make certain that the trunk
is closed.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
belts” FP46.
. For the child restraint system, refer to
“Child Restraint Systems” FP58.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System Airbag)” FP77.
& Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon
Monoxide)
s00ad03
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is dan-
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
Safety Precautions When Driving
6
(9,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. Always properly maintain the en-
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering
the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoid remaining in a parked ve-
hicle for a long time while the
engine is running. If that is un-
avoidable, then use the ventila-
tion fan to force fresh air into the
vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the trunk lid or rear gate
closed while driving to prevent
exhaust gas from entering the
vehicle.
& Drinking and Driving
s00ad04
WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-
stream delays your reaction and
impairs your perception, judgment
and attentiveness. If you drive after
drinking – even if you drink just a
little – it will increase the risk of
being involved in a serious or fatal
accident, injuring or killing yourself,
your passengers and others. In
addition, if you are injured in the
accident, alcohol may increase the
severity of that injury.
Please don’t drink and drive.
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent
causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects
all people differently, you may have con-
sumed too much alcohol to drive safely
even if the level of alcohol in your blood is
below the legal limit. The safest thing you
can do is never drink and drive. However if
you have no choice but to drive, stop
drinking and sober up completely before
getting behind the wheel.
& Drugs and Driving
s00ad05
WARNING
There are some drugs (over the
counter and prescription) that can
delay your reaction time and impair
your perception, judgment and at-
tentiveness. If you drive after taking
them, it may increase your, your
passengers’ and other persons’ risk
of being involved in a serious or fatal
accident.
If you are taking any drugs, check with
your doctor or pharmacist or read the
literature that accompanies the medication
to determine if the drug you are taking can
impair your driving ability. Do not drive
after taking any medications that can make
you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability
to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you
have a medical condition that requires you
to take drugs, please consult with your
doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
own health and well-being, we urge you
not to take illegal drugs in the first place
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
to those drugs.
– CONTINUED –
Safety Precautions When Driving
7
0
Introduction
(10,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Driving When Tired or Sleepy
s00ad06
WARNING
When you are tired or sleepy, your
reaction will be delayed and your
perception, judgment and attentive-
ness will be impaired. If you drive
when tired or sleepy, your, your
passengers’ and other persons’
chances of being involved in a
serious accident may increase.
Please do not continue to drive but instead
find a safe place to rest if you are tired or
sleepy. On long trips, you should make
periodic rest stops to refresh yourself
before continuing on your journey. When
possible, you should share the driving with
others.
& Modification of Your Vehicle
s00ad07
WARNING
Do not remove the genuine SUBARU
navigation and/or audio system.
Doing so could cause the following
functions to be inoperable.
. Combination meter display (color
LCD)
. Rear view image and help lines
. Vehicle settings
. Climate control
. Front seat heater and ventilation
. Clock
CAUTION
Your vehicle should not be modified
other than with genuine SUBARU
parts and accessories. Other types
of modifications could affect its
performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or
performance problems resulting
from modification may not be cov-
ered under warranties.
& Use of Cell Phones/Texting
and Driving
s00ad16
CAUTION
Do not talk on a cell phone or text
while driving; it may distract your
attention from driving and lead to an
accident. If you use a cell phone to
talk or text, first pull off the road and
park in a safe place. In some States/
Provinces, it may be lawful to talk on
a phone while driving, but only if the
phone is hands-free.
& Driving Vehicles Equipped
with Navigation System
s00ad09
WARNING
Do not allow the monitor to distract
your attention from driving. Also, do
not operate the controls of the
navigation system while driving.
The loss of attention to driving could
lead to an accident. If you wish to
operate the controls of the naviga-
tion system, first take the vehicle off
the road and stop it in a safe
location.
& Driving with Pets
s00ad10
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
driving and distract your attention from
driving. In a collision or sudden stop,
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
your passengers. Besides, the pets can be
hurt under these situations. It is also for
their own safety that pets should be
properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-
strain a pet with a special traveling harness
Safety Precautions When Driving
8
(11,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
which can be secured to the rear seat with
a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be
secured to the rear seat by routing a
seatbelt through the carrier’s handle.
Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the
front passenger’s seat. For further infor-
mation, consult your veterinarian, local
animal protection society or pet shop.
& Tire Pressures
s00ad11
Check and, if necessary, adjust the pres-
sure of each tire and the spare (if
equipped) at least once a month and
before any long journey.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
tire pressures to the values shown on the
tire placard. For detailed information, refer
to “Tires and Wheels” FP502.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with
excessively low tire pressures
can cause the tires to deform
severely and to rapidly be-
come hot. A sharp increase in
temperature could cause tread
separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to
an accident.
& On-Road and Off-Road Driv-
ing
s00ad13
This vehicle is classified as a utility vehicle.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
Your vehicle has a higher ground clear-
ance and higher center of gravity, making it
more likely to roll over than ordinary
passenger cars. It also handles and
maneuvers differently from other passen-
ger cars. For this reason, please read
carefully the following section and follow
the instructions and precautions in order to
prevent serious injury or death due to loss
of control, rollover and other accidents.
Refer to “Off Road Driving” FP422.
& Attaching Accessories
s00ad15
WARNING
. Do not attach any accessories,
labels or stickers (other than
properly placed inspection stick-
ers) to the windshield. Such
items may obstruct your view.
. If it is necessary to attach an
accessory (such as an electronic
toll collection (ETC) device or
security pass) to the windshield,
consult your SUBARU dealer for
details on the proper location.
Safety Precautions When Driving
9
0
Introduction
(12,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
General Information
s00ak
& California Perchlorate Advi-
sory
s00ak03
Certain vehicle components such as air-
bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
keyless entry transmitter batteries may
contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
& Noise from under the Vehicle
s00ak01
NOTE
You may hear a noise from under the
vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours
after the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction. This
noise is caused by the operation of the
fuel evaporation leakage checking sys-
tem and the operation is normal. The
noise will stop after approximately 15
minutes.
& Event Data Recorder
s00ak04
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data
that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
. How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely ac-
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the informa-
tion if they have access to the vehicle or
the EDR.
General Information
10
(13,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(14,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(15,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
sill
*
Exterior .............................................................. 14
*
Interior ............................................................... 16
*
Instrument Panel............................................... 19
*
Steering Wheel.................................................. 20
*
Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/
Switches .......................................................... 21
*
Combination Meter ........................................... 22
U.S.-Spec. Models ................................................22
Except U.S.-Spec. Models.....................................23
*
Warning and Indicator Lights.......................... 24
Illustrated Index
1
Illustrated Index
(16,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Exterior
s00ay
1) Engine hood (page 487)
2) Headlights (page 248, 518)
3) Turn signal lights (page 256, 518)
4) Windshield wipers (page 258)
5) Moonroof (page 161)
6) Roof rail with integrated crossbars (page
432)
7) Door locks (page 137)
8) Outside mirrors (page 271)
9) Tire pressure (page 504)
10) Flat tires (page 452)
11) Fog lights (page 256, 518)
12) Tie-down hooks (page 461)
13) Towing hook (Outback) (page 461)
Exterior
14
(17,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1) Rear window defogger (page 261)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 328)
3) Child safety locks (page 145)
4) Tie-down holes (page 461)
5) Lights (page 248, 518)
6) Turn signal lights (page 256, 518)
7) Trunk lid (page 148)
8) Rear gate (page 151)
9) Rear window wiper (page 260)
10) Towing hook (page 461)
Exterior
15
1
Illustrated Index
(18,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Interior
s00az
1) Lower anchorages for child restraint
system (page 69)
· U.S.-spec. models:
5 lower anchorages
· Except U.S.-spec. models:
4 lower anchorages
2) Seatbelts (page 46)
3) Center console (page 305)
4) Accessory power outlet (page 308)
5) Front seats (page 28)
6) Rear seats (page 40)
Interior
16
(19,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1) Cup holder (page 306)
2) Select lever (page 348)
3) Accessory power outlet (page 308)
4) Glove box (page 305)
5) Dual 7.0-inch display models*
1
(page
232)/Climate control (page 279)/Audio*
2
6) 11.6-inch display models*
1
(page 211)/
Climate control (page 282)/Audio*
2
/Na-
vigation system*
2
7) Rear seat heater switches (page 39)
8) USB power supply (page 310)
*1: Center information display
*2: For details about how to use the audio and
navigation system (if equipped), refer to
the separate navigation/audio Owner’s
Manual.
– CONTINUED –
Interior
17
1
Illustrated Index
(21,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Instrument Panel
s00ba
1) Power window switches (page 145)
2) Remote control mirror switch (page 271)
3) Seat position memory buttons (page 33)
4) Combination meter (page 173)
5) Hazard warning flasher switch (page
172)
6) Camera for Driver Monitoring System
(page 404)
7) Front view monitor switch (page 377)
8) Electronic parking brake switch (page
366)
9) Tilt/Telescopic steering (page 274)
10) Hood release knob (page 487)
11) Hands-free Power Rear Gate off switch
(page 160)
12) Illumination brightness control dial (page
175)
13) Trunk lid opener button (page 149)/
Power rear gate button (page 152)
Instrument Panel
19
1
Illustrated Index
(22,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Steering Wheel
s00bb
1) Audio control switches*
1
2) Talk switch for voice command system*
1
3) Cruise control switches*
2
4) Shift paddles (page 351)
5) SI-DRIVE switches (page 353)
6) Heated Steering Wheel switch (page
275)
7) SRS airbag (page 77)
8) Horn (page 276)
9) Control switches for combination meter
display (color LCD) (page 202)
10) Hands-free phone switches*
1
*1: For details about how to use the switches,
refer to the separate navigation/audio
Owner’s Manual.
*2: For details about how to use the switches,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for the EyeSight system.
Steering Wheel
20
(23,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/Switches
s00bc
1) Windshield wiper (page 257)
2) Mist (page 258)
3) Windshield washer (page 259)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 260)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 259)
6) Wiper control lever (page 258)
7) Light control switch (page 248)
8) Front fog light switch (page 256)
9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 248)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam change
(page 250)
11) Turn signal lever (page 256)
Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/Switches
21
1
Illustrated Index
(24,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Combination Meter
s00bd
& U.S.-Spec. Models
s00bd01
1) Tachometer (page 173)
2) Select lever/gear position indicator (page
197)
3) Combination meter display (color LCD)
(page 201)
4) Trip meter and odometer (page 173)
5) Speedometer (page 173)
6) Fuel gauge (page 174)
7) Digital speed screen (page 208)
8) Engine coolant temperature gauge (page
175)
Combination Meter
22
(25,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Except U.S.-Spec. Models
s00bd02
1) Tachometer (page 173)
2) Select lever/gear position indicator (page
197)
3) Combination meter display (color LCD)
(page 201)
4) Trip meter and odometer (page 173)
5) Speedometer (page 173)
6) Fuel gauge (page 174)
7) Digital speed screen (page 208)
8) Engine coolant temperature gauge (page
175)
Combination Meter
23
1
Illustrated Index
(26,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Warning and Indicator Lights s00be
Mark Name Page
Seatbelt warning light 177
Front passenger’s
seatbelt warning light
177
Rear seatbelt warning
light
179
SRS airbag system
warning light
181
CHECK ENGINE warn-
ing light/Malfunction in-
dicator light
182
Charge warning light 183
Oil pressure warning
light
183
Engine low oil level
warning indicator
183
AT OIL TEMP warning
light
184
/ ABS warning light 185
Mark Name Page
/
Brake system warning
light
186
/
Electronic parking
brake indicator light
187
Door open indicator 189
Engine hood open
warning light
189
Low fuel warning light 189
All-Wheel Drive warn-
ing light
189
Power steering warning
light
189
Auto Vehicle Hold ON
indicator light
188
Auto Vehicle Hold op-
eration indicator light
188
Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol warning light/Vehi-
cle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light
190
Mark Name Page
Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol OFF indicator light
191
Access key warning in-
dicator (if equipped)
191
Security indicator light 196
Turn signal indicator
lights
197
High beam indicator
light
197
High beam assist indi-
cator
197
Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning
light
198
LED headlight warning
light
198
Steering Responsive
Headlight OFF indicator
light
198
Steering Responsive
Headlight warning light
198
Warning and Indicator Lights
24
(27,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Mark Name Page
Front fog light indicator
light (if equipped)
198
X-MODE indicator
(Outback)
199
Hill descent control in-
dicator (Outback)
199
Headlight indicator light 198
Low tire pressure warn-
ing light (U.S.-spec.
models)
184
Front passenger’s fron-
tal airbag ON indicator
light
181
Front passenger’s fron-
tal airbag OFF indicator
light
181
Windshield washer fluid
warning light
189
Auto Start Stop OFF
indicator light
198
Auto Start Stop indica-
tor light (green)
199
Mark Name Page
Auto Start Stop warning
light (yellow)
198
Auto Start Stop No Ac-
tivity Detected indicator
light
199
BSD/RCTA warning in-
dicator (if equipped)
199
BSD/RCTA OFF indi-
cator (if equipped)
199
Intelligent (I) mode in-
dicator (if equipped)
197
Sport Sharp (S#) mode
indicator (if equipped)
197
Icy road surface warn-
ing indicator
200
RAB warning indicator
(if equipped)
200
RAB OFF indicator (if
equipped)
200
Sonar audible alarm
OFF indicator (if
equipped)
201
Mark Name Page
Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem operation indicator
light (green) (if
equipped)
200
Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem warning light (yel-
low) (if equipped)
200
Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem OFF indicator light
(if equipped)
200
Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem temporary stop in-
dicator light (if
equipped)
200
Warning and Indicator Lights
25
1
Illustrated Index
(28,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(29,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
s01
1-1. Front Seats........................................................ 28
Manual Seat (If Equipped) .....................................31
Power Seat (If Equipped) ......................................32
Head Restraint Adjustment ...................................37
1-2. Seat Heater (If Equipped) ................................. 38
Front Seat Heater .................................................39
Rear Seat Heater...................................................39
1-3. Seat Ventilation (If Equipped) .......................... 40
1-4. Rear Seats ......................................................... 40
Reclining the Seatback (Outback) .........................41
Folding Down the Rear Seatback ..........................42
Head Restraint Adjustment ...................................44
Armrest ................................................................46
1-5. Seatbelts............................................................ 46
Seatbelt Safety Tips..............................................46
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .....................47
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor (ALR/ELR) ...........................................48
Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime ........................48
Fastening the Seatbelt ..........................................48
Seatbelt Maintenance............................................54
1-6. Seatbelt Pretensioners ..................................... 55
Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt Pretensioner ..............55
Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt and Lap Belt
Pretensioners .....................................................56
System Monitors...................................................57
System Servicing..................................................57
Precautions against Vehicle Modification ..............57
1-7. Rear Seat Reminder ......................................... 58
1-8. Child Restraint Systems .................................. 58
Safety Tips for Installing Child Restraint
Systems.............................................................60
Where to Place a Child Restraint System..............61
Choosing a Child Restraint System ......................63
Installing Child Restraint Systems with ALR/ELR
Seatbelt .............................................................63
Installing a Booster Seat ......................................68
Installation of Child Restraint Systems by Use
of Lower and Tether Anchorages (LATCH) ..........69
Top Tether Anchorages ........................................74
1-9. SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System Airbag)............................................... 77
General Precautions regarding SRS Airbag
System ..............................................................77
General Precautions regarding SRS Airbag
System for Accessories and Any Objects ...........79
General Precautions regarding SRS Airbag
System and Children ..........................................81
Components ........................................................84
SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag System, SRS
Seat Cushion Airbag, SRS Side Airbag and
SRS Curtain Airbag ............................................86
SRS Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag ........... 100
SRS Airbag System Monitors ............................. 107
SRS Airbag System Servicing ............................ 108
Precautions against Vehicle Modification ............ 109
How to Contact the Vehicle Manufacturer
concerning Modifications for Persons with
Disabilities That May Affect the Advanced
Airbag System ................................................. 110
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(30,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1-1. Front Seats
s01aa
WARNING
. Never adjust the seat while driv-
ing, as personal injury or loss of
vehicle control may occur.
. Before adjusting the seat, ensure
nothing is blocking the adjusting
mechanism.
. After adjusting the seat, move it
back and forth to ensure the seat
is securely locked. If it is not, it
may move suddenly or the seat-
belt may not operate properly.
. Do not put objects under the front
seats. They may interfere with
front seat locking mechanism
and cause an accident.
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits
back and upright in the seat. To
reduce the risk of sliding under
the seatbelt in a collision, the
front seatbacks should always
be used in the upright position
while the vehicle is running. If the
front seatbacks are not in the
upright position and a collision
occurs, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious injury or death.
. The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are not sitting
back and upright when the SRS
airbag deploys could suffer ser-
ious injury. Because the SRS
airbag needs enough space for
deployment, the driver should
always sit upright and well back
in the seat as far from the steer-
ing wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control,
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
WARNING
Seat children in the rear seat prop-
erly restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults, their
risk of being injured from deploy-
ment is greater. For that reason, we
strongly recommend that ALL chil-
dren (including those in child re-
straint systems) sit in the REAR seat
properly restrained at all times in a
child restraint system or in a seat-
belt, whichever is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight. Se-
Front Seats
28
(31,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
cure ALL types of child systems in
the REAR seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-
STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions. For instructions and precau-
tions concerning child restraint sys-
tems, refer to “Child Restraint Sys-
tems” FP58.
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from slid-
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
place objects such as cushions
between the passenger and the seat-
back. If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
Do not let rear passengers rest their
feet between the front seatback and
seat cushion. Doing so may lead to
detective operation of the following
systems and could result in serious
injury.
. Occupant detection system
. SRS side airbag
. SRS seat cushion airbag
. Front seat heater (if equipped)
. Front seat ventilation (if
equipped)
. Power seat (if equipped)
– CONTINUED –
Front Seats
29
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(32,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
WARNING
Do not press your feet onto the
instrument panel. Doing so may
prevent the occupant detection
function of the SRS airbag system
from functioning correctly, and may
result in serious injury or death in
the event of an accident.
WARNING
Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits well
back and upright in the seat. Do not
put cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
death.
WARNING
Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback
because it could tumble forward and
injure passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
Front Seats
30
(33,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Manual Seat (If Equipped)
s01aa01
! Forward and backward adjustment
s01aa0101
1. Sit in the seat to adjust.
2. Pull the lever upward, slide the seat to
the desired position, and then release the
lever.
3. Try to move the seat back and forth to
make sure that it is securely locked into
place.
! Reclining the seatback
s01aa0102
1. Pull up the reclining lever, adjust the
seatback to the desired position, and then
release the lever.
2. Make sure the seatback is securely
locked into place.
The seatback placed in a reclined position
can spring back upward with force when
pulling up the lever. While operating the
lever to return the seatback, hold the
seatback lightly so that it may be raised
back gradually.
! Seat cushion height adjustment
(driver’s seat)
s01aa0103
1) Push the lever down to lower the seat.
2) Pull the lever up to raise the seat.
You can adjust the height of the seat by
moving the seat cushion adjustment lever
up or down.
– CONTINUED –
Front Seats
31
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(34,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Power Seat (If Equipped)
s01aa02
! Driver’s seat
s01aa0208
1) Seat position forward/backward con-
trol switch
To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or
backward. During forward/backward ad-
justment of the seat, you cannot adjust
the seat cushion angle or seat cushion
height.
2) Seat cushion angle control switch
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up
or push down the front end of the control
switch.
3) Seat height control switch
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push
down the rear end of the control switch.
4) Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback, move
the control switch.
5) Lumbar support control switch
To increase lower back support, push the
front side of the switch. To decrease
lower back support, push the rear side of
the switch.
! Front passenger’s seat (if equipped)
s01aa0209
1) Seat position forward/backward con-
trol switch
To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or
backward.
2) Seat cushion angle control switch
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up
or push down the front end of the control
switch.
3) Seat height control switch
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push
down the rear end of the control switch.
4) Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback, move
the control switch.
Front Seats
32
(35,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Thigh extension (driver’s seat – if
equipped)
s01aa0210
CAUTION
When the thigh extension is pulled
out to its fullest, do not put weight on
the top of it. Doing so could break
the part.
The seat front length can be adjusted.
Pull up the lever “1” to adjust the length
and release the lever to lock it.
! Power driver’s seat with synchro-
nized outside mirrors memory
function (if equipped)
s01aa0207
WARNING
. To avoid loss of vehicle control or
personal injury, never perform
the following operations while
driving.
– Adjusting the seat
– Selecting a registered seat
position
. Before adjusting the seat or se-
lecting a registered seat position,
make sure that cargo or the
hands and feet of rear seat pas-
sengers are clear of the adjusting
mechanism.
. The memory adjustment of the
seat position is finished. Be sure
to confirm that the select lever is
in the “P” position, and the park-
ing brake is applied, when adjust-
ing the seat position. Do not drive
until the utilizing of the seat
position is complete.
. When any unusual conditions or
malfunctions occur during the
memory adjustment of the seat
position, stop the memory ad-
justment of the seat position by
performing any of the following
procedures.
– Operate any of the power seat
switches.
– Press the “SET” button.
– Press button “1” or “2”.
– Operate the outside mirror
control switch.
Register the seat position with button “1” or
“2” or each of the key fobs.
The following memory positions can be
registered.
. Forward/backward position of the seat
. Angle of the seatback
. Angle of the seat cushion
. Height of the seat
. Angle of the outside mirrors
. Angle of the outside mirror angle on the
passenger’s side when the reverse tilt-
down operates.
NOTE
The seat position can also be retrieved
with the Driver Monitoring System user
information. To do so, perform user
registration in the Driver Monitoring
System settings. Refer to “Driver Mon-
itoring System” FP227.
– CONTINUED –
Front Seats
33
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(36,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Registration of memory position
with button “1” or “2”
s01aa020701
1. Adjust the seat and outside mirror
positions under the following conditions.
. The parking brake is applied.
. The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
2. Register the adjusted positions by
either of the following procedures.
. Press the “SET” button, then press
either “1” or “2” until a chirp sounds
within 5 seconds.
. While pressing and holding the
“SET” button, press either “1” or “2”
until a chirp sounds within 5 seconds.
A chirp will sound once, and the seat
position and outside mirror angle on the
passenger’s side will be registered.
NOTE
If a new position is registered for the
same button, the previously registered
memory position is deleted.
! Registration of the reverse tilt-
down mirror angle with button
“1” or “2”
s01aa020706
CAUTION
Depress the brake pedal when re-
gistering the reverse tilt-down mir-
ror angle.
1. Move the select lever to the “R”
position, then the outside mirror angle on
the passenger’s side will move to the
reverse tilt-down position.
2. Adjust the outside mirror angle on the
passenger’s side. For details about the
settings, refer to “Remote control mirror
switch” FP271.
3. Move the select lever to the “P”
position, then the outside mirror angle will
return to its original position.
4. Register the adjusted positions by
either of the following procedures.
. Press the “SET” button, then press
either “1” or “2” until a chirp sounds
within 5 seconds.
. While pressing and holding the
“SET” button, press either “1” or “2”
until a chirp sounds within 5 seconds.
A chirp will sound once, and the seat
position and outside mirror angle on the
passenger’s side will be registered.
NOTE
. Approximately 9 seconds after the
select lever is moved to any position
other than “R” position.
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as the front
passenger’s side mirror. The setting of
the driver’s side mirror operation can
be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for de-
tails.
! Registration of memory position
with a access key fob (if
equipped)
s01aa020703
1. Adjust the memory position under the
following conditions.
. The parking brake is applied.
. The ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
Front Seats
34
(37,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
2. Hold the access key fob and press and
hold the “SET” button. Then press the “
”
button of the access key fob.
A chirp will sound once, and the memory
position is registered.
NOTE
When registering the seat position,
carry the access key that you want to
register with you. If you are carrying 2
or more access keys, registration may
not be possible.
! Registration of the reverse tilt-
down mirror angle with the key
fob
s01aa020707
CAUTION
Depress the brake pedal when re-
gistering the reverse tilt-down mir-
ror angle.
1. Move the select lever to the “R”
position, then the outside mirror angle will
move to the reverse tilt-down position.
2. Adjust the outside mirror angle. For
details about the settings, refer to “Remote
control mirror switch” FP271.
3. Move the select lever to the “P”
position, then the outside mirror angle will
return to its original position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”/
“LOCK” position.
5. Hold the access key fob and press and
hold the “SET” button, then press the “
”
button of the access key fob.
A chirp will sound once, and the reverse
tilt-down mirror angle will be registered.
NOTE
. Approximately 9 seconds after the
select lever is moved to any position
other than “R” position.
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as the front
passenger’s side mirror. The setting of
the driver’s side mirror operation can
be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for de-
tails.
. The system stores the adjusted
mirror angle for approximately 45 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is turned
to the “OFF” position. Register the
mirror angle while the memory function
is available.
! Utilizing of memory position
registered with button “1” or “2”
s01aa020702
WARNING
Be sure to press the correct button
to retrieve your registered memory
position. If the seat position is not
optimum for you, it may adversely
affect your driving and may reduce
the effectiveness of the seatbelt.
That could result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
– CONTINUED –
Front Seats
35
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(38,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Put the select lever is in the “P” position
and apply the parking brake. Then press
button “1” or “2”.
A chirp will sound and the seat and angle
of the outside mirrors moves to the
registered position.
When the select lever is moved to the “R”
position, the outside mirror will move to the
registered reverse tilt-down position.
NOTE
. If the vehicle battery is removed, the
registered memory position data will
not be deleted.
. When the button “1” or “2” is
pressed within 45 seconds after the
driver’s door is opened, the registered
memory position can be retrieved even
if the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or
“OFF” position.
. If buttons “1” and “2” are pressed at
the same time, execution of seat posi-
tion retrieval may not be possible.
. When the retrieved position is the
same as the current seat position, a
chirp will sound twice.
! Utilizing of the seat position
registered with access key fob
s01aa020704
1. Hold the registered access key fob.
2. Unlock the driver’s door by pressing
the “
” button or gripping the door handle.
3. Open the driver’s door.
A chirp sounds and the seat moves to the
registered position.
When the select lever is moved to the “R”
position, the outside mirror will move to the
registered reverse tilt-down position.
NOTE
. If the registered seat position cannot
be retrieved after performing the pre-
vious procedures, try the following
procedures.
(1) Press the “SET” button on the
driver’s door.
(2) Press the “
” button on the
access key fob or touch the door
lock sensor to lock the doors.
(3) Perform the prior procedures
again.
. If the keyless access function is
disabled, the seat position cannot be
retrieved by gripping the driver’s door
handle. However, the seat position can
still be retrieved by pressing the “
”
button on the access key fob. For
information about how to enable/dis-
able the keyless access function, refer
to “Disabling Keyless Access Func-
tion” FP127.
. If a new position is registered for the
same access key fob, the previously
registered seat position is deleted.
Front Seats
36
(39,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. If you are carrying 2 or more access
keys, seat position retrieval may not be
possible.
! Clearing the registered seat posi-
tion with access key fob
s01aa020705
1. Close the driver’s door.
2. While holding the access key fob and
pressing the “SET” button, press the “
”
button on the access key fob.
A chirp will sound, and the registered seat
position will be cleared.
NOTE
After deleting the seat position, wait for
a few moments before registering a
new seat position.
& Head Restraint Adjustment
s01aa04
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Also, never install
the head restraints backwards.
Doing so will prevent the head
restraints from functioning as
intended. Therefore, when the
head restraints are removed, all
head restraints must be rein-
stalled properly to protect vehicle
occupants.
. The vehicle should not be oper-
ated until the head restraints are
installed in their proper posi-
tions.
. The front seat head restraints are
designed to be installed into the
front seats only. The rear seat
head restraints are designed to
be installed into the rear seats
only. Do not attempt to install the
front seat head restraints into the
rear seats, or the rear seat head
restraints into the front seats.
Both the driver’s seat and front passen-
ger’s seat are equipped with head re-
straints. Both head restraints are adjusta-
ble in the following ways.
! Head restraint height adjustment
s01aa0401
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while press-
ing the release button on the top of the
seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
the release button to lower the head
restraint.
– CONTINUED –
Front Seats
37
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(40,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Each head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
NOTE
It is not possible to remove or install the
head restraint without reclining the
front seatback. Reclining the front seat-
back and then remove or install the
head restraint.
! Head restraint angle adjustment
s01aa0402
The angle of the head restraint can be
adjusted in several steps. While maintain-
ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the
head restraint to a position where the back
of your head is as close to the head
restraint as possible.
To tilt:
Tilt the head restraint by hand to the
preferred position. A click will be audible
when the head restraint is locked.
To return:
Tilt the head restraint once as far forward
as it can go. The head restraint will
automatically return to the fully upright
position. Then, adjust the head restraint
again to the preferred angle.
1-2. Seat Heater (If Equipped)
s01ab
The seat heater operates when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
CAUTION
. Do not put hard or heavy objects
or ones with protrusions on the
seat, and do not stab the seat
with sharp objects, such as pins
or needles.
. People with delicate skin may
suffer slight burns even at low
temperatures if they use the seat
heater for a long period of time.
When using the heater, always be
sure to warn the persons con-
cerned.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates against heat,
such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat.
. When the seat is warmed enough
or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn off the seat heater.
NOTE
. Use of the seat heater for a long
period of time while the engine is not
Seat Heater
38
(41,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
running can cause battery discharge.
. When using for a long period of time,
we recommend setting the heater to the
MID or LOW position. Use the HIGH
position for only quick heating at the
start of the function usage.
& Front Seat Heater
s01ab05
Adjust the front seat heater function on the
center information display. Refer to “Front
Seat Heater” FP290.
NOTE
The front seat heater function cannot
be used simultaneously with the seat
ventilation (if equipped).
& Rear Seat Heater
s01ab06
CAUTION
Do not open and close the center
console lid while operating the rear
seat heater switch. There is the risk
of fingers being caught in the lid.
Rear seat heater switches
1) Front passenger’s side
2) Indicator lights
3) Driver’s side
Press the rear seat heater switch. Each
time you press the switch, the mode will
change as follows.
HIGH:
2 indicator lights are illuminated.
LOW:
1 indicator light is illuminated.
OFF:
All indicator lights turn off.
Selecting “HIGH” mode will cause the seat
to heat up quicker.
NOTE
Only the front seat heater switches
retain the previous switch position
even if the vehicle has restarted. The
rear seat switch will reset.
Seat Heater
39
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(42,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1-3. Seat Ventilation (If
Equipped)
s01ar
The seat ventilation are equipped in the
front seats.
The seat ventilation operate when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
CAUTION
. Do not put hard or heavy objects
or ones with protrusions on the
seat, and do not stab the seat
with sharp objects, such as pins
or needles.
. When cleaning the seat, do not
use organic solvents, such as
thinner, benzene, or alcohol.
. If water or liquid is spilled on the
seat, wipe it off with a dry cloth
immediately.
NOTE
. Use of the seat ventilation for a long
period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.
. The seat ventilation function cannot
be used simultaneously with the front
seat heater.
. When using for a long period of time,
we recommend setting the seat ventila-
tion to the MID or LOW position. Use the
HIGH position for only quick cooling at
the start of the function usage.
Adjust the seat ventilation function on the
center information display. Refer to “Front
Seat Ventilation” FP290.
1-4. Rear Seats
s01ac
WARNING
Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits back
and upright in the seat. Do not place
cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks
or seat cushions. By doing so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
death.
Seat Ventilation
40
(43,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
WARNING
Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback
as it could tumble forward and injure
passengers in the event of a sudden
stop or accident.
& Reclining the Seatback
(Outback)
s01ac06
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from slid-
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion.
CAUTION
If the vehicle is equipped with a
cargo area cover, observe the fol-
lowing precautions.
. Make sure hands are not pinched
between the headrest and the
cargo area cover when rear seat
is reclined.
. Move the front cover of the cargo
area cover backward so that the
cover is not damaged by the
reclined seatback. Refer to “Lift-
ing Cargo Cover (Outback – If
Equipped)” FP314.
Adjust the seatback to the desired position
while pulling the lever.
After adjusting the seatback, release the
lever and make sure the seatback is
securely locked into place.
– CONTINUED –
Rear Seats
41
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(44,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Folding Down the Rear Seat-
back
s01ac02
WARNING
. When folding down the seatback,
check that there are no passen-
gers or objects on the rear seat.
Not doing so creates a risk of
injury or property damage.
. Never allow passengers to ride
on the folded rear seatback or in
the cargo area or trunk. Doing so
may result in serious injury or
death.
. Secure all objects and especially
long items properly to prevent
them from being thrown around
inside the vehicle and causing
serious injury during a sudden
steering maneuver or accelera-
tion.
. When you return the seatback to
its original position, shake it
slightly to confirm that it is se-
curely in place. If it is not securely
fixed in place, it may suddenly
fold down in the event of sudden
braking, or objects may move out
from the cargo area, both could
cause serious injury or death.
1) Striker
WARNING
When the seatback is returned to its
original position, observe the fol-
lowing precautions. Failure to do so
may lead to serious injury or an
accident because the proper seat-
belt operation will be affected.
. The seatbelt should not be
caught in the seatback and it
should be fully visible.
. The seatbelt should not pass
behind the striker for the seat-
back.
CAUTION
For Outback, the rear seatback may
fold down quickly due to the internal
spring. Hold the seatback while pull-
ing the release lever to slow it down.
Rear Seats
42
(45,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Folding down the rear seatback
(Legacy)
s01ac0201
Release button
1) Release lever (if equipped)
Unlock the seatback by performing either
of the following procedures and then fold
the seatback down.
. Push the release button.
. Pull the release lever.
! Folding down the rear seatback
(Outback)
s01ac0202
Release button
Release lever
Folding the seatback by performing either
of the following procedures.
. Push the release button.
. Pull the release lever.
– CONTINUED –
Rear Seats
43
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(46,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Return the rear seatback
s01ac0204
WARNING
When returning the seatback to its
original position, observe the fol-
lowing precaution.
Failure to do so may damage the
seatbelt, and possibly result in a
serious injury.
. Pull the seatbelt out towards the
vehicle exterior so that it will not
be caught between the seatback
and the trim.
Lock release button
1) Unlocked
2) Locked
A) Unlocking marker in red
To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place and ensure that the unlocking
marker on the lock release button is no
longer visible.
WARNING
When you return the seatback to its
original position, check that the
unlocking marker on the lock re-
lease button is not visible. Also,
shake the seatback slightly to con-
firm that it is securely in place. If the
seatback is not securely in place, the
seatback may suddenly fold down in
the event of sudden braking, or
objects may move out from the
cargo area, which could cause ser-
ious injury or death.
& Head Restraint Adjustment
s01ac03
Both the rear window side seats and the
rear center seat are equipped with head
restraints.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you remove the head restraints,
you must reinstall all head re-
straints to protect vehicle occu-
pants.
. All occupants, including the dri-
ver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
. The front seat head restraints are
designed to be installed into the
Rear Seats
44
(47,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
front seats only. The rear seat
head restraints are designed to
be installed into the rear seats
only. Do not attempt to install the
front seat head restraints into the
rear seats, or the rear seat head
restraints into the front seats.
! Rear window side seating position
s01ac0301
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while press-
ing the release button on the top of the
seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.
The head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
When the seats are not occupied, lower
the head restraints to improve rearward
visibility.
NOTE
For Legacy, it is not possible to remove
or install the head restraint without
folding down the rear seatback. Fold
down the rear seatback and then re-
move or install the head restraint.
! Rear center seating position
s01ac0302
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used in the retracted position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to the extended posi-
tion.
1) When not used (retracted position)
2) When used (extended position)
– CONTINUED –
Rear Seats
45
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(48,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while press-
ing the release button on the top of the
seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.
When the rear center seating position is
occupied, raise the head restraint to the
extended position. When the rear center
seating position is not occupied, lower the
head restraint to improve rearward visibi-
lity.
& Armrest
s01ac01
To lower the armrest, pull on the armrest’s
top edge.
WARNING
To avoid serious injury and vehicle
damage, passengers must never sit
on the center armrest.
1-5. Seatbelts
s01ae
& Seatbelt Safety Tips
s01ae01
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
. All belts should fit snugly in order
to provide full restraint. Loose
fitting belts are not as effective in
preventing or reducing injury.
. Each seatbelt is designed to sup-
port only one person. Never use a
single belt for two or more per-
sons – even children. Otherwise,
in an accident, serious injury or
death could result.
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies
including retractors and attach-
ing hardware worn by occupants
of a vehicle that has been in a
serious accident. The entire as-
sembly should be replaced even
if damage is not obvious.
Seatbelts
46
(49,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. Seat children in the rear seat
properly restrained at all times.
The SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force
and can injure or even kill chil-
dren, especially if they are not
restrained or improperly re-
strained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater. For that
reason, we strongly recommend
that ALL children (including
those in child restraint systems)
sit in the REAR seat properly
restrained at all times in a child
restraint system or in a seatbelt,
whichever is appropriate for the
child’s height and weight. Secure
ALL types of child restraint sys-
tems in the REAR seats at all
times.
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-
STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SER-
IOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating
positions. For instructions and
precautions concerning the child
restraint system, refer to “Child
Restraint Systems” FP58.
This vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seatbelt by the front
passenger when any of the SRS frontal,
side and curtain airbags deploys.
! Infants or small children
s01ae0101
Use a child restraint system that is suitable
for this vehicle. Refer to “Child Restraint
Systems” FP58.
! Children
s01ae0102
If a child is too big for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear seat
and be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions. Never allow a child to
stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
the face or neck, move the child closer to
the belt buckle to help provide a good
shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to
securely place the lap belt as low as
possible on the hips and not on the child’s
waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt
cannot be properly positioned, a child
restraint system should be used. Never
place the shoulder belt under the child’s
arm or behind the child’s back.
! Expectant mothers
s01ae0103
Expectant mothers also need to use the
seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
for specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips, not over the waist.
& Emergency Locking Retrac-
tor (ELR)
s01ae02
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
Locking Retractor (ELR).
The emergency locking retractor allows
normal body movement but the retractor
– CONTINUED –
Seatbelts
47
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(50,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
locks automatically during a sudden stop,
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
out of the retractor.
& Automatic Locking Retractor/
Emergency Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR/ELR)
s01ae03
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-
matic Locking Retractor/Emergency Lock-
ing Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic
Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor normally functions as an Emer-
gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/
ELR has an additional locking mode,
“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode”, intended to secure a child restraint
system.
The ALR mode functions as follows.
When the seatbelt is once drawn out
completely and is then retracted even
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
that position and the seatbelt cannot be
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
retracted fully, the ALR mode is canceled
and the ELR mode is restored.
When securing a child restraint system on
the rear seats by using a seatbelt, the
seatbelt must be changed over to the
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
For instructions on how to install the child
restraint system using a seatbelt, refer to
“Installing Child Restraint Systems with
ALR/ELR Seatbelt” FP63.
When the child restraint system is re-
moved, make sure that the retractor is
restored to the Emergency Locking Re-
tractor (ELR) mode by allowing the seat-
belt to retract fully.
& Seatbelt Warning Light
and Chime
s01ae04
Refer to “Seatbelt Warning Light and
Chime” FP177.
& Fastening the Seatbelt
s01ae06
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury.
. Keep the lap belt as low as
possible on your hips. In a colli-
sion, this spreads the force of the
lap belt over stronger hip bones
instead of across the weaker
abdomen.
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright posi-
tion while the vehicle is running.
If the front seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
. Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions.
If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap
belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result
in serious internal injury or death.
Seatbelts
48
(51,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
WARNING
Never place the shoulder belt under
the arm or behind the back. If an
accident occurs, this can increase
the risk or severity of injury.
CAUTION
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
become very hot in a vehicle that has
been closed up in sunny weather;
they could burn an occupant. Do not
touch such hot parts until they cool.
! Front seatbelts
s01ae0601
1. Adjust the seat position:
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
upright position. Move the seat as far from
the steering wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-
back to the upright position. Move the seat
as far back as possible.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
5. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on
the hips, not on the waist.
– CONTINUED –
Seatbelts
49
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(52,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Adjusting the front seat shoulder
belt anchor height
s01ae060101
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best suited for the
driver/front passenger. Always adjust the
anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
Push and hold the upper part of the anchor
and slide the anchor up.
To lower:
Push and hold the upper part of the anchor
and slide the anchor down.
Pull down the anchor to make sure that it is
locked in place.
WARNING
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
s01ae060102
1) Button
1. Push the button on the buckle.
2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent it
from getting tangled or twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that the
belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
! Rear seatbelts (except rear center
seatbelt on Outback)
s01ae0602
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
the belt retract slightly after giving a
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
again.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
Seatbelts
50
(53,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
4. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on
the hips, not on the waist.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
s01ae060201
1) Button
1. Push the button on the buckle.
2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent it
from getting tangled or twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that the
belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
! Rear center seatbelt on Outback
s01ae0603
1) Center seatbelt tongue plate
2) Anchor tongue plate
3) Anchor buckle
4) Center seatbelt buckle
– CONTINUED –
Seatbelts
51
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(54,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
WARNING
Fastening the seatbelt with the web-
bing twisted can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
When fastening the belt after it is
pulled out from the retractor, espe-
cially when inserting the anchor
tongue plate into the mating buckle
(on right-hand side), always check
that the webbing is not twisted.
WARNING
Be sure to fasten both tongue plates
to the respective buckles. If the
seatbelt is used only as a shoulder
belt (with the anchor tongue plate
not fastened to the anchor buckle on
the right-hand side), it cannot prop-
erly restrain the wearer in position in
an accident, possibly resulting in
serious injury or death.
Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the
recess of the ceiling.
1. Retrieve the anchor tongue plate from
the slot in the recess by pulling the anchor
tongue plate.
2. Pass the seatbelt through the belt
guide.
3. Make sure that the “ ” mark on the
anchor tongue plate and the “
” mark on
the buckle face outwards.
Seatbelts
52
(55,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
4. After confirming that the webbing is not
twisted, insert the anchor tongue plate
attached at the webbing end into the
buckle on the right-hand side until a click
sounds.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
give it a strong pull and let it retract
slightly, then pull it out slowly again.
5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate
into the center seatbelt buckle until it
clicks.
6. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the
shoulder belt. And place the lap belt as low
as possible on the hips, not on the waist.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
s01ae060301
1) Button
1. Push the release button of the center
seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to
unfasten the seatbelt.
– CONTINUED –
Seatbelts
53
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(56,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
2. Insert a tongue plate or other hard
pointed object into the slot in the connector
(buckle) on the right-hand side and push it
in. The anchor tongue plate will then
disconnect from the buckle.
3. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.
You should hold the webbing end and
guide it back into the retractor while it is
rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate in
the recess and then insert the anchor
tongue plate into the slot.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the tongue plate can hit
against the trim, causing damage to
the trim.
. Do not allow the retractor to roll
up the seatbelt too quickly.
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up
so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored.
& Seatbelt Maintenance
s01ae07
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and
lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the
belts because this could seriously affect
their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments
including the webbing and all hardware
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears,
damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re-
place the seatbelts even if only minor
damage is found.
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
oils, chemicals and particularly
battery acid.
. Never attempt to make modifica-
tions or changes that will prevent
the seatbelt from operating prop-
erly.
Seatbelts
54
(57,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1-6. Seatbelt Pretensioners
s01af
The following seatbelts have a seatbelt
pretensioner.
. Driver’s seatbelt
. Front passenger’s seatbelt
. Rear passenger’s seatbelt (window-
side)
The seatbelt pretensioners are designed
to be activated in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe frontal and
side collision and rollover accident.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection,
the occupants should sit in an
upright position with their seat-
belts properly fastened. Refer to
“Seatbelts” FP46.
. Do not modify, remove or strike
the seatbelt retractor assemblies
equipped with seatbelt preten-
sioners or surrounding area. This
could result in accidental activa-
tion of the seatbelt pretensioners
or could make the system inop-
erative, possibly resulting in ser-
ious injury. Seatbelt preten-
sioners have no user-serviceable
parts. For required servicing of
seatbelt retractors equipped with
seatbelt pretensioners, consult
your SUBARU dealer.
. When discarding seatbelt retrac-
tor assemblies equipped with
seatbelt pretensioners or scrap-
ping the entire vehicle due to
collision damage or for other
reasons, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
NOTE
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
signed to activate in minor impacts or
in rear impacts.
. Pretensioners are designed to func-
tion on a one-time-only basis. In the
event that a pretensioner is activated,
the seatbelt retractor assemblies
equipped with seatbelt pretensioners
should be replaced only by an author-
ized SUBARU dealer. When replacing
seatbelt retractor assemblies, use only
genuine SUBARU parts.
. If a seatbelt that has a seatbelt
pretensioner does not retract or cannot
be pulled out due to a malfunction or
activation of the pretensioner, contact
your SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
. If the seatbelt retractor assembly or
surrounding area has been damaged,
contact your SUBARU dealer as soon
as possible.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to inform the buyer that the vehicle
is equipped with seatbelt preten-
sioners. Also, notify the buyer of the
contents in this section.
& Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt
Pretensioner
s01af01
NOTE
This section is applicable to the follow-
ing components.
. Front passenger’s seatbelt
. Rear passenger’s seatbelt (window-
side)
– CONTINUED –
Seatbelt Pretensioners
55
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(58,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
The pretensioner sensor also serves as
follows.
. Front impact sensor
. Side impact sensor
. Front door impact sensor
. Rollover sensor
If the sensor detects a certain predeter-
mined amount of force during frontal or
side collisions or rollover accidents, any
seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner is
quickly drawn back in by the retractor to
take up the slack so that the belt more
effectively restrains the seat occupant.
The rear passenger’s seatbelt (window-
side) pretensioner includes a tension
reducing device which limits the peak
forces exerted by the seatbelt on the
occupant in the event of a collision.
The front passenger’s seatbelt preten-
sioner includes a tension reducing device
which limits the peak forces exerted by the
seatbelt on the occupant in the event of a
collision. The adaptive force limiter will
select a reducing load to suit the body size
of the occupant as detected by the
occupant detection system sensors.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not
be pulled out and retracted and therefore
must be replaced.
& Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt
and Lap Belt Pretensioners
s01af02
NOTE
This section is applicable to the follow-
ing components.
. Driver’s seatbelt
1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder
belt pretensioner and adaptive force
limiter)
2) Lap belt pretensioner
The shoulder belt pretensioner is supple-
mented by a lap belt pretensioner, which is
located at the base of the center pillar. Like
the shoulder belt pretensioner, the lap belt
pretensioner instantaneously pulls in the
belt to eliminate slack if a certain level of
frontal collision force is detected. As a
result, the seatbelt restrains the front seat
occupant more effectively.
The driver’s seatbelt pretensioner includes
a tension reducing device which limits the
peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the
occupant in the event of a collision.
The adaptive force limiter will select a
reducing load to suit the body size of
occupant as detected by the occupant
detection sensor.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re-
mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt
cannot be pulled out and retracted and
therefore must be replaced.
Seatbelt Pretensioners
56
(59,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& System Monitors
s01af03
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner
with the ignition switch in the “ON” position.
The seatbelt pretensioners share the
control module with the SRS airbag
system. Therefore, if any malfunction
occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the
SRS airbag system warning light will
illuminate. For details, refer to “SRS Airbag
System Monitors” FP107.
& System Servicing
s01af04
WARNING
. When discarding a seatbelt re-
tractor assembly or scrapping
the entire vehicle damaged by a
collision, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. Tampering with or disconnecting
the system’s wiring could result
in accidental activation of the
seatbelt pretensioner and/or
SRS airbag or could make the
system inoperative, which may
result in serious injury. Do not
use electrical test equipment on
any circuit related to the seatbelt
pretensioner and SRS airbag sys-
tems. For required servicing of
the seatbelt pretensioner, con-
sult your nearest SUBARU deal-
er.
CAUTION
For the locations of the sensors and
control modules, refer to “Compo-
nents” FP84.
If you need service or repair in those
areas or near the front seatbelt
retractors, have the work performed
by your authorized SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If the front or side part of the vehicle is
damaged in an accident to the extent
that the seatbelt pretensioner does not
operate, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
& Precautions against Vehicle
Modification
s01af05
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you
want to install any accessory parts to your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the seatbelt pretensioners.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
ine SUBARU accessory parts to
the front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi-
dual vehicle models in this Own-
er’s Manual.
Seatbelt Pretensioners
57
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(60,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1-7. Rear Seat Reminder
s01at
This function prompts the driver to confirm
the presence of passengers and cargo in
the rear.
This function will be activated when the
rear doors are opened and closed.
It alerts the driver by warning messages on
the combination meter display (color LCD)
and beeps when the ignition switch is
turned from the “ON” position to the “OFF”
position.
NOTE
. This function does not directly de-
tect passengers and cargo in the rear
seat.
. This function detects the opening
and closing of the rear doors. In this
situation, there is the possibility that
the following phenomenon may occur.
– It may alert the driver even if there
are no passengers or cargo in the
rear seat.
– It may not alert the driver even if
there are passengers and cargo in
the rear seat.
. This function can be set to on or off
by the “Car settings”. For details, refer
to “Car settings” FP220 (11.6-inch dis-
play models) or “Vehicle setting icons”
FP239 (dual 7.0-inch display models).
. The ON/OFF setting will not be
changed even if the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” position.
. The ON/OFF setting will be returned
to the default setting if the battery is
removed.
1-8. Child Restraint Systems
s01ag
Infants and small children should always
be placed in an infant or child restraint
system in the rear seat while riding in the
vehicle.
You should use an infant or child restraint
system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standards, is compatible with
your vehicle and is appropriate for the
child’s age and size.
All child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those described in “Installation of
Child Restraint Systems by Use of Lower
and Tether Anchorages (LATCH)” FP69).
Rear Seat Reminder
58
(61,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Children could be endangered in an
accident if their child restraint systems
are not properly secured in the vehicle.
When installing the child restraint system,
carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces
require that infants and small children be
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is
moving.
Lock release button
1) Unlocked
2) Locked
A) Unlocking marker in red
WARNING
. Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that
the seatback is securely locked
into place. Otherwise, in an acci-
dent, serious injury or death
could result.
. Do not leave children in the car
unattended. High interior tem-
peratures may cause heat stroke
and dehydration that result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap or in his or her arms
while the vehicle is moving. The
passenger cannot protect the child
from injury in a collision, because
the child will be caught between the
passenger and objects inside the
vehicle. Additionally, holding a child
in your lap or arms in the front seat
exposes that child to another ser-
ious danger. Since the SRS airbag
deploys with considerable speed
and force, the child could be injured
or even killed.
– CONTINUED –
Child Restraint Systems
59
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(62,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
WARNING
Children should be properly re-
strained at all times. Never allow a
child to stand up, or to kneel on any
seat. Unrestrained children will be
thrown forward during sudden stop
or in an accident and can be injured
seriously.
Additionally, children standing up or
kneeling on or in front of the front
seat are exposed another serious
danger. Since the SRS airbag de-
ploys with considerable speed and
force, the child could be injured or
even killed.
& Safety Tips for Installing
Child Restraint Systems
s01ag16
WARNING
. Do not use a seatbelt extender. If
a seatbelt extender is used when
installing a child restraint sys-
tem, the seatbelt will not securely
hold the child restraint system.
Use of a seatbelt extender could
cause death or serious injury to
children or other passengers in
sudden braking, swerving, or
accidents.
. Attach the child restraint system
to the anchors properly. When
using the LATCH anchors, be
sure that there are no foreign
objects around the anchors.
Make sure the child restraint
system is securely attached.
Otherwise it may cause death or
serious injury to children or other
passengers in sudden braking,
swerving, or accidents.
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
Child Restraint Systems
60
(63,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Where to Place a Child Re-
straint System
s01ag01
The following descriptions are SUBARU’s
recommendations on where to place a
child restraint system in your vehicle.
WARNING
. Several types of child restraint
systems may conceal the buckle
of the neighboring seat. If the
occupant of the neighboring seat
cannot correctly fasten the seat-
belt, that person must move to a
different seat. If the seatbelt can-
not be correctly fastened, there is
the risk of serious injury or death
in the event of sudden braking or
a collision.
. If the child restraint system can-
not be correctly installed be-
cause it contacts the driver’s
seat, move the child restraint
system to a different seat. If it
cannot be installed in a different
seat (other than the driver’s seat),
adjust the front seat so that
contact does not occur.
A: Front passenger’s seat
You should not install a child restraint
system (including a booster seat) due to
the hazard to children posed by the
passenger’s airbag.
B: Rear seat, window-side seating
positions
Recommended positions for all types of
child restraint systems.
In these positions, the following equipment
is provided for installing a child restraint
system.
. Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-
gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat-
belts
. Lower anchorages (bars)
. Upper anchorages (tether anchorages)
Some types of child restraint systems
might not be able to be secured firmly
due to projection of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
C: Rear seat, center seating position
(U.S.-spec. models)
In this position, the following equipment is
provided for installing a child restraint
system.
. ALR/ELR seatbelts
. Lower anchorages (bars)
. Top tether anchorages
Some types of child restraint systems
might not be able to be secured firmly
due to projection of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
The rear center seat includes lower an-
chorages, and the lower anchorages on
the center side of the rear right seat can be
used to install a child restraint system.
When a child restraint system is installed in
the rear center seat using the lower
– CONTINUED –
Child Restraint Systems
61
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(64,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
anchorages, do not sit in the rear right
seat.
If a child restraint system is not correctly
fixed in place (for example, if a child
restraint system can be moved more than
1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), the child
restraint system should be moved to a
window seat position of the rear seat.
C: Rear seat, center seating position
(other models)
In this position, the following equipment is
provided for installing a child restraint
system.
. ALR/ELR seatbelts
. Top tether anchorages
Some types of child restraint systems
might not be able to be secured firmly
due to projection of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
When you install a child restraint system in
the rear seat’s center seating position,
raise the center head restraint.
Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side
seating positions may be used for a seat in
the center seating position if a child
restraint system manufacturer’s instruc-
tions permit and specify using anchors as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
If a child restraint system is not correctly
fixed in place (for example, if a child
restraint system can be moved more than
1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), you
should install the child restraint system in a
rear seat, window-side seating position.
WARNING
. Even with advanced airbags, chil-
dren can be seriously injured by
the airbag. Seat children in the
rear seat properly restrained at
all times. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and
force and can injure or even kill
children, especially if they are not
restrained or improperly re-
strained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
For that reason, be sure to secure
ALL types of child restraint sys-
tems in the REAR seats at all
times. You should choose a re-
straint device which is appropri-
ate for the child’s age, height and
weight. According to accident
statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the
front seating positions.
. Do not use lower anchorages
(bars) for a seat in the center
seating position unless a child
restraint system manufacturer’s
instructions permit and specify
using anchors spaced as far
apart as those in this vehicle.
. Do not connect two or more lower
hooks onto the same anchorage
(bar).
WARNING
. SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS
EQUIPPED WITH A PASSEN-
Child Restraint Systems
62
(65,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
GER’S SRS AIRBAG, NEVER IN-
STALL A CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PAS-
SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Do not allow children to lean their
heads or any other parts of their
bodies against the door or the
area of the seat, front and rear
pillars or roof side rails. The SRS
side airbags and SRS curtain
airbags deploy even if children
are seated in the child restraint
system. It will be dangerous if the
SRS side airbags and SRS cur-
tain airbags inflate. The impact
could cause death or serious
injury to the child.
. To secure the child restraint sys-
tem, be sure to comply with all
installation instructions provided
by the child restraint manufac-
turer. Not doing so could result in
death or serious injury to chil-
dren in a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
& Choosing a Child Restraint
System
s01ag02
Choose a child restraint system that is
appropriate for the child’s age and size
(weight and height) in order to provide the
child with proper protection. The child
restraint system should meet all applicable
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards for the United States or
of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
for Canada. It can be identified by looking
for the label on the child restraint system or
the manufacture’s statement of compli-
ance in the document attached to the
system. Also it is important for you to make
sure that the child restraint system is
compatible with the vehicle in which it will
be used.
& Installing Child Restraint
Systems with ALR/ELR Seat-
belt
s01ag04
CAUTION
. When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufac-
turer’s instructions supplied with
it. After installing the child re-
straint system, check to ensure
that it is held securely in position.
If it is not held tight and secure,
the danger of your child suffering
personal injury in the event of an
accident may be increased.
. When installing a child restraint
system in the rear center seating
position, set both seatbacks to
the original position. Otherwise,
the child restraint system cannot
be securely restrained, which
may result in death or serious
injuries in the event of sudden
stop, sudden steering maneuver
or an accident.
– CONTINUED –
Child Restraint Systems
63
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(66,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Installing a rearward facing child
restraint system
s01ag0401
WARNING
. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT
IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that
the seatback is securely locked
into place. Otherwise, in an acci-
dent, serious injury or death
could result.
1. Move the seatback back and forth to
confirm that it is securely locked into place.
– Check that the red colored unlock-
ing marker on the lock release button is
not visible. For details, refer to “Folding
Down the Rear Seatback” FP42.
2. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
WARNING
When you intend to install a child
restraint system in the rear center
seating position, if the child restraint
system does not fit snugly against
the contours of the rear center seat
cushion, install the child restraint
system in the window-side seating
position to be safe. For details, refer
to “Where to Place a Child Restraint
System” FP61.
3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system follow-
ing the instructions provided by its manu-
facturer.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
5. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
6. If using the seatbelt in the ALR mode is
recommended by the manufacturer’s in-
structions supplied with the child restraint
system, perform the following procedure.
(1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to
the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode.
(2) Allow the belt to rewind into the
retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as ALR.
Child Restraint Systems
64
(67,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
7. Push and pull the child restraint system
forward and side to side to check that it is
firmly secured in the center of the seat.
Sometimes a child restraint system can be
more firmly secured by pushing it down
into the seat cushion and then tightening
the seatbelt.
8. If the seatbelt has been set to the ALR
mode in step 5, pull at the shoulder portion
of the belt to confirm that it cannot be
pulled out (ALR properly functioning).
9. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
! Installing a forward facing child
restraint system
s01ag0402
WARNING
. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-
STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that
the seatback is securely locked
into place. Otherwise, in an acci-
dent, serious injury or death
could result.
1. Move the seatback back and forth to
confirm that it is securely locked into place.
– Check that the red colored unlock-
ing marker on the lock release button is
not visible. For details, refer to “Folding
Down the Rear Seatback” FP42.
2. If the child restraint system makes
contact with the head restraint of the rear
seating position where the child restraint
system is to be installed, raise the head
restraint to the extended position. If the
child restraint system still makes contact,
remove the head restraint. For details,
– CONTINUED –
Child Restraint Systems
65
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(68,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
refer to “Head Restraint Adjustment”
FP44.
CAUTION
Store the head restraint that has
been removed in the trunk (Legacy)
or cargo area (Outback). Do not
place the head restraint in the pas-
senger compartment to prevent it
from being thrown around in the
passenger compartment in a sud-
den stop or a sharp turn.
3. For Outback models, adjust the seat-
back to the upright position.
4. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
WARNING
When you intend to install a child
restraint system on the rear center
seating position, if the child restraint
system does not fit snugly against
the contours of the rear center seat
cushion, install the child restraint
system on the window-side seating
position to be safe. For details, refer
to “Where to Place a Child Restraint
System” FP61.
5. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system follow-
ing the instructions provided by its manu-
facturer.
– When a child restraint system is
installed in the rear center seating
position of an Outback, pass the rear
center seatbelt through the belt guide
properly. For details, refer to “Rear
center seatbelt on Outback” FP51.
6. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
7. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
8. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to
the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into
the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
Child Restraint Systems
66
(69,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
9. Before having a child sit in the child
restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and right and left to check if it is firmly
secured. Sometimes a child restraint
system can be more firmly secured by
pushing it down into the seat cushion and
then tightening the seatbelt.
10. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
Legacy
Outback
11. Latch the top tether hook onto the
tether anchorage that is located behind the
rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly.
For additional instructions, refer to “Top
Tether Anchorages” FP74.
12. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
Remember that the head restraint is not
intended to be used at the lowest position
(retracted position). Therefore, when the
rear center seat is occupied (including
when a child restraint system is installed),
be sure to raise the head restraint to the
extended position.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
– CONTINUED –
Child Restraint Systems
67
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(70,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
seatbelt to retract fully.
& Installing a Booster Seat
s01ag05
WARNING
Before installing a booster seat, be
sure to confirm that the seatback is
securely locked into place. Other-
wise, in an accident, serious injury
or death could result.
1. Move the seatback back and forth to
confirm that it is securely locked into place.
– Check that the red colored unlock-
ing marker on the lock release button is
not visible. For details, refer to “Folding
Down the Rear Seatback” FP42.
2. If the booster seat makes contact with
the head restraint of the rear seating
position where the booster seat with seat-
back is to be installed, raise the head
restraint to the extended position. If the
booster seat still makes contact, remove
the head restraint. For details, refer to
“Head Restraint Adjustment” FP44.
CAUTION
Store the head restraint that has
been removed in the trunk (Legacy)
or cargo area (Outback). Do not
place the head restraint in the pas-
senger compartment to prevent it
from being thrown around in the
passenger compartment in a sud-
den stop or a sharp turn.
3. For Outback models, adjust the seat-
back to the upright position.
4. Place the booster seat in the rear
seating position and sit the child on it.
The child should sit well back on the
booster seat.
5. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the booster seat and the child
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
6. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click. Take care not to twist
the seatbelt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of child’s shoulder and
that the lap belt is positioned as low as
possible on the child’s hips.
7. To remove the booster seat, press the
release button on the seatbelt buckle and
allow the belt to retract.
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury to the child.
. Never place the shoulder belt
under the child’s arm or behind
the child’s back. If an accident
occurs, this can increase the risk
or severity of injury to the child.
Child Restraint Systems
68
(71,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in
order to provide full restraint.
Loose fitting belts are not as
effective in preventing or redu-
cing injury.
. Place the lap belt as low as
possible on the child’s hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will in-
crease the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious internal
injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. Placing the
shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sud-
den braking or in a collision.
& Installation of Child Restraint
Systems by Use of Lower and
Tether Anchorages (LATCH)
s01ag07
! Lower and tether anchorages
s01ag0701
Legacy
Outback
WARNING
. Attach the child restraint system
to the anchors properly. When
using the LATCH anchors, be
sure that there are no foreign
objects around the anchors.
Make sure the child restraint
system is securely attached.
Otherwise it may cause death or
serious injury to children or other
passengers in sudden braking,
swerving, or accidents.
. When installing a child restraint
system using LATCH anchors
with the rear seatbelt fastened,
ensure that the rear seatbelt does
– CONTINUED –
Child Restraint Systems
69
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(72,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
not become caught in the child
restraint system or the lower
LATCH anchorages.
NOTE
The seatbelt warning system of the rear
seats detects if any of the seats are
occupied by a passenger. Installing a
child restraint system in the rear seat-
ing area, using the LATCH anchors,
may result in the activation of the
passenger seatbelt warning light and
chime. Fastening the rear seatbelt prior
to installing the child restraint system
will avoid activating the passenger
seatbelt warning light and chime. For
details, refer to “Rear passenger’s
seats” FP179.
Some types of child restraint systems can
be installed on the rear seat of your vehicle
without use of the seatbelts. Such child
restraint systems are secured to the
dedicated anchorages provided on the
vehicle body.
The lower and tether anchorages are
sometimes referred to as the LATCH
system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren).
Your vehicle is equipped with five lower
anchorages (bars) (U.S.-spec. models)
four lower anchorages (bars) (other mod-
els) and three upper anchorages (tether
anchorages) for accommodating such
child restraint systems.
! Lower anchorages
s01ag070101
U.S.-spec. models
WARNING
Do not connect two or more lower
hooks onto the same anchorage
(bar).
There are a total of 5 lower anchorages at
the rear seat. The rear anchorage from the
right side is used for both the right seat and
center seat. Each lower anchorage is
located where the seat cushion meets
the seatback.
Child Restraint Systems
70
(73,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Other models
WARNING
Do not connect two or more lower
hooks onto the same anchorage
(bar).
Two lower anchorages (bars) are provided
for installing a child restraint system on the
rear seat window-side seating positions.
Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side
seating positions may be used for a seat in
the center seating position if a child
restraint system manufacturer’s instruc-
tions permit and specify using anchors as
far apart as those in this vehicle. Each
lower anchorage is located where the seat
cushion meets the seatback.
! Tether anchorages
s01ag070102
Legacy
1) For right seat
2) For center seat
3) For left seat
Outback
1) For left seat
2) For center seat
3) For right seat
The tether anchorages (upper an-
chorages) are provided at the locations
shown in the above illustration. For details,
– CONTINUED –
Child Restraint Systems
71
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(74,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
refer to “Top Tether Anchorages” FP74.
! To install a child restraint system
using lower and tether an-
chorages
s01ag070103
WARNING
Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that the
seatback is securely locked into
place. Otherwise, in an accident,
serious injury or death could result.
1. Move the seatback back and forth to
confirm that it is securely locked into place.
– Check that the red colored unlock-
ing marker on the lock release button is
not visible. For details, refer to “Folding
Down the Rear Seatback” FP42.
For U.S.-spec. models
Other models
2. You will find “ ” marks at the bottoms
of the rear seatback. These marks indicate
the positions of the lower anchorages
(bars).
Each lower anchorage is located behind
the cover of seatback bottom.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
Peel off the anchorage cover completely
from the selected side of the rear seatback
to expose the anchorages (bars) to be
used for installation of the child restraint
Child Restraint Systems
72
(75,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
system.
If it is hard to install the child restraint
system because the anchorage cover
returns to the original position, press the
anchorage cover to the seat cushion until it
is flat.
3. If the child restraint system makes
contact with the head restraint of the rear
seating position where the child restraint
system is to be installed, raise the head
restraint to the extended position. If the
child restraint system still makes contact,
remove the head restraint. For details,
refer to “Head Restraint Adjustment”
FP44.
CAUTION
Store the head restraint that has
been removed in the trunk (Legacy)
or the cargo area (Outback). Do not
place the head restraint in the pas-
senger compartment to prevent it
from being thrown around in the
passenger compartment in a sud-
den stop or a sharp turn.
4. For Outback models, adjust the seat-
back to the upright position.
5. While following the instructions sup-
plied by the child restraint system manu-
facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the
lower anchorages located at “
” marks on
the bottom of the rear seatback. When the
hooks are connected, make sure the
adjacent seatbelts are not caught.
6. If your child restraint system is a
flexible attachment type (which uses tether
belts), push the child restraint into the seat
cushion and pull both left and right lower
tether belts up to secure the child restraint
system by taking up the slack in the belt.
7. Latch the top tether hook onto the
tether anchorage that is located on the rear
shelf (Legacy)/behind the rear seat
(Outback) and tighten the top tether firmly.
For additional instructions, refer to “Top
Tether Anchorages” FP74.
– CONTINUED –
Child Restraint Systems
73
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(76,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
8. Before seating a child in the child
restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and left and right to verify that it is
firmly secured in the center of the seat.
9. To remove the child restraint system,
follow the reverse procedures of installa-
tion.
If you have any question concerning this
type of child restraint system, ask your
SUBARU dealer.
& Top Tether Anchorages
s01ag09
Your vehicle is equipped with three top
tether anchorages so that a child restraint
system having a top tether can be installed
in the rear seat. When installing a child
restraint system using top tether, proceed
as follows, while observing the instructions
by the child restraint system manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top
tether whenever one is required or avail-
able.
! Tether anchorage location
s01ag0901
! Legacy
s01ag090101
1) For right seat
2) For center seat
3) For left seat
Child Restraint Systems
74
(77,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Three tether anchorages are installed on
the rear shelf behind the rear seat head
restraint. Open the cover flap to use each
anchorage.
! Outback
s01ag090102
1) For left seat
2) For center seat
3) For right seat
Three tether anchorages, i.e., ones for the
right, center and left positions, are already
installed on the back side of the rear
seatback.
! To hook the top tether
s01ag0902
CAUTION
. Always raise the head restraint
when mounting a child restraint
system with a top tether. Failure
to do so may prevent the top
tether from being fastened
tightly.
. If the head restraint is removed,
store the head restraint in the
trunk (Legacy) or the cargo area
(Outback).
. Do not place the head restraint in
the passenger compartment to
prevent it from being thrown
around in the passenger com-
partment in a sudden stop or a
sharp turn.
– CONTINUED –
Child Restraint Systems
75
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(78,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Legacy
s01ag090201
1) When installing on the window-side
seating position
2) When installing on the rear center seating
position
1. Raise the head restraint at the seating
position where the child restraint system is
to be installed with the seatbelt or lower
anchorages.
2. Open the cover flaps to use the
anchorages.
3. Pass the top tether between the head
restraint and seatback.
4. Fasten the top tether hook of the child
restraint system to the appropriate upper
anchorage.
5. Tighten the top tether securely. Con-
tact your SUBARU dealer if you have any
questions regarding the installation of a
child restraint system.
! Outback
s01ag090202
1) When installing on the window-side
seating position
2) When installing on the rear center seating
position
1. Raise the head restraint at the seating
position where the child restraint system is
to be installed with the seatbelt or lower
anchorages.
2. Adjust the seatback to the upright
position.
3. Pass the top tether between the head
restraint and seatback.
Child Restraint Systems
76
(79,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
4. Attach the top tether hook to the
appropriate upper anchorage.
5. Tighten the top tether securely. Con-
tact your SUBARU dealer if you have any
questions regarding the installation of a
child restraint system.
1-9. SRS Airbag (Supplemen-
tal Restraint System Airbag)
s01ah
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
name is used because the airbag system
supplements the vehicle’s seatbelts.
This vehicle is equipped with a supple-
mental restraint system which consists of
eight airbags.
The configurations are as follows.
. Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal
airbags
. Driver’s and front passenger’s side
airbags
. Front passenger’s seat cushion air-
bags
. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas-
senger, and window-side rear passen-
gers)
. Knee airbag for driver
These SRS airbags are designed only
to be a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seatbelt.
The system also controls front seatbelt
pretensioners. For operation instructions
and precautions concerning the seatbelt
pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt Preten-
sioners” FP55.
& General Precautions regard-
ing SRS Airbag System
s01ah10
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers must
always wear seatbelts when in
the vehicle. The SRS airbag is
designed only to be a supplement
to the primary protection pro-
vided by the seatbelt. It does not
eliminate the need to fasten seat-
belts. In combination with the
seatbelts, it offers the best pro-
tection in case of a serious acci-
dent.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the seatbelt system,
refer to “Seatbelts” FP46.
. The SRS side airbags and SRS
curtain airbags are designed only
to be a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seat-
belt. They do not eliminate the
need to fasten seatbelts. It is also
important to wear a seatbelt to
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
77
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(80,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
help avoid injuries that can result
when an occupant is not seated
in a proper upright position.
WARNING
The SRS airbags deploy with con-
siderable speed and force. Occu-
pants who are not seated in proper
upright position when the SRS air-
bag deploys could suffer serious
injury. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always sit
upright and back in the seat as far
from the steering wheel as practical
while still maintaining full vehicle
control, and the front passenger
should move the seat as far back
as possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
WARNING
. Do not sit or lean close to either
front door. The SRS side airbags
are stored in both front seat
seatbacks next to the door, and
they provide protection by de-
ploying rapidly in the event of a
side impact collision. However,
the force of SRS side airbag
deployment can injure an occu-
pant whose body is too close to
an SRS airbag.
. Since your vehicle is equipped
with SRS curtain airbags, do not
sit or lean close to the front or
rear door on either side. Do not
put body parts out of the window.
The SRS curtain airbags on both
sides of the cabin are stored in
the roof side (between the front
pillar and a point behind the rear
quarter glass), and they provide
protection by deploying rapidly
in the event of a side impact,
rollover or an offset frontal colli-
sion. However, the force of its
deployment can injure an occu-
pant whose body is too close to
an SRS airbag.
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the SRS airbag. Because
the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force to
protect in high speed collisions,
the force of an airbag can injure
an occupant whose body is too
close to SRS airbag.
It is also important to wear seat-
belts to help avoid injuries that
can result when the SRS airbag
contacts an occupant not in their
proper position.
Even when properly positioned,
there remains a possibility that
an occupant may suffer minor
injury, such as abrasions and
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
78
(81,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
bruises to the face or arms,
because of the SRS airbag de-
ployment force.
WARNING
. Keep arms away from either front
door or its internal trim. They
could be injured in the event of
SRS side airbag deployment.
. Do not place any objects over or
near the SRS airbag cover or
between you and the SRS airbag.
If the SRS airbag deploys, these
objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle,
causing injury.
CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breath-
ing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breath-
ing trouble. If you or your pas-
sengers have breathing pro-
blems after SRS airbag deploys,
get fresh air promptly.
. A deploying SRS airbag releases
hot gas. Occupants could get
burned if they come into direct
contact with the hot gas.
NOTE
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to inform the buyer that the vehicle
is equipped with SRS airbags. Also,
notify the buyer of the applicable sec-
tion in this Owner’s Manual.
. If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel
supply will be cut off to reduce the risk
of fire caused by leaking fuel. For
details about restarting of the engine,
refer to “If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an
Accident” FP470.
& General Precautions regard-
ing SRS Airbag System for
Accessories and Any Objects
s01ah13
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
79
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(82,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
WARNING
. Do not put any objects (including
straps or cord) over the steering
wheel pad, column cover, or
dashboard.
– These objects could be en-
tangled with the steering
wheel, preventing the SRS
frontal airbag, etc. from oper-
ating properly.
– If the SRS frontal airbag de-
ploys, these objects could be
propelled inside the vehicle,
causing injury.
. Do not put any objects under the
driver’s side of the instrument
panel. If the SRS knee airbag
deploys, those objects could in-
terfere with its proper operation
and could be propelled inside the
vehicle, causing injury.
. The key must not be attached to
heavy, sharp or hard acces-
sories, or another key. If the SRS
knee airbag deploys, those ob-
jects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle and
cause injury.
WARNING
Do not attach accessories to the
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-
ror over the inside rear view mirror. If
the SRS airbag deploys, those ob-
jects could become projectiles that
could seriously injure vehicle occu-
pants.
WARNING
. Do not attach accessories to the
door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
near the SRS side airbags. In the
event of SRS side airbag deploy-
ment, they could be propelled
dangerously toward the vehicle’s
occupants and cause injuries.
. Do not attach a hands-free micro-
phone or any other accessory to
a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
pillar, the windshield, a side win-
dow, an assist grip, or any other
cabin surface that would be near
a deploying SRS curtain airbag. A
hands-free microphone or other
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
80
(83,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
accessory in such a location
could be propelled through the
cabin with great force by the
curtain airbag, or it could prevent
correct deployment of the curtain
airbag. In either case, the result
could be serious injuries.
WARNING
Do not hang coat hangers or other
hard or pointed objects on the coat
hook. If such items were hanging on
the coat hooks during deployment
of the SRS curtain airbags, they
could cause serious injuries by
coming off the coat hooks and being
thrown through the cabin or by
preventing deployment of the cur-
tain airbags.
Before hanging clothing on the coat
hooks, make sure there are no sharp
objects in the pockets. Hang cloth-
ing directly on the coat hooks with-
out using hangers.
WARNING
. Do not put any kind of clothes or
other objects over the driver’s
seat and front passenger’s seat-
back and do not attach labels or
stickers to the driver’s seat and
front passenger’s seat surface on
or near the SRS side airbag. They
could prevent proper deployment
of the SRS side airbag, reducing
protection available to the dri-
ver’s seat and front passenger’s
seat’s occupant.
. Do not install a seat cover unless
it is a genuine SUBARU seat
cover exclusively designed for
use with the SRS airbag. Even
when using a genuine SUBARU
seat cover, the SRS side airbag
system may not function nor-
mally if the seat cover is not
installed correctly.
& General Precautions regard-
ing SRS Airbag System and
Children
s01ah14
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
81
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(84,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
WARNING
Seat children in the rear seat prop-
erly restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults, their
risk of being injured from deploy-
ment is greater.
For that reason, we strongly recom-
mend that ALL children (including
those in child restraint systems) sit
in the REAR seat properly restrained
at all times in a child restraint device
or in a seatbelt, whichever is appro-
priate for the child’s age, height and
weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint
systems (including forward facing
child restraint system) in the REAR
seats at all times.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the child restraint sys-
tem, refer to “Child Restraint Sys-
tems” FP58.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-
STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
Never allow a child to stand up or
kneel on the front passenger’s seat.
The SRS airbag deploys with con-
siderable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
82
(85,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable force and can
injure or even kill the child.
WARNING
. Never allow a child to do the
following.
– Kneel on any passenger’s seat
facing the side window.
– Wrap his/her arms around the
front seat seatback.
– Put his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body out of
the window.
In the event of an accident, the
force of SRS side airbag and/or
SRS curtain airbag deployment
could injure the child seriously
because his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body are too
close to the SRS side airbag and/
or SRS curtain airbag.
. Since your vehicle is also
equipped with a front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children
should be placed in the rear seat
anyway and should be properly
restrained at all times.
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
83
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(86,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Components
s01ah11
1) Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
2) Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
3) SRS side airbag
4) SRS curtain airbag
5) SRS seat cushion airbag
6) SRS knee airbag
The SRS airbags are stowed in the
following locations.
Driver’s SRS frontal airbag: in the center
portion of the steering wheel
An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located on the
pad of the airbag.
Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag:
near the top of the dashboard
An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located on the
right corner of the dashboard.
SRS side airbag: in the door side of each
front seat cushion which bears an “SRS
AIRBAG” mark
SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point over
the rear seat)
“SRS AIRBAG” marks are located at the
top of each center pillar.
SRS seat cushion airbag: in the center
console side of the front passenger’s seat
cushion that bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label
SRS knee airbag: under the steering
column
An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the
door of the airbag.
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
84
(87,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1) Airbag control module (including impact
sensor and rollover sensor)
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
4) Front impact sensor (left-hand side)
5) Front impact sensor (right-hand side)
6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
8) Side impact sensor (center pillar left-
hand side)
9) Side impact sensor (center pillar right-
hand side)
10) Airbag wiring
11) Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force
limiter (driver’s side)
12) Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force
limiter (front passenger’s side)
13) Side impact sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side)
14) Side impact sensor (rear wheel house
left-hand side)
15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s
side)
18) Knee airbag module (driver’s side)
19) Front passenger’s occupant detection
system sensor
20) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator
21) SRS airbag system warning light
22) Side impact sensor (under the rear center
seat)
23) Side impact sensor (front door left-hand
side)
24) Side impact sensor (front door right-hand
side)
25) Seat cushion airbag module (front pas-
senger’s side)
26) Lap belt pretensioner (driver’s side)
27) Driver’s seat position sensor
28) Passenger’s seat position sensor
29) Rear seatbelt pretensioner (front passen-
ger’s side)
30) Rear seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
85
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(88,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& SUBARU Advanced Frontal
Airbag System, SRS Seat
Cushion Airbag, SRS Side
Airbag and SRS Curtain Air-
bag
s01ah02
This vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system that com-
plies with the new advanced frontal airbag
requirements in the amended Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
No. 208.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system automatically determines the de-
ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag at the time of deployment as well as
whether or not to activate the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if
activated, the deployment force of the SRS
frontal airbag at the time of deployment.
This vehicle has warning labels on the
driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors
beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH
ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag at-
tached to the glove box lid beginning with
the phrase “Even with Advanced Air
Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read
the instructions on the warning labels and
tag.
Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system is a
supplemental restraint system and must
be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
seated in an appropriate child restraint
system.
This vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
SRS curtain airbag system that complies
with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.
For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer
to “Components” FP84.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
the following components deploy.
. SRS frontal airbag for driver
. SRS frontal airbag for front passenger
. SRS seat cushion airbags for front
passenger
. SRS curtain airbag*
1
. SRS knee airbag for driver
*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag occurs.
These components supplement the seat-
belts by reducing the impact to the
occupant’s head, chest and knees.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact to the occupant’s chest and
waist.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the side win-
dow and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact to the occupant’s
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
86
(89,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
head.
NOTE
The SRS side airbag and seatbelt pre-
tensioner are not controlled by the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-
tem.
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
s01ah0201
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a dual
stage inflator. The inflator operates in
different ways depending on the severity
of impact.
SRS airbag system warning light
Have the system inspected by your
SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS
airbag system warning light illuminates.
! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-
bag
s01ah0202
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator
operates in different ways depending on
the severity of impact.
1) Occupant detection sensors
The occupant detection system sensors
are installed between the seat and seat
rails, and monitor the physique and pos-
ture of the front passenger. Using this
information, the occupant detection sys-
tem determines whether the front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag should be de-
ployed or not.
The occupant detection system may not
inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys. This is normal. In this
case, although the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag does not operate, the front
passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner oper-
ates with the driver’s seatbelt preten-
sioner. For details about the seatbelt
pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt Preten-
sioners” FP55.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system from functioning correctly
or cause the system to fail.
. Do not apply any strong impact to
the front passenger’s seat such
as by kicking.
. Do not let rear passengers rest
their feet between the front seat-
back and seat cushion.
. Do not spill liquid on the front
passenger’s seat. If liquid is
spilled, wipe it off immediately.
. Do not remove or disassemble
the front passenger’s seat.
. Do not install any accessory
(such as an audio amplifier) other
than a genuine SUBARU acces-
sory under the front passenger’s
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
87
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(90,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
seat.
. Do not place anything (shoes,
umbrella, etc.) under the front
passenger’s seat.
. Do not place any objects (books,
etc.) around the front passen-
ger’s seat.
. Do not use the front passenger’s
seat with the head restraint re-
moved.
. Do not leave any articles on the
front passenger’s seat or the
seatbelt tongue and buckle en-
gaged when you leave your vehi-
cle.
. Do not put sharp object(s) on the
seat or pierce the seat uphols-
tery.
. Do not place a magnet near the
seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt
retractor.
. Do not use front seats with their
backward-forward position and
seatback not being locked into
place securely. If any of them are
not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure,
refer to “Manual Seat” FP31
(models equipped with manual
seats only).
SRS airbag system warning light
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
passenger’s occupant detection system
have failed, the SRS airbag system warn-
ing light will illuminate. Have the system
inspected by your SUBARU dealer imme-
diately if the SRS airbag system warning
light illuminates.
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this
may affect the proper function of the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.
Have your vehicle inspected at your
SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front
passenger’s seat while driving the vehicle
to your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
The front passenger’s SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag are not con-
trolled by the SUBARU advanced fron-
tal airbag system.
! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicators
s01ah0203
Dual 7.0-inch display models
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
88
(91,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
11.6-inch display models
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON in-
dicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
Refer to “Front Passenger’s Frontal Airbag
ON and OFF Indicators” FP181.
! Occupant detection system
s01ah0209
1) Occupant detection sensors
The occupant detection system sensors
are installed between the seat and seat
rails, and monitor the physique and pos-
ture of the front passenger. Using this
information, the occupant detection sys-
tem determines whether the front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag and front passen-
ger’s SRS seat cushion airbag should be
deployed or not.
WARNING
Do not kick the front passenger seat
or subject it to severe impact. Other-
wise, the SRS airbag system warn-
ing light may illuminate to indicate a
malfunction of the front passenger
occupant detection system. In this
case, contact your SUBARU dealer
immediately.
CAUTION
Electrical devices, such as cell
phones, laptops, portable music
players, or electronic games, espe-
cially when connected to the acces-
sory power outlet and placed on the
front passenger’s seat or used by
the person sitting in the front pas-
senger’s seat, may affect the opera-
tion of the occupant detection sys-
tem. If either of the following situa-
tions occurs when using an electro-
nic device in the vehicle, at first try
to relocate that device to avoid it
creating any interference.
. The SRS airbag system warning
light illuminates.
. The front passenger’s frontal air-
bag ON and OFF indicators oper-
ate erratically.
If the device continues to cause
interference, the use of that device
in the vehicle should be discontin-
ued.
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
89
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(92,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
SRS airbag system warning light
If the front passenger’s seat cushion is
wet, this may adversely affect the ability of
the system to determine deployment.
Wipe off liquid from the seat, let the seat
dry naturally and then check the SRS
airbag system warning light.
Dual 7.0-inch display models
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
11.6-inch display models
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON in-
dicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicators do not work properly
even when the front passenger’s seat is
dry, do not allow anyone to sit on the front
passenger’s seat and have the occupant
detection system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
90
(93,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Dual 7.0-inch display models
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
11.6-inch display models
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON in-
dicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
Also, if luggage or electronic devices are
placed on the front passenger’s seat, this
may adversely affect the ability of the
system to determine deployment. This
may prevent the front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON and OFF indicators from work-
ing properly. Check that the indicators
work properly.
When the OFF indicator turns off and the
ON indicator illuminates, the front passen-
ger’s frontal airbag may deploy during a
collision. Remove luggage and electronic
devices from the front passenger’s seat.
! Conditions in which front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not
activated
s01ah0204
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will not be activated when any of the
following conditions are met regarding
the front passenger’s seat:
. The seat is empty.
. The seat is equipped with an appro-
priate child restraint system and an infant
or a child is restrained in it. (See WARN-
ING that follows.)
. The front passenger’s occupant detec-
tion system is malfunctioning.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-
STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE
FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-
TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be
sure to install it in the REAR seat in a
correct manner. Also, it is strongly
recommended that any forward fa-
cing child seat or booster seat be
installed in the REAR seat, and that
even children who have outgrown a
child restraint system be also seated
in the REAR seat. This is because
children sitting in the front passen-
ger’s seat may be killed or severely
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
91
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(94,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
injured should the front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR
seats are the safest place for chil-
dren.
CAUTION
When the front passenger’s seat is
occupied by an infant in an appro-
priate child restraint system, ob-
serve the following precautions.
Failure to do so may increase the
load on the front passenger’s seat,
activating the front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag even though that
seat is occupied by an infant.
. Do not place any article on the
seat other than the infant in the
child restraint system.
. Do not place more than one infant
in the child restraint system.
. Do not install any accessory such
as a table or TV onto the seat-
back.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
. Do not allow the rear seat occu-
pant to place his/her hands or
legs on the front passenger’s
seatback, or allow him/her to pull
the seatback.
! If the front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator illuminates
and the OFF indicator turns off
even when an infant or a small
child is in a child restraint sys-
tem (including booster seat)
s01ah020401
Dual 7.0-inch display models
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
11.6-inch display models
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON in-
dicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Remove the child restraint system from
the seat.
3. By referring to the child restraint
manufacturer’s recommendations as well
as the child restraint system installation
procedures in “Child Restraint Systems”
FP58, correctly install the child restraint
system.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and make sure that the front
passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator
turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
92
(95,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
If still the ON indicator remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off, take the
following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than the child restraint system
and the child occupant.
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth. (Models
equipped with manual seats only)
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off after
taking relevant corrective actions de-
scribed above, relocate the child restraint
system to the rear seat and immediately
contact your SUBARU dealer for an
inspection.
NOTE
When a child who has outgrown a child
restraint system or a small adult is
seated in the front passenger’s seat,
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system may or may not activate the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the occupant’s seating
posture. Children should always wear a
seatbelt when sitting in the seat irre-
spective of whether the airbag is deac-
tivated or activated. If the front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
(the ON indicator remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off), take
the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on
the seat other than the occupant.
If the ON indicator still remains illumi-
nated while the OFF indicator turns off
despite the fact that the actions noted
above have been taken, seat the child/
small adult in the rear seat and imme-
diately contact your SUBARU dealer for
an inspection. Even if the system has
passed the dealer inspection, it is
recommended that on subsequent trips
the child/small adult always take the
rear seat.
Children who have outgrown a child
restraint system should always wear the
seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
is deactivated or activated.
! Conditions in which front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
s01ah0205
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will be activated for deployment upon
impact when any of the following condi-
tions are met regarding the front passen-
ger’s seat.
. When the seat is occupied by an adult.
. When certain items (e.g. jug of water)
are placed on the seat.
When the front passenger’s seat is occu-
pied by an adult, observe the following
precautions. Failure to do so may lessen
the load on the front passenger’s seat,
deactivating the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat
is occupied by an adult. This may result in
personal injury.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
lift the front passenger’s seat cushion
using his/her feet.
. Do not place any article under the front
passenger’s seat, or squeeze any article
from behind and under the seat. This may
lift the seat cushion.
. Do not squeeze any article between the
front passenger’s seat and side trim/pillar,
door or center console box. This may lift
the seat cushion.
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
93
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(96,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! If the passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator illuminates and the
ON indicator turns off even when
the front passenger’s seat is
occupied by an adult
s01ah020501
Dual 7.0-inch display models
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
11.6-inch display models
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON in-
dicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
This can be caused by the adult incorrectly
sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Ask the front passenger to set the
seatback to the upright position, sit up
straight in the center of the seat cushion,
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
the rearmost position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
If the OFF indicator remains illuminated
while the ON indicator remains off, take the
following actions.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Make sure that the front passenger
does not use a blanket, extra seat cushion,
seat cover, extra seat heater or massager,
etc.
3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing,
the front passenger should remove any
unnecessary items before sitting in the
front passenger’s seat, or should sit in a
rear seat.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and wait 6 seconds to allow the
system to complete self-checking. Follow-
ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator
should illuminate while the OFF indicator
remains off.
If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
nated while the ON indicator remains off,
ask the occupant to move to the rear seat
and immediately contact your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
94
(97,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Operation
s01ah0207
A) Driver’s side
B) Passenger’s side
1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a
collision occurs.
2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to
deflate immediately so that the driver’s
vision is not obstructed.
The SRS airbags can function only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system is designed to determine the
activation or deactivation condition of the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-
pending on the characteristic of item(s) or
person on the front passenger’s seat
monitored by the front passenger’s occu-
pant detection system sensor. For this
reason, only the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag may deploy in the event of a
collision, but this does not mean failure of
the system.
If the following sensors detect a predeter-
mined amount of force during a frontal
collision, the control module sends signals
to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s
module or both driver’s and front passen-
ger’s modules) instructing the module(s) to
inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s).
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
95
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(98,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. The front impact sensors
. The impact sensors in the airbag
control module
On the driver’s side, the SRS knee airbag
also inflates with the SRS frontal airbag.
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags use dual stage inflators.
The two inflators of each airbag are
triggered either sequentially or simulta-
neously, depending on the severity of
impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS
frontal airbag and depending on the
severity of impact and the characteristic
of item(s) or person on the seat in the case
of the front passenger’s SRS frontal air-
bag.
! After deployment
s01ah0210
After deployment, the SRS airbag imme-
diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s
vision is not obstructed and the driver’s
ability to maintain control of the vehicle is
not impaired. The time required from
detecting impact to the deflation of the
SRS airbag after deployment is shorter
than the blink of an eye.
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
pretensioners operate at the same time.
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and
some smoke will be released. These
occurrences are a normal result of the
deployment. This smoke does not indicate
a fire in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS airbag system
components around the steering
wheel and dashboard with bare
hands right after deployment. Doing
so can cause burns because the
components can be very hot as a
result of deployment.
! Example of the type of accident
s01ah0211
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-
signed as follows.
. To deploy in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe frontal
collision
. To function on a one-time-only basis
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are not
designed as follows.
. To deploy in most lesser frontal im-
pacts*
1
. To deploy in most side or rear impacts
or in most rollover accidents*
2
*1: Because the necessary protection can be
achieved by the seatbelt alone.
*2: Because deployment of only the driver’s
SRS frontal airbag or both the driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags
would not protect the occupant in those
situations.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the
level of force experienced in the passen-
ger compartment during a collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on the
visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
96
(99,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Example of accident in which the
driver’s/driver’s and front pas-
senger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)
will most likely deploy
s01ah021101
A head-on collision against a thick con-
crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
vated when the vehicle is exposed to a
frontal impact similar in fashion and
magnitude to the collision described
above.
! Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which it is possible that
the driver’s/driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy
s01ah021102
Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbags may be activated when the vehicle
sustains a hard impact in the undercar-
riage area from the road surface (such as
when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch,
is severely impacted or knocked hard
against an obstacle on the road such as
a curb).
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
97
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(100,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) is unlikely to occur
S01AH021103
1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of a
truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces involved.
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
98
(101,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which the driver’s/dri-
ver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) are not de-
signed to deploy in most cases
s01ah021104
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags are not designed to deploy
in most of the following cases.
. If the vehicle is struck from the side or
from behind
. If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
. If the vehicle is involved in a low-speed
frontal collision
1) First impact
2) Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is
impacted more than once, the driver’s
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first
impact.
Example: In the case of a double collision,
first with another vehicle, then against a
concrete wall in immediate succession,
once either or both of the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are
activated on the first impact, it/they will
not be activated on the second impact.
! SRS seat cushion airbag operation
s01ah0212
1) Passenger’s side
WARNING
The SRS seat cushion airbag is
designed not to deploy when the
seatbelt for the corresponding seat
is not fastened. For safety, all per-
sons in the vehicle should fasten
their seatbelts.
The SRS seat cushion airbags are de-
signed to deploy simultaneously when the
SRS frontal airbags deploy. For details
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
99
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(102,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
about the operating conditions, refer to
“SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag Sys-
tem, SRS Seat Cushion Airbag, SRS Side
Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag” FP86.
The front passenger’s SRS seat cushion
airbag is designed not to deploy in either of
the following conditions.
. The front passenger’s seatbelt is not
fastened (even when the front passenger’s
frontal airbag ON indicator illuminates
while the OFF indicator remains off).
. The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator is off while the OFF indicator
illuminates.
NOTE
When the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag is deactivated by the occupant
detection system, the front passen-
ger’s SRS seat cushion airbag is also
deactivated.
& SRS Side Airbag and SRS
Curtain Airbag
s01ah03
! SRS side airbag
s01ah0302
The SRS side airbag is stored in the door
side of each front seat seatback, which
bears an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact on the occupant’s chest and
waist. The SRS side airbag operates only
for front seat occupants.
! SRS curtain airbag
s01ah0303
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
SRS curtain airbag system that complies
with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the
cabin is stored in the roof side (between
the front pillar and a point over the rear
seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located
at the top of each center pillar.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the side win-
dow and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact on the occupant’s
head.
In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both
sides of the vehicle deploy between the
occupant and the side window and supple-
ment the seatbelt by reducing the impact to
the occupant’s head.
In an offset frontal collision, SRS curtain
airbags on both sides of the vehicle deploy
between the occupant and the side win-
dow and supplement the seatbelt by
reducing the impact to the occupant’s
head and chest.
! Operation
s01ah0301
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag can function only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The following airbags deploy indepen-
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
100
(103,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
dently of each other since each has its own
impact sensor.
. Driver’s SRS side airbag
. Front passenger’s SRS side airbag
. SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side)
. SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side)
Therefore, they may not both deploy in the
same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag deploys indepen-
dently of the driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbags in the steering wheel
and instrument panel.
For the locations of the sensors and
control modules, refer to “Components”
FP84.
! After deployment
s01ah0304
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag
immediately starts to deflate. The time
required from detection of an impact to
deflation of an SRS side airbag after
deployment is shorter than the blink of an
eye.
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated
for a while following deployment then
slowly deflates.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag deploy even when no one occupies
the seat on the side on which an impact is
applied.
When the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud
inflation noise will be heard and some
smoke will be released. These occur-
rences are a normal result of the deploy-
ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire
in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS side airbag
system components around the
front seat seatback with bare hands
right after deployment. Doing so can
cause burns because the compo-
nents can be very hot as a result of
deployment.
After deployment, do not touch any
part of the SRS curtain airbag sys-
tem (from the front pillar to the part
of the roof side over the rear seat).
Doing so can cause burns because
the components can be very hot as a
result of deployment.
! Example of the type of accident
s01ah0305
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are designed as follows:
. To deploy in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe side impact
collision
. To function on a one-time-only basis
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are not designed to deploy in the
following cases:
. In most lesser side impact
. In most frontal or most rear impacts
(because the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag deployment would not pro-
tect the occupant in those situations)
The SRS curtain airbags are also de-
signed to deploy when the vehicle is in an
extremely inclined state such as during a
rollover. They are not designed to deploy in
most lesser inclined state.
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
deployment depend on the level of force
experienced in the passenger compart-
ment during a side impact collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on the
visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
101
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(104,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Example of the type of accident in
which the SRS side airbag will
most likely deploy
s01ah030501
1) A severe side impact near the front seat.
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
102
(105,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most likely deploy
S01AH030502
1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side
impact near the front seat or the rear seat.
2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or
the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curbstone
laterally.
4) An offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag.
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
103
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(106,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy
S01AH030503
1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
104
(107,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to deploy
S01AH030504
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-
on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
105
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(108,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely to deploy
S01AH030505
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-
on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
106
(109,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which the SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag
are not designed to deploy in
most cases
s01ah030506
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision
with another vehicle (moving or station-
ary).
2) The vehicle is struck from behind.
3) The vehicle pitches end over end.
In the event of accidents like those
illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are not designed to deploy
in most cases.
1) First impact
2) Second impact
A) SRS curtain airbag
B) SRS side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck
from the side more than once, the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy
only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
immediately followed by another from the
same direction, once the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
the first impact, they will not be activated
on the second.
& SRS Airbag System Monitors
s01ah04
SRS airbag system warning light
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the SRS airbag system
(including seatbelt pretensioners) with the
ignition switch in the “ON” position. The
SRS airbag system warning light will show
normal system operation by illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
107
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(110,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
The following components are monitored
by the indicator:
. Front impact sensor
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Airbag control module (including im-
pact sensor and rollover sensor)
. Frontal airbag module
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Knee airbag module
– Driver’s side
. Seat cushion airbag module
– Front passenger’s side
. Side impact sensor
– Center pillar left-hand side
– Center pillar right-hand side
– Forward of rear wheel house left-
hand side
– Forward of rear wheel house right-
hand side
– Front door left-hand side
– Front door right-hand side
– Under the rear center seat
. Side airbag module
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Curtain airbag module
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive
force limiter
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Lap belt pretensioner
– Driver’s side
. Seatbelt buckle switch
– Front passenger’s side
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
system sensor
. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator
. All related wiring
. Rear seatbelt pretensioner
– Driver’s side
– Passenger’s side
. Seat position sensor
– Driver’s side
– Passenger’s side
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
Immediately take your vehicle to
your nearest SUBARU dealer to
have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbag will not operate properly in
the event of a collision, which may
increase the risk of injury.
& SRS Airbag System Servicing
s01ah05
WARNING
. When discarding an airbag mod-
ule or scrapping the entire vehi-
cle damaged by a collision, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer.
. The SRS airbag has no user-
serviceable parts. Do not use
electrical test equipment on any
circuit related to the SRS airbag
system. For required servicing of
the SRS airbag, consult your
nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-
ing with or disconnecting the
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
108
(111,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
system’s wiring could result in
accidental inflation of the SRS
airbag or could make the system
inoperative, which may result in
serious injury.
CAUTION
If you need service or repair in areas
indicated in the following list, have
the work performed by an author-
ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air-
bag control module, impact sensors
and airbag modules are stored in
these areas.
. Under the center of the instru-
ment panel
. On both the right and left sides at
the front of the vehicle
. Steering wheel and column and
nearby areas
. Bottom of the steering column
and nearby areas
. Top of the dashboard on front
passenger’s side and nearby
areas
. Each front seat and nearby area
. Inside each center pillar
. Inside each front door
. In each roof side (from the front
pillar to a point over the rear seat)
. Between the rear seat cushion
and rear wheel house on each
side
. Under the rear center seat
In the event that the SRS airbag is
deployed, replacement of the system
should be performed only by an author-
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-
nents of the SRS airbag system are
replaced, use only genuine SUBARU
parts.
NOTE
In the following cases, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The front part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which only
the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags did not deploy.
. The pad of the steering wheel, the
cover over the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
the front pillar to a point over the rear
seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
. The center pillar, front door, rear
wheel house or rear sub frame, or an
area near these parts, was involved in
an accident in which the SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not
deploy.
. The fabric or leather of either front
seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
damaged.
. The rear part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which no
SRS airbag was deployed.
& Precautions against Vehicle
Modification
s01ah06
WARNING
. To avoid accidental activation of
the system or rendering the sys-
tem inoperative, which may re-
sult in serious injury, no modifi-
cations should be made to any
components or wiring of the SRS
airbag system.
This includes following modifica-
tions.
– Installation of custom steering
wheels
– Attachment of additional trim
materials to the dashboard
– Installation of custom seats
– Replacement of seat fabric or
leather
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
109
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(112,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
– Installation of additional fabric
or leather on the front seat
– Attachment of a hands-free
microphone or any other ac-
cessory to a front pillar, a
center pillar, a rear pillar, the
windshield, a side window, an
assist grip, or any other cabin
surface that would be near a
deploying SRS curtain airbag.
– Installation of additional elec-
trical/electronic equipment
such as a mobile two-way
radio on or near the SRS air-
bag system components and/
or wiring is not advisable. This
could interfere with proper
operation of the SRS airbag
system.
– Modifications on or inside the
front door panels for the pur-
pose of a speaker replace-
ment or sound insulation
. The impact sensors, which detect
the pressure of an impact, are
located in the doors. Do not
modify any components of the
doors or door trims, such as the
addition of door speakers for
example. Any modifications to
the doors will create a risk of the
airbag system becoming inop-
erative or unintended airbag de-
ployment.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the SRS airbag system.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
ine SUBARU accessory parts to
the front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi-
dual vehicle models in this Own-
er’s Manual.
. Attachment of any equipment
(side steps or side sill protectors,
etc.) other than genuine SUBARU
accessory parts to the side body.
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you
want to install any accessory parts on your
vehicle.
& How to Contact the Vehicle
Manufacturer concerning
Modifications for Persons
with Disabilities That May
Affect the Advanced Airbag
System
s01ah15
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper,
front side frame, radiator panel, instrument
panel, combination meter, steering wheel,
steering column, tire, suspension or floor
panel can affect the operation of the
SUBARU advanced airbag system. If you
have any questions, you may contact the
following SUBARU distributors.
<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
of Columbia>
Subaru of America, Inc.
Customer Retailer Services Department
One Subaru Drive
P.O. Box 9103
Camden, NJ 08101-9877
1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
110
(113,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
<Hawaii>
Subaru Hawaii
2850 Pukoloa Street, Ste. 101,
Honolulu, HI 96819
877-215-0338
<Guam>
Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
biles
491 East Marine Corps Drive,
Dededo, Guam 96929
671-633-2698
<Puerto Rico>
Trebol Motors
296 Marginal JF Kennedy, San Juan,
Puerto Rico
787-793-2828
<Canada>
Subaru Canada, Inc.
Consumer Support Department
560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario
L5R 4J7
1-800-894-4212
There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
in such an area, please contact the
SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
you bought your vehicle.
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
111
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(114,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(115,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
s02
2-1. Keys ................................................................. 115
Key Number Plate............................................... 115
2-2. Keyless Access with Push-Button Start
System (If Equipped) .................................... 115
Safety Precautions.............................................. 116
Locking and Unlocking with “Keyless Access”
Entry Function..................................................120
Unlock Using PIN Code Access .......................... 124
Power Saving Function ....................................... 126
Power Saving Function of Access Key Fob ......... 127
Disabling Keyless Access Function .................... 127
Selecting Audible Signal Operation ..................... 130
Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation.......130
Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator .............. 130
When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate
Properly ........................................................... 130
Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob .................130
Replacing Access Key Fob ................................. 130
Certification for Keyless Access with
Push-Button Start System................................. 130
2-3. Immobilizer...................................................... 131
Security Indicator Light.......................................132
Key Replacement................................................ 132
Certification for Immobilizer System.................... 132
2-4. Remote Keyless Entry System ...................... 133
Locking the Doors ..............................................135
Unlocking the Doors ........................................... 135
Opening the Trunk Lid (Legacy) ..........................135
Unlocking the Rear Gate (Outback) ..................... 135
Setting Audible Signal Operation ........................ 135
Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation ...... 136
Vehicle Finder Function...................................... 136
Sounding a Panic Alarm..................................... 136
Replacing the Battery......................................... 136
Replacing Lost Transmitters............................... 136
Certification for Remote Keyless Entry System ... 136
2-5. Door Locks ......................................................137
Locking and Unlocking from the Outside............ 137
Locking and Unlocking from the Inside .............. 139
Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking .................... 140
Key Lock-In Prevention Function........................ 140
Battery Drainage Prevention Function ................ 141
2-6. Alarm System ..................................................141
Alarm System Operation .................................... 142
Arming the System ............................................ 142
Disarming the System ........................................ 143
Alarm System Setting......................................... 144
If You Have Accidentally Triggered the Alarm
System ............................................................ 144
Valet Mode ......................................................... 144
2-7. Child Safety Locks ..........................................145
2-8. Windows...........................................................145
Power Window Operation ................................... 146
Initialization of Power Window (Windows with
One-Touch Auto up and down Function)........... 148
2-9. Trunk Lid (Legacy) ..........................................148
To Open and Close the Trunk Lid from
Outside ............................................................ 149
To Open the Trunk Lid from Inside ..................... 149
Internal Trunk Lid Release Handle ...................... 149
Keys and Doors
2
Keys and Doors
(116,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
2-10. Rear Gate (Outback) ..................................... 151
Manual Rear Gate ............................................... 151
Power Rear Gate (If Equipped) ............................ 152
2-11. Moonroof (If Equipped) .................................161
Moonroof Switches ............................................ 161
Sunshade........................................................... 162
Keys and Doors
(117,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
2-1. Keys
s02aa
NOTE
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, refer to
“Keyless Access with Push-Button
Start System” FP115.
1) Master keys
2) Valet key
3) Key number plate
Two types of keys are provided for your
vehicle:
Master key and valet key.
The master key fit all locks on your vehicle.
. Ignition switch
. Driver’s door
. Glove box
The valet key fits only the ignition switch
and door locks. You can keep the glove
box locked when you leave your vehicle
and valet key at a parking facility.
NOTE
Locking/unlocking using the remote
keyless entry system can also be con-
trolled with the buttons on the key. For
detailed information, refer to “Remote
Keyless Entry System” FP133.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs
against your knees while you are
driving, it could turn the ignition
switch from the “ON” position to
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position,
thereby stopping the engine.
& Key Number Plate
s02aa01
The key number is stamped on the key
number plate attached to the key set. Write
down the key number and keep it in
another safe place, not in the vehicle. This
number is needed to make a replacement
key if you lose your key or lock it inside the
vehicle. Refer to “Key Replacement”
FP132.
2-2. Keyless Access with
Push-Button Start System
(If Equipped)
s02ap
The following access key fobs are pro-
vided with the vehicle.
1) Access key fobs
2) Key number plate
The keyless access with push-button start
system allows you to perform the following
functions when you are carrying the
access key fob.
. Locking and unlocking of the doors, fuel
filler lid and rear gate (Outback)
. Opening the trunk (Legacy)
. Starting and stopping the engine. For
detailed information, refer to “Starting and
Stopping Engine (Models with Push-But-
– CONTINUED –
Keys
115
2
Keys and Doors
(118,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
ton Start System)” FP336.
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
tem. For detailed information, refer to
“Alarm System” FP141.
NOTE
. Locking and unlocking by the re-
mote keyless entry system can also be
controlled with the buttons on the
access key fob. For detailed informa-
tion, refer to “Remote Keyless Entry
System” FP133.
. Carefully store the key number plate
supplied with the access key fob. It is
necessary for vehicle repair and addi-
tional registration of access key fobs.
For details, refer to “Key Replacement”
FP132.
An emergency key is attached to each
access key fob.
1) Release button
2) Emergency key
While pressing the release button of the
access key fob, take out the emergency
key.
The emergency key is used for the follow-
ing operations.
. Locking and unlocking the driver’s door
. Locking and unlocking the glove box
NOTE
The glove box can be kept locked when
you leave your vehicle and the access
key fob (with the emergency key re-
moved) at a parking facility.
& Safety Precautions
s02ap11
WARNING
If you wear an implanted pacemaker
or an implanted defibrillator, stay at
least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the
transmitting antennas installed on
the vehicle.
The radio waves from the transmit-
ting antennas on the vehicle could
adversely affect the operation of
implanted pacemakers and im-
planted defibrillators.
If you wear electronic medical equip-
ment other than an implanted pace-
maker or an implanted defibrillator,
before using the keyless access
with push-button start system, refer
to “Radio waves used for the key-
less access with push-button start
system” mentioned later, and con-
tact the electronic medical equip-
ment manufacturer for more infor-
mation. The radio waves from the
transmitting antennas on the vehicle
could adversely affect the operation
of the electronic medical equipment.
“Radio waves used for the keyless
access with push-button start sys-
tem”
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
116
(119,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. The keyless access with push-
button start system uses radio
waves of the following fre-
quency* in addition to the radio
waves used for the remote key-
less entry system. The radio
waves are periodically output
from the antennas installed on
the vehicle as shown in the
following illustrations.
*: Radio frequency: 134 kHz
Legacy
1) Antennas
Outback
1) Antennas
– CONTINUED –
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
117
2
Keys and Doors
(120,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
CAUTION
. Never leave or store the access
key fob inside the vehicle or
within 6.6 ft (2 m) around the
vehicle (e.g., in the garage). The
access key fob may be locked
inside the vehicle, or the battery
may discharge rapidly. Note that
the push-button ignition switch
may not turn on in some cases
depending on the location of the
access key fob.
. The access key fob contains
electronic components. Observe
the following precautions to pre-
vent malfunctions.
– It is recommended to have the
access key fob battery re-
placed at an authorized
SUBARU dealer to avoid the
risk of damage.
– Do not get the access key fob
wet. If the access key fob gets
wet, wipe it off immediately
and let it dry completely.
– Do not apply strong impacts to
the access key fob.
– Never leave the access key
fob in direct sunlight or any-
where that may become hot,
such as on the dashboard. It
may damage the battery or
cause circuit malfunctions.
– Do not wash the access key
fob in an ultrasonic washer.
– Do not leave the access key
fob in humid or dusty loca-
tions. Doing so may cause
malfunctions.
– Keep the access key fob away
from magnetic sources.
– Do not leave the access key
fob near a personal computer
or home electrical appliance.
– Do not leave the access key
fob near a battery charger or
any electrical accessories.
– Do not apply metallic window
tint or attach metallic objects
to the windows.
– Do not fit non genuine acces-
sories or parts.
. If the access key fob is dropped,
the integrated emergency key in-
side may become loose. Be care-
ful not to lose the emergency key.
. When traveling in an airplane, do
not press the button of the ac-
cess key fob. If any button of the
access key fob is pressed, radio
waves are emitted and may affect
the operation of the airplane. In a
bag, take measures to prevent
the buttons from being pressed
accidentally.
NOTE
. The operational/non-operational
setting for the keyless access function
can be changed. For the setting proce-
dure, refer to “Disabling Keyless Ac-
cess Function” FP127.
. For detailed information about the
operation method for the push-button
ignition switch while the keyless ac-
cess function is switched to the non-
operational mode, refer to “Access Key
Fob – If Access Key Fob Does Not
Operate Properly” FP465.
. The keyless access with push-but-
ton start system uses weak radio
waves. The status of the access key
fob and environmental conditions may
interfere with the communication be-
tween the access key fob and the
vehicle under the following conditions,
and it may not be possible to lock or
unlock the doors or start the engine.
– When operating near a facility
where strong radio waves are trans-
mitted, such as a broadcast station
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
118
(121,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
and power transmission lines.
– When products that transmit
radio waves are used, such as an
access key fob or a remote trans-
mitter key of another vehicle.
– When carrying the access key fob
of your vehicle together with the
access key fob or the remote trans-
mitter of another vehicle.
– When the access key fob is
placed near wireless communica-
tion equipment such as a cell
phone.
– When the access key fob is
placed near a metallic object.
– When metallic accessories are
attached to the access key fob.
– When carrying the access key fob
with an electronic appliance such as
a laptop computer.
– When the battery of the access
key fob is discharged.
. The access key fob is always com-
municating with the vehicle and is
continuously using the battery.
Although the life of the battery varies
depending on the operating conditions,
it is approximately 1 to 2 years. If the
battery becomes fully discharged, re-
place it with a new one.
. If an access key fob is lost, it is
recommended that all of the remaining
access key fobs be reregistered. For
reregistration of an access key fob,
contact a SUBARU dealer.
. For a spare access key fob, contact a
SUBARU dealer.
. Up to 7 access key fobs can be
registered for one vehicle.
. Do not leave the access key fob in
the storage spaces inside the vehicle,
such as the door pocket, dashboard or
inside the corner of the cargo area.
Vibrations may damage the key fob or
turn on the switch, possibly resulting in
a lockout.
. After the vehicle battery is dis-
charged or replaced, initialization of
the steering lock system may be re-
quired to start the engine. In this case,
perform the following procedure to
initialize the steering lock.
(1) Turn the push-button ignition
switch to the “OFF” position. For
details, refer to “Switching Power
Status” FP171.
(2) Open and close the driver’s
door.
(3) Wait for approximately 10 sec-
onds.
When the steering is locked, the initi-
alization is completed.
. Do not leave the access key fob in
the following places.
– On the instrument panel
– On the floor
– Inside the glove box
– Inside the door trim pocket
– On the rear seat
– On the rear shelf (Legacy)
– Inside the trunk (Legacy)
– In the cargo area (Outback)
If you do, the following situations
may occur.
– The access key fob is mistakenly
locked inside the vehicle.
– A false warning issues although
no malfunction actually occurs.
– No warning issues even when a
malfunction occurs.
– CONTINUED –
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
119
2
Keys and Doors
(122,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Locking and Unlocking with
“Keyless Access” Entry
Function
s02ap01
When the access key fob is carried within
the operating range, the doors, the fuel
filler lid, the trunk (Legacy) and the rear
gate (Outback) can be locked/unlocked
just by touching the door handle.
NOTE
The vehicle can also be locked/un-
locked with the remote keyless entry
system. For details, refer to “Remote
Keyless Entry System” FP133.
! Operating ranges
s02ap0101
Legacy
1) Antennas
2) Operating range (approximately 16 to 32
in (40 to 80 cm))
Outback
1) Antennas
2) Operating range (approximately 16 to 32
in (40 to 80 cm))
1) LED indicator
When the access key fob is within either of
the operating ranges of the front doors, the
LED indicator on the access key fob
flashes. When the keyless access func-
tions are disabled, the LED indicator does
not flash unless a button on the access key
fob is pressed.
NOTE
. If the access key fob is placed too
close to the vehicle body, the keyless
access functions may not operate
properly. If it does not operate properly,
repeat the operation from farther away.
. If the access key fob is placed near
the ground or in an elevated location
from the ground, even if it is in the
indicated operating range, the keyless
access function may not operate prop-
erly.
. When the access key fob is within
the operating range, it is possible for
anyone, even someone who is not
carrying the access key fob, to operate
the keyless access function. Note that
the keyless access function can be
operated only by the door handle, door
lock sensor, rear gate opener button or
rear lock button in the operating range
in which the access key fob is detected.
. It is not possible to lock the doors,
rear gate and fuel filler lid using the
keyless access function when the ac-
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
120
(123,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
cess key fob is inside the vehicle.
However, depending on the status of
the access key fob and the environ-
mental conditions, the access key fob
may be locked inside the vehicle.
Before locking the vehicle, make sure
that you have the access key fob.
. When the battery of the access key
fob is discharged, or when operating it
in a location with strong radio waves or
noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power
plant, broadcast station or an area
where wireless equipment is used), or
while talking on a cell phone, the
operating ranges may be reduced, or
the keyless access function may not
operate.
In such a case, perform the procedure
described in “Locking and Unlocking”
FP466.
. The doors may lock or unlock when
the car is being washed or exposed to a
significant amount of water that
touches the door handle while the key
fob is still in the operating range.
! How to lock and unlock
s02ap0108
It is possible to perform the following
operations when you are carrying the
access key fob.
. Lock and unlock the doors and the fuel
filler lid.
. Unlock the trunk lid (Legacy).
. Unlock and lock the rear gate
(Outback).
NOTE
. It is not possible to lock the doors,
rear gate and fuel filler lid using the
keyless access function when the
push-button ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position. Refer to
“Switching Power Status” FP171.
. If the door handle is gripped with a
gloved hand, the door lock may not be
released.
. If the door lock sensor is touched
three times or more repeatedly, the
system will ignore the sensor opera-
tion.
. When performing the locking proce-
dure too quickly, locking may not
complete. After performing the locking
procedure, it is recommended to pull
the rear door handle to confirm that the
doors have been locked.
. If any of the doors (or the rear gate)
are not fully closed, the following will
occur to alert you that the doors (or the
rear gate) are not properly closed.
– An electronic chirp sounds five
times.
– The hazard warning flashers
flash five times.
. It is possible to lock the doors even
when one of the doors is open. After
performing the locking procedure,
close the opened door or rear gate to
lock it.
. Within 3 seconds after locking the
doors and the rear gate using the
keyless access function, it is not pos-
sible to unlock doors and/or the rear
gate using the keyless access function.
. When locking, be sure to carry the
access key fob to prevent locking the
access key fob in the vehicle.
. The setting of the hazard warning
flasher operation and the volume of the
audible signal can be changed by your
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details. Also, for models with
the center information display, the
setting of the hazard warning flasher
operation can be changed by operating
the center information display. For de-
tails, refer to “Car settings” FP220.
– CONTINUED –
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
121
2
Keys and Doors
(124,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Locking with the door lock sensor
s02ap010801
1) Door lock sensor
Carry the access key fob, close all doors
(for Outback, including the rear gate) and
touch the door lock sensor on the door
handle. All doors including the rear gate
and the fuel filler lid will be locked. Also, an
electronic chirp will sound once and the
hazard warning flashers will flash once.
NOTE
After touching the door lock sensor to
lock all of the doors (including the rear
gate), if you touch the door lock sensor
once more to attempt the lock opera-
tion without first unlocking the doors,
nothing will happen, even if the door
lock sensor is touched. In this case,
perform the unlocking operation once
first. You can then touch the door lock
sensor to lock the doors.
! Locking with the rear lock button
(Outback)
s02ap010802
1) Rear lock button
Carry the access key fob, close all doors
including the rear gate and press the rear
lock button. The rear gate, the fuel filler lid
and all doors will be locked. Also, an
electronic chirp will sound once and the
hazard warning flashers will flash once.
! Locking with the power rear gate
lock button (Outback – if
equipped)
s02ap010803
1) Power rear gate lock button
Carry the access key fob, and press the
power rear gate lock button. It will close
automatically, and the rear gate, all doors
and the fuel filler lid will be locked. Also, the
hazard warning flashers will flash once,
and an electronic chirp will sound once.
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
122
(125,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Unlocking
s02ap010804
Carry the access key fob, and touch the
sensor behind the door handle.
. When the driver’s door handle is
gripped, only the driver’s door and the fuel
filler lid will be unlocked.
. When the front passenger’s door han-
dle is gripped, all doors (for Outback,
including the rear gate) and the fuel filler
lid will be unlocked.
Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice
and the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
! Opening rear gate (Outback)
s02ap010805
1) Rear gate opener button
Carry the access key fob, and press the
rear gate opener button. Only the rear gate
will be unlocked and opened. Also, an
electronic chirp will sound twice and the
hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
! Opening trunk (Legacy)
s02ap010806
1) Trunk opener button
Carry the access key fob, and press the
trunk opener button. The trunk will open.
An electronic chirp will sound twice and the
hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
NOTE
Under the following conditions, the
trunk can be opened without the key
fob.
. The trunk lock/unlock setting is on.
. All doors are unlocked.
– CONTINUED –
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
123
2
Keys and Doors
(126,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
The trunk lock/unlock setting can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact
your SUBARU dealer to change the
setting.
! Door unlock selection function
s02ap0105
When the door is unlocked using the
keyless access function, only the doors
that were set and the fuel filler lid can be
unlocked.
The settings can be changed with the
following methods.
. The setting can be changed by operat-
ing the center information display.
For details, refer to “Car settings” FP220.
. The setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer.
& Unlock Using PIN Code Ac-
cess
s02ap21
1) Trunk opener button (Legacy)
1) Rear lock button (Outback)
While all doors (for Outback, including the
rear gate) are locked, you can unlock the
doors (including rear gate) without a key by
performing the following procedure.
. Legacy: press the trunk opener button
. Outback: press the rear lock button
NOTE
PIN Code Access will be helpful if the
key is accidentally left in the vehicle. It
is recommended that a 5-digit security
code (PIN code) is registered.
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
124
(127,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Registration for a PIN code
s02ap2102
Steps Operation Time from the previous step
1 Turn off the ignition switch. —
2 Close all doors (including trunk/rear gate). —
3
Press and hold the “
” button on the access key fob, then press and hold the
trunk opener button (Legacy)/rear lock button (Outback) until a chirp sounds
intermittently.
—
4 Press the “
” button on the access key fob. Within 30 seconds
Input the PIN code using the trunk opener button (Legacy)/rear lock button
(Outback) within 30 seconds after the chirp sound of step 4.
For example, to register “32468” as the PIN code, perform the following
procedure.
Within 30 seconds
5
(1) Press the button three times.
(2) After a chirp sounds once, press the button twice.
(3) After a chirp sounds once, press the button four times.
(4) After a chirp sounds once, press the button six times.
(5) After a chirp sounds once, press the button eight times.
6
Perform step 5 again within approximately 30 seconds after the chirp starts
sounding intermittently.
—
7 All doors will be unlocked and locked. Then the PIN code will be registered.
—
NOTE
Press the “ ” button within 30 seconds of step 6 to end the preparation mode and move on to the registration stage. Unless the
“
” button is pressed within 30 seconds after step 6, the PIN code registration will be canceled.
– CONTINUED –
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
125
2
Keys and Doors
(128,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
NOTE
. Press the trunk opener button/rear
lock button ten times to enter “0”.
. Change the PIN code frequently to
protect your vehicle from theft.
. If you have lent your vehicle to
another person, confirm that the PIN
code has not been changed or deleted.
If the PIN code has been changed or
deleted, reregister a new PIN code.
. If you make an error during the
registration procedure, press the “
”
or “
” button on the access key fob.
Then, start over from the procedure
described in “Preparation”.
. To protect your vehicle from theft,
you cannot register “00000” to “99999”
or “12345” as a PIN code.
. Do not register your vehicle license
plate number or simple numbers such
as “11122” or “12121” as a PIN code.
Doing so will increase the risk of
vehicle theft.
. When you try to register “22222”, the
registered PIN code will be deleted. You
cannot unlock the doors by PIN Code
Access until a new code is registered.
. After registering a new PIN code,
make sure that you can unlock the
doors using the PIN code.
. The PIN code cannot be deleted
while the keyless access function is
disabled by operating the access key
fob.
. Reregister the PIN code in the fol-
lowing case.
– When you forget the PIN code
– When you want to change the PIN
code
! Unlocking
s02ap2103
Perform steps (1) to (5) of step 5 described
in “Registration”.
NOTE
. You cannot unlock by PIN Code
Access in the following cases.
– When the access key fob is within
the operating ranges
– When the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position
. If you make an operation error dur-
ing the unlocking procedure, start over
with the unlocking procedure after
waiting for 5 seconds or longer.
. To protect your vehicle from theft, a
buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN codes
are entered five times continuously. If
this occurs, you cannot unlock the
doors by PIN Code Access for 5
minutes.
& Power Saving Function
s02ap23
To protect the access key fob battery and
the vehicle battery, the keyless access
function will be disabled as follows.
. When the keyless access function and
the remote keyless entry system have not
been used:
(1) 5 days after the push-button igni-
tion switch has been turned off, com-
munication between the antennas and
the access key fob will be stopped.
(2) 9 days after step (1), the sensors
(both lock sensor and unlock sensor)
on the front passenger’s door will be
disabled.
. When the access key fob has been left
in the operating range for 10 minutes or
longer while all doors are locked, the
keyless access function will be disabled.
! Recovery from power saving mode
s02ap2301
When one of the following operations is
performed, the keyless access function
will be recovered.
. Unlock by gripping the door handle
(only when the sensors on the front
passenger’s door are not disabled) or
pressing the rear gate opener button on
the rear gate (Outback)/trunk opener
button on the trunk lid (Legacy).
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
126
(129,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. Lock or unlock by the remote keyless
entry system.
. Open a door and then close it.
. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ON” position.
& Power Saving Function of
Access Key Fob
s02ap26
This function stops the access key fob
from receiving signals and helps minimize
the battery consumption of the access key
fob.
1. Press the “
” button twice while hold-
ing the “
” button.
1) LED indicator
2. Confirm that the LED indicator blinks 4
times to notify that the setting is complete.
When the access key fob is in the power
save mode, the keyless access function
and push-button start system will not be
available.
To cancel the power save mode, press one
of the buttons on the access key fob.
& Disabling Keyless Access
Function
s02ap07
WARNING
If you have an implanted pacemaker
or an implanted defibrillator, per-
form the procedure “By operating
the driver’s door” FP128 to disable
the keyless access function. If you
perform the procedure “By operat-
ing the access key fob” FP128, the
operation of an implanted pace-
maker or implanted defibrillator
may be affected by the radio waves
from the transmitter antenna.
When the vehicle is not going to be used
for a long time, or when you choose not to
use the keyless access function, the key-
less access function can be disabled.
NOTE
. The locking and unlocking function
by the remote keyless entry system is
not disabled.
. To start the engine while the func-
tions are disabled, perform the proce-
dure described in “Starting Engine”
FP466.
– CONTINUED –
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
127
2
Keys and Doors
(130,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Disabling functions
s02ap0701
! By operating the access key fob
s02ap070102
To disable the keyless access function by
operating the access key fob, register a
PIN code for PIN Code Access. For details
about registering a PIN code, refer to
“Unlock Using PIN Code Access” FP124.
1. Open the driver’s door.
2. Rotate the lock lever forward.
3. Press and hold the “ ” button and “ ”
button on the access key fob simulta-
neously for more than 5 seconds.
A chirp sound will be heard, and the
function will be disabled.
! By operating the driver’s door
s02ap070101
To disable the keyless access function by
operating the driver’s door, perform the
following procedures.
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
128
(131,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Steps Operation Time Status
1 Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the door. — Close
2 Push “
” on the power door locking switch. — Close
3 Open the driver’s door. Within 5 sec. Close?Open
4
Push “
” on the power door locking switch
twice.
Within 5 sec. Open
5 Close and open the driver’s door twice. Within 10 sec.
Open?Close?
Open?Close?Open
6
Push “
” on the power door locking switch
twice while the door is open.
Within 10 sec. Open
7 Close and open the driver’s door once. Within 10 sec. Open?Close?Open
8 Close the door. Within 5 sec.
Open?Close
A chirp will sound and the functions will be disabled.
NOTE
In steps 4 and 6, press the power door locking switch firmly. If the switch is not
pressed firmly, the functions may not be disabled.
! Enabling functions
s02ap0702
When the procedure to disable the func-
tions is performed again, a chirp sound will
be heard, and the functions are enabled.
NOTE
. The keyless access function will be
enabled only if you perform the proce-
dure in the same manner you disabled
the function (for example, when dis-
abling by operating the driver’s door,
the function will not be enabled even if
you operate the access key fob).
. Press the push-button ignition
switch if you do not know the proce-
dure in which the keyless access func-
tion was disabled.
– When disabling by operating the
driver’s door: A chirp will not be
heard.
– When disabling by operating the
access key fob: A chirp will be
heard.
– CONTINUED –
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
129
2
Keys and Doors
(132,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Selecting Audible Signal Op-
eration
s02ap12
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
are locked or unlocked. If desired, you can
turn the audible signal off by operating the
center information display. For details,
refer to “Car settings” FP220.
Furthermore, the volume setting of the
audible signal can also be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
& Selecting Hazard Warning
Flasher Operation
s02ap18
Using the hazard warning flasher, the
system will give you a visible signal when
the doors are locked or unlocked. If
desired, you can turn the hazard warning
flashers off by operating the center infor-
mation display. For details, refer to “Car
settings” FP220. The setting can also be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult
your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Warning Chimes and Warning
Indicator
s02ap06
The keyless access with push-button start
system is equipped with a warning chime
and the access key warning indicator in
order to minimize improper operations and
help protect your vehicle from theft.
For details, refer to “Warning Chimes and
Warning Indicator of the Keyless Access
with Push-Button Start System” FP191.
& When Access Key Fob Does
Not Operate Properly
s02ap08
Refer to “Access Key Fob – If Access Key
Fob Does Not Operate Properly” FP465.
& Replacing Battery of Access
Key Fob
s02ap09
Refer to “Replacing Battery of Access Key
Fob” FP526.
& Replacing Access Key Fob
s02ap13
Access key fobs can be replaced at
SUBARU dealers. For more details, con-
tact a SUBARU dealer.
& Certification for Keyless Ac-
cess with Push-Button Start
System
s02ap14
. U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: HYQ14AHK
FCC ID: Y8PFJ18-2
FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
130
(133,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. Canada-spec. models . Mexico-spec. models
IFT
RLVDE1415-1661
14AHK
DENSO
2-3. Immobilizer
s02ab
The immobilizer system is designed to
prevent an unauthorized person from
starting the engine. Only keys registered
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can
be used to operate your vehicle. If engine
start is attempted with an unregistered
access key fob or key, the engine will not
start. Even if the engine does start, it will
stop after a few seconds. This system,
however, is not a 100% anti-theft guaran-
tee.
CAUTION
. Do not place the key under direct
sunlight or anywhere it may be-
come hot.
. Do not get the key wet. If the key
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
immediately.
. Do not modify or remove the
system. If modified or removed,
the proper operation of the sys-
tem cannot be guaranteed.
NOTE
. To protect your vehicle from theft,
please pay close attention to the follow-
ing security precautions:
– CONTINUED –
Immobilizer
131
2
Keys and Doors
(134,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
– Never leave your vehicle unat-
tended with its keys inside.
– Before leaving your vehicle,
close all windows and the moon-
roof, and lock the doors (all models)
and rear gate (Outback).
– Do not leave spare keys or any
record of your key number in the
vehicle.
. The vehicle has a maintenance-free
type immobilizer system.
& Security Indicator Light
s02ab02
Refer to “Security Indicator Light” FP196.
& Key Replacement
s02ab03
Your key number plate will be required if
you ever need a replacement key made.
Any new key must be registered for use
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system
before it can be used. The maximum
number of keys that can be registered for
use with one vehicle is as follows.
. Four (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”)
. Seven (models with “keyless access
with push-button start system”)
One key that has already been registered
is required in order to register a new key.
NOTE
If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code
still remains in the memory of the
vehicle’s immobilizer system. For se-
curity reasons, the lost key’s ID code
should be erased from the memory. To
erase the lost key’s ID code, all keys
that will be used are required.
For details about new key registration
and erasing the lost key’s ID code,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
& Certification for Immobilizer
System
s02ab05
. For models with “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
Refer to “Certification for Keyless Access
with Push-Button Start System” FP130.
. For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
– U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: Y8PFJ18-3
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Immobilizer
132
(135,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
– Canada-spec. models – Mexico-spec. models
2-4. Remote Keyless Entry
System
s02ae
CAUTION
. Do not expose the remote trans-
mitter to severe shocks, such as
those experienced as a result of
dropping or throwing.
. Do not take the remote transmit-
ter apart except when replacing
the battery.
. Do not get the remote transmitter
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with
a cloth immediately.
. When you carry the remote trans-
mitter on an airplane, do not
press the button of the remote
transmitter while in the airplane.
When any button of the remote
transmitter is pressed, radio
waves are sent and may affect
the operation of the airplane.
When you carry the remote trans-
mitter in a bag on an airplane,
take measures to prevent the
buttons of the remote transmitter
from being pressed.
– CONTINUED –
Remote Keyless Entry System
133
2
Keys and Doors
(136,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Access key fob
1) Lock/arm button
2) Unlock/disarm button
3) Trunk lid opener (Legacy)/Rear gate
unlock button (Outback)
4) PANIC button
Transmitter
1) Lock/arm button
2) Unlock/disarm button
3) Trunk lid opener (Legacy)/Rear gate
unlock button (Outback)
4) PANIC button
The remote keyless entry system has the
following functions.
. Locking and unlocking the doors, rear
gate (Outback) and fuel filler lid
. Opening the trunk lid (Legacy)
. Sounding a panic alarm
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
tem. For details, refer to “Alarm System”
FP141.
The operable distance of the remote key-
less entry system is approximately 30 feet
(10 meters). However, this distance will
vary depending on environmental condi-
tions. The system’s operable distance will
be shorter in areas near a facility or
electronic equipment emitting strong radio
waves such as a power plant, broadcast
station, TV tower, or remote controller of
home electronic appliances.
NOTE
. For models with “keyless access
with push-button start system”, the
remote keyless entry system will not
be activated when the push-button
ignition switch is in any position other
than the “OFF” position.
. For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”, the
remote keyless entry system will not
be activated when the key is inserted in
the ignition switch.
. The hazard warning flashers will
flash once or twice when the access
key fob/transmitter button is pressed in
the following cases.
– When locking the doors
– When unlocking the doors
– When unlocking the rear gate
If desired, you can turn the hazard
warning flashers off by operating the
center information display. For details,
refer to “Car settings” FP220. The
setting can also be changed by a
Remote Keyless Entry System
134
(137,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
& Locking the Doors
s02ae01
Press the “ ” button to lock all doors, the
trunk (Legacy), rear gate (Outback) and
fuel filler lid. An electronic chirp will sound
once and the hazard warning flashers will
flash once.
If any of the doors (or the rear gate/trunk
lid) are not fully closed, the following will
occur to alert you that the doors (or the rear
gate/trunk lid) are not properly closed.
. An electronic chirp sounds five times.
. The hazard warning flashers flash five
times.
When you close the door, it will automati-
cally lock and then the following will occur.
. An electronic chirp sounds once.
. The hazard warning flashers flash
once.
& Unlocking the Doors
s02ae02
Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’s
door and fuel filler lid. An electronic chirp
will sound twice and the hazard warning
flashers will flash twice. To unlock all doors
and the rear gate, briefly press the “
”
button again within 5 seconds.
NOTE
If the interval between the first and
second presses of the “
” button (for
unlocking of all of the doors and the
rear gate) is extremely short, the sys-
tem may not respond.
& Opening the Trunk Lid
(Legacy)
s02ae13
Press and hold the “ ” button to open the
trunk lid. An electronic chirp will sound
twice and the hazard warning flashers will
flash twice.
This operation setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
& Unlocking the Rear Gate
(Outback)
s02ae03
Press the “ ” button to unlock the rear
gate. An electronic chirp will sound twice
and the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
This operation setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
& Setting Audible Signal Op-
eration
s02ae07
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
lock and unlock.
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
If desired, you can turn the audible signal
off by operating the center information
display. For details, refer to “Car settings”
FP220. Furthermore, the volume setting
of the audible signal can also be changed
by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for details.
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
Perform the following steps to deactivate
the audible signal. Take the same steps to
restore the function.
– CONTINUED –
Remote Keyless Entry System
135
2
Keys and Doors
(138,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Steps Operation Time
1 Sit in the driver’s seat. —
2
Close all doors and the
rear gate.
—
3
(1)
Press and hold “
” on
the power locking
switch.
Within
10 sec.
(2)
Insert the key into the
ignition switch and pull it
out at least 6 times.
4
Open and close the dri-
ver’s door.
Within
10 sec.
The hazard warning flashers flash 3 times
to indicate completion of the setting.
Your SUBARU dealer can perform the
above procedure for you.
& Selecting Hazard Warning
Flasher Operation
s02ae26
Using the hazard warning flasher, the
system will give you a visible signal when
the doors are locked or unlocked. If
desired, you can turn the hazard warning
flashers off by operating the center infor-
mation display. For details, refer to “Car
settings” FP220 (11.6-inch display mod-
els) or “Vehicle setting icons” FP239 (dual
7.0-inch display models). The setting can
also be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Vehicle Finder Function
s02ae05
Use this function to find your vehicle
parked among many vehicles in a large
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “
”
button three times in a 5-second period will
cause your vehicle’s horn to sound once
and its hazard warning flashers to flash
three times.
NOTE
If the interval between presses is too
short when you press the “
” button
three times, the system may not re-
spond to the signals from the remote
transmitter.
& Sounding a Panic Alarm
s02ae06
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”
button once.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning flashers will flash.
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
button on the remote transmitter. If a
button on the remote transmitter is not
pressed, the alarm will be deactivated after
approximately 30 seconds.
& Replacing the Battery
s02ae08
Refer to “Replacing Battery” FP525.
& Replacing Lost Transmitters
s02ae09
If you lose a transmitter or want to
purchase additional transmitters (up to
four can be programmed), you should re-
program all of your transmitters for security
reasons. For details, contact your
SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters
programmed into the remote keyless entry
system.
& Certification for Remote Key-
less Entry System
s02ae18
. U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: CWTB1G077
FCC ID: CWTD1G141
CAUTION
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that
Remote Keyless Entry System
136
(139,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
may cause undesired operation.
. Canada-spec. models
. Mexico-spec. models
IFETEL RLVSUTB15-1814
SUBARU
MODEL: TB1G077
IFETEL RLVSUTD18-0302
SUBARU
MODEL: TD1G141
2-5. Door Locks
s02ac
& Locking and Unlocking from
the Outside
s02ac01
NOTE
If you unlock the driver’s door with a
key (including an emergency key) and
open the door while the alarm system is
armed, the alarm system is triggered
and the vehicle’s horn sounds. In this
case, perform any of the following
operations:
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
. Press any button on the access key
fob (except when the access key fob
battery is discharged).
. Turn the push-button ignition switch
to the “ACC” position.
. Carry the access key fob and per-
form either of the following procedures.
– Grip the front door handle.
– Press the rear gate opener but-
ton.
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
. Press any button on the remote
transmitter (except when the transmit-
ter battery is discharged).
– CONTINUED –
Door Locks
137
2
Keys and Doors
(140,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. Insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
For details about the alarm system,
refer to “Alarm System” FP141.
! How to lock and unlock the vehicle
using the key
s02ac0101
1) Rotate the key toward the front to lock.
2) Rotate the key toward the rear to unlock.
In this case, only the driver’s side door is
locked or unlocked.
NOTE
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
The emergency key is directional. If the
key cannot be inserted, change the
direction that the grooved side is facing
and insert it again.
! How to lock the vehicle without
using the key
s02ac0102
To lock the door from outside without the
key, the following methods are available.
! Locking using lock lever
s02ac010201
1) Rotate the lock lever forward.
2) Close the door.
In this way, only the door that was operated
will be locked.
! Locking using power door lock-
ing switch
s02ac010202
1) Press the side of the power door
locking switch*.
2) Close the door.
*: For details about the power door locking
switch, refer to “How to operate the power
door locking switches” FP139.
In this case, all closed doors, the fuel filler
lid and the rear gate (Outback) are locked
at the same time.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside without the key.
Door Locks
138
(141,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Locking and Unlocking from
the Inside
s02ac02
! How to use the lock lever
s02ac0202
1) Rotate the lock lever rearward to unlock.
2) Rotate the lock lever forward to lock.
To lock the door from the inside, rotate the
lock lever forward. To unlock the door from
the inside, rotate the lock lever rearward.
The red mark on the lock lever appears
when the door is unlocked.
Pull the inside door handle to open an
unlocked door.
Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate (Outback) are closed before
starting to drive.
WARNING
. Keep all doors locked when you
drive, especially when small chil-
dren are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of
seatbelts and child restraint sys-
tems, locking the doors reduces
the chance of being thrown out of
the vehicle in an accident.
It also helps prevent passengers
from falling out by preventing a
door from being accidentally
opened, and intruders from un-
expectedly opening doors and
entering your vehicle.
. Do not pull the front door handle
from inside while driving. The
door could open even if it is
locked.
! How to operate the power door
locking switches
s02ac0203
All doors, the rear gate (Outback) and fuel
filler lid can be locked and unlocked by
pressing either side of the power door
locking switches located on the driver’s
side and the front passenger’s side doors.
1) Lock
2) Unlock
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside using the power
door locking switches.
– CONTINUED –
Door Locks
139
2
Keys and Doors
(142,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Automatic Door Locking/Un-
locking
s02ac08
All doors and the fuel filler lid are auto-
matically locked or unlocked under the
following conditions.
. For automatic door locking
– When the vehicle speed reaches 12
mph (20 km/h) or higher (factory
default setting).
– When the select lever is shifted into
a position other than the “P” position.
. For automatic door unlocking
– When the driver’s door is open
(factory default setting).
– When the ignition switch is turned to
OFF.
– When the select lever is shifted into
the “P” position.
NOTE
. The automatic door lock and unlock
setting can be changed with the center
information display. Refer to “Car set-
tings” FP220 (11.6-inch display mod-
els) or “Vehicle setting icons” FP239
(dual 7.0-inch display models).
. When locking the door by the power
door locking switches, automatic door
locking will not operate.
. When unlocking the door by the
power door locking switches, auto-
matic door unlocking will not operate.
. If the system detects a strong en-
ough impact to deploy the airbags, all
doors may be automatically unlocked.
For further details, refer to “Automatic
Door Locking/Unlocking Operation
When Involved in an Accident” FP470.
. When getting out of the vehicle from
a rear door, make sure to unlock all the
doors by pushing the unlock side of the
power door locking switch. If a rear
door is unlocked from the inside door
lever then the door is opened and
closed, the Key lock-in prevention
function will be triggered. All doors will
be unlocked, the Key lock-in prevention
warning indicator “
” will appear and
the warning chime will also sound.
& Key Lock-In Prevention
Function
s02ac06
Under the following conditions, all the
doors will not lock when the power door
locking switch is pushed with a front door
open.
. The key is still in the ignition switch
(models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”).
. The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position (models with “keyless ac-
cess with push-button start system”).
NOTE
. When leaving the vehicle, make sure
you are holding the key before locking
the doors.
. When getting out of the vehicle from
a rear door, make sure to unlock all the
doors by pushing the unlock side of the
power door locking switch.
. When getting out of the vehicle from
a rear door, make sure to unlock all the
doors by pushing the unlock side of the
power door locking switch. If a rear
door is unlocked from the inside door
lever then the door is opened and
closed, the Key lock-in prevention
function will be triggered. All doors will
be unlocked, the Key lock-in prevention
warning indicator “
” will appear and
the warning chime will also sound.
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
This function’s operational/non-opera-
tional setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU
dealer for details.
! Non-operation of key lock-in pre-
vention function
s02ac0602
When the system is set so that it does not
operate, the doors are locked by the
following operation.
. If the lock lever is turned to the front
Door Locks
140
(143,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
open and the driver’s door is then closed
with the lock lever in that position, the
driver’s door is locked.
. If the spare key is used to lock the
driver’s door from the outside of the
vehicle, the door is locked.
& Battery Drainage Prevention
Function
s02ac03
If a door or the rear gate (Outback) is not
completely closed, the interior lights will
remain illuminated as a result. However,
several lights are automatically turned off
by the battery drainage prevention func-
tion to prevent the battery from going dead.
The following interior lights are affected by
this function.
Item
Switch
position
Automatically turning
off
Map lights DOOR
Approximately 20
minutes later
Dome light DOOR
Approximately 20
minutes later
Ignition
switch light
—
Approximately 20
minutes later
Cargo area
light
(Outback)
DOOR
Approximately 20
minutes later
NOTE
. The default setting for this function
is set as “operational”. The operational/
non-operational setting of this function
can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
Contact your SUBARU dealer to
change the setting.
. When leaving the vehicle, please
make sure that all doors and the rear
gate (Outback) are completely closed.
. The battery drainage prevention
function does not operate under the
following condition.
– While the push-button ignition
switch is in “ACC” or “ON” (models
with the push-button ignition
switch)
– While the key is in the ignition
switch (models without the push-
button ignition switch)
. Models with the push-button ignition
switch are also equipped with the
battery drainage prevention function
for the push-button ignition switch.
For details, refer to “Battery drainage
prevention function” FP172.
2-6. Alarm System
s02af
The alarm system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn
sounds and the hazard warning flashers
flash if someone attempts to break into
your vehicle.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
The system can be armed or disarmed
with the keyless access function or access
key fob.
The system will not be activated when the
push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
The system can be armed or disarmed
with the remote transmitter.
The system will not be activated when the
key is inserted into the ignition switch.
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set
for activation at the time of shipment from
the factory. You can set the system for
deactivation yourself or have it done by
your SUBARU dealer.
– CONTINUED –
Alarm System
141
2
Keys and Doors
(144,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Alarm System Operation
s02af01
When the alarm system is armed, it is
triggered by the opening any of the doors,
the rear gate (Outback)/trunk lid (Legacy)
or engine hood.
The alarm system will activate the follow-
ing alarms when triggered.
. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30
seconds.
. The hazard warning flashers will flash
for 30 seconds.
If any of the doors, the rear gate (Outback)/
trunk lid (Legacy) or engine hood remains
open after the 30-second period, the horn
will continue to sound for a maximum of 3
minutes. If the door, rear gate (Outback)/
trunk lid (Legacy) or engine hood is closed
while the horn is sounding, the horn will
stop sounding with a delay of up to 30
seconds.
NOTE
The alarm system can be set to trigger
the illumination of the following interior
lights.
. Map lights (illuminates only when
the door interlock switch is in the
“DOOR” position)
. Dome light (illuminates only when
the dome light switch is in the “DOOR”
position)
. Cargo area light (Outback) (illumi-
nates only when the cargo area light
switch is in the “DOOR” position)
The notifications regarding the map
lights, dome light and cargo area light
(Outback) are deactivated as the fac-
tory setting. A SUBARU dealer can
activate the system. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for details.
& Arming the System
s02af04
The alarm system becomes armed when
the following operation is performed.
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
equipped) and turn the ignition switch to
the “OFF” position.
2. Carry the key and get out of the
vehicle.
3. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
4. Lock the doors using any of the
following methods.
. Locking using the remote keyless
entry system. For details, refer to
“Remote Keyless Entry System”
FP133.
. Locking using the keyless access
function (if equipped). For details, refer
to “Locking with the door lock sensor”
FP122.
. Locking using the power door lock-
ing switch. For details, refer to “Locking
using power door locking switch”
FP138.
. Locking using the rear lock button.
For details, refer to “Locking with the
rear lock button (Outback)” FP122.
. Locking using the power rear gate
lock button. For details, refer to “Lock-
ing with the power rear gate lock button
(Outback – if equipped)” FP122.
Security indicator light
NOTE
. All doors, the rear gate (Outback)/
trunk lid (Legacy) and fuel filler lid will
lock, an electronic chirp will sound
once, the hazard warning flashers will
flash once, and the security indicator
Alarm System
142
(145,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
light will start flashing rapidly.
. If any of the doors or the rear gate
(Outback)/trunk lid (Legacy) is not fully
closed, an electronic chirp sounds five
times and the hazard warning flashers
flash five times to alert you that the
doors (or the rear gate (Outback)/trunk
lid (Legacy)) are not properly closed.
When you close the door, doors will
automatically lock and the system will
automatically arm in 30 seconds.
5. Approximately 30 seconds later, the
system will enter surveillance state.
When the system is in surveillance state,
the security indicator light will then flash
slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec-
onds), indicating that the system has been
armed for surveillance.
NOTE
. The system can be armed even if the
windows and/or moonroof are open.
Always make sure that they are fully
closed before arming the system.
. The 30-second standby time can be
eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-
formed by your SUBARU dealer.
. If any of the following actions is
done during the standby period, the
system will not switch to the surveil-
lance state.
– Doors (including the rear gate
(Outback)/trunk lid (Legacy)) are
unlocked using the access key fob/
remote transmitter.
– Doors (including the rear gate
(Outback)/trunk lid (Legacy)) are
unlocked using the keyless access
function (models with “keyless ac-
cess with push-button start sys-
tem”).
– Any door (including the rear gate
(Outback) and engine hood) is
opened.
– The ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position (models without
“keyless access with push-button
start system”).
– Push-button ignition switch is
turned to the “ACC” position (mod-
els with “keyless access with push-
button start system”).
& Disarming the System
s02af05
Perform either of the following procedures.
. Briefly press a button (for less than 2
seconds) on the access key fob/remote
transmitter.
. Carry the access key fob and perform
either of the following procedures (models
with “keyless access with push-button
start system”).
– Grip the front door handle.
– Press the rear gate opener button
(Outback).
– Press the trunk opener button
(Legacy).
– Unlock using the PIN code access.
The flashing of the security indicator light
will then change slowly (once approxi-
mately every 3 seconds from twice ap-
proximately every 2 seconds), indicating
that the alarm system has been disarmed.
! Emergency disarming
s02af0501
If you cannot disarm the system using the
access key fob/transmitter (i.e., the trans-
mitter is lost, broken or the transmitter
battery is too weak), you can disarm the
system without using the access key fob/
remote transmitter.
The system can be disarmed if you turn the
ignition switch from the “LOCK”/“OFF”
position to the “ON” position with a
registered key/access key fob.
NOTE
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, if the ac-
cess key fob battery is discharged,
perform the procedure described in
“Switching Power Status” FP466. In
such a case, replace the battery im-
mediately. Refer to “Replacing Battery
of Access Key Fob” FP526.
– CONTINUED –
Alarm System
143
2
Keys and Doors
(146,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Alarm System Setting
s02af11
To change the setting of your vehicle’s
alarm system for activation or deactiva-
tion, do the following.
1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
“Disarming the System” FP143.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors, the rear gate (Outback), the trunk lid
(Legacy) and engine hood.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
4. Hold down “
” of the driver’s power
door locking switch, open the driver’s door
within the following 1 second, and wait 10
seconds without releasing the switch. The
setting will then be changed as follows.
Setting
status
Combination
meter display
(color LCD)
Horn
Activate AL ON Once
Deactivate AL OFF
Twice
NOTE
You may have the above setting change
done by your SUBARU dealer.
& If You Have Accidentally
Triggered the Alarm System
s02af03
! To stop the alarm
s02af0301
Do any of the following operations:
. Press any button on the access key fob/
remote transmitter.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”).
. Turn the push-button ignition to the
“ACC” position (models with “keyless
access with push-button start system”).
NOTE
Only registered keys will stop the
alarm. If the immobilizer transponder
is not registered, the alarm will not
stop.
& Valet Mode
s02af06
When you choose the valet mode, the
alarm system does not operate. In valet
mode, the remote transmitter is used only
for locking and unlocking the doors and
rear gate (Outback) and panic activation.
To enter the valet mode, change the
setting of your vehicle’s alarm system to
deactivation mode. Refer to “Alarm Sys-
tem Setting” FP144. The security indica-
tor light will continue to flash once every 3
seconds, indicating that the system is in
the valet mode.
To exit valet mode, change the setting of
your vehicle’s alarm system to activation
mode. Refer to “Alarm System Setting”
FP144.
Alarm System
144
(147,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
2-7. Child Safety Locks
s02ag
WARNING
Always turn the child safety locks to
the “LOCK” position when children
sit on the rear seat. Serious injury
could result if a child accidentally
opens the door and falls out.
Each rear door has a child safety lock.
When the child safety lock lever is in the
“LOCK” position, the door cannot be
opened from inside. The door can only
be opened from the outside.
2-8. Windows
s02ah
WARNING
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, always con-
form to the following instructions
without exception.
. When operating the power win-
dows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyone’s body parts or
any other objects from being
caught in the window.
. Always lock the passengers’ win-
dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
. Always carry the key when you
leave the vehicle for safety rea-
sons and never allow an unat-
tended child to remain in the
vehicle. Failure to follow this
procedure could result in injury
to a child operating the power
window.
NOTE
. If the power window system detects
resistance, an impact or abnormality,
the window operation may be automa-
tically stopped to prevent further jam-
ming, entrapment or malfunction.
– The closing window slides down
slightly and stops.
– The opening window stops slid-
ing down.
. The power window system may
detect resistance, an impact or an
abnormality in the following cases.
– A substantial sized object is
caught between the window and
the window frame.
– A foreign object is caught be-
tween the window and the window
frame.
– The vehicle drives over a deep
pothole.
. The window cannot be closed for a
few seconds after the window is auto-
matically stopped by the system.
– CONTINUED –
Child Safety Locks
145
2
Keys and Doors
(148,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Power Window Operation
s02ah07
! Power window switches
s02ah0701
. Driver’s side power window switches:
1) For front left window (with one-touch auto
up and down feature)
2) For front right window (with one-touch
auto up and down feature)
3) For rear left window (with one-touch auto
up and down feature (if equipped))
4) For rear right window (with one-touch
auto up and down feature (if equipped))
5) Lock switch
All door windows can be controlled by the
power window switch cluster on the driver
side door.
The switch illuminates when operated.
. Passenger’s side power window
switches:
Each passenger’s window can be con-
trolled by the power window switch located
on the door.
The switch illuminates when operated.
! Operating the window
s02ah0702
With one-touch auto up and down feature
1) Automatically close*
2) Close
3) Open
4) Automatically open*
*: To stop the window halfway, operate the
switch to the opposite side.
Windows
146
(149,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Without one-touch auto up and down
feature
1) Close
2) Open
NOTE
Avoid the following.
. Continuously operating a switch in
the same direction after the window is
fully closed or fully opened.
. Continuously operating three or
more switches all at once in the same
direction after the windows are fully
closed or fully opened.
Either of the operations described
above may cause the power window
breaker to operate making it impossible
to open or close the window. Be sure to
initialize the power windows. Refer to
“Initialization of Power Window (Win-
dows with One-Touch Auto up and
down Function)” FP148.
! Anti-entrapment function (windows
with one-touch auto up and down
function)
s02ah0703
While closing the window automatically, if
the window senses a substantial enough
object trapped between the window and
the window frame, it automatically moves
down slightly and stops.
If a foreign object is caught while window is
opening automatically, the window will
stop.
CAUTION
. Never attempt to test the power
window operation using body
parts.
. If an object is caught just before
the window fully closes, the sys-
tem may not operate properly.
NOTE
. If a window detects an impact similar
to that caused by trapping an object (for
example, when the vehicle encounters
a deep pothole), the anti-entrapment
function may operate.
. You cannot close the window for a
few seconds after the anti-entrapment
function operates.
! Off delay function (windows with
one-touch auto up and down func-
tion)
s02ah0705
The windows can be operated for approxi-
mately 40 seconds even after the ignition
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “OFF”
position. If a front door is opened within 40
seconds, the off delay function is can-
celed.
! Locking the passengers’ windows
s02ah0704
1) Lock
2) Unlock
When the lock switch is in the lock position,
the rear passenger’s window switches on
the driver side door and the passengers’
– CONTINUED –
Windows
147
2
Keys and Doors
(150,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
window switches cannot be operated.
When the indicator on the window
switches does not illuminate, the window
switch cannot be operated.
& Initialization of Power Win-
dow (Windows with One-
Touch Auto up and down
Function)
s02ah06
If the one-touch auto up and down function
or off delay function does not operate
properly, operate each window according
to the following procedure in order to
initialize the power window system.
1. Close the door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
3. Open the window completely and then
press and hold down the power window
switch for approximately 1 second.
4. Close the window completely and then
pull and hold the power window switch for
approximately 1 second.
2-9. Trunk Lid (Legacy)
s02ai
WARNING
. To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the trunk lid closed
while the engine is running.
. Check that the trunk is comple-
tely closed before driving. If it is
not, it may suddenly open, which
could lead to an accident.
. Help prevent children, adults or
animals from locking themselves
in the trunk. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in the trunk
could quickly become high en-
ough to cause death or serious
heat-related injuries including
brain damage to anyone locked
inside, particularly for small chil-
dren.
. When leaving the vehicle, close
all windows and lock all doors.
Also make certain that the trunk
is closed.
CAUTION
. Be extremely careful not to catch
fingers or other objects when
closing the trunk lid.
. Check carefully when opening
and closing the trunk.
. Pay attention to hot engine ex-
haust gas when loading and un-
loading cargo, as it could possi-
bly cause burns.
. Be careful opening the trunk
when the wind is strong. The
trunk lid could close or open
suddenly, possibly causing inju-
ries.
. Make sure that the trunk is com-
pletely open when using it. If it is
not, the trunk lid may suddenly
drop and cause serious injury.
. Be careful opening and closing
the trunk suddenly on a slope, as
trunk is more difficult to open and
close on a slope than on a flat
area.
. Do not install accessories other
than genuine SUBARU parts. If
the trunk lid becomes too heavy,
the stay may not be able to hold it
open.
Trunk Lid (Legacy)
148
(151,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. Remove snow and ice from the
trunk lid before opening it. Not
doing so could cause the trunk
lid to fall after it is opened.
. Do not push the trunk lid forcibly
to close it. It could deform the
metal.
& To Open and Close the Trunk
Lid from Outside
s02ai01
The trunk lid can be opened using the
keyless access function or remote keyless
entry system. For details, refer to the
following section.
. For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, refer to “Open-
ing trunk (Legacy)” FP123, or “Opening
the Trunk Lid (Legacy)” FP135.
. For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”, refer to
“Opening the Trunk Lid (Legacy)” FP135.
To close the trunk lid, lightly press the trunk
lid down until the latch engages.
NOTE
. Do not leave your valuables in the
trunk when you leave your vehicle.
. Under the following conditions, the
trunk can be opened without the access
key fob.
– The trunk lock/unlock setting is
set to on.
– All doors are unlocked.
The trunk lock/unlock setting can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact
your SUBARU dealer to change the
setting.
& To Open the Trunk Lid from
Inside
s02ai02
Press and hold the trunk lid opener button
for more than 1 second.
& Internal Trunk Lid Release
Handle
s02ai04
The internal trunk lid release handle is a
device designed to open the trunk lid from
inside the trunk. In the event children or
adults become locked inside the trunk, the
handle allows them to open the lid. The
handle is located on the inside of the trunk
lid.
To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk,
pull the yellow handle as indicated by the
arrow on the handle. This operation
unlocks the trunk lid. Then, push up the lid.
The handle is made of material that
remains luminescent for approximately
an hour in the dark trunk space after it is
exposed to ambient light even for a short
time.
– CONTINUED –
Trunk Lid (Legacy)
149
2
Keys and Doors
(152,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
WARNING
Never allow any child to get in the
trunk and play with the release
handle. If the driver starts the vehi-
cle without knowing that a child is
inside the trunk and the child opens
the lid using the release handle, the
child could fall out and be killed or
seriously injured.
CAUTION
. Do not close the lid while gripping
the release handle. The handle
may be damaged.
. Do not use the handle as a hook
to fasten straps or ropes to
secure your cargo in the trunk.
Such use may result in damage of
the handle.
. Load the trunk so that cargo
cannot strike the release handle.
If the cargo hits the handle while
the vehicle is being driven, the
handle may be pulled and the
trunk lid may open. That may
cause cargo to fall out of the
trunk, which could create a traffic
safety hazard.
! Inspection
s02ai0401
Perform the following steps at least twice a
year to check the release handle for
correct operation.
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. To lock it, press the latch with the
screwdriver shaft until it clicks.
This places the latch in the locked position.
3. Move the release handle, from outside
the vehicle, in the direction of the arrow to
check if the latch is released.
Trunk Lid (Legacy)
150
(153,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
If the latch is not released, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
In that case, use the key to release the
latch, then close the trunk lid.
Also, if the movement of the release
handle feels restricted or not entirely
smooth during operation, or the handle
and/or handle base is cracked, contact
your SUBARU dealer.
2-10. Rear Gate (Outback)
s02aj
& Manual Rear Gate
s02aj04
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked
using any of the following systems.
. Power door locking switch: Refer to
“Locking and Unlocking from the Inside”
FP139.
. Keyless access with the push-button
start system (if equipped): Refer to “Key-
less Access with Push-Button Start Sys-
tem” FP115.
. Remote keyless entry system: Refer to
“Remote Keyless Entry System” FP133.
To open:
Rear gate opener button
1. Unlock the rear gate.
2. Press and hold the rear gate opener
button. The rear gate will open slightly.
3. Hold the rear gate and lift it up slowly.
NOTE
If the rear gate cannot be opened due to
a discharged vehicle battery, a mal-
function in the door locking/unlocking
system or other causes, you can unlock
it by manually operating the rear gate
lock release lever. For the procedure,
refer to “Rear Gate (Outback) – If the
Rear Gate Cannot Be Opened” FP467.
To close:
Lower the rear gate slowly and push down
firmly until the latch engages.
The rear gate can be lowered easily if you
pull it down holding the convenient grip.
– CONTINUED –
Rear Gate (Outback)
151
2
Keys and Doors
(154,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
WARNING
. To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the rear gate closed
while the engine is running.
. Do not attempt to shut the rear
gate while holding the recessed
grip. Also do not close the rear
gate by pulling the grip from
inside the cargo space. There is
a danger of your hand being
caught and injured.
CAUTION
. Do not jam a plastic bag in or
place cellophane tape on the rear
gate stays or scratch the stays
while loading or unloading cargo.
That could cause leakage of gas
from the stays, which may result
in their inability to hold the rear
gate open.
. Be careful not to hit your head or
face on the rear gate when open-
ing or closing the rear gate and
when loading or unloading cargo.
& Power Rear Gate (If
Equipped)
s02aj01
WARNING
. When operating the power rear
gate, observe the following pre-
cautions. Ignoring the precau-
tions may result in an injury (e.
g., anyone’s body is hit against
the rear gate or is caught in the
rear gate, etc.)
– Make sure there are no people
around the rear gate.
– Never let anyone get close to
the rear gate.
. When closing the rear gate, be
extremely careful to prevent any-
one’s fingers, arms, neck, head
or other objects from being
caught in the rear gate. Other-
wise, serious personal injury may
be caused by entrapment.
. After opening the rear gate on a
slope by using the power rear
gate feature, the rear gate may
close. Make sure that the rear
gate has stopped completely
after opening it.
. When leaving the vehicle, always
carry the key for safety and never
allow an unattended child to
remain in the vehicle. Failure to
follow this procedure could re-
sult in injury to a child operating
the power rear gate.
. The driver should be aware of and
pay careful attention to his/her
responsibilities.
. Use the power rear gate only
when the area around the rear
gate is clearly visible and when
you have checked that there is no
danger of people being caught in
the gate.
CAUTION
. When closing the rear gate after
opening it, make sure to use the
power rear gate. If you close the
rear gate manually with extra
force, the power rear gate may
be damaged.
. Do not install any accessories
other than genuine SUBARU
parts on the rear gate. If the
weight of rear gate increases
excessively, the rear gate stay
cannot support the rear gate
sufficiently when opening the
rear gate. Also, the power rear
Rear Gate (Outback)
152
(155,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
gate may not function properly or
may malfunction.
The power rear gate operates only when
all of the following conditions are satisfied.
. The vehicle is stopped completely.
. The outside temperature is within a
range from −228F to 1408F (from −308C to
608C).
. The ignition switch is in the “OFF” or
“ACC” position. Or, the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position and the select lever is in
the “P” position.
We recommend using the power rear gate
function in most circumstances instead of
manual operation.
NOTE
. The rear gate may not move
smoothly when the battery power be-
comes low.
. Do not press the power rear gate
button repeatedly while the power rear
gate is operating. Otherwise, the sys-
tem may ignore the button operation in
order to avoid being damaged.
. If the vehicle starts to move while the
power rear gate is operating, the sys-
tem sounds a buzzer and closes the
rear gate automatically. At this time, if
the system detects jamming, it will
deactivate the power rear gate and the
rear gate will not be closed. If this
occurs, close the rear gate manually.
For details, refer to “Manual Rear Gate”
FP151.
. If you try to open the rear gate using
the power rear gate function immedi-
ately after closing the rear gate using
the power rear gate function, an elec-
tronic chirp will sound and the rear gate
will not open. Wait for a while before
trying to open the rear gate via the
power rear gate function.
. If either of the operating conditions
has not been satisfied while operating
the power rear gate, an electronic chirp
will sound and the power rear gate will
be deactivated. In this case, the rear
gate may stop opening or closing
suddenly.
! Operation
s02aj0111
NOTE
. The rear gate will remain unlocked
even after closing it. Always lock the
rear gate when leaving the vehicle.
. If you cannot open/close the rear
gate by performing the operation de-
scribed here, a short electronic chirp
will sound three times (beep, beep,
beep). In this case, perform the initiali-
zation of the power rear gate. Refer to
“Initialization of power rear gate”
FP158.
! By the power rear gate button
(other than the buttons on the
rear gate)
s02aj011101
Power rear gate button on the instrument
panel
– CONTINUED –
Rear Gate (Outback)
153
2
Keys and Doors
(156,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Power rear gate button on the access key
fob
To open the rear gate:
Press and hold the power rear gate button
when the rear gate is closed. The rear gate
will open automatically. Then an electronic
chirp and the hazard warning flashers will
operate as follows:
. When operating the power rear gate
button on the instrument panel: sounds
and flashes twice.
. When operating the power rear gate
button on the access key fob: sounds and
flashes four times.
NOTE
. While the rear gate is locked, you
cannot open the rear gate by operating
the power rear gate button on the
instrument panel. In such a case,
unlock the rear gate before operating
the power rear gate button.
. The factory setting (default setting)
of the operation for the “
” button on
the access key fob or the transmitter is
pressing and holding. This setting can
be changed to non-operation or press-
ing twice at SUBARU dealers. For more
details, contact a SUBARU dealer.
To pause the opening rear gate:
Briefly press the power rear gate button
while the rear gate is being opened. Then
an electronic chirp will sound twice and the
hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
If you press the power rear gate button
again, the rear gate will close.
You can open the rear gate by pressing the
power rear gate button briefly while the
rear gate is being closed.
NOTE
The rear gate cannot be paused when it
is in the approximately 2 in (5 cm) range
from the fully closed position. The
system will ignore any button operation
and the rear gate will continue to open.
To close the rear gate:
Press and hold the power rear gate button.
Then an electronic chirp will sound twice
and the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice. If you briefly press the power rear
gate button again, the rear gate will open.
Rear Gate (Outback)
154
(157,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! By the buttons on the rear gate
s02aj011102
NOTE
After performing the following proce-
dures, an electronic chirp will sound
twice and the hazard warning flashers
will flash twice.
Rear gate opener button
Power rear gate button on the inside edge
of the rear gate
1) Power rear gate lock button
2) Power rear gate button
To open the rear gate:
1. For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, carry the ac-
cess key fob. For models without “keyless
access with push-button start system”,
unlock the rear gate.
2. Briefly press the rear gate opener
button when the rear gate is closed.
The rear gate will open automatically.
To pause the opening rear gate:
Briefly press either of the following buttons
while the rear gate is being opened.
. Rear gate opener button
. Power rear gate button on the inside
edge of the rear gate
If you press the power rear gate button
again, the rear gate will close. You can
open the rear gate by pressing the power
rear gate button briefly while the rear gate
is being closed.
NOTE
The rear gate cannot be paused when it
is in the approximately 2 in (5 cm) range
from the fully closed position. The
system will ignore any button operation
and the rear gate will continue to open.
To close the rear gate:
Briefly press either of the following but-
tons.
. Rear gate opener button
– CONTINUED –
Rear Gate (Outback)
155
2
Keys and Doors
(158,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. Power rear gate button on the inside
edge of the rear gate
If you press the power rear gate button
again, the rear gate will open.
To Lock the doors using the power rear
gate lock button:
Carry the access key fob, and press the
power rear gate lock button. All doors, the
rear gate and the fuel filler lid are locked,
and the rear gate will be closed. Also, the
hazard warning flashers will flash once,
and an electronic chirp will sound once.
NOTE
. By pushing the power rear gate lock
button for more than 2 seconds, all
doors are locked, however, the auto
closing function of the rear gate will be
canceled.
. If any of the doors is not fully closed,
the electronic chirp sounds five times
to alert you that the doors are not
properly closed.
! By manual operation
s02aj011103
To open the rear gate:
Lift up the rear gate, when the rear gate is
at the midway position. The rear gate will
open automatically.
To close the rear gate:
Pull down the rear gate when the rear gate
is opened. The rear gate will close auto-
matically.
NOTE
. If the rear gate is moved slowly, it
may not operate automatically open or
close.
. When leaving the vehicle, make sure
that all doors and the rear gate are
completely locked.
! Memory function
s02aj0101
The preferred rear gate height can be
registered.
! Registration of the rear gate
height
s02aj010101
To register the rear gate height, perform
the following procedures.
1. Open the rear gate and stop it at the
preferable height.
1) Power rear gate button
2. Press and hold the power rear gate
button to register the height. An electronic
chirp sounds and the hazard warning
flashes for confirmation.
The rear gate will stop at the registered
position when the memory function is on.
NOTE
. Register the rear gate height to turn
on the “Power Rear Gate Memory”
automatically. For details, refer to “Car
settings” FP220.
. To change the registered height,
perform the registering procedure
again.
. It is possible to register the height
from approximately 2 in (5 cm) or more
Rear Gate (Outback)
156
(159,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
from the completely closed position.
! Deactivation of the memory func-
tion
s02aj010103
Deactivate the memory function to open
the rear gate fully. Perform either of the
following operation to deactivate the mem-
ory function.
– Deactivate the “Power Rear Gate
Memory” function on the center informa-
tion display (CID). Refer to “Car settings”
FP220.
– Register the position of the rear gate at
the fully open position.
! Utilizing the memorized rear gate
height
s02aj010102
To open the rear gate and stop it at the
registered height, perform the following
procedure.
1. Check that “Power Rear Gate Memory”
is on. Refer to “Car settings” FP220.
2. Press and hold any of the power rear
gate button.
NOTE
The rear gate will open to the position
that is stored in the memory function
even if the rear gate is opened by the
reverse function.
! Reverse function
s02aj0102
WARNING
. Do not let parts of your body get
caught when operating the re-
verse function. If the reverse
function does not operate for
some reason, this may lead to
serious injury or accidents.
. The reverse function may not
operate if foreign objects are
caught in the rear gate just before
it closes completely. Be careful
not to catch your fingers and
other body parts.
. The reverse function may not
operate depending on the object
shape and the manner in which it
was caught. Be careful not to
catch your fingers and other
body parts.
CAUTION
. If the reverse function is operated
3 times consecutively, automatic
opening and closing of the power
rear gate function will be can-
celed and the rear gate will stop
opening or closing suddenly.
However, the rear gate may open
or close depending on the rear
gate height when automatic op-
eration is ceased. Be careful that
the rear gate does not hit any-
one’s head or face, etc. and that
fingers and baggage, etc. are not
caught in it.
. Take care not to damage the
touch sensors. Otherwise, the
reverse function may cease to
operate.
If, while opening or closing using power
rear gate, the rear gate catches persons or
baggage or hits an obstacle, an electronic
chirp will sound 3 times and the rear gate
will operate as follows.
When opening the rear gate: The rear
gate will automatically close.
When closing the rear gate: The rear
gate will automatically open.
– CONTINUED –
Rear Gate (Outback)
157
2
Keys and Doors
(160,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1) Touch sensor
Touch sensors are attached on the left and
right edges of the rear gate. If the touch
sensors detect fingers, baggage, etc.
while closing by the power rear gate
function, an electronic chirp will sounds 3
times and the rear gate will open auto-
matically.
NOTE
When the rear gate is opened using the
reverse function, it will be opened fully
or to the height registered in the
memory function.
! Rear gate drop prevention function
s02aj0104
If, while fully opened via the power rear
gate function, the rear gate is lowered by
the weight of snow and such, an electronic
chirp will sound and the rear gate drop
prevention function will apply braking to
the rear gate so that it prevents a rapid
closure of the rear gate.
NOTE
. If there is snow on the rear gate, only
use the power rear gate function after
removing the snow.
. If you close the rear gate manually
just after the rear gate is fully opened
using the power rear gate function, the
rear gate drop prevention function will
detect a rapid closure of the rear gate
and apply braking to the rear gate. In
this case, this is not a malfunction.
! Selecting audible signal operation
s02aj0109
Using an electronic chirp, the power rear
gate will give you an audible signal before
starting its operation. If desired, the audi-
ble signal can be turned off by a SUBARU
dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for
details.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, you can also
turn the audible signal off by operating the
center information display. For details,
refer to “Car settings” FP220.
The ON/OFF setting of the audible signal
also works as the audible signal settings
for the “remote keyless entry system” and
the “keyless access with push-button start
system”. However, for the electronic chirp
such as that caused by “Reverse function”
FP157 or “Rear gate drop prevention
function” FP158, it cannot be set as non-
operational.
! Initialization of power rear gate
s02aj0112
If the power rear gate detects some
abnormality while operating, an electronic
chirp will sound and the power rear gate
operation will be automatically stopped in
either opening or closing position. In this
case, the system needs to be initialized in
the following order to restart the function
properly.
! If the power rear gate is closed
s02aj011201
Rear Gate (Outback)
158
(161,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1. Keep pressing the rear gate opener
button until it is unlocked (for approxi-
mately 5 seconds) and lift up the rear gate.
2. Pull down the rear gate until it starts to
close automatically. The system will be
initialized once the gate is fully closed.
3. Operate the power rear gate and check
that the function operates properly.
! If the power rear gate is opened
s02aj011202
1. Pull down the rear gate until it starts to
close automatically. The system will be
initialized once the gate is fully closed.
If the rear gate will not close completely,
keep pressing the rear gate opener button
for approximately 5 seconds and pull down
the rear gate.
2. Operate the power rear gate and check
that the function operates properly.
CAUTION
If the power rear gate function does
not operate properly, have your
vehicle checked by a SUBARU deal-
er.
! Hands-free Power Rear Gate func-
tion
s02aj0113
The Hands-free Power Rear Gate function
enables the rear gate to be opened
automatically by holding a hand over the
rear emblem.
This function can be deactivated using the
Hands-free Power Rear Gate off switch.
Refer to “Hands-free Power Rear Gate off
switch” FP160.
CAUTION
Do not remove the rear emblem or
decorate it or the area around it.
Doing so could lead to a malfunction
of the Hands-free Power Rear Gate
function.
To open the rear gate via the function,
perform the following steps.
1. When the ignition switch is in the OFF
position, carry the access key fob.
2. Move your hand slowly toward the rear
emblem and hold it there until a electronic
chirp sounds.
3. Immediately after the electronic chirp
sounds, move your hand away.
4. The rear gate will open automatically.
NOTE
. It is possible to open the rear gate by
moving close to the rear emblem.
. The Hands-free Power Rear Gate
function will not operate when the rear
gate has already been opened.
. If any of the following are performed
before automatically opening the
power rear gate, the operation will be
canceled.
– Your hand is not properly held
over the rear emblem for approxi-
– CONTINUED –
Rear Gate (Outback)
159
2
Keys and Doors
(162,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
mately 2 seconds or more.
– Touching the rear emblem
. The rear gate may suddenly open
under the following circumstances if
someone is holding the access key fob
near the vehicle.
– Washing the vehicle by hand and/
or machine.
– There is an object rearward of the
vehicle in a narrow space.
– Attaching a carrier on the back-
side of the vehicle
– Attaching a trailer
– Removing snow
Take the access key fob out of the
operation range or turn off the function
when you do not want to activate the
Hands-free Power Rear Gate function.
Refer to “Hands-free Power Rear Gate
off switch” FP160.
. The Hands-free Power Rear Gate
function may not operate properly in
the following conditions.
– In heavy rain
– The rear gate is very dirty.
– The vehicle is covering by snow.
– Hands and arms may not be
detected because of clothing.
– The system of the vehicle cannot
detect the access key fob.
In those cases, push the rear gate
opener button to open.
! Hands-free Power Rear Gate off
switch
s02aj0114
Hands-free Power Rear Gate off switch
status
1) Inactive
2) Active
Pressing the Hands-free Power Rear Gate
off switch deactivates the Hands-free
Power Rear Gate function.
Rear Gate (Outback)
160
(163,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
2-11. Moonroof (If Equipped)
s02ak
WARNING
Never let anyone’s hands, arms,
head or any objects protrude from
the moonroof. A person could be
seriously injured if the vehicle stops
suddenly or turns sharply or if the
vehicle is involved in an accident.
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, you must
conform to the following instruc-
tions without exception.
. Before closing the moonroof,
make sure that no one’s hands,
arms, head or other objects will
be accidentally caught in the
moonroof.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al-
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety (models
without “keyless access with
push-button start system”) and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure to
follow this procedure could re-
sult in injury to a child operating
the moonroof.
. Never try to check the anti-en-
trapment function by deliberately
placing part of your body in the
moonroof.
CAUTION
. Do not sit on the edge of the open
moonroof.
. Do not operate the moonroof if
falling snow or extremely cold
conditions have caused it to
freeze shut.
. The anti-entrapment function
does not operate when the moon-
roof is being tilted down. Be sure
to confirm that it is safe to do so
before tilting the moonroof down.
. If the moonroof does not close,
have the system checked by a
SUBARU dealer.
The moonroof has both tilting and sliding
functions.
The moonroof operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
& Moonroof Switches
s02ak02
! Tilting moonroof
s02ak0201
The tilting up function will only operate
when the moonroof is fully closed. The
laying down function will only operate
when the moonroof is tilted.
To tilt up the moonroof:
Press and hold the moonroof switch.
To lay down the moonroof:
Slide and hold the moonroof switch for-
ward.
CAUTION
Release the switch after the moon-
roof has been tilted or has been laid
down completely. Pressing the
– CONTINUED –
Moonroof
161
2
Keys and Doors
(164,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
switch continuously may cause da-
mage to the moonroof.
NOTE
One-touch operation does not take
place when the moonroof is lowered.
Press the switch continuously to lower
the moonroof.
! Sliding moonroof
s02ak0202
1) Open
2) Close
To open the moonroof:
When the moonroof switch is slid and held
backward, the moonroof will open, then
stop slightly before the fully open position
to reduce wind noise.
Slide the moonroof switch again to fully
open the moonroof.
To close the moonroof:
When the moonroof switch is slid and held
to the close side, the moonroof will fully
close.
To stop the moonroof halfway, slide the
moonroof switch either way.
After washing the vehicle or after it rains,
wipe away water on the roof prior to
opening the moonroof to prevent drops of
water from falling into the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
For the sake of safety, it is recom-
mended that you avoid driving with the
moonroof fully opened.
! Anti-entrapment function
s02ak0203
When the moonroof senses a substantial
enough object trapped between its glass
and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it
automatically moves to the open side and
stop. The anti-entrapment function may
also be activated by a strong shock on the
moonroof even when there is nothing
trapped.
CAUTION
Never attempt to test this function
using fingers, hands or other parts
of your body.
& Sunshade
s02ak05
The sunshade can be slid forward or
backward by hand while the moonroof is
closed.
If the moonroof is opened, the sunshade
also moves back.
Moonroof
162
(165,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(166,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(167,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
s03
3-1. Ignition Switch (Models without
Push-Button Start System) .......................... 168
Key Positions ..................................................... 168
Key Reminder Chime .......................................... 169
Ignition Switch Light........................................... 169
3-2. Push-Button Ignition Switch (Models with
Push-Button Start System) .......................... 170
Safety Precautions..............................................170
Operating Range for Push-Button Start System...170
Switching Power Status ...................................... 171
When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate
Properly ........................................................... 172
3-3. Hazard Warning Flasher................................. 172
3-4. Meters and Gauges ........................................ 173
Speedometer ...................................................... 173
Tachometer......................................................... 173
Odometer ........................................................... 173
Double Trip Meter ............................................... 174
Fuel Gauge.........................................................174
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge .................... 175
Combination Meter Settings ................................175
3-5. Illumination Brightness Control .................... 175
Auto Dimmer Cancel Function ............................ 176
3-6. Warning and Indicator Lights ........................ 177
Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime ...................... 177
SRS Airbag System Warning Light ...................... 181
Front Passenger’s Frontal Airbag ON and OFF
Indicators ......................................................... 181
CHECK ENGINE Warning Light/Malfunction
Indicator Light .................................................. 182
Charge Warning Light ......................................... 183
Oil Pressure Warning Light ................................ 183
Engine Low Oil Level Warning Indicator ............. 183
AT OIL TEMP Warning Light ............................... 184
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light (U.S.-Spec.
Models)............................................................ 184
ABS Warning Light............................................. 185
Brake System Warning Light .............................. 186
Electronic Parking Brake Indicator Light............. 187
Auto Vehicle Hold ON Indicator Light ................. 188
Auto Vehicle Hold Operation Indicator Light ....... 188
Low Fuel Warning Light ..................................... 189
Door Open Indicator........................................... 189
Engine Hood Open Warning Light ...................... 189
Windshield Washer Fluid Warning Light ............. 189
All-Wheel Drive Warning Light ............................ 189
Power Steering Warning Light ............................ 189
Vehicle Dynamics Control Warning Light/
Vehicle Dynamics Control Operation Indicator
Light ................................................................ 190
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF Indicator Light.... 191
Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator of the
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start
System (If Equipped) ........................................ 191
Security Indicator Light ...................................... 196
SI-DRIVE Indicator Light (If Equipped) ................ 197
Select Lever/Gear Position Indicator................... 197
Turn Signal Indicator Lights ............................... 197
High Beam Indicator Light.................................. 197
High Beam Assist Indicator ................................ 197
Automatic Headlight Beam Leveler Warning
Light ................................................................ 198
LED Headlight Warning Light ............................. 198
Instruments and Controls
3
Instruments and Controls
(168,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Steering Responsive Headlight OFF Indicator
Light ................................................................ 198
Steering Responsive Headlight Warning Light .....198
Headlight Indicator Light..................................... 198
Front Fog Light Indicator Light (If Equipped)....... 198
Auto Start Stop Warning Light (Yellow) ............... 198
Auto Start Stop OFF Indicator Light ....................198
Auto Start Stop Indicator Light (Green) ............... 199
Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected Indicator
Light ................................................................ 199
X-MODE Indicator (Outback) ............................... 199
Hill Descent Control Indicator (Outback) ............. 199
BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator (If Equipped).......... 199
BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator (If Equipped)................ 199
Icy Road Surface Warning Indicator .................... 200
RAB Warning Indicator (If Equipped)................... 200
RAB OFF Indicator (If Equipped) .........................200
Driver Monitoring System Operation Indicator
Light (Green) (If Equipped)................................200
Driver Monitoring System Warning Light
(Yellow) (If Equipped)........................................ 200
Driver Monitoring System OFF Indicator Light
(If Equipped)..................................................... 200
Driver Monitoring System Temporary Stop
Indicator Light (If Equipped).............................. 200
Sonar Audible Alarm OFF Indicator
(If Equipped)..................................................... 201
3-7. Combination Meter Display (Color LCD) ...... 201
Basic Operation.................................................. 202
Welcome Screen (Opening Animation) and
Good-Bye (Ending Animation) Screen ............... 202
Warning Screen .................................................. 203
Meter Information Screen ................................... 203
Telltale Screen ................................................... 204
Basic Screens.................................................... 205
Digital Speed Screen .......................................... 208
3-8. Center Information Display (CID) ...................209
Features ............................................................ 209
Welcome Screen ................................................ 209
Good-Bye Screen ............................................... 210
Interruption Screen ............................................ 210
Touch Screen Operations ................................... 210
11.6-Inch Display Models (If Equipped) ............... 211
Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models (If Equipped) ......... 232
3-9. Clock ................................................................245
Setting the Clock Manually ................................. 245
Setting the Clock Automatically.......................... 246
3-10. Light Control Switch .....................................248
Headlights ......................................................... 248
High/Low Beam Change (Dimmer) ...................... 250
Headlight Flasher ............................................... 250
High Beam Assist Function ................................ 251
Daytime Running Light System .......................... 254
3-11. Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) .........254
3-12. Headlight Beam Leveler................................255
3-13. Front Fog Light Switch (If Equipped) ..........256
3-14. Turn Signal Lever ..........................................256
One-Touch Lane Changer................................... 257
3-15. Wiper and Washer .........................................257
Windshield Wiper and Washer Switches ............. 258
Rear Window Wiper and Washer Switch
(Outback) ......................................................... 260
Instruments and Controls
(169,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
3-16. Defogger and Deicer..................................... 261
3-17. Mirrors ........................................................... 263
Inside Mirror (without Auto-Dimming Function)
(If Equipped)..................................................... 263
Auto-Dimming Mirror/Compass with HomeLink
®
(If Equipped)..................................................... 263
Outside Mirrors .................................................. 271
3-18. Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel .....................274
3-19. Heated Steering Wheel System
(If Equipped) ..................................................275
3-20. Horn................................................................276
Instruments and Controls
3
Instruments and Controls
(170,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
3-1. Ignition Switch (Models
without Push-Button Start
System)
s03aa
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
“LOCK” while the vehicle is being
driven or towed because that will
lock the steering wheel, prevent-
ing steering control. And when
the engine is turned off, it takes a
much greater effort than usual to
steer.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al-
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure to
follow this procedure could re-
sult in injury to a child or others.
Children could operate the power
windows, the moonroof or other
controls or even make the vehicle
move.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it banged
against your knees or hands while
you are driving, it could turn the
ignition switch from the “ON” posi-
tion to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-
tion, thereby stopping the engine.
Also, if the key is attached to a
keyholder or to a large bunch of
other keys, centrifugal force may act
on it as the vehicle moves, resulting
in unwanted turning of the ignition
switch.
The ignition switch has four positions:
LOCK, ACC, ON and START.
NOTE
. Keep the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position when the engine is
not running.
. Using electrical accessories for a
long time with the ignition switch in the
“ON” or “ACC” position can cause the
battery to go dead.
. If the ignition switch will not move
from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”
position, turn the steering wheel
slightly to the left and right as you turn
the ignition switch.
& Key Positions
s03aa11
Position Description
LOCK
The key can only be inserted
or removed in this position.
The ignition switch will lock
the steering wheel when you
remove the key.
ACC
In this position the electrical
accessories (audio, acces-
sory power outlet, etc.) can be
used.
ON
This is the normal operating
position after starting the en-
gine.
START
The engine is started in this
position.
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position while the engine
is running.
Ignition Switch (Models without Push-Button Start System)
168
(171,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
NOTE
. To turn the key from the “ACC” to
“LOCK” position, the select lever must
be in the “P” position and the key must
be pushed in and turned.
. If your registered key fails to start
the engine, pull out the key once (the
security indicator light will blink), and
then insert the key again and turn it to
the “START” position again to restart
the engine.
. The engine may not start in the
following cases:
– The key grip is touching another
key or a metallic key holder.
– The key is near another key that
contains an immobilizer transpon-
der.
– The key is near or touching
another transmitter.
& Key Reminder Chime
s03aa05
The reminder chime sounds when the
driver’s door is opened and the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.
The chime stops under the following
conditions.
. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
. The key is removed from the ignition
switch.
. The driver’s door is closed.
& Ignition Switch Light
s03aa06
For easy access to the ignition switch in
the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-
nates when driver’s door is opened or
when the driver’s door is unlocked using
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The light remains illuminated for approxi-
mately 30 seconds and gradually turns off
under the following conditions.
. The driver’s door is closed.
. The doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
– CONTINUED –
Ignition Switch (Models without Push-Button Start System)
169
3
Instruments and Controls
(172,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
The light gradually turns off under the
following conditions.
. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
. The doors are locked using the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
3-2. Push-Button Ignition
Switch (Models with Push-
Button Start System)
s03bg
& Safety Precautions
s03bg04
Refer to “Safety Precautions” FP116.
& Operating Range for Push-
Button Start System
s03bg01
Legacy
1) Antennas
2) Operating range
Outback
1) Antennas
2) Operating range
NOTE
. If the access key fob is not detected
within the operating range of the anten-
nas inside the vehicle, the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start
cannot be operated.
. Even when the access key fob is
outside the vehicle, if it is placed too
close to the glass, it may be possible to
switch the power or to start the engine.
. Do not leave the access key fob in
the following places. It may become
impossible to operate the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start.
– On the instrument panel
Push-Button Ignition Switch (Models with Push-Button Start System)
170
(173,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
– On the floor
– Inside the glove box
– Inside the door trim pocket
– On the rear seat
– On the rear shelf (Legacy)
– Inside the trunk (Legacy)
– At the corner of the cargo area
(Outback)
. When operating the push-button
ignition switch or starting the engine,
if the access key fob battery is dis-
charged, perform the procedure de-
scribed in “Access Key Fob – If Access
Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly”
FP465. In such a case, replace the
battery immediately. Refer to “Repla-
cing Battery of Access Key Fob”
FP526.
& Switching Power Status
s03bg02
1) Operation indicator
2) Push-button ignition switch
The power status is switched every time
the push-button ignition switch is pressed.
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the
driver’s seat.
2. Make sure the select lever is in the “P”
position.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
without depressing the brake pedal. Every
time the button is pressed, the power is
switched in the sequence of “OFF”, “ACC”,
“ON” and “OFF”. When the engine is
stopped and the push-button ignition
switch is in “ACC” or “ON”, the operation
indicator on the push-button ignition switch
illuminates in orange.
Power
status
Indicator color Operation
OFF Turned off
Power is turned
off.
ACC Orange
The following
systems can be
used:
audio and ac-
cessory power
outlet.
ON
Orange
(while engine is
stopped)
All electrical
systems can be
used.
Turned off
(while engine is
running)
CAUTION
. To prevent the vehicle battery
from discharging, do not leave
the push-button ignition switch
in the “ON” or “ACC” position for
a long time.
. To avoid a malfunction, observe
the following precautions.
– Do not spill drinks or other
liquids on the push-button
ignition switch.
– CONTINUED –
Push-Button Ignition Switch (Models with Push-Button Start System)
171
3
Instruments and Controls
(174,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
– Do not touch the push-button
ignition switch with a hand
that is soiled with oil or other
contaminants.
. If the push-button ignition switch
does not operate smoothly, stop
the operation. Contact a SUBARU
dealer immediately.
. If the operation indicator on the
push-button ignition switch does
not illuminate even when the
instrument panel illumination is
turned on, have the vehicle in-
spected at a SUBARU dealer.
. If the vehicle was left in the hot
sun for a long time, the surface of
the push-button ignition switch
may get hot. Be careful not to
burn yourself.
NOTE
. When operating the push-button
ignition switch, firmly press it all the
way.
. If the push-button ignition switch is
pressed quickly, the power may not
turn on or off.
. If the indicator light on the push-
button ignition switch flashes in green
when the push-button ignition switch is
pressed, steering is locked. When this
occurs, press the push-button ignition
switch while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
! Battery drainage prevention func-
tion
s03bg0201
When the push-button ignition switch is left
in the “ACC” or “ON” position for approxi-
mately 1 hour, the push-button ignition
switch will be automatically switched to
“OFF” to prevent the battery from going
dead. This function is activated when the
select lever is in the “P” position.
& When Access Key Fob Does
Not Operate Properly
s03bg03
Refer to “Access Key Fob – If Access Key
Fob Does Not Operate Properly” FP465.
3-3. Hazard Warning Flasher
s03ab
The hazard warning flasher is used to warn
other drivers when you have to park your
vehicle under emergency conditions. The
hazard warning flasher works with the
ignition switch in any position.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher,
press the hazard warning flasher switch on
the instrument panel. All the turn signal
lights and the turn signal indicator lights
will flash. To turn off the flasher, press the
switch again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
Hazard Warning Flasher
172
(175,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
3-4. Meters and Gauges
s03ad
NOTE
Liquid crystal displays are used in
some of the meters and gauges in the
combination meter. You will find their
indications hard to see if you wear
polarized glasses.
& Speedometer
s03ad03
The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed.
NOTE
The initial movement of the meter
needles and gauge needles that occurs
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position can be activated or
deactivated.
For details, refer to “General settings”
FP216 (11.6-inch display models) or
“General settings” FP234 (dual 7.0-
inch display models).
& Tachometer
s03ad06
The tachometer shows the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red
zone. In this range, fuel injection will
be cut by the engine control module
to protect the engine from overrev-
ving. The engine will resume run-
ning normally after the engine speed
is reduced below the red zone.
NOTE
The initial movement of the meter
needles and gauge needles that occurs
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position can be activated or
deactivated.
For details, refer to “General settings”
FP216 (11.6-inch display models) or
“General settings” FP234 (dual 7.0-
inch display models).
& Odometer
s03ad04
1) TRIP RESET switch
2) Odometer
This meter displays the odometer when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The odometer shows the total distance
that the vehicle has been driven.
NOTE
If you press the TRIP RESET switch
when the ignition switch is in the
“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the
odometer/trip meter will light up. The
indicators will turn off when the TRIP
RESET switch is not operated for
approximately 10 seconds.
– CONTINUED –
Meters and Gauges
173
3
Instruments and Controls
(176,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Double Trip Meter
s03ad05
1) TRIP RESET switch
2) Trip meter
This meter displays the two trip meters
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
The trip meter shows the distance that the
vehicle has been driven since you last set
it to zero.
The display can be switched as shown in
the following sequence by pressing the
TRIP RESET switch.
To reset the trip meter, select either the A
trip or B trip meter, then press and hold the
TRIP RESET switch.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
result.
NOTE
. If the connection between the com-
bination meter and battery is broken for
any reason such as vehicle mainte-
nance or fuse replacement, the data
recorded on the trip meter will be lost.
. If you press the TRIP RESET switch
when the ignition switch is in the
“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the
odometer/trip meter will light up. It is
possible to switch between the A trip
meter and B trip meter indications while
the odometer/trip meter is lit up.
In addition, it is possible to reset the trip
meter by pressing and holding the TRIP
RESET switch.
The indicators will turn off when the
TRIP RESET switch is not operated for
approximately 10 seconds.
& Fuel Gauge
s03ad07
The fuel gauge shows the approximate
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/
“OFF” or “ACC” position, the fuel gauge
shows “E” even if the fuel tank contains
fuel.
The gauge may move slightly due to fuel
level movement in the tank (e.g., during
braking, turning or acceleration).
NOTE
. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
lid is located on the right side of the
vehicle.
. If you press the TRIP RESET switch
while the ignition switch is in the
Meters and Gauges
174
(177,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the
fuel gauge will light up and indicate the
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
The gauge will turn off when the TRIP
RESET switch is not operated for
approximately 10 seconds.
& Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
s03ad08
1) Normal operating range
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The coolant temperature will vary in
accordance with the outside temperature
and driving conditions.
We recommend that you drive moderately
until the pointer of the temperature gauge
reaches near the middle of the range.
Engine operation is optimum with the
engine coolant at this temperature range
and high revving operation when the
engine is not warmed up enough should
be avoided.
CAUTION
If the pointer exceeds the normal
operating range, safely stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
Refer to “Engine Overheating”
FP460.
& Combination Meter Settings
s03ad16
Meter settings can be set on the center
information display. For details, perform
the procedures described in “General
settings” FP216 (11.6-inch display mod-
els) or “General settings” FP234 (dual
7.0-inch display models).
3-5. Illumination Brightness
Control
s03aj
The illumination brightness of the combi-
nation meter and center information dis-
play dims under the following conditions.
. The light switch is in the “
” or “ ”
position when the ambient light is dark.
. The light switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the headlights illuminate
automatically.
You can adjust the illumination brightness
for better visibility.
To brighten, turn the control dial upward.
To darken, turn the control dial downward.
– CONTINUED –
Illumination Brightness Control
175
3
Instruments and Controls
(178,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
NOTE
. When the control dial is turned fully
upward, the illumination brightness
becomes the maximum and the auto-
matic dimming function does not work
at all.
. The brightness setting is not can-
celed even when the ignition switch is
turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
. The operation method of illumina-
tion brightness will differ depending
whether or not “Brightness Dial” in the
center information display is on. Refer
to the operation method indicated the
following table.
“Brightness Dial” is on.
Operational
item
Combi-
nation
meter
Center
informa-
tion dis-
play
Control dial Available Available
“Brightness”*
1
on the center
information
display
Not avail-
able
Not avail-
able
“Brightness Dial” is off.
Operational
item
Combi-
nation
meter
Center
informa-
tion dis-
play
Control dial Available
Not avail-
able
“Brightness”
on the center
information
display
Not avail-
able
Available
*1: When “Brightness Dial” is on,
“Brightness” on the center infor-
mation display is not available.
For details about “Brightness Dial” on/
off settings, refer to “General settings”
FP216 (11.6-inch display models) or
“General settings” FP234 (dual 7.0-
inch display models).
& Auto Dimmer Cancel Func-
tion
s03aj01
When the ambient light is bright, the
illumination brightness is set to the max-
imum regardless of the position of the
control dial. In this case, you cannot adjust
the illumination brightness by using the
control dial. When the ambient light is dark,
you can dim the illumination brightness as
described above.
The operational/non-operational setting
and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel
function can be changed by your SUBARU
dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for
details.
Illumination Brightness Control
176
(179,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
3-6. Warning and Indicator
Lights
s03ae
Several of the warning and indicator lights
illuminate momentarily and then go out
when the ignition switch is initially turned to
the “ON” position. This permits checking
the operation of the bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition switch to the “ON” position. For
the system check, the following lights
illuminate and turn off after several sec-
onds or after the engine has started:
: Seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt
warning light turns off only when the
driver fastens the seatbelt.)/Front pas-
senger’s seatbelt warning light (The
seatbelt warning light turns off only
when the front seat passenger fastens
the seatbelt.)
: Rear seatbelt warning light
: SRS airbag system warning light
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator light
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator light
/ : CHECK ENGINE warning light/
Malfunction indicator light
: Charge warning light
: Oil pressure warning light
/ : ABS warning light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator
light
/ : Brake system warning light
: Electronic parking brake indicator
light
: Power steering warning light
: Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-
spec. models)
: Low fuel warning light
: Automatic headlight beam leveler
warning light
: Auto Start Stop warning light (yellow)
If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a
burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
for repair.
& Seatbelt Warning Light
and Chime
s03ae01
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
warning device at the driver’s and passen-
ger’s seats, as required by current safety
standards.
! Driver’s and front passenger’s seats
s03ae0114
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, this device reminds the driver and
front passenger to fasten their seatbelts by
illuminating the warning lights in the loca-
tions indicated in the following illustration
and sounding a chime.
Driver’s seat
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
177
3
Instruments and Controls
(180,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Front passenger’s seat (dual 7.0-inch dis-
play models)
Front passenger’s seat (11.6-inch display
models)
! Operation
s03ae011401
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the driver’s and/or front
passenger’s warning light will illuminate,
then it will blink for several seconds. If the
seatbelt of the driver’s seat is not fastened,
the warning chime may make a peep
sound.
NOTE
. If the driver’s and/or front passen-
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is not fastened
while driving, the seatbelt warning
system operates as follows according
to the vehicle speed.
– The warning light will illuminate
when driving approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) or less.
– The warning light will blink, and
the warning chime will make a peep
sound when driving between ap-
proximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and
13 mph (20 km/h). The warning
chime will stop when the vehicle
stops.
– The warning light will blink, and
the warning chime will sound loudly
when 15 seconds have elapsed
while driving between approxi-
mately 6 mph (10 km/h) and 13
mph (20 km/h).
– The warning light will blink, and
the warning chime will sound loudly
when driving approximately more
than 13 mph (20 km/h).
. The warning light will turn off and the
warning chime will stop when the
seatbelt is fastened.
. The seatbelt warning system can be
cancelled. However, when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position
after it is turned to the “OFF” position,
the warning system settings will be
restored. For details about the warning
cancellation, contact a SUBARU dealer.
If there is no passenger on the front
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
system for the front passenger’s seat will
be deactivated. The front passenger’s
seatbelt warning system monitors whether
or not there is a passenger on the front
passenger’s seat.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the
device from functioning correctly or
cause the device to fail.
. Do not install any accessory such
as a table or TV onto the seat-
back.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
Warning and Indicator Lights
178
(181,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. Do not allow the rear seat occu-
pant to place his/her hands or
legs on the front passenger’s
seatback, or allow him/her to pull
the seatback.
. Do not use front seats with their
backward-forward position and
seatback not being locked into
place securely. If any of them are
not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure,
refer to “Front Seats” FP28.
If the seatbelt warning system for the front
passenger’s seat does not function cor-
rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the
front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
deactivated even when the front passen-
ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take
the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than a child restraint system and
its child occupant, although we strongly
recommend that all children sit in the rear
seat properly restrained.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth.
If still the seatbelt warning system for front
passenger’s seat does not function cor-
rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-
tions described above, immediately con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion.
! Rear passenger’s seats
s03ae0115
Rear seatbelt warning light (dual 7.0-inch
display models)
1) Rear left seat
2) Rear center seat
3) Rear right seat
Rear seatbelt warning light (11.6-inch dis-
play models)
1) Rear left seat
2) Rear center seat
3) Rear right seat
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, the seatbelt warning light and
chime reminds the rear passenger to
fasten their seatbelt by illuminating the
warning lights in the locations indicated in
the above illustration and sounding a
chime.
WARNING
. The driver must check that the all
passengers have fastened their
seatbelts properly since the seat-
belt warning system may not
detect passengers under the fol-
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
179
3
Instruments and Controls
(182,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
lowing circumstances.
– When cushions or child re-
straint systems, etc., are used.
– When a child or small adult is
sitting in the seat.
. Observe the following precau-
tions
– Do not apply any strong im-
pact to the rear seat.
– Do not fold the seatback for-
ward when objects are on the
seat.
– Do not spill liquid on the rear
seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it
off immediately.
– Do not remove or disassemble
the rear seat.
NOTE
. The seatbelt warning system of the
rear seat detects if the seat is occupied
by a passenger. Heavy cargo or large
pets on the rear seat may result in the
activation of the passenger seatbelt
warning light and chime. Fastening
the rear seatbelt prior to loading cargo
or large pets will avoid activating the
passenger seatbelt warning light and
chime.
. When folding the rear seat, ensure
that the seat is empty prior to folding.
Items caught between the seat bottom
and seatback, when folded, may da-
mage the seat surface or activate the
passenger seatbelt warning light and
chime.
! Operation
s03ae011501
If passengers in the rear seats do not
fasten their seatbelts while the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
seatbelt warning lights will illuminate or
blink to indicate that their seatbelts are not
fastened.
NOTE
. If the rear passenger’s seatbelt(s)
are/is still not fastened while driving,
the seatbelt warning system operates
as follows according to the vehicle
speed.
– The warning light will illuminate
when driving approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) or less.
– When driving approximately be-
tween 6 mph (10 km/h) and 12.5 mph
(20 km/h), if the seatbelts are not
fastened for 50 seconds, the seat-
belt warning lights will blink and a
warning chime will sound.
The chime will make a peep sound
for 15 seconds, and it then will
become louder and continue for 35
seconds. The warning light will
blink for 50 seconds, then it will
illuminate steadily and the chime
will stop.
– When driving more than approxi-
mately 12.5 mph (20 km/h), if seat-
belts are not fastened for 35 sec-
onds, the warning lights of the
unfastened seatbelts will blink and
a chime will sound loudly. If the rear
seatbelts are not fastened after 35
seconds, the blinking warning light
will illuminate steadily and the
chime will stop. The warning lights
will continue to illuminate until their
seatbelts are fastened.
. The warning light will turn off and the
warning chime will stop when the
seatbelt is fastened.
. The seatbelt warning light can be
cancelled. However, when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position
after it is turned to the “OFF” position,
the warning system settings will be
restored. For details about the warning
cancellation, contact a SUBARU dealer.
Warning and Indicator Lights
180
(183,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& SRS Airbag System
Warning Light
s03ae02
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
Immediately take your vehicle to
your nearest SUBARU dealer to
have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbags will operate improperly (e.g.
SRS airbags may inflate in a very
minor collision or not inflate in a
severe collision), which may in-
crease the risk of injury.
For details about the components mon-
itored by the warning light, refer to “SRS
Airbag System Monitors” FP107.
& Front Passenger’s Frontal
Airbag ON and OFF Indica-
tors
s03ae03
NOTE
For details about the operating condi-
tions of SRS seat cushion airbag, refer
to “SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag
System, SRS Seat Cushion Airbag, SRS
Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag”
FP86.
Dual 7.0-inch display models
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
181
3
Instruments and Controls
(184,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
11.6-inch display models
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON in-
dicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicators show you the status of
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
The indicators are located as shown in the
illustration.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
which time the system is checked. Follow-
ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
indicators illuminates depending on the
status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-
vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
indicator will remain off.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator will remain off while
the OFF indicator will illuminate.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, if both the ON and OFF indicators
remain illuminated or off simultaneously
even after the system check period, the
system is malfunctioning. Contact your
SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-
spection.
& CHECK ENGINE
Warning Light/Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light
s03ae04
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light illumi-
nates while you are driving, have
your vehicle checked/repaired by
your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible. Continued vehicle opera-
tion without having the emission
control system checked and re-
paired as necessary could cause
serious damage, which may not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate
that there is at least one problem or
potential problem somewhere in the emis-
sion control system.
! If the light illuminates constantly
s03ae0401
If the light illuminates constantly while
driving or does not turn off after the engine
starts, an emission control system mal-
function has been detected.
You should have your vehicle checked by
an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
NOTE
This light also illuminates when the fuel
filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light coming on
could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.
Remove the cap and retighten it until it
clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with
the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap
will not make the CHECK ENGINE warn-
ing light/malfunction indicator light turn off
immediately. It may take several driving
Warning and Indicator Lights
182
(185,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
trips. If the light does not turn off, take your
vehicle to your authorized SUBARU dealer
immediately.
! If the light is blinking
s03ae0402
If the light is blinking while driving, an
engine misfire condition has been de-
tected which may damage the emission
control system.
To prevent serious damage to the emis-
sion control system, you should conform to
the following instructions.
. Reduce vehicle speed.
. Avoid hard acceleration.
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-
ble.
. Stop towing a trailer as soon as
possible (Outback).
The CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-
function indicator light may stop blinking
and illuminate steadily after several driving
trips. You should have your vehicle
checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer
immediately.
& Charge Warning Light
s03ae05
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the charging
system is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the alternator belt. If the belt is
loose, broken or if the belt is in good
condition but the light remains illuminated,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
immediately.
& Oil Pressure Warning
Light
s03ae06
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
oil pressure warning light on. This
may cause serious engine damage.
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the engine oil
pressure is low and the lubricating system
is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
immediately.
For details about checking the engine oil
level or adding the engine oil, refer to
“Engine Oil” FP491.
& Engine Low Oil Level
Warning Indicator
s03ae58
This indicator appears when the engine oil
level decreases to the lower limit.
If the warning indicator appears, check the
engine oil level on a level surface. When
the engine oil level is not within the normal
range, refill with engine oil. Refer to
“Engine Oil” FP491. After adding or
changing the engine oil, warm up the
engine and stop it on a level surface, then
start the engine after a lapse of 1 minute or
more. Confirm that the warning indicator
has turned off after the engine has started.
If the warning indicator does not turn off
after refilling the engine oil, or the indicator
appears even though the engine oil level is
within the normal range, have the vehicle
checked by a SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
. The oil level will be detected by the
system just after turning the ignition
switch to the “OFF” position. If the oil
level is below the lower limit when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, the engine low oil level warn-
ing indicator will turn on.
. When the vehicle is parked on a
steep slope, the engine low oil level
warning indicator may not illuminate
even if the oil level is below the lower
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
183
3
Instruments and Controls
(186,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
limit to avoid erroneous lighting.
& AT OIL TEMP Warning
Light
s03ae07
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the transmis-
sion fluid temperature is too hot.
If the light illuminates while driving, im-
mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and let the engine idle until the warning
light turns off.
! Transmission control system warn-
ing
s03ae0701
If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes
after the engine has started, it may indicate
that the transmission control system is not
working properly. Contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer for service immediately.
& Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light (U.S.-
Spec. Models)
s03ae08
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-
ing light will illuminate for approximately 2
seconds to check that the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning
properly. If there is no problem and all tires
are properly inflated, the light will go out.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists. When the mal-
function indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low
tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-
tions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Should the warning light illuminate steadily
after blinking for approximately one min-
ute, have the system inspected by your
nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
Warning and Indicator Lights
184
(187,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
WARNING
If this light does not illuminate
briefly after the ignition switch is
turned ON or the light illuminates
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute, you should have
your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead, per-
form the following procedure. Other-
wise an accident involving serious
vehicle damage and serious perso-
nal injury could occur.
1) Keep driving straight ahead while
gradually reducing speed.
2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the Low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
to have the system inspected.
CAUTION
The tire pressure monitoring system
is NOT a substitute for manually
checking tire pressure. The tire
pressure should be checked peri-
odically (at least monthly) using a
tire gauge. After any change to tire
pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-
itoring system will not re-check tire
inflation pressures until the vehicle
is first driven more than 20 mph (32
km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-
sures, increase the vehicle speed to
at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the
TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-
tion pressures. If the tire pressures
are now above the severe low pres-
sure threshold, the low tire pressure
warning light should turn off a few
minutes later. Therefore, be sure to
install the specified size for the front
and rear tires.
& ABS Warning Light
s03ae09
CAUTION
. If any of the following conditions
occur, we recommend that you
have the ABS repaired at the first
available opportunity by your
SUBARU dealer.
– The warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
– The warning light illuminates
when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position,
but it does not turn off even
after starting the vehicle.
– The warning light illuminates
during driving.
. When the warning light is on (and
brake system warning light is
off), the ABS function shuts
down; however, the conventional
brake system continues to oper-
ate normally.
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
185
3
Instruments and Controls
(188,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
The ABS warning light illuminates together
with the brake system warning light if the
EBD system malfunctions. For further
details of the EBD system malfunction
warning, refer to “Brake System Warning
Light” FP186.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following conditions,
the ABS may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light remains illumi-
nated after the engine has been started,
but it turns off while driving.
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery
voltage such as when the engine is jump
started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage
and does not indicate a malfunction. When
the battery becomes fully charged, the
light will turn off.
& Brake System Warn-
ing Light
s03ae10
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
may not be working properly. If
the light remains illuminated,
have the brakes inspected by a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether the
brakes are operating properly, do
not drive the vehicle. Have your
vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
. If the brake system warning light
illuminates, the electronic park-
ing brake system may be mal-
functioning. Immediately stop
your vehicle in a safe location,
use tire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving
and contact your SUBARU deal-
er. For details, refer to “Electro-
nic Parking Brake” FP366.
NOTE
. Even if the brake system warning
light illuminates, if the warning light
behavior is as described in the follow-
ing examples, the electronic parking
brake system is not malfunctioning.
– The warning light turns off when
the electronic parking brake is ap-
plied or released.
– The warning light turns off when
the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position again.
. The brake system warning light may
illuminate immediately after the engine
is started. However, it is not malfunc-
tioning if the warning light turns off
after the electronic parking brake is
released.
. The brake system warning light may
illuminate after the electronic parking
brake is frequently applied and re-
leased. However, the electronic parking
brake system is not malfunctioning if
the light turns off after a short period of
time.
. When the engine is started while the
electronic parking brake is applied/
released, the system may judge an
abnormal situation and the warning
light may illuminate. If the warning light
illuminates, turn the ignition switch
once to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position
and then restart the engine. Then,
apply/release the electronic parking
brake. If the warning light turns off,
Warning and Indicator Lights
186
(189,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
the system will be restored.
This light has the following functions.
! Brake fluid level warning
s03ae1002
This light illuminates when the brake fluid
level has dropped to near the “MIN” level of
the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
switch in the “ON” position and with the
parking brake fully released.
If the brake system warning light should
illuminate while driving (with the parking
brake fully released and with the ignition
switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an
indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn
brake pads. If this occurs, immediately
stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place
and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid
level is below the “MIN” mark in the
reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have
the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU
dealer for repair.
! Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) system warning
s03ae1003
If the warning light remains on even though
the parking brake is released, the brake
fluid level may be low or there could be a
problem with the EBD system. Park the
vehicle in a safe place immediately and
contact a SUBARU dealer.
! Electronic parking brake system
warning
s03ae1004
The brake system warning light illuminates
when the electronic parking brake system
is malfunctioning. If the warning light
illuminates, promptly park in a safe loca-
tion as soon as possible and contact your
SUBARU dealer.
The brake system warning light remains
illuminated when the parking brake cannot
be released even if the parking brake
switch is pushed. For details, refer to
“Electronic Parking Brake” FP366.
! Frequent operation warning
s03ae100403
The brake system warning light illuminates
and a chirp sound will be heard if the
parking brake switch is operated too
frequently. In this case, the operation of
the parking brake switch is restricted to
protect the electronic parking brake sys-
tem.
& Electronic Parking
Brake Indicator Light
s03ae85
! Parking brake indicator
s03ae8501
The light illuminates with the parking brake
applied while the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position. It turns off when
the parking brake is fully released.
! Electronic parking brake system
warning
s03ae8502
WARNING
. When you release the electronic
parking brake while the engine is
running, the electronic parking
brake indicator light will turn off.
However, if the light still illumi-
nates, stop the vehicle in a safe
location immediately and have
the system inspected by a
SUBARU dealer.
. If at all in doubt about whether the
brakes are operating properly, do
not drive the vehicle. Have your
vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
. If the electronic parking brake
indicator light flashes, the elec-
tronic parking brake system may
be malfunctioning. Immediately
stop your vehicle in a safe loca-
tion, use tire stops under the tires
to prevent the vehicle from mov-
ing and contact your SUBARU
dealer. For details, refer to “Elec-
tronic Parking Brake” FP366.
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
187
3
Instruments and Controls
(190,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
NOTE
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the
electronic parking brake applied, the
electronic parking brake indicator light
remains illuminated for approximately
30 seconds and then turns off.
. When the electronic parking brake
switch is pulled to apply the electronic
parking brake while the ignition switch
is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the
electronic parking brake indicator light
illuminates, remains illuminated for
approximately 30 seconds and then
turns off.
. Even if the electronic parking brake
indicator light flashes, if the warning
light behavior is as described in the
following examples, the electronic
parking brake system is not malfunc-
tioning.
– The indicator light turns off when
the electronic parking brake is re-
leased.
. The electronic parking brake indica-
tor light may flash immediately after the
engine is started. However, it is not
malfunctioning if the indicator light
turns off after the electronic parking
brake is released.
. The electronic parking brake indica-
tor light may flash after the electronic
parking brake is frequently applied and
released. However, the electronic park-
ing brake system is not malfunctioning
if the light turns off after a short period
of time.
The electronic parking brake indicator light
flashes when the electronic parking brake
system is malfunctioning. If the indicator
light flashes, promptly park in a safe
location as soon as possible and contact
your SUBARU dealer.
The electronic parking brake indicator light
remains illuminated when the parking
brake cannot be released even if the
parking brake switch is pushed. For de-
tails, refer to “Electronic Parking Brake”
FP366.
! Parking brake apply inhibit warn-
ing
s03ae850201
The electronic parking brake indicator light
flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound
will be heard if the parking brake switch is
operated when the parking brake cannot
be applied.
! Frequent operation warning
s03ae850202
The electronic parking brake indicator light
flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound
will be heard if the parking brake switch is
operated too frequently. In this case, the
operation of the parking brake switch is
restricted to protect the electronic parking
brake system.
NOTE
Wait until the indicator light turns off.
& Auto Vehicle Hold ON
Indicator Light
s03ae94
CAUTION
If the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator
light does not illuminate even when
“Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)” is
touched to activate the Auto Vehicle
Hold function, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunction-
ing.
This indicator light illuminates when the
Auto Vehicle Hold is activated. For details,
refer to “Auto Vehicle Hold function”
FP368.
& Auto Vehicle Hold Op-
eration Indicator Light
s03ae95
This indicator light illuminates while the
vehicle is stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold
function. For details, refer to “Auto Vehicle
Hold function” FP368.
Warning and Indicator Lights
188
(191,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Low Fuel Warning Light
s03ae11
The low fuel warning light illuminates when
the tank is nearly empty approximately 2.6
US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp gal). It only
operates when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
CAUTION
Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
ever the low fuel warning light
illuminates. Engine misfires as a
result of an empty tank could cause
damage to the engine.
& Door Open Indicator
s03ae61
When any of the doors, the rear gate
(Outback) or the trunk lid (Legacy) is not
fully closed, the door open indicator
appears. This function is effective even if
the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF”
or “ACC” position or the key is removed
from the ignition switch (models without
“keyless access with push-button start
system”).
The open door is indicated by the corre-
sponding part of the door open indicator.
Always make sure this indicator does not
appear before you start to drive.
& Engine Hood Open
Warning Light
s03ae98
The warning light illuminates if the engine
hood is not fully closed. This function is
effective even if the ignition switch is in the
“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, or the
key is removed from the ignition switch
(models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”).
Always make sure this light is not illumi-
nated before you start to drive.
& Windshield Washer
Fluid Warning Light
s03ae42
This light appears when the fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid tank de-
creases to the lower limit (approximately
0.6 US qt, 0.6 liter, 0.5 Imp qt).
& All-Wheel Drive Warn-
ing Light
s03ae13
WARNING
Continued driving with the AWD
warning light flashing can lead to
powertrain damage. If the AWD
warning light flashes, promptly park
in a safe location and then check
whether all four tires are the same
diameter and whether any of the
tires has a puncture or has lost air
pressure for some other reason.
NOTE
If the temporary spare tire is used, the
AWD warning light may flash. Use of the
temporary spare tire should therefore
be restricted to the minimum time
necessary. Replace the temporary
spare tire with a conventional tire as
soon as possible.
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven
with tires of different diameters fitted on its
wheels or with the air pressure excessively
low in any of its tires.
& Power Steering Warn-
ing Light
s03ae53
While the engine is running, this warning
light illuminates when a malfunction has
been detected in the electric power steer-
ing system.
CAUTION
When the power steering warning
light is illuminated, there may be
more resistance when the steering
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
189
3
Instruments and Controls
(192,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and
have the vehicle inspected immedi-
ately.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following ways, the power steering
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent the
system components, such as the con-
trol computer and drive motor, from
overheating.
. The steering wheel is operated fre-
quently and turned sharply while the
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
speeds, such as while frequently turn-
ing the steering wheel during parallel
parking.
. The steering wheel remains in the
fully turned position for a long period of
time.
At this time, there will be more resis-
tance when steering. However this is
not a malfunction. Normal steering
force will be restored after the steering
wheel is not operated for a while and
the power steering control system has
an opportunity to cool down. However,
if the power steering is operated in a
non-standard way which causes power
assist limitation to occur too frequently,
that may result in a malfunction of the
power steering control system.
& Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol Warning Light/Vehi-
cle Dynamics Control
Operation Indicator
Light
s03ae14
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light
s03ae1401
CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem provides its ABS control
through the electrical circuit of the
ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is
inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system becomes unable to
provide ABS control. As a result, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
becomes inoperative, causing the
warning light to illuminate. Although
both the Vehicle Dynamics Control
and ABS are inoperative in this case,
the ordinary functions of the brake
system are still available. You will be
safe while driving in this condition,
but drive carefully and have your
vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
NOTE
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system itself mal-
functions, the warning light only illumi-
nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System) remains fully opera-
tional.
. The warning light illuminates when
the electronic control system of the
ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
malfunctions.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably inoperative under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
. The warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
. The warning light illuminates while the
vehicle is running.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following examples,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
Warning and Indicator Lights
190
(193,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
immediately and remains off.
. The warning light illuminates after
the engine has started and turns off
while the vehicle is subsequently being
driven.
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but turns off immediately and
remains off.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light
s03ae1402
The indicator light flashes during activation
of the skid suppression function and during
activation of the traction control function.
NOTE
. The light may remain illuminated for
a short period of time after the engine
has been started, especially in cold
weather. This does not indicate the
existence of a problem. The light
should turn off as soon as the engine
has warmed up.
. The indicator light illuminates when
the engine has developed a problem
and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light is on.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under the follow-
ing condition. Have your vehicle checked
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The light does not turn off even after the
lapse of several minutes (the engine has
warmed up) after the engine has started.
& Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol OFF Indicator Light
s03ae15
The light illuminates when “Vehicle Dy-
namics Control” is selected to deactivate
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
. The light does not illuminate while the
system check.
. The light does not turn off even after a
period of approximately 2 seconds after
the ignition switch has been turned to the
“ON” position.
& Warning Chimes and Warning
Indicator of the Keyless Ac-
cess with Push-Button Start
System (If Equipped)
s03ae55
Access key warning indicator
The keyless access with push-button start
system is equipped with a warning chime
and the access key warning indicator in
order to minimize improper operations and
help protect your vehicle from theft.
When the warning chime sounds and/or
the warning indicator appears, take the
appropriate action.
You cannot turn the warning chimes off.
However, the volume setting of the outside
warning chime can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
191
3
Instruments and Controls
(194,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
dealer for details.
WARNING
Never drive the vehicle if the indica-
tor on the push-button ignition
switch is flashing in green when
starting the engine. This indicates
the status that the steering wheel is
not released and could result in an
accident involving serious injury or
death.
CAUTION
. When starting the engine again
after the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch
flashes in green, if the operation
indicator is still flashing in green,
there could be a steering lock
malfunction. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
. When the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch
flashes in orange, contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
NOTE
. Even when the access key fob is
within the operating ranges inside the
vehicle, the access key warning for
engine start may be provided depend-
ing on the status of the access key fob
and the environmental conditions.
. When the access key fob is taken out
of the vehicle through an open window,
the access key takeout warning or
passenger access key takeout warning
will not be provided.
! List of warnings
s03ae5504
CAUTION
When any of the following warnings
occurs even if the access key warn-
ing indicator does not appear, take
the appropriate action.
Warning and Indicator Lights
192
(195,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Operation indica-
tor on push-button
ignition switch
Status Action
Ding, ding ...
(intermittent)
— —
The driver’s door is opened while the push-
button ignition switch is “ACC” and the select
lever is in the “P” position.
Switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF”, or close the driver’s door.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure to switch
the push-button ignition switch to “OFF”.
The push-button ignition switch is switched
to “OFF” while the driver’s door is open.
Close the driver’s door.
Ding
Short beep
(2 seconds)
—
Lockout warning:
The doors are locked by following methods
when an access key fob is left in the car.
. The door is closed when the lock lever of
the door is in the lock position.
. The door is closed when the power door
locking switch is in the lock position.
Take out the access key fob from the vehicle,
and lock the doors.
The doors cannot be locked while the access
key fob is inside the vehicle.
A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors will
be unlocked.
—
Short beep
(2 seconds)
—
Access key lock-in warning:
The door lock sensor is touched while the
push-button ignition switch is “OFF” and the
access key fob is inside the vehicle.
Take out the access key fob from the vehicle,
and lock the doors.
If the access key fob is inside the vehicle, the
doors cannot be locked.
—
Beep, beep,
beep, beep,
beep (5 times)
—
Door ajar warning:
The door lock sensor is touched while the
ignition switch is in the “OFF” position and
one of the doors including the rear gate is
opened.
Close the doors securely and lock them.
If one of the doors including the rear gate is
opened, the doors cannot be locked.
Ding
Long beep (60
seconds max.)
—
Power warning:
The door lock sensor is touched while you
are carrying the access key fob, the push-
button ignition switch is in a position other
than “OFF” and the select lever is in the “P”
position.
Return the access key fob inside the vehicle,
or switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF”.
If the push-button ignition switch is not
switched to “OFF”, the doors cannot be
locked.
Ding, ding ...
(7 seconds)
— —
Access key warning:
The vehicle is driven while the access key fob
is not inside the vehicle.
Carry the access key fob, and drive the
vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
193
3
Instruments and Controls
(196,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Operation indica-
tor on push-button
ignition switch
Status Action
Ding — —
Access key warning for engine start:
The push-button ignition switch is pressed
while the access key fob is not inside the
vehicle.
Carry the access key fob, and press the
push-button ignition switch.
Ding
Beep, beep,
beep (3 times)
—
Access key takeout warning:
The driver exits the vehicle with the access
key fob and closes the driver’s door while the
push-button ignition switch is in a position
other than “OFF” and the select lever is in the
“P” position.
Switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF”, and get out of the vehicle.
Ding
Beep, beep,
beep (3 times)
—
Passenger access key takeout warning:
A fellow passenger exits the vehicle with the
access key fob and closes a door other than
the driver’s door while the push-button
ignition switch is in a position other than
“OFF”.
Return the access key fob to inside the
vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition
switch to “OFF”.
Long beep
(continuous)
Long beep
(continuous)
—
Access key takeout without “P” position
warning:
The driver exits the vehicle with the access
key fob and closes the driver’s door while the
push-button ignition switch is in a position
other than “OFF” and the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” position.
Shift the select lever to the “P” position,
switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF” and exit the vehicle.
Long beep
(continuous)
— —
Select lever position warning:
. Case 1: The engine is turned off by
pressing the push-button ignition switch
while the select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
. Case 2: The driver’s door is opened
while the push-button ignition switch is in
a position other than “OFF” and the
select lever is in a position other than the
“P” position.
. Case 1: Start the engine, shift the select
lever to the “P” position, switch the push-
button ignition switch to “OFF” and exit
the vehicle.
. Case 2: Shift the select lever to the “P”
position, switch the push-button ignition
switch to “OFF” and exit the vehicle.
Warning and Indicator Lights
194
(197,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Operation indica-
tor on push-button
ignition switch
Status Action
Ding — — The battery of the access key fob is low. Replace the battery of the access key fob.
Ding —
Flashes in green
(15 seconds max.)
Steering lock warning:
The engine start procedure is performed, but
the steering is still locked.
While turning the steering wheel right and left
lightly, depress the brake pedal and press the
push-button ignition switch.
Ding — Flashes in orange
System malfunction warning:
A malfunction is detected in the power
system or steering lock.
Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately and
have the vehicle inspected.
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
195
3
Instruments and Controls
(198,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Security Indicator Light
s03ae16
This indicator light shows the status of the
alarm system. It also indicates operation of
the immobilizer system.
! Alarm system
s03ae1601
It blinks to show the driver the operational
status of the alarm system. For detailed
information, refer to “Alarm System”
FP141.
! Immobilizer system
s03ae1602
The security indicator light starts blinking
in the following conditions.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
. Immediately after the push-button igni-
tion switch is turned to the “OFF” position.
. Immediately after the driver’s door is
opened or closed when all of the following
conditions are met.
– The push-button ignition switch is in
the “ON” or “ACC” position.
– The engine is not running.
In the event that an unauthorized key is
used (for example, the key is unregistered
or the ID code does not match), the power
is not switched to “ON” and the security
indicator light continues blinking.
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
. Approximately 60 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned from the “ON”
position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
. Immediately after the key is pulled out.
If the indicator light does not blink in the
above conditions, it may indicate that
immobilizer system may be malfunction-
ing. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
immediately.
In the event that an unauthorized key (for
example, an unauthorized duplicate) is
used, the security indicator light illumi-
nates. For details about the immobilizer
system, refer to “Immobilizer” FP131.
NOTE
. The security indicator light remains
off in the following conditions. It means
that the matching of the ID code is
completed and the immobilizer system
is deactivated, and it does not indicate
a malfunction.
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
– While the engine is running
– The push-button ignition switch
has been turned to the “ON” or
“ACC” position and the driver’s
door has not been opened or closed
Models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
– While the engine is running
– For approximately 60 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned
from the “ON” position to the “ACC”
or “LOCK” position
– When the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position
. Even if a malfunction occurs, such
as the security indicator light flashes
irregularly, it will not affect the func-
tionality of the immobilizer system.
Warning and Indicator Lights
196
(199,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& SI-DRIVE Indicator Light (If
Equipped)
s03ae52
SI-DRIVE indicator light
1) Intelligent (I) mode
2) Sport Sharp (S#) mode
This light indicates the current SI-DRIVE
mode.
For details of SI-DRIVE mode, refer to
“SI-DRIVE” FP353.
& Select Lever/Gear Position
Indicator
s03ae43
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Select lever/gear position indicator
The select lever position is displayed on
the indicator.
! Upshift/downshift indicator
s03ae4305
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator (which shows the
current gear selection) and the available
upshift/downshift indicator light up. Refer
to “Selection of Manual Mode” FP351.
& Turn Signal Indicator
Lights
s03ae20
These lights show the operation of the turn
signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Refer to “Replacing Bulbs” FP518.
& High Beam Indicator
Light
s03ae21
This light shows that the headlights are in
the high beam mode.
This indicator light also illuminates when
operating the headlight flasher.
& High Beam Assist Indi-
cator
s03ae83
This indicator appears when the high
beam assist function is activated. For
details about the high beam assist func-
tion, refer to “High Beam Assist Function”
FP251.
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
197
3
Instruments and Controls
(200,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Automatic Headlight
Beam Leveler Warning
Light
s03ae33
This light illuminates when the automatic
headlight beam leveler does not operate
normally.
If this light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off approximately 3 seconds after
turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
position, have your vehicle inspected at
your SUBARU dealer.
& LED Headlight Warning
Light
s03ae76
This light illuminates if the LED headlights
malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
& Steering Responsive
Headlight OFF Indicator
Light
s03ae89
This light illuminates when the Steering
Responsive Headlight function is off. For
details about the on/off setting, refer to
“Car settings” FP220.
& Steering Responsive
Headlight Warning
Light
s03aeb2
The light flashes when a malfunction
occurs in the Steering Responsive Head-
light. Refer to “Steering Responsive Head-
light (SRH)” FP254.
& Headlight Indicator
Light
s03ae24
This indicator light illuminates under the
following conditions.
. The light switch is turned to the “
” or
“
” position.
. The light switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the headlights illuminate
automatically.
& Front Fog Light Indica-
tor Light (If Equipped)
s03ae25
This indicator light illuminates while the
front fog lights are illuminated.
& Auto Start Stop Warn-
ing Light (Yellow)
s03ae65
CAUTION
If the Auto Start Stop warning light is
illuminated in yellow, there may be a
malfunction in the Auto Start Stop
system. When starting the engine
again after the Auto Start Stop
warning light illuminates, if it is still
illuminating, have your vehicle in-
spected at a SUBARU dealer as soon
as possible.
The Auto Start Stop warning light will
illuminate in yellow if you open the engine
hood when the engine has been tempora-
rily stopped by the Auto Start Stop system.
In this case, to ensure safety, the engine
will not be automatically restarted, even if
you release the brake pedal. Use normal
operation to restart the engine.
& Auto Start Stop OFF
Indicator Light
s03aeb3
This light will illuminate when “Auto Start
Stop” is touched to prevent the Auto Start
Stop system from operating. It will turn off
when “Auto Start Stop” is touched once
more to enable operation of the Auto Start
Stop system. For details about the setting,
refer to “Car settings” FP220 (11.6-inch
display models) or “Setting of the upper
display” FP234 (dual 7.0-inch display
models).
Warning and Indicator Lights
198
(201,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
CAUTION
If the Auto Start Stop OFF indicator
light does not illuminate when “Auto
Start Stop” is touched, contact a
SUBARU dealer for an inspection as
soon as possible.
& Auto Start Stop Indica-
tor Light (Green)
s03ae66
This indicator light illuminates when the
engine has been temporarily stopped by
the Auto Start Stop system. It will turn off
when the engine is restarted.
& Auto Start Stop No
Activity Detected Indi-
cator Light
s03aea3
When a vehicle is stopped, the indicator
light illuminates when the operating con-
dition of idling stop are not meet. The light
will turn off when the vehicle starts driving.
Refer to “Non-operational conditions”
FP373.
& X-MODE Indicator (Outback)
s03ae68
X-MODE indicator (models with 1 mode)
1) X-MODE indicator
X-MODE indicator (models with 2 modes)
1) DEEP SNOW/MUD mode indicator
2) SNOW/DIRT mode indicator
This indicator appears while the X-MODE
is activated. It will disappear when the
X-MODE is deactivated. Refer to “To
Activate/Deactivate the X-MODE” FP361.
& Hill Descent Control
Indicator (Outback)
s03ae69
This indicator appears while the hill des-
cent control function is in standby. It will
flash while the hill descent control function
is operating. It will disappear when the hill
descent control function is not available.
& BSD/RCTA Warning In-
dicator (If Equipped)
s03ae80
This warning indicator appears on the
combination meter display (color LCD)
when the BSD (Blind Spot Detection) or
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) is not
functioning for any reason. For further
details, refer to “BSD/RCTA Warning In-
dicator” FP390. If this indicator remains
displayed, have your vehicle inspected by
your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
& BSD/RCTA OFF Indica-
tor (If Equipped)
s03ae86
This indicator appears on the combination
meter display (color LCD) when “BSD/
RCTA” is touched to deactivate the BSD
(Blind Spot Detection) and RCTA (Rear
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
199
3
Instruments and Controls
(202,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Cross Traffic Alert), or when the BSD/
RCTA is suspended temporarily. For de-
tails, refer to “BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator”
FP389.
& Icy Road Surface
Warning Indicator
s03ae82
When the outside temperature is 378F
(38C) or less, the icy road surface warning
indicator will illuminate to inform the driver
that the road surface may be frozen.
NOTE
. The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature in the area
around the sensor. However, the tem-
perature may not be indicated correctly
or the update may be delayed in the
following conditions.
– While parking or driving at low
speeds
– When the outside temperature
changes suddenly (example: when
going in and out of an underground
parking area or when passing
through a tunnel)
– When starting the engine after
being parked for a certain period of
time
. The icy road surface warning indi-
cator should be treated only as a guide.
Be sure to check the condition of the
road surface before driving.
. Once the icy road surface warning
indicator appears, it will not disappear
unless the outside temperature has
increased to 418F (58C) or higher.
& RAB Warning Indi-
cator (If Equipped)
s03ae91
This indicator illuminates if the Reverse
Automatic Braking (RAB) system malfunc-
tions. Refer to “Reverse Automatic Brak-
ing (RAB) System” FP393.
& RAB OFF Indicator (If
Equipped)
s03ae92
This indicator illuminates when the Re-
verse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is
turned OFF, or when the Reverse Auto-
matic Braking (RAB) system is suspended
temporarily. Refer to “Reverse Automatic
Braking (RAB) System” FP393.
& Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem Operation Indicator
Light (Green) (If
Equipped)
s03aea4
This indicator illuminates when the Driver
Monitoring System is activated. Refer to
“Driver Monitoring System operation in-
dicator light (green)” FP412.
& Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem Warning Light (Yel-
low) (If Equipped)
s03aeb6
This warning light illuminates if the Driver
Monitoring System malfunctions. Have
your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to
“Driver Monitoring System operation in-
dicator light (green)” FP412.
& Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem OFF Indicator Light
(If Equipped)
s03aea5
This indicator illuminates when “Driver
Monitoring System” is touched to deacti-
vate the Driver Monitoring System. Refer
to “Driver Monitoring System OFF indica-
tor light” FP412.
& Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem Temporary Stop In-
dicator Light (If
Equipped)
s03aea6
This indicator illuminates when the Driver
Monitoring System is temporarily stopped.
Refer to “Driver Monitoring System tem-
porary stop indicator light” FP412.
Warning and Indicator Lights
200
(203,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
NOTE
The Driver Monitoring System stops
temporarily in the following circum-
stances.
. The temperature of the Driver Mon-
itoring System unit is high.
& Sonar Audible Alarm
OFF Indicator (If
Equipped)
s03ae93
This indicator illuminates when the sonar
audible alarm is turned OFF. For the
setting procedure, refer to “Car settings”
FP220.
3-7. Combination Meter Dis-
play (Color LCD)
s03bn
WARNING
Always pay adequate attention to
safe driving when operating the
combination meter display (color
LCD) while the vehicle is in motion.
When operation of the combination
meter display (color LCD) interferes
with your ability to concentrate on
driving, stop the vehicle before
performing operations on the
screen. Also, do not concentrate on
the display while driving. Doing so
may cause you to look away from the
road and could result in an accident.
Various information will be shown on the
combination meter display (color LCD).
Also, a warning message will appear on
the display if a malfunction is detected. In
addition, several settings for the displayed
content can be performed.
Combination meter display (color LCD)
1) Meter information screen (Refer to “Me-
ter Information Screen” FP203.)
2) Warning screen (Refer to “Warning
Screen” FP203.)/Basic screen (Refer to
“Basic Screens” FP205.)
3) EyeSight screen*
– CONTINUED –
Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)
201
3
Instruments and Controls
(204,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
4) Digital speed screen (Refer to “Digital
Speed Screen” FP208.)
5) Telltale screen (Refer to “Telltale Screen”
FP204.)
6) Select lever/gear position indicator (Re-
fer to “Select Lever/Gear Position Indi-
cator” FP197.)
7) X-MODE indicator (Outback) (Refer to
“X-MODE Indicator (Outback)” FP199.)
SI-DRIVE indicator (if equipped) (Refer
to “SI-DRIVE Indicator Light” FP197.)
8) Odometer (Refer to “Odometer”
FP173.)/Double trip meter (Refer to
“Double Trip Meter” FP174.)
*: For details, refer to the separate EyeSight
Owner’s Manual.
& Basic Operation
s03bn01
Control switches
1)
2)
3)
By operating or of the control
switches, the screens can be changed.
If there are some useful messages, such
as vehicle information, warning informa-
tion, etc., they will interrupt the current
screen, and appear on the display accom-
panied by a beep. If such a screen is
displayed, take proper action according to
the message shown on the screen.
The warning screen will return to the
original screen after a few seconds. While
the
information reminder is shown on
the display, it may be possible to display
the warning screen again. To recall the
message marked with
on the display,
pull the
switch on the steering wheel
toward you.
& Welcome Screen (Opening
Animation) and Good-Bye
(Ending Animation) Screen
s03bn08
Welcome screen and Good-bye screen
are motion graphic displayed on the
combination meter display and center
information display upon entering and
exiting the vehicle.
When the driver’s door is opened and
closed after unlocking the door, the wel-
come screen (opening animation) will
appear on the combination meter display
(color LCD) for approximately 20 seconds.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the combination
meter display (color LCD) gradually turns
off by showing good-bye screen (ending
animation).
NOTE
. The welcome screen and the good-
bye screen may differ in the actual
words and appearance.
. The basic screen will be shown
when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position while the welcome
screen is displayed.
Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)
202
(205,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. Once the welcome screen appears, it
takes a certain period of time to display
it again.
. If the ignition switch is operated
after unlocking the driver’s door, the
welcome screen will not appear even
when the driver’s door is opened and
closed.
. The welcome screen will disappear
when you lock the driver’s door by
using the remote keyless entry system
(all models) or the keyless access
function (if equipped) while the wel-
come screen is displayed.
. The welcome screen including the
audio/navigation unit can be set to on
or off.
. The welcome screen can be set to on
or off. For details, refer to “General
settings” FP216 (11.6-inch display
models) or “General settings” FP234
(dual 7.0-inch display models).
. The good-bye screen can be set to
on or off. For details, refer to “General
settings” FP216 (11.6-inch display
models) or “General settings” FP234
(dual 7.0-inch display models).
& Warning Screen
s03bn05
Example of warning
If there is a warning message or a
maintenance notification, it will appear on
combination meter display (color LCD).
Take the appropriate actions based on the
messages indicated.
& Meter Information Screen
s03bn12
The meter information screen can be
changed. For details, refer to “General
settings” FP216 (11.6-inch display mod-
els) or “General settings” FP234 (dual
7.0-inch display models).
! ECO gauge
s03bn1201
The ECO gauge shows the difference
between the average rate of fuel con-
sumption since the trip meter was last
reset and the current rate of fuel consump-
tion.
The ECO gauge indicates the current fuel
efficiency as shown in the following chart.
Displayed unit
Needle position
“+” side “−” side
MPG Better Poorer
l/100km Poorer
Better
– CONTINUED –
Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)
203
3
Instruments and Controls
(206,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
NOTE
. The ECO gauge shows only an
approximate indication.
. After resetting the trip meter, the
average rate of fuel consumption is not
shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km). Until
that time, the ECO gauge does not
operate.
! Clock and temperature
s03bn1202
This screen displays the clock and outside
temperature.
For details about clock setting, refer to
“Clock” FP245.
! Compass (if equipped)
s03bn1203
The direction of the vehicle is displayed.
! Driving range on remaining fuel
s03bn1204
NOTE
The driving range on the remaining fuel
is only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
the remaining fuel, so you must im-
mediately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
& Telltale Screen
s03bn09
1) Telltale screen
When the corresponding situation occurs,
the following telltales will be displayed on
the telltale screen.
NOTE
. When there is warning information
to display, it will be displayed in five
warning indicators, starting on the left
Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)
204
(207,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
in ascending order of severity.
. If there are 6 or more warning
messages to display, the indicators will
be displayed in sequential order.
Mark Name Page
Door open indicator
light
189
Engine hood open
warning light
189
LED headlight warning
light
198
High beam assist indi-
cator light
197
Steering Responsive
Headlight OFF indicator
light
198
Steering Responsive
Headlight warning light
198
Engine low oil level
warning lndicator
183
RAB warning light (if
equipped)
200
RAB OFF indicator (if
equipped)
200
BSD/RCTA warning in-
dicator (if equipped)
199
Mark Name Page
BSD/RCTA OFF indi-
cator (if equipped)
199
Auto Start Stop warning
light (yellow)
198
Auto Start Stop OFF
indicator light
198
Auto Start Stop indica-
tor light (green)
199
Auto Start Stop No Ac-
tivity Detected indicator
light
199
Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning
light
198
Windshield washer fluid
warning light
189
Hill descent control in-
dicator light (Outback)
199
Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem operation indicator
light (green) (if
equipped)
200
Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem warning light (yel-
low) (if equipped)
200
Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem OFF indicator light
(if equipped)
200
Mark Name Page
Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem temporary stop in-
dicator light (if
equipped)
200
Icy road surface warn-
ing light
200
& Basic Screens
s03bn06
By operating the or switch on the
steering wheel, you can change the screen
that is always displayed.
Average fuel consumption screen:
AVG: Average fuel consumption
: Driving range on remaining fuel
This screen displays the average rate of
fuel consumption since the trip meter was
last reset.
– CONTINUED –
Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)
205
3
Instruments and Controls
(208,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
NOTE
The driving range on the remaining fuel
is only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
the remaining fuel, so you must im-
mediately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
Current fuel consumption screen:
: Current fuel consumption
: Driving range on remaining fuel
NOTE
The driving range on the remaining fuel
is only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
the remaining fuel, so you must im-
mediately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
Driving information screen:
: Journey time
: Journey distance
This screen displays the journey time (the
time that has elapsed since the ignition
switch was turned to the “ON” position)
and journey distance (the distance that
has been driven since the ignition switch
was turned to the “ON” position).
Auto Start Stop screen:
: The total amount of time that the engine
was stopped by means of the Auto Start
Stop system
: The total amount of fuel saved due to the
engine being stopped by the Auto Start
Stop system
The indicated values are calculated from
the most recent reset of the currently
displayed trip meter to the current time.
The indication ranges are as follows.
.
Total amount of time: from 00’00@ to
9999h59’59@
. Total amount of fuel saved: from 0 gal to
9999.999 gal
NOTE
. When the trip meter is reset, the
corresponding accumulated time and
the amount of fuel saving are also reset.
Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)
206
(209,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. The time spent with the engine
stopped by means of the Auto Start
Stop system is also added to the
journey time.
TPMS screen (U.S.-spec. models):
This screen displays each tire pressure.
When a tire is deflated, the deflated tire
and the tire pressure will be displayed on
the screen in yellow.
NOTE
. The tire pressure values are dis-
played several minutes after driving.
. You can set the tire pressure units.
For details about setting the units, refer
to “General settings” FP216 (11.6-inch
display models) or “General settings”
FP234 (dual 7.0-inch display models).
. Once the tire pressure monitoring
system detects the low tire pressure,
the tire pressure values will display in
yellow until the system detects the
normal tire pressure.
. Immediately adjust the tire pressure
when the warning light illuminates.
When the tire pressure monitoring
system detects the adjusted tire pres-
sure, the warning light will turn off and
the tire pressure values will turn to
white.
. For information about the specified
value of the air pressure, refer to
“Tires” FP536.
Compass screen (if equipped):
The direction of the vehicle is displayed.
Navigation screen (if equipped):
When the route guidance is set in the
navigation system, this item shows the
navigation route information. For details
about the navigation system, refer to the
separate navigation/audio Owner’s Man-
ual.
– CONTINUED –
Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)
207
3
Instruments and Controls
(210,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Audio screen:
The audio screen shows the status of
audio information. For details about the
audio system, refer to the separate navi-
gation/audio Owner’s Manual.
Clock and outside temperature screen:
This screen displays the clock and outside
temperature.
For details about clock setting, refer to
“Clock” FP245.
& Digital Speed Screen
s03bn11
1) Speed limit indicator (if equipped)
2) Vehicle speed
This screen displays the current vehicle
speed.
Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)
208
(211,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
3-8. Center Information Dis-
play (CID)
s03bs
WARNING
Always pay attention to safe driving
when operating the center informa-
tion display while the vehicle is in
motion. When operation of the cen-
ter information display is disturbing
your awareness and ability to con-
centrate on driving, stop the vehicle
in a safe place before performing
operations on the display. Also, do
not concentrate on the display while
driving. Doing so could result in an
accident.
& Features
s03bs01
All information is displayed on the center
information display, including vehicle set-
tings, vehicle status, navigation system (if
equipped) operation, audio operation, and
air conditioning operation.
Items
Page for
11.6-inch
display
models
Page for
dual 7.0-
inch display
models
Interruption
screen
210
Vehicle status and
maintenance in-
formation
211 239
Vehicle settings 216 234/237
Climate control
operations
216 234
Front View Moni-
tor (if equipped)/
Rear view camera
347/379
Navigation system
Refer to the navigation/
audio Owner’s Manual.
Audio/telephone
Refer to the navigation/
audio Owner’s Manual.
EyeSight
Refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for
the EyeSight system.
The center information display can also be
used to set and initialize the center
information display itself.
NOTE
. When the vehicle is in motion,
certain functions and selections may
not be available.
. The language and units for both the
center information display and the
combination meter display (color LCD)
can be changed. For details, refer to
“Car settings” FP220 (11.6-inch dis-
play models) or “Setting of the upper
display” FP234 (dual 7.0-inch display
models).
. The images displayed in this Own-
er’s Manual are sample images. The
actual image may vary depending on
the region and vehicle specifications.
& Welcome Screen
s03bs02
Welcome screen and Good-bye screen
are motion graphic displayed on the
combination meter display and center
information display upon entering and
exiting the vehicle.
When the driver’s door is opened and
closed, the welcome screen will appear for
a short time.
NOTE
. The welcome screen will disappear
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position while the welcome
screen is shown.
. The welcome screen can be turned
on or off. For details, refer to “General
settings” FP216 (11.6-inch display
models) or “General settings” FP234
(dual 7.0-inch display models).
. For a certain period of time after the
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
209
3
Instruments and Controls
(212,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
welcome screen has once appeared, it
may not appear again even when the
driver’s door is opened and closed.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
& Good-Bye Screen
s03bs08
The good-bye screen will be displayed
under the following conditions.
. The driver’s door is opened after the
ignition switch is put in the “OFF” position.
. 3 minutes have passed after the ignition
switch is put in the “OFF” position with the
driver’s door closed.
. 10 minutes have passed when the
hands-free phone is used after the ignition
switch is put in the “OFF” position.
. The battery voltage is low when the
ignition switch is put in the “OFF” position.
& Interruption Screen
s03bs03
Useful messages, such as reminders,
weather information (if equipped) and
traffic information (if equipped) may inter-
rupt the current screen and appear on the
display accompanied by a beep. Take the
proper action according to the message.
& Touch Screen Operations
s03bs04
The center information display has a touch
screen. Operations are performed by
touching the touch screen directly.
! Touch
s03bs0401
Quickly touch and release once.
! Drag
s03bs0402
Touch the screen and move the screen to
the desired position.
! Swipe
s03bs0403
Quickly move the screen by swiping with
Center Information Display (CID)
210
(213,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
your finger.
NOTE
Swipe operations may not be per-
formed smoothly in high altitudes.
& 11.6-Inch Display Models (If
Equipped)
s03bs05
NOTE
For dual 7.0-inch display models, refer
to “Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models”
FP232.
! Touch screen
s03bs0501
1) HOME icon (Refer to “HOME icon”
FP216.)
2) Status bar (Refer to “Status bar” FP211.)
3) Information bar (Refer to “Information
bar” FP212.)
4) Main screen (Refer to “Main screen”
FP216.)
5) Driver profiles icon (Refer to “Driver
profiles icon” FP216.)
6) Climate control screen (Refer to “Climate
control screen” FP216.)
7) Car settings icon (Refer to “Car settings
icon” FP214.)
8) Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon (Refer to
“Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon” FP214.)
While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position, the touch panel will activate.
! Status bar
s03bs050101
The outside temperature and clock are
displayed on the status bar.
NOTE
. The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature around the
sensor. However, the temperature may
not be indicated correctly or the update
may be delayed in the following condi-
tions.
– While parking or driving at low
speeds
– When the outside temperature
changes suddenly (example: when
going in and out of an underground
parking area or when passing
through a tunnel)
– When starting the engine after
being parked for a certain period of
time
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
211
3
Instruments and Controls
(214,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. The temperature unit cannot be
changed.
. The clock can be displayed in either
12-hour display or 24-hour display. For
details, refer to “Clock” FP245.
. Touch the clock on the status bar to
display the clock setting screen. Refer
to “Clock” FP245.
. For details about Bluetooth device
information, refer to the navigation/
audio Owner’s Manual.
! Information bar
s03bs050102
Swipe the information bar or touch or
on the information bar to switch the item
displayed.
Audio screen:
The screen of the currently selected audio
source is displayed.
For details about how to use the audio set,
refer to the separate navigation/audio
Owner’s Manual.
Navigation screen (models with naviga-
tion system):
The directions to the destination are
displayed on the screen.
NOTE
When a destination is not set in the
navigation system, the compass orien-
tation, street name and speed limit
remain displayed on the screen.
Favorite screen:
Favorite screen
This screen displays up to three optional
pieces of information that can be selected
from the following items.
Item Details
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil temperature
Average vehicle speed
Accelerator opening ratio
Vehicle posture
Center Information Display (CID)
212
(215,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Item Details
Direction of the vehicle*
1
Weather information for the
next three hours*
2
Weather information for the
next six hours*
2
Posted speed limit of the
road you are currently driv-
ing on*
1
Calendar
Driver Monitoring System*
1
information and the average
fuel consumption of driver
Nothing is displayed.
*1: If equipped
*2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio
NOTE
Some items may not be shown depend-
ing on the model and specifications.
The items shown on the favorite screen
can be changed. For details, refer to
“Favorite Widgets” FP226.
Weather information screen (if
equipped):
NOTE
. When all of the following conditions
are satisfied, weather information is
displayed.
– The vehicle is equipped with an
audio and navigation system for
SiriusXM satellite radio.
– The SiriusXM satellite radio sub-
scription is active.
. The weather forecast for the set
destination remains displayed until a
new destination is set or until the
destination is reached.
. Depending on the reception timing
of XM, the weather information may be
delayed.
X-MODE screen (Outback):
Models with 1 mode
Models with 2 modes
The X-MODE information is displayed on
the screen.
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
213
3
Instruments and Controls
(216,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Also, X-MODE can be switched to a
different mode on the screen.
! Main screen
s03bs050103
For details about the following menu, refer
to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s
Manual.
. Radio
. Media
. Phone
. Map
. Apps
. My Subaru
. SUBARU STARLINK
. Add to Shortcuts
! Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon
s03bs050108
1) Auto Start Stop indicator (green)
Touching “ ” deactivates the Auto Start
Stop system and turns off the Auto Start
Stop indicator (green) on the screen.
Touching “
” again activates the Auto
Start Stop system and turns on the Auto
Start Stop indicator (green).
! Car settings icon
s03bs050104
Touch to display the items that are
changeable while driving.
Center Information Display (CID)
214
(217,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Item
Available settings
Page reference for
the vehicle system
operation
Page reference for
the setting procedure
1st menu 2nd menu
Vehicle Control
Vehicle Dynamics
Control
ON/OFF 359 225
X-MODE*
1
Models with 1 mode: ON/OFF
Models with 2 modes: Normal, Deep Snow/Mud, Snow/
Dirt
361 225
Auto Vehicle Hold
(AVH)
ON/OFF 368 225
Steering Responsive
Headlights (SRH)
ON/OFF 254 225
Cruise Control Accel-
eration Characteris-
tics
Lv.1 (Eco)/Lv.2 (Comfort)/Lv.3 (Standard)/Lv.4 (Dy-
namic)
Refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement
for the EyeSight sys-
tem.
—
Auto Start Stop ON/OFF 375 225
Driving Assistance
Pre-Collision Braking Setting ON/Setting OFF Refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement
for the EyeSight sys-
tem.
—
Lane Departure Pre-
vention Function
All Functions/Lane Departure Prevention Function
Only/Warning Buzzer Only/OFF
BSD/RCTA*
1
ON/OFF 389 225
Others
Warning Volume Min/Mid/Max 388, 402 and *
2
—
Units
km, km/h, Liter/
Miles, MPH, Gallon
173 and 201 225
Driver Monitoring
System*
1
ON/OFF 404
225
*1: If equipped
*2: For details about the EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
215
3
Instruments and Controls
(218,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Driver profiles icon
s03bs050105
Touch (driver profiles icon) to confirm
the driver’s information. For details, refer
to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s
Manual.
! HOME icon
s03bs050106
Touch (HOME) to display the top menu.
! Climate control screen
s03bs050107
The climate control status is shown on the
screen.
1) Set temperature indicator (left-hand side)
2) SYNC mode indicator
3) Climate control ON/OFF button
4) Airflow mode
5) Climate control mode
6) Air inlet selection
7) Customizable icon
8) Set temperature indicator (right-hand
side)
9) Seat heater/seat ventilation indicator*
1
(right-hand side)
10) Fan speed indicator
11) Seat heater/seat ventilation indicator*
1
(left-hand side)
*1: If equipped
When operating the climate control sys-
tem, the main screen switches to the
climate control screen. For details, refer
to “Climate Control Panel” FP279.
! Main screen
s03bs0502
To display the main screen, touch
(HOME).
In this Owner’s Manual, the following
settings will be explained. For details
about other items, refer to the separate
navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.
– “Settings” ? “General”
– “Settings” ? “Car”
– “Car Info”
! General settings
s03bs050201
Set the time and display general items.
1. Touch (HOME).
2. ?
(Settings)
3. ? “General”
4. Select the preferred menu.
Center Information Display (CID)
216
(219,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.
Item
Available settings
Page reference for
the vehicle system
operation
Page reference for
the setting proce-
dure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
General
Clock
Time Setting*
1
*
2
Auto/Manual
245
245
Time Setting*
3
Sync With Phone/Manual
Time Zone*
1
AUTO/Pacific/Mountain/Central/
Eastern/Atlantic/Newfoundland/
Hawaii/Alaska
225
Daylight Saving Time*
1
AUTO/ON (+1 hour)/OFF 225
Clock Format 12H/24H 225
Display
Display Off Turn the screen on or off. — 225
Brightness Dial ON/OFF 175 225
Brightness/Contrast
Set and adjust the brightness and
contrast of the display.
225 225
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi ON/OFF
*
6
—
Connected to: Select the registered devise.
Available Wi-Fi Networks Add
Wi-Fi Protected Setup PIN Setup/Push Button Setup
Registered Wi-Fi Networks —
Wi-Fi Hotspot — ON/OFF *
7
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
217
3
Instruments and Controls
(220,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Item
Available settings
Page reference for
the vehicle system
operation
Page reference for
the setting proce-
dure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
General
Reminder Screen
Maintenance ON/OFF
210
225
Birthday ON/OFF 225
Anniversary ON/OFF 225
Meter Screen
Gauge Initial Movement ON/OFF 173 225
Meter Information Screen
Eco Gauge/OUT TEMP/Clock/
Compass*
4
/Gas Range
203 225
Turn by Turn Screen Interrup-
tion*
1
ON/OFF 205 225
Camera
Rear Camera Delay Control ON/OFF 380 225
Steering Angle Lines ON/OFF 382 225
Climate Control Customize Climate Button A/C/MAX A/C/AUTO/Recirculation 287 225
Language — English/Français/Español 201 and 209 225
Tire Pressure Units*
5
— kPa/PSi 205 225
Home Screen Short-
cuts
— ON/OFF *
6
225
Welcome Screen — ON/OFF 202 225
Goodbye Screen — ON/OFF 202 225
Favorite Widgets — Set a favorite widget from the list. 212 226
Birthday List — Set a birthday. 210 226
Anniversary List — Set an anniversary day. 210 227
Center Information Display (CID)
218
(221,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Item
Available settings
Page reference for
the vehicle system
operation
Page reference for
the setting proce-
dure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
General
Periodic Rest Notifica-
tion*
1
— ON/OFF
*
6
—
Software Update
Update Check if a new software update
Automatically Check for Up-
dates
ON/OFF
Automatically Download Up-
dates
ON/OFF
SUBARU STARLINK
Apps Recovery
— OK/Cancel
SUBARU STARLINK
Auto Connect
— ON/OFF
Factory Data Reset — Reset/Cancel
System Information — —
Free/Open Source
Software Information
—
—
*1: Models with navigation system
*2: Models with SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security without navigation system
*3: Models without SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security or navigation system
*4: Models without navigation system
*5: If equipped
*6: For details about the audio and navigation system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the audio and navigation system.
*7: For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security.
NOTE
Touch to display the explanation of the items.
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
219
3
Instruments and Controls
(222,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Car settings
s03bs050209
Perform the EyeSight system setting and
vehicle setting.
1. Touch (HOME).
2. ?
(Settings)
3. ? “Car”
4. Select the preferred menu.
Center Information Display (CID)
220
(223,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.
Item
Available settings
Page reference
for the vehicle
system opera-
tion
Page reference
for the setting
procedure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
Car
EyeSight
Pre-Collision Braking Setting ON/Setting OFF
Refer to the
Owner’s Manual
supplement for
the EyeSight
system.
—
Lane Departure Prevention
Function
All Functions/Lane Departure
Prevention Function Only/
Warning Buzzer Only/OFF
Cruise Control Acceleration
Characteristics
Lv.1 (Eco)/Lv.2 (Comfort)/Lv.3
(Standard)/Lv.4 (Dynamic)
Select Drive on Left/Drive on
Right
Right Lane/Left Lane
Lead Vehicle Acquisition
Sound
ON/OFF
Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor ON/OFF
EyeSight Assist Monitor
Red indicator ON/OFF
Yellow Indicator ON/OFF
Green Indicator ON/OFF
Reverse Automatic Braking*
1
Sonar Audible Alarm ON/OFF 393 225
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
221
3
Instruments and Controls
(224,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Item
Available settings
Page reference
for the vehicle
system opera-
tion
Page reference
for the setting
procedure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
Car
Driver Monitoring System*
1
Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF
404
225
Repeat Facial Scan Perform the user recognition. 227
User Recognition ON/OFF 225
Automatically Retract Seat on
Entry
ON/OFF 225
Register User Register the user. 227
Update Seat and Mirror Posi-
tion
Re-register the driver’s posi-
tion.
227
Delete Driver Position
Delete the registered driver’s
position.
227
Delete User Delete the registered user. 227
Delete All Users Delete all registered users. 227
Keyless Entry System
Audible Signal*
1
*
2
ON/OFF 130 and 135 225
Hazard Warning Flasher ON/OFF 130 and 136 225
Driver Door Unlock*
1
Driver Door Only/All 124 225
Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock*
1
Rear Gate/Trunk Only/All 124 225
Center Information Display (CID)
222
(225,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Item
Available settings
Page reference
for the vehicle
system opera-
tion
Page reference
for the setting
procedure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
Car
Defogger — 15 minutes/Continuous 261 225
Interior Light —
10 seconds/20 seconds/30
seconds/OFF
303 225
Auto Light Sensor
Light Sensitivity Min/Low/Mid/Max 248 225
Wiper Link ON/OFF 249 225
Welcome Lighting
Approaching Time Set
30 seconds/60 seconds/90
seconds/OFF
249
225
Leaving Time Set
30 seconds/60 seconds/90
seconds/OFF
225
One-Touch Lane Changer — ON/OFF 257 225
Auto Door Lock/Unlock
Auto Door Lock
Vehicle Speed/Shift into or out
of PARK.*
1
/OFF
140
225
Auto Door Unlock
Ignition OFF/Driver Door Open/
Shift into or out of PARK.*
1
/OFF
225
Rear Seat Reminder — ON/OFF 58 225
Door Mirror Setting*
1
Auto Electric Folding ON/OFF 274 225
Reverse Tilt ON/OFF 272 225
Power Rear Gate*
1
Power Rear Gate Memory ON/OFF 156 225
Vehicle Dynamics Control — ON/OFF 359 225
Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) — ON/OFF 368 225
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
223
3
Instruments and Controls
(226,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Item
Available settings
Page reference
for the vehicle
system opera-
tion
Page reference
for the setting
procedure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
Car
Auto Start Stop — ON/OFF 375 225
BSD/RCTA*
1
— ON/OFF 389 225
X-MODE*
1
—
Models with 1 mode: ON/OFF
Models with 2 modes: Normal,
Snow/Dirt, Deep Snow/Mud
361 225
Steering Responsive Head-
lights (SRH)
— ON/OFF 254 225
Warning Volume — Min/Mid/Max 388, 402 and *
3
225
Units —
km, km/h, Liter/
Miles, MPH, Gallon
173 and 201
225
*1: If equipped
*2: This setting also works as the On/Off setting of the power rear gate buzzer for starting operation.
However, you cannot change the warning buzzer setting for a detecting jam, etc.
*3: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
NOTE
Touch to display the explanation of the items.
Center Information Display (CID)
224
(227,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! How to select items on the screen
s03bs0510
! ON/OFF setting
s03bs051001
Example
Touch the changing menu and select ON
or OFF .
! Selecting
s03bs051002
Example
Touch the preferred item.
! How to set items on the screen
s03bs0511
! Brightness/Contrast
s03bs051101
Set and adjust the brightness and contrast
of the center information display.
NOTE
“Brightness” can only be adjusted
when “Brightness Dial” is off. Refer to
“General settings” FP216.
1. Touch
(HOME).
2. ?
(Settings)
3. ? “General”
4. ? “Display”
5. ? “Brightness/Contrast”
6. Drag to adjust the brightness and
contrast.
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
225
3
Instruments and Controls
(228,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Touch “Default” to revert to the factory
setting.
! Favorite Widgets
s03bs051102
The menu on the favorite screen can be
customized.
1. Touch
(HOME).
2. ?
(Settings)
3. ? “General”
4. ? “Favorite Widgets”
5. Select the icon of the display position.
6. Select the display item.
! Birthday List
s03bs051103
If a birthday or anniversary is approaching,
a message will be shown when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. This
function can be set to on or off by
“Reminder Screen”. For details, refer to
“General settings” FP216.
1. Touch
(HOME).
2. ?
(Settings)
3. ? “General”
4. ? “Birthday List”
5. ? “Add”
6. Enter the name.
7. ? “Next”.
8. Enter the date.
9. ? “OK”
Center Information Display (CID)
226
(229,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
NOTE
A maximum of 5 birthdays can be
stored.
! Anniversary List
s03bs051104
The procedure for setting an anniversary is
the same as “Birthday List” FP226, except
that in step 4 “Anniversary List” is selected.
! Driver Monitoring System (if
equipped)
s03bs051105
The Driver Monitoring System settings can
be changed.
For setting method for the following menu
on the Driver Monitoring System, refer to
“ON/OFF setting” FP225.
. Driver Monitoring System
. User Recognition
. Auto Retract Seat on Entry
Repeat facial scan:
1. Touch
(HOME).
2. ?
(Settings)
3. ? “Car”
4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”
5. ? “Repeat facial scan”
6. ? “OK”
7. While seated in the driver’s seat, face
forward and wait for a few moments. When
the scan is completed, the completion
screen is displayed on the combination
meter (color LCD).
Register User:
1. Adjust the seat position, outside mirror
angle, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror
angle so that you are seated in the correct
driving posture.
NOTE
. Start the user registration after ad-
justing the seat position, outside mirror
angle, and reverse tilt-down outside
mirror angle. If they are adjusted during
user registration, it may be disrupted.
Refer to “Power Seat” FP32 or “Out-
side Mirrors” FP271.
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position before user registration
is complete, the information of the
adjusted seat position, outside mirror
angles, and reverse tilt-down outside
mirror angle will not be saved.
2. Touch
(HOME).
3. ?
(Settings)
4. ? “Car”
5. ? “Driver Monitoring System”
6. ? “Register User”
7. Select the preferred user from the list.
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
227
3
Instruments and Controls
(230,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
8. ? “Set”
9. While seated in the driver’s seat, face
forward and wait for a few moments.
When the screen changes, the registration
of the facial scan is completed.
A) Forward direction
B) Display direction
1) Face forward.
2) Do not lower your chin.
3) Face the display.
*: Display
NOTE
. If user registration cannot be per-
formed, turn your face forward as
shown in the illustration, then turn to
the display.
. There are some cases where user
registration cannot be registered prop-
erly. In those cases, refer to “Driver
Monitoring System” FP404.
. If “Unable to register. Try again.”
appears, repeat the procedure begin-
ning from step 5.
10. Enter the name.
11. ? “Next”
Center Information Display (CID)
228
(231,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
12. Select the preferred icon.
13. ? “Set”
NOTE
. An existing user can be overwritten
by selecting a registered number. When
a user is registered by overwriting, the
individual fuel economy data is reset.
. When “User Recognition” is set to
OFF, user registration cannot be se-
lected.
Update Seat and Mirror Position:
1. Touch
(HOME).
2. ?
(Settings)
3. ? “Car”
4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”
5. ? “Update Seat and Mirror Position”
6. ? “Set”
NOTE
. Start the user registration after ad-
justing the seat position, outside mirror
angle, and reverse tilt-down outside
mirror angle. If they are adjusted during
user registration, it may be disrupted.
Refer to “Power Seat” FP32 or “Out-
side Mirrors” FP271.
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position before user registration
is complete, the information of the
adjusted seat position, outside mirror
angles, and reverse tilt-down outside
mirror angle will not be saved.
Delete Driver Position:
1. Touch
(HOME).
2. ?
(Settings)
3. ? “Car”
4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”
5. ? “Delete Driver Position”
6. ? “Yes”
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
229
3
Instruments and Controls
(232,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Delete User:
1. Touch
(HOME).
2. ?
(Settings)
3. ? “Car”
4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”
5. ? “Delete User”
6. Select the preferred user from the list.
7. ? “Yes”
Delete All Users:
1. Touch
(HOME).
2. ?
(Settings)
3. ? “Car”
4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”
5. ? “Delete All Users”
6. ? “Yes”
Center Information Display (CID)
230
(233,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Car information screen
s03bs0503
1. Touch (HOME) to display the top
menu.
2. ? (Car Info)
! Driving Statistics screen
s03bs050301
1) Driving Statistics
2) Steering angle
3) Running condition
4) Vehicle posture
5) Telltale screen
This screen displays the driving status of
the vehicle and the operation status func-
tions. For functions that are operating, the
indicator will illuminate or flash.
NOTE
. The vehicle posture indication may
differ from the actual vehicle posture.
. For Outback, when X-MODE has
been turned on, the screen of the center
information display will be changed to
the X-MODE screen.
. The vehicle posture angle varies not
only due to the angle of the road
surface, but also due to the vehicle tilt
caused by the occupants, cargo, and
acceleration or deceleration.
! Advanced Package screen
s03bs050302
1) Advanced Package
2) Driver Monitoring System
3) Pre-Collision Braking
4) BSD/RCTA*
1
5) Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) sys-
tem*
1
6) Information icon
7) Lane Departure Warning
8) EyeSight Assist Monitor
9) High beam assist
10) Front view monitor*
1
*1: If equipped
This screen displays the advanced safety
functions status of the vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
231
3
Instruments and Controls
(234,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Touch “Advanced Package” from the 2nd
menu in the car info screen.
The advanced safety functions information
can be shown on the screen. Touch the
information icon on the screen.
NOTE
. Indicators and icons are not dis-
played for functions that are not
equipped to the vehicle.
. The indicators and icons of func-
tions that are not operating are dis-
played in gray.
! Maintenance screen
s03bs050303
Maintenance reminders can be set.
Engine oil change reminder:
1. Touch “Maintenance” from the 2nd
menu in the car info screen.
2. ?
(Engine Oil)
3. Select “Notification Date” or “Notifica-
tion Distance” of the reminder.
4. ? “Set”
5. ?
Oil Filter change reminder:
The setting procedure is the same as the
“Engine Oil” reminder, but touch the “Oil
Filter” item in step 2.
Tires rotation reminder:
The setting procedure is the same as the
“Engine Oil” reminder, but touch the “Tires”
item in step 2.
Maintenance Schedule setting:
The setting procedure is the same as the
“Engine Oil” reminder, but touch the
“Maintenance Schedule” item in step 2.
NOTE
. Touch “Reset” to reset each setting.
. Touch “Update” to revert to the
default value.
& Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models
(If Equipped)
s03bs06
NOTE
For 11.6-inch display models, refer to
“11.6-Inch Display Models” FP211.
Center Information Display (CID)
232
(235,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Main screens
s03bs0601
A) Upper display
B) Lower display
1) HOME button (Refer to “HOME button”
FP233.)
2) Status bar (Refer to “Status bar” FP233.)
3) Upper main screen (Refer to “Setting of
the upper display” FP234.)
4) Lower main screen (Refer to “Setting of
the lower display” FP237.)
5) Climate control screen (Refer to “Climate
control screen” FP234.)
While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position, the touch panel will activate.
! HOME button
s03bs0609
Press (HOME) to display the top menu.
! Status bar
s03bs060901
The driver profiles icon, outside tempera-
ture and clock are shown on the display.
NOTE
. The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature around the
sensor. However, the temperature may
not be indicated correctly or the update
may be delayed in the following condi-
tions.
– While parking or driving at low
speeds
– When the outside temperature
changes suddenly (example: when
going in and out of an underground
parking area or when passing
through a tunnel)
– When starting the engine after
being parked for a certain period of
time
. The temperature unit cannot be
changed.
. The clock can be shown in either 12-
hour display or 24-hour display. For
details about the setting, refer to
“Clock” FP245.
. Touch the clock on the status bar to
display the clock setting screen. Refer
to “Clock” FP245.
! Upper display
s03bs060902
For details about items, refer to “Setting of
the upper display” FP234.
For details about the following menu, refer
to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s
Manual.
. Radio
. Media
. Phone
. Apps
. SUBARU STARLINK
. Add to Shortcuts
! Lower display
s03bs060903
For details about the setting items, refer to
“Setting of the lower display” FP237.
If this screen changes to the climate
control screen, refer to “Dual 7.0-Inch
Display Models” FP279.
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
233
3
Instruments and Controls
(236,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Climate control screen
s03bs060904
1) Airflow mode
2) Climate control mode
3) Air inlet selection
4) Set temperature indicator
5) Air conditioner ON indicator
6) Fan speed indicator
7) Climate control On/Off button
When operating the climate control sys-
tem, the main screen switches to the
climate control screen. For details about
climate control operation, refer to “Climate
Control Panel” FP279.
! Setting of the upper display
s03bs0602
In this Owner’s Manual, the settings of the
“General” menu will be explained. For
details about other items, refer to the
separate navigation/audio Owner’s Man-
ual.
! General settings
s03bs060204
The “General” menu is used to set the
display, language and time.
1. Press
(HOME).
2. Touch (Settings).
3. ? “General”
4. Select the preferred menu.
Center Information Display (CID)
234
(237,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.
Item
Available settings
Page reference
for the vehicle
system opera-
tion
Page reference
for the setting
procedure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
General
Clock
Time setting Sync With Phone/Manual
245
245
Clock Format 12H/24H 246
Display
Display Off Turn the screen on or off. — 242
Brightness Dial ON/OFF — 242
Brightness/Contrast
Set and adjust the brightness
and contrast of the screen dis-
play and camera display.
— 242
Reminder Screen
Maintenance ON/OFF
210
242
Birthday ON/OFF 242
Anniversary ON/OFF 242
Meter Screen
Gauge Initial Movement ON/OFF 173 242
Meter Information Screen
Eco Gauge/OUT TEMP/Clock/
Gas Range
203 242
Camera
Rear Camera Delay Control ON/OFF 380 242
Steering Angle Lines ON/OFF 382 242
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
235
3
Instruments and Controls
(238,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Item
Available settings
Page reference
for the vehicle
system opera-
tion
Page reference
for the setting
procedure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
General
Climate Control Customize Climate Button
A/C/MAX A/C/AUTO/Recircu-
lation
287 242
Language — English/Français/Español 201 and 209 242
Tire Pressure Units*
1
— kPa/PSi 205 242
Home Screen Shortcuts — ON/OFF *
2
242
Welcome Screen — ON/OFF 202 242
Goodbye Screen — ON/OFF 202 242
Birthday List — Set a birthday. 210 243
Anniversary List — Set an anniversary day. 210 243
SUBARU STARLINK Apps Re-
covery
— OK/Cancel
*
2
—
SUBARU STARLINK Auto
Connect
— ON/OFF
Factory Data Reset — Reset/Cancel
System Information — —
Free/Open Source Software
Information
—
—
*1: If equipped
*2: For details about the audio and navigation system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the audio and navigation system.
NOTE
Touch to display the explanation of the items.
Center Information Display (CID)
236
(239,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Setting of the lower display
s03bs0605
Touch (Car Settings). Refer to “Vehicle
setting icons” FP239.
This screen displays the driving status of
the vehicle and the operation status of the
functions. Refer to “Driving Statistics”
FP243.
Set the timing of the maintenance. Refer to
“Maintenance” FP244.
! Vehicle settings while driving
s03bs060502
Touch (X-MODE), (Vehicle Control),
(Driving Assistance), (Others), or
(Auto Start Stop) to display the items that
are changeable while driving.
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
237
3
Instruments and Controls
(240,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Item
Available settings
Page reference
for the vehicle
system opera-
tion
Page reference
for the setting
procedure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
X-MODE*
1
— — ON/OFF 361 242
Vehicle Con-
trol
Vehicle Dynamics Control — ON/OFF 359 242
Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) — ON/OFF 368 242
Cruise Control Acceleration
Characteristics
—
Lv.1 (Eco)/Lv.2 (Comfort)/Lv.3
(Standard)/Lv.4 (Dynamic)
*
2
—
Driving As-
sistance
Pre-Collision Braking — Setting ON/Setting OFF
*
2
—
Lane Departure Prevention
Function
—
All Functions/Lane Departure
Prevention Function Only/
Warning Buzzer Only/OFF
Auto Start
Stop
— — ON/OFF 375 242
Others
Warning Volume — Min/Mid/Max *
2
242
Units —
km, km/h, Liter/
Miles, MPH, Gallon
173 and 201 242
Auto Start Stop — ON/OFF 375
242
*1: For Outback
*2: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
Center Information Display (CID)
238
(241,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon
s03bs060503
1) Auto Start Stop indicator (green)
Touching “ ” deactivates the Auto Start
Stop system and turns off the Auto Start
Stop indicator (green) on the screen.
Touching “
” again activates the Auto
Start Stop system and turns on the Auto
Start Stop indicator (green).
! Vehicle setting icons
s03bs060501
1. Press (HOME).
2. Touch
(Car Settings).
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
239
3
Instruments and Controls
(242,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.
Item
Available settings
Page reference
for the vehicle
system opera-
tion
Page reference
for the setting
procedure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
Car Settings
EyeSight
Pre-Collision Braking Setting ON/Setting OFF *
1
—
Lane Departure Prevention
Function
All Functions/Lane Departure
Prevention Function Only/
Warning Buzzer Only/OFF
*
1
—
Cruise Control Acceleration
Characteristics
Lv.1 (Eco)/Lv.2 (Comfort)/Lv.3
(Standard)/Lv.4 (Dynamic)
*
1
—
Select Drive on Left/Drive on
Right
Right Lane/Left Lane *
1
—
Lead Vehicle Acquisition
Sound
ON/OFF *
1
242
Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor ON/OFF *
1
242
EyeSight Assist Monitor
Red indicator ON/OFF
*
1
—Yellow Indicator ON/OFF
Green Indicator ON/OFF
Keyless Entry System Hazard Warning Flasher ON/OFF 136 242
Defogger — 15 minutes/Continuous 261 242
Interior Light —
10 seconds/20 seconds/30
seconds/OFF
303 242
Center Information Display (CID)
240
(243,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Item
Available settings
Page reference
for the vehicle
system opera-
tion
Page reference
for the setting
procedure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
Car Settings
Auto Light Sensor
Light Sensitivity Min/Low/Mid/Max 248 242
Wiper Link ON/OFF 249 242
Welcome Lighting
Approaching Time Set
30 seconds/60 seconds/90
seconds/OFF
249
242
Leaving Time Set
30 seconds/60 seconds/90
seconds/OFF
242
One-Touch Lane Changer — ON/OFF 257 242
Auto Door Lock/Unlock
Auto Door Lock
Vehicle Speed/Shift into or out
of PARK/OFF
140
242
Auto Door Unlock
Ignition OFF/Driver Door Open/
Shift into or out of PARK/OFF
242
Rear Seat Reminder — ON/OFF 58 242
Vehicle Dynamics Control — ON/OFF 359 242
Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) — ON/OFF 368 242
Auto Start Stop — ON/OFF 375 242
X-MODE*
2
— ON/OFF 361 242
Warning Volume — Min/Mid/Max *
1
242
Units —
km, km/h, Liter/
Miles, MPH, Gallon
173 and 201
242
*1: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
*2: If equipped
NOTE
Touch to display the explanation of the items.
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
241
3
Instruments and Controls
(244,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! How to select items on the screen
s03bs0610
! ON/OFF setting
s03bs061001
Example
Touch the changing menu and select ON
or OFF .
! Selecting
s03bs061002
Example
Touch the preferred setting.
! How to set items on the screen
s03bs0611
! Brightness/Contrast
s03bs061101
Set and adjust the brightness and contrast
of the center information display.
NOTE
“Brightness” can only be adjusted
when “Brightness Dial” is off. Refer to
“General settings” FP234.
1. Touch
(HOME).
2. ?
(Settings)
3. ? “General”
4. ? “Display”
5. ? “Brightness/Contrast”
6. Drag to adjust the brightness and
contrast.
Center Information Display (CID)
242
(245,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Touch “Default” to revert to the factory
setting.
! Birthday List
s03bs061102
If a birthday or anniversary is approaching,
a message will be displayed when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position. This function can be set to on or
off by the “Reminder Screen”. For details,
refer to “General settings” FP234.
1. Touch
(HOME).
2. ?
(Settings)
3. ? “General”
4. ? “Birthday List”
5. ? “Add”
6. Enter the name.
7. ? “Next”
8. Enter the date.
9. ? “OK”
NOTE
A maximum of 5 birthdays can be
stored.
! Anniversary List
s03bs061103
The procedure for setting an anniversary is
the same as “Birthday List” FP243, except
that in step 4 “Anniversary List” is selected.
! Driving Statistics
s03bs0603
1) Steering angle
2) Vehicle posture
3) Running condition
This screen displays the driving status of
the vehicle and the operation status of the
functions. For functions that are operating,
the indicator will illuminate or flash.
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
243
3
Instruments and Controls
(246,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
NOTE
. The vehicle posture indication may
differ from the actual vehicle posture.
. For Outback, when X-MODE has
been turned on, the screen of the center
information display will be changed to
the X-MODE screen.
. The vehicle posture angle varies not
only due to the angle of the road
surface, but also due to the vehicle tilt
caused by the occupants, cargo, and
acceleration or deceleration.
! Maintenance
s03bs0604
Maintenance reminders can be set.
Engine oil setting:
1. Touch
(Maintenance).
2. ?
(Engine Oil)
3. Select “Notification Date” or “Notifica-
tion Distance” of the reminder.
4. ? “Set”
5. ?
Oil Filter setting:
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine Oil” setting, but touch the “Oil
Filter” item in step 2.
Tires setting:
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine Oil” setting, but touch the “Tires”
item in step 2.
Maintenance Schedule setting:
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine Oil” setting, but touch the “Main-
tenance Schedule” item in step 2.
NOTE
. Touch “Reset” to reset each setting.
. Touch “Update” to revert to the
default value.
Center Information Display (CID)
244
(247,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
3-9. Clock
s03af
For models with a genuine SUBARU
navigation and/or audio system, the clock
can be adjusted using either auto mode or
manual mode.
& Setting the Clock Manually
s03af03
! Dual 7.0-inch display models
s03af0303
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Press (HOME).
3. Touch
(Settings).
4. ? “General”
5. ? “Clock”
6. ? “Time Setting”
7. ? “Manual”
8. ?
or
9. ? “OK”
NOTE
The clock setting screen can also be
displayed by touching the clock on the
status bar.
! 11.6-inch display models
s03af0304
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Touch (HOME).
3. ?
(Settings)
4. ? “General”
5. ? “Clock”
6. ? “Time Setting”
– CONTINUED –
Clock
245
3
Instruments and Controls
(248,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
7. ? “Manual”
8. ?
or
9. ? “OK”
NOTE
The clock setting screen can also be
displayed by touching the clock on the
status bar.
& Setting the Clock Automati-
cally
s03af02
! Dual 7.0-inch display models
s03af0204
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Press (HOME).
3. Touch
(Settings).
4. ? “General”
5. ? “Clock”
6. ? “Time Setting”
7. ? “Sync With Phone”
The clock will be set and adjusted auto-
matically when a smartphone is connected
via Bluetooth
®
for transferring phonebook
data.
1. Register the smartphone to the audio
system. For details, refer to “Bluetooth
SETTINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s
Manual for the audio/navigation system.
2. Transfer phonebook data to the sys-
tem. For details, refer to “Bluetooth SET-
TINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s
Manual for the audio/navigation system.
The clock will be adjusted automatically.
NOTE
Depending on the model of smart-
phone, the settings of the connected
Clock
246
(249,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
smartphone may need to be changed.
(ex: For iOS or other models, notifica-
tion settings may need to be activated.)
For details, check the instructions on
connecting smartphones.
! 11.6-inch display models
s03af0205
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Touch (HOME).
3. ?
(Settings)
4. ? “General”
5. ? “Clock”
6. ? “Time Setting”
7. Models with navigation system:
? “Auto”
Models with SUBARU STARLINK Safety
and Security without navigation system:
? “Auto”
Models without SUBARU STARLINK
Safety and Security or navigation system:
? “Sync With Phone”
! Models with navigation system
s03af020501
The clock will be set automatically where a
GPS signal is available.
! Models with SUBARU STARLINK
Safety and Security without na-
vigation system
s03af020507
The clock will be set automatically where a
DCM (Data Communication Module in
vehicle cellular connection) signal is avail-
able.
! Models without SUBARU
STARLINK Safety and Security
or navigation system
s03af020508
The clock will be set and adjusted auto-
matically when a smartphone is connected
via Bluetooth
®
for transferring phonebook
data.
1. Register the smartphone to the audio
system. For details, refer to “Bluetooth
SETTINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s
Manual for the audio/navigation system.
2. Transfer phonebook data to the sys-
tem. For details, refer to “Bluetooth SET-
TINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s
Manual for the audio/navigation system.
The clock will be adjusted automatically.
NOTE
Depending on the model of smart-
phone, the settings of the connected
smartphone may need to be changed.
(ex: For iOS or other models, notifica-
tion settings may need to be activated.)
For details, check the instructions on
connecting smartphones.
Clock
247
3
Instruments and Controls
(250,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
3-10. Light Control Switch
s03ah
CAUTION
. Use of any lights for a long period
of time while the engine is not
running can cause the battery to
discharge.
. Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that the light control switch
is turned to the off position. If the
vehicle is left unattended for a
long time with the light control
switch set to a position other
than the off position, the battery
may be discharged.
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
The light control switch operates when the
push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
Regardless of the position of the light
control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the push-button ignition
switch is turned off.
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
The light control switch operates when the
key is inserted in the ignition switch.
Regardless of the position of the light
control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the key is removed from
the ignition switch.
NOTE
The light control switch can be oper-
ated (except auto on/off headlights),
even under the following conditions.
. When the push-button ignition
switch is turned off (models with “key-
less access with push-button start
system”)
. When the key is not inserted into the
ignition switch (models without “key-
less access with push-button start
system”)
If the driver’s door is opened while the
headlights are illuminated under such
conditions, a chirp sound will inform
the driver that the lights are illuminated.
& Headlights
s03ah01
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on
the end of the light control switch.
“
” position:
The headlights are all off.
“
” position:
Instrument panel illumination, headlights,
parking lights, front side marker lights, rear
side marker lights, tail lights and license
plate lights are on.
“
” position:
Instrument panel illumination, parking
lights, front side marker lights, rear side
marker lights, tail lights and license plate
lights are on.
Light Control Switch
248
(251,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
“ ” position: Auto on/off headlights
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the instrument panel illumination,
headlights, parking lights, front side mar-
ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights
and license plate lights are automatically
on or off depending on the level of the
ambient light.
The light sensitivity of the auto on/off
headlights can be changed by operating
the center information display. For details,
refer to “Car settings” FP220 (11.6-inch
display models) or “Vehicle setting icons”
FP239 (dual 7.0-inch display models).
Also, the setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
! Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlights
s03ah0106
While the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position, the headlights will auto-
matically turn on when the windshield
wipers operate several times. The head-
lights will automatically turn off approxi-
mately 1 minute after the wiper stops.
The ON/OFF setting of this function can be
changed by operating the center informa-
tion display. For details, refer to “Car
settings” FP220 (11.6-inch display mod-
els) or “Vehicle setting icons” FP239 (dual
7.0-inch display models). Also, the setting
can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
! Welcome lighting function
s03ah0103
The welcome lighting function turns on the
low beam headlight for smooth approach-
ing to or exiting from the vehicle at night or
in a dark place.
The function is activated while all of the
following conditions are met.
. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”
position.
. It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/
off headlights.
! When approaching
s03ah010301
While the welcome lighting function is
activated, the low beam headlights will
automatically illuminate when unlocking
the doors (for Outback, including the rear
gate) by using the remote keyless entry
system.
The low beam headlights will remain
illuminated for 30 seconds*
1
and then turn
off. However, if any of the following
operations is done, the low beam head-
lights will turn off.
. The doors are locked.
. The light control switch is turned to a
position other than “AUTO”.
! When exiting
s03ah010302
While the welcome lighting function is
activated, the low beam headlights will
remain illuminated even when either of the
following operation is done.
. The push-button ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” status (models with
“keyless access with push-button start
system”).
. The key is pulled out from the ignition
switch (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”).
The low beam headlights will turn off under
any of the following conditions.
. 3 minutes have passed since the low
beam headlights were illuminated by the
welcome lighting function.
. 30 seconds have passed since the door
is opened and closed.*
1
. The light control switch is turned to a
position other than “AUTO”.
. The locking procedure is performed
twice. When performing the unlocking
procedure after performing the locking
procedure, perform the locking procedure
twice again.
*1: The setting for the period of time in which the
low beam headlights remain on by the
welcome lighting function can be changed
by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your
– CONTINUED –
Light Control Switch
249
3
Instruments and Controls
(252,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
SUBARU dealer for details. Also, you can
change the setting by operating the center
information display. For details, refer to “Car
settings” FP220 (11.6-inch display models)
or “Vehicle setting icons” FP239 (dual 7.0-
inch display models).
! Sensor for the auto on/off head-
lights
s03ah0101
The sensor is on the instrument panel as
shown in the illustration.
CAUTION
If any object is placed on or near the
sensor, the sensor may not detect
the level of the ambient light cor-
rectly and the auto on/off headlights
may not operate properly.
& High/Low Beam Change
(Dimmer)
s03ah02
1) High beam
2) Low beam
While the light control switch is in the “ ”,
“
”, or “ ” position in a dark place, the
headlights will turn on.
When the headlights are on high beam, the
high beam indicator light “
” on the
combination meter is also on.
NOTE
While the light control switch is in the
“
” position and the lever is the high
beam position, the high beam assist
function will be on standby.
& Headlight Flasher
s03ah03
CAUTION
Do not hold the lever in the flashing
position for more than just a few
seconds.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
toward you and then release it. The high
beam will stay on for as long as you hold
Light Control Switch
250
(253,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
the lever. The headlight flasher works even
though the lighting switch is in the off
position.
When the headlights are on high beam, the
high beam indicator light “
” on the
combination meter also illuminates.
& High Beam Assist Function
s03ah07
NOTE
. The high beam assist function uti-
lizes the stereo camera installed at the
position of the front map lights.
. For details on how to handle the
stereo camera, refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the EyeSight
system.
The high beam assist function automati-
cally changes the headlight from high
beam to low beam (or vice versa).
When all of the following conditions are
met, the headlight will change to high
beam.
. When the vehicle speed increases to or
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
. There is no preceding or oncoming
vehicle.
. The forward area of the vehicle is dark.
. The road does not have a sharp curve.
When any of the following conditions are
met, the headlight will change to low beam.
. When the vehicle speed decreases to
or below 10 mph (16 km/h).
. When the forward area of the vehicle is
bright.
. When there is a preceding or oncoming
vehicle.
. When the EyeSight system is malfunc-
tioning or is temporarily stopped.
NOTE
. Do not overestimate the capacity of
the high beam assist function. The
driver always has the responsibility to
understand the surrounding situation,
to drive safely, and to change the
headlight mode manually if necessary.
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
This setting can be changed to OFF
(non-operation) at SUBARU dealers.
For more details, contact a SUBARU
dealer.
! How to use the high beam assist
function
s03ah0701
The high beam assist function will be
activated when all the following conditions
are met.
. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the low beam headlights are
on automatically.
. The turn signal lever is pushed forward.
High beam assist indicator
When the high beam assist function is
activated, the high beam assist indicator
on the combination meter will illuminate.
NOTE
If the high beam assist function is
malfunctioning or is temporarily
stopped, the headlight will be fixed at
low beam.
! Temporary stop of high beam assist
function
s03ah0706
If the high beam assist function stops
temporarily due to poor visibility or abnor-
mal temperature, the message appears on
the combination meter. Once the condi-
tions have been remedied, drive the
– CONTINUED –
Light Control Switch
251
3
Instruments and Controls
(254,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
vehicle for a while to restore the system.
NOTE
Even when the operation conditions of
the high beam assist function are met,
there may be a case in which the high
beam assist indicator does not illumi-
nate.
! How to temporarily lower the sensi-
tivity of the high beam assist func-
tion
s03ah0704
The sensitivity of the high beam assist
function can be lowered by using the
following operations.
1. Before turning the ignition switch to the
“ON” position, set the light control switch to
the “AUTO” position and push the signal
lever forward (high beam position).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and within approximately 15 sec-
onds, press the “
/ ” (following distance
setting) switch more than 10 times con-
secutively.
When the sensitivity of the high beam
assist function is lowered, the high beam
assist indicator light “
” on the combina-
tion meter display (color LCD) will flash.
NOTE
. The sensitivity of the high beam
assist function cannot be lowered in
the following conditions.
– Cruise control or Adaptive Cruise
Control indicator is illuminated.
– The EyeSight warning indicator
(yellow) is illuminated.
. The sensitivity of the high beam
assist function returns to normal level
the next time the ignition switch is
turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position
and the engine is restarted.
! How to change the headlight mode
manually
s03ah0702
Change to the low beam:
When you return the turn signal lever to the
center position, the high beam assist
function will turn off and the high beam
assist indicator will turn off.
Change to the high beam:
When you turn the light control switch to
the “
” position, the headlight mode will
be changed to the high beam.
At this time, the high beam assist function
will turn off, the high beam assist indicator
will turn off and the high beam indicator
light will turn on.
NOTE
. After manually changing the head-
light mode to the high beam, if you turn
on the high beam assist function,
return the light control switch to the
“AUTO” position.
. When manually changing the head-
light mode to the high beam, if you turn
the light control switch to the “
”
position, the parking lights, front side
marker lights, rear side marker lights,
tail lights and license plate lights will
turn on.
! Tips for the high beam assist sys-
tem
s03ah0703
. The high beam assist function recog-
nizes the condition surrounding the vehicle
based on the brightness of illumination
ahead of your vehicle, etc. Therefore, the
headlight mode may switch in some
situations that do not match to the driver’s
sense.
. A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be
detected.
. Under the following situations, the
brightness of ambient illumination may
not be detected correctly and the high
beam assist function may not work prop-
erly. As a result, the glare of the high beam
may disturb the oncoming vehicle or
vehicle ahead. Also, the low beam mode
Light Control Switch
252
(255,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
may continue although there are no
oncoming vehicles and vehicles ahead.
In the such cases, change the headlight
mode manually.
– In bad weather (fog, snow, sand
storm, heavy rain, etc.).
– When the windshield glass is dirty or
fogged.
– When the windshield is cracked or
damaged.
– If there are lights similar to the
headlights or the tail lights in the
surrounding area.
– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-
hicle ahead is driven without its head-
lights and tail lights on.
– If the headlights of an oncoming
vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle
ahead are dirty or discolored, or if the
light beams are not aimed correctly.
– When a rapid change of brightness
continues while driving.
– When driving on a road with many
ups and downs or uneven surfaces.
– When driving on a road with many
curves.
– When there are some objects that
reflect light strongly, such as a road
sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead.
– When the rear part of the vehicle
ahead, such as a container, reflects
light strongly.
– When the headlights of your vehicle
are damaged or dirty.
– When your vehicle is tilted, such as
in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is
being towed.
– When the stereo camera is de-
formed or the stereo camera lenses
are dirty.
– Immediately after the engine has
started.
. In the following conditions, the head-
light mode will not be automatically chan-
ged from the high beam to the low beam.
– When your vehicle passes an on-
coming vehicle suddenly in a blind
curve.
– When another vehicle passes in
front of your vehicle.
– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-
hicle ahead comes in and out of view
because of continuous curves, median
strips, roadside trees, etc.
. If the stereo camera detects the light of
the front fog lights of an oncoming vehicle,
the headlight mode may change from the
high beam to the low beam automatically.
. The headlight mode may change from
the high beam to the low beam, or the low
beam mode may continue, when affected
by a street light, traffic signal, illumination
of an advertisement board, or a reflective
object such as a road sign and signboard.
. The timing of the change of headlight
mode may differ due to the following
factors.
– Color or brightness of the headlights
of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights
of a vehicle ahead.
– The headlights of the oncoming
vehicle or the tail lights of the vehicle
ahead are covered with mud, snow,
etc.
– Movement and direction of an on-
coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead.
– When the headlights of an oncom-
ing vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle
ahead illuminate on only one side.
– When the oncoming vehicle or
vehicle ahead is a motorcycle.
– Conditions of a road (slope, curve,
road surface, etc.).
– Number of passengers and weight
of loaded cargo.
– Limitation of the detection ability of
the stereo camera.
– CONTINUED –
Light Control Switch
253
3
Instruments and Controls
(256,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Daytime Running Light Sys-
tem
s03ah04
WARNING
When the daytime running lights are
illuminated, the tail lights do not
illuminate. When it becomes dark
outside, turn the light switch to the
“
” position to illuminate the head-
lights and tail lights. This will im-
prove visibility and allow other dri-
vers to see your vehicle more easily.
The daytime running lights will automati-
cally illuminate when the following condi-
tions are fulfilled.
. The engine is running.
. The parking brake is fully released.
. The light control switch is in the
“AUTO”, “
” or off position.
. The select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
NOTE
When the light switch is in the “ ”
position, the instrument panel illumina-
tion, front side marker lights, tail lights
and license plate lights are also illumi-
nated.
3-11. Steering Responsive
Headlight (SRH)
s03bl
1) The target area of illumination when SRH
is activated
2) The target area of illumination when SRH
is not activated
SRH is a function that automatically moves
the headlight beam to the left or right in
accordance with the steering angle. This
function helps to improve the visibility at
night by illuminating the road ahead at
corners and intersections.
You can turn the SRH function on or off.
The settings can be changed by using the
center information display. For details,
refer to “Car settings” FP220.
1) SRH OFF indicator light
The SRH OFF indicator light on the
combination meter display (color LCD)
turns off when SRH is turned on.
The SRH OFF indicator light on the
combination meter display (color LCD)
illuminates when SRH is turned off.
Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)
254
(257,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1) SRH warning indicator
If SRH is malfunctioning, the SRH warning
indicator on the combination meter display
(color LCD) illuminates and a message
appears on the warning screen when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position. It
indicates that SRH has been deactivated.
Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion.
NOTE
. The SRH function operative/non-op-
erative status is kept when the engine is
turned off, even if the engine is re-
started.
. When you turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position, the SRH OFF indi-
cator light will illuminate and turn off
after several seconds.
. SRH only activates when the vehicle
is traveling forward at the speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more.
3-12. Headlight Beam Leveler
s03at
The LED headlights produce more light
than conventional halogen headlights.
When the vehicle is carrying a heavy load
and the headlight beams are angled
upwards, the driver of an oncoming vehicle
may experience glare.
To prevent this, the automatic headlight
beam leveler adjusts the headlights to the
optimum height automatically depending
on the load the vehicle is carrying.
CAUTION
In certain circumstances, the head-
lights may become misaligned, and
the headlight beam leveler will not
reset them to the proper angle. This
may occur after transporting your
vehicle on a flat-bed truck, or if the
vehicle is parked and restarted on
different angles. In such cases, have
the headlight alignment checked by
a SUBARU dealer.
Headlight Beam Leveler
255
3
Instruments and Controls
(258,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
3-13. Front Fog Light Switch
(If Equipped)
s03al
1) Headlight switch
2) Fog light switch
To turn on the front fog lights:
Turn the fog light switch to the “
” position
while the headlights are in either of the
following conditions.
. The headlight switch is in the “
”
position with the low beam mode selected.
. The headlight switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the low beam headlights turn
on automatically.
To turn off the front fog lights:
Turn the fog light switch back down to the
“
” position.
Indicator light
The indicator light located on the combina-
tion meter will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
3-14. Turn Signal Lever
s03ai
1) Right turn
2) Lane change right signal
3) Lane change left signal
4) Left turn
If the lever does not return after cornering,
return the lever to the neutral position by
hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
during the lane change. The lever will
return automatically to the neutral position
when you release it.
Front Fog Light Switch
256
(259,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& One-Touch Lane Changer
s03ai01
To flash the turn signal and turn signal
indicator light three times, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and
immediately release it.
NOTE
The operational/non-operational
setting of the one-touch lane changer
can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for
details. The setting can also be chan-
ged by operating the center information
display. For details, refer to “Car set-
tings” FP220 (11.6-inch display mod-
els) or “Vehicle setting icons” FP239
(dual 7.0-inch display models).
3-15. Wiper and Washer
s03am
WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the
windshield washer until the wind-
shield is sufficiently warmed by the
defroster.
Otherwise the washer fluid can
freeze on the windshield, blocking
your view.
CAUTION
. Do not operate the washer con-
tinuously for more than 10 sec-
onds, or when the washer fluid
tank is empty. This may cause
overheating of the washer motor.
Check the washer fluid level fre-
quently, such as at fuel stops.
. Do not operate the wipers when
the windshield or rear window is
dry. This may scratch the glass,
damage the blade rubbers and
might cause the wiper motor to
fail. Before operating the wiper
on a dry windshield or rear win-
dow, always use the windshield
washer.
. In freezing weather, be sure that
the blade rubbers are not frozen
to the windshield or rear window
before switching on the wipers.
Attempting to operate the wiper
with the blade rubbers frozen to
the window glass could cause
not only the blade rubbers to be
damaged but also might cause
the wiper motor to fail. If the blade
rubbers are frozen to the window
glass, be sure to operate the
defroster, windshield wiper dei-
cer (if equipped) or rear window
defogger before turning on the
wiper.
. If the wipers stop during opera-
tion because of ice or some other
obstruction on the window, this
might cause the wiper motor to
fail even if the wiper switch is
turned off. If this occurs,
promptly stop the vehicle in a
safe location, turn the ignition
switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” po-
sition and clean the window glass
to allow proper wiper operation.
. Use clean water if windshield
washer fluid is unavailable. In
areas where water freezes in
winter, use SUBARU Windshield
Washer Fluid or the equivalent.
– CONTINUED –
Wiper and Washer
257
3
Instruments and Controls
(260,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Refer to “Windshield Washer
Fluid” FP510.
Also, when driving the vehicle
when there are freezing tempera-
tures, use non-freezing type wi-
per blades.
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
NOTE
. The windshield wiper motor is pro-
tected against overloads by a circuit
breaker. If the motor operates continu-
ously under an unusually heavy load,
the circuit breaker may trip to stop the
motor temporarily. If this happens, park
your vehicle in a safe location, turn off
the wiper switch, and wait for approxi-
mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker
will reset itself, and the wipers will
again operate normally.
. Clean your blade rubbers and win-
dow glass periodically with a washer
solution to prevent streaking, and to
remove accumulations of road salt or
road film. Operate the windshield
washer for at least 1 second so that
washer solution will be sprinkled all
over the windshield or rear window.
. Grease, wax, insects or other mate-
rial on the windshield or the blade
rubbers results in jerky wiper operation
and streaking on the glass. If you
cannot remove those streaks after
operating the washer or if the wiper
operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
face of the windshield or rear window
and the blade rubbers using a sponge
or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
rinse the window glass and blade
rubbers with clean water. The glass is
clean if no beads form on the glass
when you rinse with water.
. If you cannot eliminate the streaking
even after following this procedure,
replace the wiper blades (or blade
rubbers) with new ones. For replace-
ment instructions, refer to “Replace-
ment of Wiper Blades” FP511.
& Windshield Wiper and
Washer Switches
s03am01
The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
! Windshield wipers
s03am0101
: Mist (for a single wipe)
: Off
: Intermittent
: Low speed
:
High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
control lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the “
” position.
Wiper and Washer
258
(261,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
For a single wipe of the wipers, push the
lever up. The wipers operate until you
release the lever.
! Wiper intermittent time control
s03am0103
When the wiper switch is in the “ ”
position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-
ing interval of the wiper. The operating
interval can be adjusted in several steps
from the shortest interval to the longest.
! Windshield washer
s03am0104
To wash the windshield, pull the wiper
control lever toward you. The washer fluid
sprays until you release the lever. The
wipers operate while you pull the lever.
Windshield washer fluid warning light
NOTE
The windshield washer fluid warning
light appears when the washer fluid
level in the tank has dropped to the
lower limit. If the warning light appears,
refill the tank with fluid. For the tank
refilling method, refer to “Windshield
Washer Fluid” FP510.
– CONTINUED –
Wiper and Washer
259
3
Instruments and Controls
(262,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Rear Window Wiper and
Washer Switch (Outback)
s03am02
:
Washer (accompanied by wiper op-
eration)
: Continuous
: Intermittent
: Off
:
Washer (accompanied by wiper op-
eration)
! Rear wiper
s03am0201
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob
switch upward.
To turn the wiper off, return the knob switch
to the “
” position.
With the switch turned to the “
” position,
the rear wiper will operate intermittently at
intervals corresponding to the vehicle
speed. In this position, when you move
the select lever to the “R” position, the rear
wiper will switch to continuous operation.
When you move the select lever from the
“R” (reverse) position to another position,
the rear wiper will return to intermittent
operation.
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper:
Even if the rear wiper switch is in the off
“
” position, if the front windshield wiper is
operating continuously, the rear wiper will
operate intermittently when you move the
select lever to the “R” (reverse) position.
The factory setting (default setting) of the
reverse gear interlocked rear wiper is as
follows.
. U.S.-spec. models: Non-operational
. Other models: Operational
This setting can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for
details.
CAUTION
Do not attach anything that disturbs
the rear wiper operation on the rear
gate. Doing so may damage the rear
wiper when it operates.
! Washer
s03am0202
To wash the rear window while the rear
wiper is operating, turn the knob switch
upward to the “
” position. The washer
fluid sprays until you release the knob.
To wash the rear window when the rear
wiper is not in use, turn the knob switch
downward to the “
” position. The washer
fluid sprays and the wiper operates until
you release the knob.
The rear view camera washer also oper-
ates while the rear window washer is
operating.
Windshield washer fluid warning light
NOTE
The windshield washer fluid warning
light appears when the washer fluid
level in the tank has dropped to the
Wiper and Washer
260
(263,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
lower limit. If the warning light appears,
refill the tank with fluid. For the tank
refilling method, refer to “Windshield
Washer Fluid” FP510.
3-16. Defogger and Deicer
s03bi
1) Rear window defogger
2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)
The defogger and deicer system is acti-
vated only when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
Rear window and outside mirror (if
equipped) defogger button (dual 7.0-inch
display models)
Rear window and outside mirror defogger
button (11.6-inch display models)
– CONTINUED –
Defogger and Deicer
261
3
Instruments and Controls
(264,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
To activate the defogger and deicer sys-
tem, press the rear window and outside
mirror defogger button. The rear window
defogger, outside mirror defogger and
windshield wiper deicer are activated
simultaneously. The indicator light on the
button illuminates while the defogger and
deicer system is activated.
To turn them off, press the button again.
They also turn off when the ignition switch
is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”/“OFF”
position.
The defogger and deicer system will
automatically shut off after approximately
15 minutes. If the rear window and outside
mirrors have been cleared and the wind-
shield wiper blade rubbers have been
deiced completely before that time, press
the button to turn them off. If defrosting,
defogging or deicing is not complete, you
have to press the button to turn them on
again.
It is possible to set the defogger and deicer
system for the continuous operation mode
by operating the center information dis-
play. For details, refer to “Car settings”
FP220 (11.6-inch display models) or
“Vehicle setting icons” FP239 (dual 7.0-
inch display models).
CAUTION
. To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the
defogger and deicer system con-
tinuously for any longer than
necessary.
. Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface of
the rear window. They may da-
mage the conductors printed on
the window.
NOTE
. Turn on the defogger and deicer
system if the wipers are frozen to the
windshield.
. If the windshield is covered with
snow, remove the snow so that the
windshield wiper deicer works effec-
tively.
. While the defogger and deicer sys-
tem is in the continuous operation
mode:
– If the vehicle speed remains at 9
mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15
minutes, the windshield wiper dei-
cer system automatically stops op-
erating. However, the rear window
defogger system and outside mirror
defogger system maintain continu-
ous operation in this condition.
– If the vehicle battery voltage
drops below the permissible level,
continuous operation of the defog-
ger system and deicer system is
canceled and the system stops
operating.
. The vehicle is equipped with a radio
antenna on the upper part of the rear
window. Therefore it is not possible to
clear fog and frost on the upper part of
the rear window.
Defogger and Deicer
262
(265,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
3-17. Mirrors
s03ap
Always check that the inside and outside
mirrors are properly adjusted before you
start driving.
& Inside Mirror (without Auto-
Dimming Function) (If
Equipped)
s03ap08
1) Normal position
2) Anti-glare position
Push the tab on the mirror for normal use.
To reduce glare from the headlights of the
vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the anti-
glare position.
& Auto-Dimming Mirror/Com-
pass with HomeLink
®
(If
Equipped)
s03ap10
1) Display
2) HomeLink
®
buttons
3) Switch
During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming
feature senses distracting glare from
vehicle headlights behind you and auto-
matically dims to eliminate the glare and
help preserve your vision.
! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea-
ture
s03ap1001
Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto-
dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming
feature is enabled when the switch’s green
LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming
feature will default to on with each ignition
cycle.
! To Operate the Compass Feature (if
equipped)
s03ap1002
1. To turn the compass feature on/off,
press and hold the “
” switch for more
than 3 seconds or until the display turns
on/off. The compass feature will default to
on with each ignition cycle.
2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive the
vehicle in circles until compass is cali-
brated.
Compass calibration zones (U.S.)
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
263
3
Instruments and Controls
(266,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Compass calibration zones (South Amer-
ica)
3. To adjust for compass zone variance:
(1) Find your current location and
zone number on the map.
(2) Press and hold the “
” switch for
more than 6 seconds or until a zone
number appears in the display.
(3) Once the zone number appears in
the display, toggle the “
” switch
again until your current location zone
number appears. After you stop press-
ing the switch, your new zone number
will be saved. Within a few seconds,
the display will show a compass direc-
tion.
4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-
ged or if the compass appears inaccurate,
recalibrate the compass. Press and hold
the “
” switch for more than 9 seconds or
until a “C” appears in the display. Once a
“C” appears in the display, slowly drive the
vehicle in circles until compass is cali-
brated.
! HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem
s03ap1003
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
provides a convenient way to replace up to
three hand-held radio frequency remotes
used to activate devices such as gate
operators, garage door openers, entry
door locks, security systems, even home
lighting. The below steps are generic
programming instructions; for Genie and
Sommer garage door openers please go
directly to the HomeLink
®
website. Addi-
tional information and programming vi-
deos can be found at www.HomeLink.
com and www.youtube.com/HomeLink-
Gentex.
CAUTION
. Before programming HomeLink
®
to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of
the device to prevent potential
harm or damage.
. When programming a garage
door opener, it is advised to park
outside of the garage.
. Do not use HomeLink
®
with any
garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features
as required by U.S. federal safety
standards (this includes any gar-
age door opener model manufac-
tured before April 1, 1982). A
garage door that cannot detect
an object signaling the door to
stop and reverse does not meet
current U.S. federal safety stan-
dards.
. It is also recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-
held remote (garage door opener
remote) of the device for quicker
and more accurate training.
. Turn the ignition switch to the
“ON” or “ACC” position before
programming and/or operating
HomeLink
®
.
. Keep the hand-held remote (gar-
age door opener remote) of the
device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as
for future HomeLink
®
program-
ming. It is also suggested that
upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed HomeLink
®
buttons
Mirrors
264
(267,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
be erased for security purposes.
Refer to “Erasing HomeLink
®
but-
tons” FP267.
! Programming a New HomeLink
®
button
s03ap100301
1) Indicator Light
2) HomeLink
®
buttons
1. Press and release the HomeLink
®
button that you would like to program.
The HomeLink
®
indicator light will flash
orange slowly (if not, refer to “Erasing
HomeLink
®
buttons” FP267).
1) Garage door opener remote
2. Position the hand-held remote (garage
door opener remote) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink
®
button that
you would like to program.
NOTE
Some hand-held remotes (garage door
opener remotes) may actually train
better at a distance of 6 to 12 inches
(15 to 30 cm). Keep this in mind if you
have difficulty with the programming
process.
3. While the HomeLink
®
indicator light is
flashing orange, press and hold the hand-
held remote button. Continue pressing the
hand-held remote button until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light changes from
orange to green. You may now release the
hand-held remote button.
NOTE
Some devices may require you to re-
place this “Programming a New
HomeLink
®
button” step 3 with proce-
dures noted in the “Gate Operator /
Canadian Programming” section. Refer
to “Gate Operator/Canadian Program-
ming” FP267.
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
265
3
Instruments and Controls
(268,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1) Indicator Light
4. Press the HomeLink
®
button that you
would like to program and observe the
indicator light.
. If the indicator light remains constant
green, your device should operate
when the HomeLink
®
button is
pressed. At this point, if your device
operates, programming is complete.
. If the indicator light rapidly flashes
green, firmly press, hold for two sec-
onds and release the HomeLink
®
but-
ton up to three times to complete the
programming process. At this point if
your device operates, programming is
complete. If the device does not
operate, continue with the next step
of the programming instructions.
1) “Learn” button
5. At the garage door opener motor,
(security gate motor, etc.) locate the
“Learn”, “Smart”, or “Program” button. This
can usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit (see the device’s manual to identify
this button). The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
NOTE
A ladder and/or second person may
simplify the following steps.
6. Firmly press and release the “Learn”,
“Smart”, or “Program” button. You now
have 30 seconds in which to complete step
7.
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for 2 seconds and release the
HomeLink
®
button up to three times. At
this point programming is complete and
your device should operate when the
HomeLink
®
button is pressed and re-
leased.
Mirrors
266
(269,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1) Status Indicators
8. If status indicator arrows appear next
to the indicator light, please refer to
“Garage Door Two-Way Communication”
FP268.
In the event that there are still program-
ming difficulties or questions, additional
HomeLink
®
information and programming
videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For
Genie and Sommer garage door openers
please go directly to the HomeLink
®
website.
! Gate Operator/Canadian Pro-
gramming
s03ap100302
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter remote signals to “time-out”
(or quit) after several seconds of transmis-
sion, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink
®
to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are de-
signed to “time-out” in the same manner.
The indicator LED on the hand-held
remote will go off when the device times
out, indicating that it has finished transmit-
ting.
If you live in Canada or you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator or
garage door opener by using the program-
ming procedures, replace “Programming a
New HomeLink
®
button” step 3 with the
following:
While the HomeLink
®
indicator light is
flashing orange, press and release (“cy-
cle”) your device’s hand-held remote every
two seconds until the HomeLink
®
indicator
light changes from orange to green. You
may now release the hand-held remote
button.
NOTE
If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug
the device during the “cycling” process
to prevent possible overheating.
Proceed with “Programming a New
HomeLink
®
button” step 4 to complete.
! Using HomeLink
®
s03ap100303
To operate, simply press and release the
programmed HomeLink
®
button. Activa-
tion will now occur for the trained device
(i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/
office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held remote of the device may also
be used at any time.
! Erasing HomeLink
®
buttons
s03ap100304
To erase programming from the three
buttons (individual buttons cannot be
erased but can be “reprogrammed” as
outlined below), follow the step noted:
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink
®
buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED
indicator will change from continuously lit
to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons.
Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.
HomeLink
®
is now ready to be pro-
grammed at any time beginning with
“Programming a New HomeLink
®
button”
- step 1.
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
267
3
Instruments and Controls
(270,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink
®
button
s03ap100305
To program a previously trained button,
follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
®
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to slowly
flash orange after 20 seconds. The
HomeLink
®
button can be released at this
point. Proceed with “Programming a New
HomeLink
®
button” - step 3.
3. If you do not complete the program-
ming of a new device to the button, it will
revert to the previously stored program-
ming.
! Garage Door Two-Way Commu-
nication
s03ap100306
HomeLink
®
has the capability of commu-
nicating with your garage door opener.
HomeLink
®
can receive and display “clos-
ing” or “opening” status messages from
compatible garage door opener systems.
At any time, HomeLink
®
can also recall and
display the last recorded status commu-
nicated by the garage door opener to
indicate your garage door being “closed”
or “opened”.
HomeLink
®
has the capability of receiving
this communication from the garage door
opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).
Range may be reduced by obstacles such
as houses or trees. You may have to slow
your vehicle speed to successfully receive
the garage door opener communication.
! Programming Two-Way Commu-
nication
s03ap100307
1) Status Indicators
Within 5 seconds after programming a new
HomeLink
®
button, both of HomeLink’s
garage door status indicators will flash
rapidly green indicating that the garage
door two-way communication has been
enabled. If your garage door status in-
dicators flashed, two-way communication
programming is complete.
If the garage door status indicators do not
flash, additional HomeLink
®
information
and programming videos can be found
online at www.HomeLink.com and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
! Using Two-Way Communication
s03ap100308
1) Status Indicator
Recall and display (at any time) the last
recorded garage door status message
communicated to HomeLink
®
by simulta-
neously pressing HomeLink
®
buttons 1
and 2 for 2 seconds. HomeLink
®
will
display the last recorded status for 3
seconds.
If two-way communication programming is
successful, HomeLink
®
will display the
status of your garage door opener with
arrow indicators (see below).
Mirrors
268
(271,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1) Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking
Orange)
2) Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid
Green)
3) Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blink-
ing Orange)
4) Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid
Green)
! Certification
s03ap100309
In the event that there are still program-
ming difficulties or questions, additional
HomeLink
®
information and programming
videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or
by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline
at 1-800-355-3515.
. U.S.-spec. models
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
269
3
Instruments and Controls
(272,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. Canada-spec. models
HomeLink
®
and the HomeLink
®
house are
registered trademarks of Gentex Corpora-
tion.
WARNING
. When programming the
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem, you may be operating a
garage door opener or other
device. Make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of
the garage door or other device
to prevent potential harm or da-
mage.
. Do not use the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System with a gar-
age door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature
as required by applicable safety
standards. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet these
safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these fea-
tures increases risk of serious
injury or death. For more infor-
mation, consult the HomeLink
®
website at www.homelink.com or
call 1-800-355-3515.
Mirrors
270
(273,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. Mexico-spec. models
& Outside Mirrors
s03ap03
! Convex mirror (passenger side)
s03ap0301
WARNING
Objects look smaller in a convex
mirror and farther away than when
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the
convex mirror to judge the distance
of vehicles behind you when chan-
ging lanes. Use the inside mirror (or
glance backwards) to determine the
actual size and distance of objects
that you view in convex mirror.
CAUTION
Make sure to adjust the mirrors
before driving.
! Remote control mirror switch
s03ap0302
: Select side to adjust
: Direction control
The remote control mirrors operate when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”
position.
1. Turn the control switch to the side that
you want to adjust. “L” is for the left mirror,
“R” is for the right mirror.
2. Move the control switch in the direction
you want to move the mirror.
3. Return the control switch to the neutral
position to prevent unintentional opera-
tion.
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
271
3
Instruments and Controls
(274,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
NOTE
. The mirrors can also be adjusted
manually.
For models with memory function:
. The outside mirror can be adjusted
for approximately 45 seconds after the
following conditions are met.
– The ignition switch is turned to
the “OFF” position.
– The door is unlocked using the
access key fob.
. The outside mirror angle can be
registered with button “1”, “2” or each
of the key fobs. For details, refer to
“Power driver’s seat with synchronized
outside mirrors memory function”
FP33.
. The outside mirror angle can also be
retrieved with the Driver Monitoring
System user information. To do so,
perform user registration in the Driver
Monitoring System settings. Refer to
“Driver Monitoring System” FP227.
! Reverse tilt-down feature (if
equipped)
s03ap030201
When backing the vehicle up, the right
and/or left outside mirrors will turn down-
ward automatically to provide better rear
visibility.
1. Push the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Move the select lever to the R (Re-
verse) position.
3. The outside mirror surface moves
downward.
The outside mirror surface will return to its
original position when the following condi-
tion are met.
. Approximately 9 seconds after the
select lever is moved to any position other
than R (Reverse).
. The ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position.
. The vehicle is running.
NOTE
. The reverse tilt-down mirror angle
can be registered with button “1”, “2”
or each of the key fobs. For details,
refer to “Power driver’s seat with
synchronized outside mirrors memory
function” FP33.
. The reverse tilt-down mirror angle
can also be retrieved with the Driver
Monitoring System user information.
To do so, perform user registration in
the Driver Monitoring System settings.
Refer to “Driver Monitoring System”
FP227.
. The operational/non-operational
setting can be changed by operating
the center information display. For de-
tails, refer to “Car settings” FP220.
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as the front
passenger’s side mirror. The setting of
driver’s side mirror operation can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact
your SUBARU dealer for details.
CAUTION
Depress the brake pedal during the
reverse tilt-down mirror angle ad-
justment.
To adjust the reverse tilt-down mirror
angle, adjust the outside mirror using the
remote control mirror switch while the
reverse tilt-down operates. For details
about how to adjust the outside mirror
angle, refer to “Remote control mirror
switch” FP271.
Memory function:
The angle of the reverse tilt-down mirror
can be registered. Register the position
with button “1”, “2” or each of the access
key fobs and retrieve the position.
For details about registration or retrieval of
a position, refer to “Power driver’s seat
with synchronized outside mirrors memory
function” FP33.
Mirrors
272
(275,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
NOTE
If the seat is moved forward or back-
ward 1.18 in (30 mm) or more, the
reverse tilt-down will move to the
factory default position or the last
position hold.
Hold last position function:
The angle of the reverse tilt-down mirror
can be set to the latest adjusted angle.
The hold last position function operates
when the following condition are met.
. The memory function is not used.
. The seat is moved forward or backward
1.18 in (30 mm) or more.
NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “non-opera-
tional”. This setting can be changed to
“operational” at SUBARU dealers. For
more details, contact a SUBARU dealer.
. If the hold last position function
setting is “non-operation”, the reverse
tilt-down will move to the factory de-
fault position.
! Power folding mirror switch (if
equipped)
s03ap0304
The power folding mirror switch operates
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
To fold the outside mirrors, press the
power folding mirror switch. To unfold the
mirrors, press the switch again.
NOTE
. If the outside mirrors have been
operated (folded or unfolded) manually,
when you turn the ignition switch from
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position to the
“ACC” or “ON” position, the outside
mirrors may be adjusted automatically
depending on the status of the power
folding mirror switch.
. If the outside mirrors have been
manually folded slightly forward of the
regularly unfolded position, when you
turn the ignition switch from the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position to the “ACC”
or “ON” position, the outside mirrors
may automatically fold further forward
depending on the status of the power
folding mirror switch. When this hap-
pens, press the power folding mirror
switch. By doing so, the outside mir-
rors which have been folded to the
furthest forward position will extend to
the regularly unfolded position and
then fold rearward in the usual way. In
order to unfold the outside mirrors,
press the switch again.
. When you fold the outside mirrors
manually, the mirrors may not unfold
when the switch is pressed, even
though the motor operating sound is
heard. When this happens, operate the
power folding mirror switch again.
. When you unfold the outside mirrors
manually, the mirrors may become
wobbly. Be sure to unfold the mirrors
by operating the switch. If the outside
mirrors are still wobbly, fold the mirrors
again and then unfold them by operat-
ing the switch again.
. When the temperature is low, the
outside mirrors may stop during opera-
tion. Push the switch again. When the
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
273
3
Instruments and Controls
(276,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
outside mirrors do not work by operat-
ing the switch, move the outside mir-
rors several times manually. This
makes it possible to operate them by
switch operation.
. When you operate the power folding
mirror switch continuously, it may not
work. This is not a malfunction. Operate
after waiting for a short period of time.
. The outside mirrors can be operated
(folded or unfolded) manually for ap-
proximately 45 seconds after the fol-
lowing conditions are met.
– The ignition switch is turned to
the “OFF” position.
– The door is unlocked using the
access key fob.
! Power folding door mirror func-
tion (if equipped)
s03ap030401
The mirrors are automatically folded when
the power folding mirror switch is in the
mirror unfolding position, the ignition
switch is turned OFF, and the doors are
locked.
The mirrors are automatically unfolded
when the power folding mirror switch is in
the mirror unfolding position and the doors
are unlocked.
NOTE
. The power folding door mirror func-
tion does not operate when the power
folding mirror switch is in the mirror
unfolding position.
. The setting of the power folding door
mirrors function can be changed by
operating the center information dis-
play. For details, refer to “Car settings”
FP220. Also, the setting can be chan-
ged by your SUBARU dealer.
We recommend that you contact your
SUBARU dealer for details.
3-18. Tilt/Telescopic Steering
Wheel
s03bf
WARNING
. Do not adjust the steering wheel
tilt/telescopic position while driv-
ing. This may cause loss of
vehicle control and result in per-
sonal injury.
. If the lever cannot be raised to the
fixed position, adjust the steering
wheel again. It is dangerous to
drive without locking the steering
wheel. This may cause loss of
vehicle control and result in per-
sonal injury.
Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel
274
(277,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1) Tilt adjustment
2) Telescopic adjustment
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to “Front
Seats” FP28.
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked by moving it up and down,
and forward and backward.
3-19. Heated Steering Wheel
System (If Equipped)
s03bm
The Heated Steering Wheel system
warms the steering wheel at a constant
temperature.
1) Heated Steering Wheel switch
2) Indicator light
3) Heated area
To turn on the Heated Steering Wheel
system, pull the Heated Steering Wheel
switch when the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position. Then the steering
wheel will be warmed and the indicator
light on the switch will illuminate. To turn off
the Heated Steering Wheel system, pull
the switch again. Then the indicator light
will turn off.
CAUTION
. Use the Heated Steering Wheel
system with the engine running.
Otherwise, the battery voltage
may drop below the permissible
level and it may not be possible to
start the engine.
. There is a possibility that people
with delicate skin may suffer
slight burns even at low tempera-
tures if they use the Heated
Steering Wheel for a long period
of time. When using the Heated
Steering Wheel, always be sure to
warn the persons concerned.
. Do not cover the Heated Steering
Wheel with an object such as a
steering wheel cover. Doing so
may cause the Heated Steering
Wheel to overheat.
NOTE
. If the surface temperature of the
steering wheel is approximately above
1048F (408C) when the Heated Steering
Wheel system is turned on, the system
will not heat the steering wheel. Then,
the indicator light will continue to
illuminate.
– CONTINUED –
Heated Steering Wheel System
275
3
Instruments and Controls
(278,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. The Heated Steering Wheel system
will automatically turn off approxi-
mately 30 minutes after the system
has been turned on.
3-20. Horn
s03ar
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
Horn
276
(279,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
s04
4-1. Ventilator Control............................................ 278
Center Ventilators ............................................... 278
Side Ventilators .................................................. 278
Rear Ventilators (If Equipped) ............................. 278
4-2. Climate Control Panel .................................... 279
Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models .............................. 279
11.6-Inch Display Models .................................... 282
4-3. Automatic Climate Control Operation........... 285
Sensors.............................................................. 286
4-4. Manual Climate Control.................................. 287
Airflow Mode Selection .......................................287
Temperature Control ...........................................288
Fan Speed Control.............................................. 288
Air Conditioner Control....................................... 289
Air Inlet Selection ............................................... 289
To Turn Off the Climate Control System .............. 289
4-5. Front Seat Heater and Ventilation
(If Equipped).................................................. 290
Front Seat Heater ............................................... 290
Front Seat Ventilation......................................... 290
4-6. Defrosting ........................................................291
4-7. Operating Tips for Heater and Air
Conditioner ....................................................292
Cleaning Ventilator Grille.................................... 292
Efficient Cooling after Parking in Direct
Sunlight ........................................................... 292
Lubrication Oil Circulation in the Refrigerant
Circuit.............................................................. 292
Checking Air Conditioning System before
Summer Season............................................... 292
Cooling and Dehumidifying in High Humidity
and Low Temperature Weather Condition ......... 292
Air Conditioner Compressor Shut-Off When
Engine Is Heavily Loaded ................................. 292
Refrigerant for Your Climate Control System ...... 293
4-8. Air Filtration System .......................................293
Replacing the Cabin Air Filter............................. 293
Climate Control
4
Climate Control
(280,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
4-1. Ventilator Control
s04af
& Center Ventilators
s04af01
Move the tabs to adjust the flow direction.
To close the ventilator, move the tab all the
way down.
& Side Ventilators
s04af02
1) Open
2) Close
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.
To open the ventilator, turn the side grille
open/close wheel upward to the “
”
position.
To close it, turn the wheel downward to the
“
” position.
& Rear Ventilators (If Equipped)
s04af04
1) Open
2) Close
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.
To open the ventilator, turn the rear grille
open/close wheel upward to the “
”
position.
To close it, turn the wheel downward to the
“
” position.
Ventilator Control
278
(281,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
4-2. Climate Control Panel
s04ag
& Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models
s04ag11
1) Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”
FP291.)
2) Rear window and outside mirror defogger
button (if equipped) (Refer to “Defogger
and Deicer” FP261.)
3) Climate control screen (lower display)
4) Temperature control button (Refer to
“Temperature Control” FP288.)
– CONTINUED –
Climate Control Panel
279
4
Climate Control
(282,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Climate control screen
s04ag1101
Climate control screen (lower display)
: Touch the climate control mode indicator
1) Climate control mode indicator
2) Climate control ON/OFF button
3) Fan speed indicator
4) Customizable icon*
5) Airflow mode selection screen
6) Climate control mode select button
7) Fan speed control screen
*: The customizable icon can be changed to
the favorite icon. Refer to “General settings”
FP234.
Climate Control Panel
280
(283,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Temperature control screen
s04ag1102
Climate control screen (lower display)
: Touch the set temperature indicator
1) Set temperature indicator
2) Climate control ON/OFF button
3) Fan speed indicator
4) Customizable icon*
5) Temperature control screen
6) Temperature control bar
*: The customizable icon can be changed to
the favorite icon. Refer to “General settings”
FP234.
– CONTINUED –
Climate Control Panel
281
4
Climate Control
(284,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& 11.6-Inch Display Models
s04ag12
1) Climate control screen
2) Rear window and outside mirror defogger
button (Refer to “Defogger and Deicer”
FP261.)
3) Passenger’s side temperature control
button (Refer to “Temperature Control”
FP288.)
4) Driver’s side temperature control button
(Refer to “Temperature Control” FP288.)
5) Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”
FP291.)
Climate Control Panel
282
(285,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Climate control screen
s04ag1201
: Touch the climate control mode indicator
1) Climate control ON/OFF button
2) Climate control mode indicator
3) Customizable icon*
1
4) Fan speed indicator
5) Airflow mode selection screen
6) Climate control mode select button
7) Fan speed control screen
*1: The customizable icon can be changed to
the favorite icon. Refer to “General set-
tings” FP216.
– CONTINUED –
Climate Control Panel
283
4
Climate Control
(286,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Temperature control screen
s04ag1202
: Touch the temperature control screen
1) Climate control ON/OFF button
2) Climate control mode indicator
3) Customizable icon*
1
4) Fan speed indicator
5) Temperature control bar
6) Temperature control screen
7) Seat heater/ventilation control screen*
2
8) SYNC mode indicator
9) Set temperature indicator (right-hand
side)
10) Front passenger’s seat heater/ventilation
indicator*
2
11) SYNC button
12) Driver’s seat heater/ventilation indica-
tor*
2
13) Set temperature indicator (left-hand side)
*1: The customizable icon can be changed to
the favorite icon. Refer to “General set-
tings” FP216.
*2: For details, refer to “Front Seat Heater and
Ventilation” FP290.
Climate Control Panel
284
(287,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
4-3. Automatic Climate Con-
trol Operation
s04ai
Climate control screen (dual 7.0-inch dis-
play models)
Climate control screen (11.6-inch display
models)
1) Airflow distribution
2) Air inlet selection
3) Air conditioner compressor
4) Fan speed
When the full auto mode is selected, the
following functions are automatically con-
trolled.
. Fan speed
. Airflow distribution
. Air inlet selection
. Air conditioner compressor operation
To activate this mode, perform the follow-
ing.
1. Touch the climate control mode indi-
cator.
2. Touch “AUTO”.
3. Set the preferred temperature. Refer to
“Temperature Control” FP288.
NOTE
. Operate the automatic climate con-
trol system when the engine is running.
. Even when cooling is not necessary,
the air conditioner compressor will
automatically turn on if the temperature
is set much lower than the current
outlet air temperature. Even in this
case, the “A/C” indicator light on the
climate control screen illuminates.
. The air conditioner may not operate
in the following cases:
– When the cabin temperature is
low
– When the ambient temperature
decreases close to 328F (08C)
. The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.
. If something other than temperature
control is operated while the display is
in full auto mode, the “FULL” indicator
will turn off and the “AUTO” indicator
light will remain illuminated. You can
then manually control the system as
desired using the climate control
screen. To change the system back to
full auto mode, touch “AUTO”.
– CONTINUED –
Automatic Climate Control Operation
285
4
Climate Control
(288,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
To turn off the climate control system,
touch the climate control ON/OFF button.
At this time, the air inlet selection mode will
differ depending on the auto mode and
manual mode.
Auto mode: Changes to the outside air
circulation mode.
Manual mode: Continues the mode when
the climate control mode is set to OFF.
& Sensors
s04ai03
1) Solar sensor
2) Interior air temperature sensor
The automatic climate control system
employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly
and become damaged, the system may
not be able to control the interior tempera-
ture correctly. To avoid damaging the
sensors, observe the following precau-
tions:
– Do not subject the sensors to impact.
– Keep water away from the sensors.
– Do not cover the sensors.
Automatic Climate Control Operation
286
(289,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
4-4. Manual Climate Control
s04ab
& Airflow Mode Selection
s04ab04
Select the preferred airflow mode by the
following operation.
Via the climate control screen:
1. Touch the climate control mode indi-
cator.
2. Touch the preferred airflow mode.
Airflow modes are as follows.
A) Models with rear ventilators
Ventilation: Instrument panel outlets
A) Models with rear ventilators
Ventilation 2: Instrument panel outlets and
foot outlets
A) Models with rear ventilators
Bi-level: Instrument panel outlets and the
foot outlets
A) Models with rear ventilators
Heat: Foot outlets, both side outlets of the
instrument panel and some through wind-
shield defroster outlets (A small amount of
air flows to the windshield and both side
windows to prevent fogging.)
– CONTINUED –
Manual Climate Control
287
4
Climate Control
(290,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
A) Models with rear ventilators
Heat-def: Windshield defroster outlets,
foot outlets and both side outlets of the
instrument panel
& Temperature Control
s04ab05
Perform the following operation to regulate
the temperature of airflow from the air
outlets.
Temperature control buttons:
Press the temperature control button to the
blue side (cool) or the red side (warm).
Temperature control screen:
1. Touch the set temperature indicator.
2. Touch and move the temperature con-
trol bar.
! Max A/C mode
s04ab0503
For quicker cooling, touch “MAX A/C” on
the climate control mode select button or
customizable icon.
When the Max A/C mode is on, the
following settings will be changed auto-
matically.
. The air conditioner will turn on.
. The temperature will be set on the
lowest.
. The fan speed will be set on the
maximum speed.
. The air inlet will be set to the recircula-
tion mode.
. The airflow mode setting will be set to
the ventilation mode.
To turn off the Max A/C mode and return to
the previous setting, touch “MAX A/C”
again.
! SYNC mode (11.6-inch display
models)
s04ab0505
When the SYNC mode is turned on, both
the driver’s and passenger’s side tem-
peratures are synchronized using the
driver’s side temperature control button
and temperature control display.
1. Touch the set temperature indicator.
2. Touch “SYNC” to turn the SYNC mode
on or off.
The SYNC mode indicator will turn white.
Touch “SYNC” again, press the passen-
ger’s side temperature control button or
operate the passenger’s side temperature
control bar to cancel the SYNC mode. The
SYNC mode indicator will be grayed out. In
this case, temperature control on the
driver’s side and passenger’s side will be
separated. The temperature will be con-
trolled individually using the driver’s and
passenger’s temperature control button
and the driver’s and passenger’s tempera-
ture control bar.
& Fan Speed Control
s04ab06
Select the preferred fan speed by the
following operation.
Via the fan speed indicator:
Touch
or on the climate control
screen.
Manual Climate Control
288
(291,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Via the fan speed control screen:
1. Touch the climate control mode indi-
cator
2. Touch the preferred fan speed. It is
also possible to change the fan speed by
dragging.
& Air Conditioner Control
s04ab07
The air conditioner operates only when the
engine is running.
Perform the following operation while the
fan is in operation to turn on the air
conditioner.
. If “A/C” is displayed on the customiz-
able icon, touch “A/C”. When the air
conditioner is on, the “A/C” indicator
illuminates.
. If a customizable icon other than “A/C”
is displayed, touch the climate control
mode indicator. Then touch “A/C” on the
climate control mode select button. When
the air conditioner is on, “A/C” will turn
blue.
To turn off the air conditioner, touch “A/C”
again. The indicator light will turn off or it
will be grayed out.
NOTE
For efficient defogging or dehumidify-
ing in cold weather, turn on the air
conditioner. However, if the ambient
temperature decreases to approxi-
mately 328F (08C), the air conditioner
and dehumidification system may not
work properly.
& Air Inlet Selection
s04ab08
Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet
selection button.
Recirculation mode: Interior air is recir-
culated inside the vehicle. This mode is
used for the following cases.
. When driving on a dusty road
. When you want cooling performance to
increase (for example, in particularly hot
weather)
Perform the following operation to select
this mode.
.
is displayed on the customizable
icon:
(1) Touch
.
.
is not displayed on the customiz-
able icon:
(1) Touch the climate control mode
indicator.
(2) Touch
on the climate control
mode select button.
will be displayed on the climate control
mode indicator.
Outside air circulation mode: Outside
air is drawn into the passenger compart-
ment. This mode is used for the following
cases.
. When the road is no longer dusty
. When the interior has cooled to a
comfortable temperature
Perform the same operation as the recir-
culation mode to change the mode.
will be displayed on the climate control
mode indicator.
WARNING
Continued operation in the recircu-
lation mode may fog up the win-
dows. Switch to the outside air
circulation mode as soon as the
outside dusty condition clears.
& To Turn Off the Climate Con-
trol System
s04ab10
To turn off the climate control system,
touch the climate control ON/OFF button.
Manual Climate Control
289
4
Climate Control
(292,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
4-5. Front Seat Heater and
Ventilation (If Equipped)
s04al
& Front Seat Heater
s04al01
The seat heater operates when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
1) Front seat display
2) Seat heater selector icon
3) Front passenger’s seat heater/ventilation
indicator
4) Driver’s seat heater/ventilation indicator
1. Touch the seat heater/ventilation in-
dicator on the climate control screen.
2. Touch the seat heater selector icon on
the driver/passenger climate screen. Each
time you touch the icon, the mode will
change as follows.
HIGH:
3 indicator lights are illuminated.
MID:
2 indicator lights are illuminated.
LOW:
1 indicator light is illuminated.
OFF:
All indicator lights turn off.
When in LOW mode, touch the icon again
to turn all indicators OFF.
Selecting HIGH mode will cause the seat
to heat up quicker.
Holding and releasing the seat heater icon
turns the seat heater OFF in any mode.
NOTE
The front seat heater function cannot
be used simultaneously with the seat
ventilation (if equipped).
& Front Seat Ventilation
s04al02
The front seat ventilation operates when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
1) Front seat display
2) Seat ventilation selector icon
3) Front passenger’s seat heater/ventilation
indicator
4) Driver’s seat heater/ventilation indicator
1. Touch the seat heater/ventilation in-
dicator on the climate control screen.
2. Touch the seat ventilation selector icon
on the driver/passenger climate screen.
Each time you touch the icon, the mode
will change as follows.
Front Seat Heater and Ventilation
290
(293,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
HIGH:
3 indicator lights are illuminated.
MID:
2 indicator lights are illuminated.
LOW:
1 indicator light is illuminated.
OFF:
All indicator lights turn off.
When in LOW mode, touch the icon again
to turn all indicators OFF.
Holding and releasing the seat ventilation
selector icon turns the seat ventilation OFF
in any mode.
4-6. Defrosting
s04ah
To defrost or dehumidify the windshield
and front door windows, perform the
following procedures.
. To select the “
” mode, press the
defroster button.
. To select the “
” mode, touch “ ” on
the airflow mode selection screen.
NOTE
. When the “ ” or “ ” mode is
selected, the air conditioner compres-
sor operates automatically regardless
of the position of the air conditioner
button to defrost the windshield more
quickly. However, the indicator on the
air conditioner button may not illumi-
nate. At the same time, the air inlet
selection is automatically set to the
outside air circulation mode.
. After defrosting the windshield by
pressing the defroster button “
”,
pressing the button again returns the
system to the setting that had been
selected before the defroster was acti-
vated.
Defrosting
291
4
Climate Control
(294,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
4-7. Operating Tips for Heater
and Air Conditioner
s04ad
& Cleaning Ventilator Grille
s04ad01
1) Front ventilator inlet grille
2) Condenser
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille
free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.
Since the condenser is located in front of
the radiator, this area should be kept clean
because cooling performance is impaired
by any accumulation of insects and leaves
on the condenser.
& Efficient Cooling after Park-
ing in Direct Sunlight
s04ad02
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes to
allow outside air to circulate into the
heated interior. This results in quicker
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
windows closed during the operation of the
air conditioner for maximum cooling effi-
ciency.
& Lubrication Oil Circulation in
the Refrigerant Circuit
s04ad03
Operate the air conditioner compressor at
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving
speeds) a few minutes each month during
the off-season to circulate its oil.
& Checking Air Conditioning
System before Summer Sea-
son
s04ad04
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-
ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper
operation each spring. Have the air con-
ditioning system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
& Cooling and Dehumidifying in
High Humidity and Low Tem-
perature Weather Condition
s04ad05
Under certain weather conditions (high
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
small amount of water vapor emission
from the air outlets may be noticed. This
condition is normal and does not indicate
any problem with the air conditioning
system.
& Air Conditioner Compressor
Shut-Off When Engine Is
Heavily Loaded
s04ad06
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
the air conditioner compressor is designed
to temporarily shut off during air condi-
tioner operation whenever the accelerator
is fully depressed such as during rapid
acceleration or when driving on a steep
upgrade.
Operating Tips for Heater and Air Conditioner
292
(295,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Refrigerant for Your Climate
Control System
s04ad07
1) Air conditioner label
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly
refrigerant R-1234yf (HFO-1234yf).
Before adding, changing or checking the
refrigerant, check the air conditioner label
in the location shown in the illustration to
confirm which type of refrigerant is used in
your vehicle.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for service.
Repairs needed as a result of using the
wrong refrigerant are not covered under
warranty.
4-8. Air Filtration System
s04ae
Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
equipped with an air filtration system.
Replace the cabin air filter according to
the replacement schedule found in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.” This
schedule should be followed to maintain
the filter’s dust collection ability. Under
extremely dusty conditions, the filter
should be replaced more frequently. Have
your filter checked or replaced by your
SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use
only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
CAUTION
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
following occurs, even if it is not yet
time to change the filter.
. Reduction of the airflow through
the vents.
. Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air condi-
tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
mance if not properly maintained.
& Replacing the Cabin Air Filter
s04ae01
1. Remove the glove box.
(1) Open the glove box.
(2) Remove the damper shaft from the
glove box.
– CONTINUED –
Air Filtration System
293
4
Climate Control
(296,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
(3) Push both sides of the glove box
inward to unlock the stoppers and then
pull down the glove box as far as it will
go.
(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally
and remove the hinge portion. When
doing this, be careful not to damage
the hinge.
2. Remove the cabin air filter according to
the following procedure in order to prevent
dust on the air cleaner from falling to the
inside of its housing.
(1) Pinch both tabs and remove the
filter cover.
(2) Gently tilt down the end of the filter
and slowly pull it out 0.4 in (1 cm).
(3) Slowly pull out the rest of the filter.
3. Replace the cabin air filter with a new
one and then reinstall the cover.
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.
Air Filtration System
294
(297,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect
the damper shaft.
5. Close the glove box.
Air Filtration System
295
4
Climate Control
(298,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(299,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
s05
5-1. Antenna ........................................................... 298
Printed Antenna..................................................298
Roof Antenna..................................................... 298
5-2. Audio Set .........................................................298
Audio
5
Audio
(300,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
5-1. Antenna
s05aa
& Printed Antenna
s05aa01
CAUTION
Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface of
the window on which the antenna is
printed. Doing so may damage the
antenna printed on the window.
The antenna is printed on the inner surface
of the rear window glass.
NOTE
Antenna performance will deteriorate
significantly if you apply tinting film or
any other material over the antenna
portion of the rear window glass.
& Roof Antenna
s05aa03
The satellite radio antenna and telematics
antenna (if equipped) are installed in the
center of the roof at the rear.
5-2. Audio Set
s05ac
If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine
SUBARU navigation system or audio
system, refer to the separate navigation/
audio Owner’s Manual for details.
Antenna
298
(301,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(302,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(303,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
s06
6-1. Interior Light ................................................... 302
Dome Light......................................................... 302
Map Lights ......................................................... 302
Cargo Area Light (Outback) ................................ 303
OFF Delay Timer................................................. 303
6-2. Sun Visors....................................................... 303
Vanity Mirror with Light....................................... 304
6-3. Storage Compartment .................................... 304
Glove Box ..........................................................305
Center Console................................................... 305
Overhead Console ..............................................305
6-4. Cup Holder ...................................................... 306
Front Passenger’s Cup Holder ............................ 306
Rear Passenger’s Cup Holder ............................. 307
6-5. Bottle Holders ................................................. 307
6-6. Accessory Power Outlets .............................. 308
6-7. USB Power Supply ......................................... 310
How to Use the USB Power Supply ..................... 310
6-8. Ashtray (Dealer Option) ..................................311
6-9. Assist Grip .......................................................312
6-10. Coat Hook ......................................................312
6-11. Shopping Bag Hook ......................................313
Legacy............................................................... 313
Outback ............................................................. 313
6-12. Floor Mat ........................................................314
6-13. Lifting Cargo Cover (Outback –
If Equipped) ...................................................314
To Install the Cover Housing .............................. 315
Using the Cover ................................................. 315
To Remove the Cover Housing ........................... 317
To Stow the Cover.............................................. 318
To Take Out the Stowed Cover ........................... 319
6-14. Convenient Tie-Down Hooks (Outback) ......319
6-15. Adjustable Storage Net (Outback) ...............320
6-16. Under-Floor Storage Compartment..............320
Interior Equipment
6
Interior Equipment
(304,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
6-1. Interior Light
s06aa
CAUTION
When leaving your vehicle, make
sure the lights are turned off to
avoid battery discharge.
& Dome Light
s06aa01
1) ON
2) DOOR
3) OFF
The dome light switch has the following
positions:
ON: The light turns on.
OFF: The light turns off.
DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-
matically when any of the doors (for
Outback, including the rear gate) is
opened. Several seconds after all of the
doors (including the rear gate) are closed,
the dome light gradually turns off. For
details, refer to “OFF Delay Timer” FP303.
& Map Lights
s06aa06
! Map light switches
s06aa0606
To turn on the map light, press the lens.
To turn it off, press the lens again.
CAUTION
Do not keep watching the light
source because they use LEDs.
Doing so could damage your eyes.
! Door interlock switch
s06aa0602
1) Door interlock switch
The door interlock switch has the following
positions.
OFF: The map lights do not illuminate
automatically in conjunction with a door
opening. However, the lights can be turned
on manually by pressing the map light
lens.
DOOR: The map lights illuminate auto-
matically when any of the doors (other than
the rear gate or trunk lid) is opened even
Interior Light
302
(305,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
while the map light is off. Several seconds
after all of the doors (other than the rear
gate or trunk lid) are closed, the map lights
gradually turn off. For details, refer to “OFF
Delay Timer” FP303.
& Cargo Area Light (Outback)
s06aa02
1) ON
2) OFF
3) DOOR
The cargo area light switch has the
following positions.
ON: The light turns on.
OFF: The light turns off.
DOOR: The light illuminates only when the
rear gate is opened. The light gradually
turns off several seconds after the rear
gate is closed. For details, refer to “OFF
Delay Timer” FP303.
& OFF Delay Timer
s06aa07
The following lights have an automatic
illumination function.
. Dome light
. Map lights
. Trunk (Legacy)
. Cargo area light (Outback)
When the interior light switch is set to the
“DOOR” position, the light will automati-
cally turn on and off depending on the
locking and unlocking of the doors, the
opening and closing of the doors, as well
as the position of the ignition switch.
NOTE
The setting for the period of time in
which the lights remain on (OFF delay
timer) can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for details. Also, the setting can be
changed by operating the center infor-
mation display. For details, refer to “Car
settings” FP220 (11.6-inch display
models) or “Vehicle setting icons”
FP239 (dual 7.0-inch display models).
6-2. Sun Visors
s06ac
To block out glare, swing down the visors.
To use the sun visor at a side window,
swing it down and move it sideways.
With the sun visor positioned over the side
– CONTINUED –
Sun Visors
303
6
Interior Equipment
(306,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
window, you can slide the sun visor toward
the rear to prevent glare through the gap
between the sun visor and center pillar. To
slide the sun visor, pull it toward the rear of
the vehicle. When you have finished
sliding it, push it toward the front of the
vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not slide the sun visor over the
windshield. The slided sun visor
would obstruct your view of the
rearview mirror.
& Vanity Mirror with Light
s06ac02
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid
being blinded by glare.
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
The lights beside the vanity mirror illumi-
nate when the mirror cover is opened.
NOTE
Use of the vanity mirror light for a long
period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.
6-3. Storage Compartment
s06ad
CAUTION
. Always keep the storage com-
partment closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden stops or an
accident.
. Do not store the following items
in the storage compartment.
Otherwise, it may cause a fire or
accident.
– Spray cans, containers with
flammable or corrosive li-
quids or any other dangerous
items.
– Plastic or other heat-vulner-
able or flammable articles
such as a lighter.
Storage Compartment
304
(307,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Glove Box
s06ad01
1) Lock
2) Unlock
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To
close it, push the lid firmly upward.
To lock the glove box, insert the key and
turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,
insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, use the emer-
gency key to lock or unlock the glove box.
NOTE
The emergency key is directional. If the
key cannot be inserted, change the
direction that the grooved side is facing
and insert it again.
& Center Console
s06ad02
The center console box provides a storage
space.
1) Upper lid opening lever
2) Upper and lower lid opening lever (dotted
surface)
The center console box has a two-layer
structure consisting of an upper compart-
ment and lower compartment.
& Overhead Console
s06ad04
To open the console, push on the lid lightly
and it will automatically open.
WARNING
Do not use the overhead console
while driving. Doing so may distract
you from the road conditions ahead
and cause an accident that may
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION
. Before operating this vehicle, en-
sure that the overhead console is
closed.
– CONTINUED –
Storage Compartment
305
6
Interior Equipment
(308,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. When your vehicle is parked in
the sun or on a warm day, the
inside of the overhead console
heats up. Avoid storing plastic or
other heat vulnerable or flam-
mable articles such as a lighter
in the overhead console.
. Do not pull the lid when opening
the overhead console.
There is the risk that the over-
head console may be damaged.
6-4. Cup Holder
s06ae
CAUTION
Take care to avoid spills. Beverages,
if hot, might burn you and/or your
passengers. Spilled beverages may
also damage upholstery, carpets or
audio equipment.
& Front Passenger’s Cup
Holder
s06ae01
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder
while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an acci-
dent.
. Take care not to spill a beverage
on the select lever or any
switch(es) in the adjacent area. If
the beverage is spilled, it may
cause a malfunction of the select
lever and/or switch(es).
1) Spacer
The dual cup holder is built into the center
console.
Place a spacer in it before putting in a
small cup or can.
Cup Holder
306
(309,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Rear Passenger’s Cup Holder
s06ae02
A dual cup holder is built into the armrest.
CAUTION
When a cup containing a beverage is
in the cup holder, do not fold down
or recline any seat. Otherwise, the
beverage could spill while driving
and, if the beverage is hot, it could
burn you and/or your passengers.
6-5. Bottle Holders
s06av
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a bottle from the
bottle holder or put a bottle in the
holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
bottle holder, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could burn
you and/or your passengers.
The bottle holder equipped on each door
trim can be used to hold beverage bottles
and other items.
Bottle Holders
307
6
Interior Equipment
(310,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
6-6. Accessory Power Out-
lets
s06af
Power outlet in the glove box
Power outlet in the center console (if
equipped)
Power outlet in the cargo area (Outback)
Accessory power outlets are provided in
the glove box, center console and cargo
area. Electrical power (12 V DC) from the
battery is available at any of the outlets
when the ignition switch is in either the
“ACC” or “ON” position.
You can use an in-vehicle electrical appli-
ance by connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appli-
ance that can be connected is 120 W. Do
not use an appliance which exceeds the
indicated wattage for each outlet.
When using appliances connected to two
or more outlets simultaneously, the total
power consumed by them must not ex-
ceed 120 W.
CAUTION
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette
lighter in the accessory power
outlet.
. Do not place any foreign objects,
especially metal ones such as
coins or aluminum foil, into the
accessory power outlet. That
could cause a short circuit. Al-
ways put the cap on the acces-
sory power outlet when it is not in
use.
. Use only electrical appliances
which are designed for 12 V DC.
The maximum power rating of an
appliance that can be connected
is 120 W. Do not use an appliance
which exceeds the indicated wat-
tage for each outlet.
When using appliances con-
nected to two or more outlets
simultaneously, the total power
consumed by them must not
exceed 120 W. Overloading the
accessory power outlet can
cause a short circuit. Do not use
double adapters or more than
one electrical appliance.
. If the plug on your electric appli-
ance is either too loose or too
Accessory Power Outlets
308
(311,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
tight for the accessory power
outlet, this can result in a poor
contact or cause the plug to get
stuck. Only use plugs that fit
properly.
. Use of an electric appliance in the
accessory power outlet for a long
period of time while the engine is
not running can cause battery
discharge.
. Before driving your vehicle, make
sure that the plug and the cord on
your electrical appliance will not
interfere with your shifting gears
and operating the accelerator
and brake pedals. If they do, do
not use the electrical appliance
while driving.
Power outlet in the glove box
Power outlet in the center console (if
equipped)
NOTE
The power outlets in the center console
and the glove box can be used even
when the lid is closed, because there
are gaps that allow the cords to come
out. Pass the cord of the electrical
appliance through this gap.
Accessory Power Outlets
309
6
Interior Equipment
(312,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
6-7. USB Power Supply
s06ay
CAUTION
. The specification of a USB term-
inal that can be used is the A-
type. If a different specification of
terminal is connected, power
supply or charging may not be
possible, or the device may mal-
function.
. There is a risk that a connected
device may malfunction or data
may be damaged. The connec-
tion of a device shall be per-
formed at your responsibility.
. To avoid an electric shock or a
malfunction, observe the follow-
ing precautions.
– Do not connect a USB hub.
– Do not insert any metal or
other foreign object into the
USB terminal.
– Do not spill water or other
liquid on the USB terminal.
. Be careful not to pull the con-
nected cable. Doing so could
break the USB terminal and the
connected device.
. If a device is connected for a long
time when the engine is not
running, doing so may cause the
risk of a discharged battery. Even
when the engine is running, we
recommend that you do not con-
nect a device for an unnecessa-
rily long time.
. Do not connect a malfunctioning
device. Doing so may cause the
risk of smoke and fire.
NOTE
. The rated voltage of each USB
terminal is 5 V/2.1 A (total 4.2 A). For
details about the maximum rated
power, refer to “How to Use the USB
Power Supply” FP310. Before con-
necting a device, be sure to read the
instruction manual of the device and
check whether or not this specification
of the output is supported by the
device. If a device that requires power
exceeding the maximum rating is con-
nected, power supply or charging may
not be possible. Even if charging could
be completed, the time required for
charging may be longer than when the
genuine charger for that device is used.
. Depending on the device, charging
may be possible only when a special
cable is used. In this case, be sure to
connect the device using the special
cable.
. When a device that communicates
with a PC is connected, power supply
or charging may not be possible.
. When connect a device for charging,
disconnect the device promptly after
charging is completed.
& How to Use the USB Power
Supply
s06ay01
Front seat USB power supply (an audio
device can be connected and used)
USB Power Supply
310
(313,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Console USB power supply (charge only)
(if equipped)
Use the USB terminal to use or charge an
electronic device.
When using the USB, open the USB power
supply cover. After use, close it.
When the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position, the power can be supplied
to the electronic device. Up to 5 V/2.1 A
can be supplied from each terminal (total
of 4.2 A).
6-8. Ashtray (Dealer Option)
s06ag
CAUTION
. Do not use ashtrays as waste
receptacles or leave a lighted
cigarette in an ashtray. This could
cause a fire.
. Always extinguish matches and
cigarettes before putting them
into the ashtray, and then close
the ashtray securely. If you keep
the ashtray open, the fire of the
cigarette may spread to another
cigarette butt and start a fire.
. Do not put flammable material in
the ashtray.
. Do not leave a lot of cigarette
butts in the ashtray.
NOTE
Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-
mulate around the hinges of the ash-
tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a
toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended
implement.
The portable ashtray can be installed in
each cup holder or bottle holder. For the
locations of the cup holders, refer to “Cup
Holder” FP306. For the locations of the
bottle holders, refer to “Bottle Holders”
FP307.
When using the ashtray, open the lid of the
ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the
ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.
Ashtray (Dealer Option)
311
6
Interior Equipment
(314,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
6-9. Assist Grip
s06bd
1) Assist grip
The assist grip is to be held to support the
body of the passengers when they are in
the seat and the vehicle is moving.
WARNING
Do not hold the assist grip when
getting up from the seat. Holding
and pulling the assist grip in the
wrong way could break the grip and
possibly cause injury.
CAUTION
Do not attach heavy objects to the
assist grip. Doing so could break it
and damage the object.
6-10. Coat Hook
s06ah
WARNING
Obey the following instructions.
. Do not hang coat hangers or
other hard or pointed objects on
the coat hooks. Hang clothing
directly on the coat hooks with-
out using hangers.
. Before hanging clothing on the
coat hooks, make sure there are
no pointed objects in the pock-
ets.
If these instructions are ignored, the
following may occur in sudden
stops or in a collision.
Assist Grip
312
(315,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. Serious injuries by the items
thrown through the cabin
. Incorrect SRS curtain airbag de-
ployment
CAUTION
Never hang anything on the coat
hook that might obstruct the driver’s
view or that could cause injury in
sudden stops or in a collision. And
do not hang items on the coat hook
that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.
The coat hook is attached to each rear
passenger’s assist grip.
6-11. Shopping Bag Hook
s06ai
& Legacy
s06ai01
CAUTION
Do not hang items on the shopping
bag hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or
more.
A shopping bag hook is attached to each
inner side wall of the trunk near the trunk
lid opening.
& Outback
s06ai02
CAUTION
Do not hang items on the shopping
bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or
more.
A shopping bag hook is attached to each
side of the cargo area.
To use the hook, push the upper portion
and the shopping bag hook will appear.
Store the hook after using it.
Shopping Bag Hook
313
6
Interior Equipment
(316,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
6-12. Floor Mat
s06aj
CAUTION
If the floor mat slips forward and
interferes with the movement of the
pedals during driving, it could cause
an accident. Observe the following
precautions to prevent the floor mat
from slipping forward.
. Be sure to use a genuine
SUBARU floor mat designed with
grommets in the correct loca-
tions.
. Make sure that the driver’s floor
mat is placed back in its proper
location and is correctly secured
on its retaining pins.
. Do not use more than one floor
mat.
Retaining pins are located on the driver’s
side floor.
The floor mat should be properly secured
using the built-in grommets, by placing the
grommets over the pins and pushing them
downward.
6-13. Lifting Cargo Cover
(Outback – If Equipped)
s06ak
The Lifting Cargo Cover is provided to
cover the cargo area and to protect its
contents from direct sunlight.
The cover also has the practicability of its
easy lift-up function, eliminating the need
to rewind the cover all the way when
accessing the cargo.
This cover can be detached to make room
for additional cargo.
1) Cargo area cover
2) Cover housing
3) Front cover
4) Front cover rod
Floor Mat
314
(317,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& To Install the Cover Housing
s06ak05
1. Insert the left side cover housing end
into the retainer, then insert the right cover
housing end into the right retainer.
Make sure both ends are clicked into the
retainers.
NOTE
If the label on the cover housing is
placed on the top, the cover housing
will be installed in reverse and it will not
be affixed to the vehicle body.
2. Align the right side of the front cover
rod end with a triangle mark on the cargo
area trim.
NOTE
When the rear seatbacks are reclined,
align the front cover rod to the rear
triangle mark.
3. Push the front cover rod on the right
side against the cargo area trim to shorten
the front cover rod.
4. Once the right side is aligned, align the
left side to a triangle mark on the cargo
area trim to fix the front cover in place.
CAUTION
When reclining the rear seatback,
move the front cover backward so
that the cover is not damaged
& Using the Cover
s06ak01
WARNING
Do not place anything on the ex-
tended cover. Putting excessive
weight on the extended cover can
break it and the object on the cover
could tumble forward in the event of
a sudden stop or collision. This
could cause serious injury.
CAUTION
Be careful not to scratch the rear
gate stays while extending and re-
winding the cover. Scratches on the
stays could cause leakage of gas
from the stays, which may result in
their inability to hold the rear gate
open.
– CONTINUED –
Lifting Cargo Cover (Outback – If Equipped)
315
6
Interior Equipment
(318,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! To extend the cover
s06ak0101
A Stopper
1) Tilt up
2) Pull out
1. Hold the cover by the handle in the
center, tilt it up and pull it out to free the
stoppers.
2. Pull out the cover by the handle in the
center to extend it. Then insert the
stoppers into the catches as shown.
! To rewind the cover
s06ak0103
1. Hold the cover by the handle in the
center and pull it toward you, then slightly
lower it to free the stoppers in the catches.
A) Stopper
1) Rewind
2) Tilt up
2. Slowly rewind the cover completely.
Then tilt the cover up by the handle to hook
the stoppers.
Lifting Cargo Cover (Outback – If Equipped)
316
(319,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
CAUTION
Do not leave the cover dangling.
Make sure the stoppers are hooked
on to the cover housing. Otherwise
the cover may be torn and damaged.
! To lift the cover
s06ak0102
CAUTION
Do not drive with the cover lifted up.
Doing so could obstruct the rear-
ward view.
1. Push down the handle in the center to
lift the cover up.
The stoppers will slide up the grooves and
stop at the top.
2. To lower the lifted cover, hold the cover
by the handle and pull it back into to the
catches.
& To Remove the Cover Hous-
ing
s06ak02
1. Slowly rewind the cover completely.
Then tilt the cover up by the handle to hook
the stoppers.
2. Push the front cover rod on the right
side against the cargo area trim to shorten
the front cover rod.
3. Remove the front cover and place it on
the cover housing.
– CONTINUED –
Lifting Cargo Cover (Outback – If Equipped)
317
6
Interior Equipment
(320,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
4. Hold down the button on the right-hand
cargo area trim and lift up the right-hand
cover housing end.
5. Gently slide the left-hand cover end out
to the right then remove the cover housing.
& To Stow the Cover
s06ak11
The cover can be stowed in the under-floor
storage.
1. To open the cargo floor lid, pull the
handle up.
2. Use the hook provided on the back to
hang the cargo floor lid open.
The hook can be hanged onto the opening
of the rear gate.
3. Remove the left and right corners of
the cargo floor lid.
Lifting Cargo Cover (Outback – If Equipped)
318
(321,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
4. Stow the cover housing in the cargo
area under-floor storage.
NOTE
To make enough room for the cover
when stowing, first insert the right-
hand side into the ditch on the cargo
area trim.
& To Take Out the Stowed Cover
s06ak10
1. Raise the cover.
2. Take out the cover housing by lifting it
toward you.
6-14. Convenient Tie-Down
Hooks (Outback)
s06am
CAUTION
The convenient tie-down hooks are
designed only for securing light
cargo. Never try to secure cargo that
exceeds the capacity of the hooks.
The maximum load capacity is 110
lbs (50 kg) per hook.
The cargo area is equipped with several
tie-down hooks so that cargo can be
secured with a luggage net or ropes.
– CONTINUED –
Convenient Tie-Down Hooks (Outback)
319
6
Interior Equipment
(322,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
When using the tie-down hooks, turn them
down out of the storing recesses. When
not in use, put the hooks up into the storing
recesses.
6-15. Adjustable Storage Net
(Outback)
s06be
There is an adjustable storage net in the
cargo area. Push the net downward to
expand the cargo area.
6-16. Under-Floor Storage
Compartment
s06an
The subfloor storage compartment is
located under the floor of the trunk or
cargo area and can be used to store small
items. To open the lid, pull the tab or
handle up.
NOTE
When storing a flat tire, put the subfloor
storage in the trunk or cargo area.
CAUTION
. Always keep the lid of the sub-
floor storage compartment
closed while driving to reduce
the risk of injury in the event of
sudden stop or an accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the subfloor storage
compartment.
Adjustable Storage Net (Outback)
320
(323,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Legacy
Outback
For Outback, hang the hook provided on
the underside of the lid on the rear edge of
the roof to keep the lid open.
NOTE
The lid cannot be hooked while the
Lifting Cargo Cover is being used.
Rewind the cover completely to open
the lid.
Under-Floor Storage Compartment
321
6
Interior Equipment
(324,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(325,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
s07
7-1. Fuel .................................................................. 326
Fuel Requirements..............................................326
Fuel Filler Lid and Cap........................................ 328
7-2. State Emission Testing (U.S. Only) ............... 332
7-3. Preparing to Drive .......................................... 333
7-4. Starting and Stopping the Engine (Models
without Push-Button Ignition Switch) ......... 334
General Precautions When Starting/Stopping
Engine..............................................................334
Starting Engine................................................... 334
Stopping the Engine ........................................... 335
Steering Lock ..................................................... 336
7-5. Starting and Stopping Engine (Models
with Push-Button Start System) .................. 336
Safety Precautions..............................................336
Operating Range for Push-Button Start System...336
Starting Engine................................................... 336
Stopping Engine................................................. 338
When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate
Properly ........................................................... 338
Steering Lock ..................................................... 338
7-6. Remote Engine Start System
(Dealer Option) .............................................. 339
Remote Engine Starter Transceiver (Fob) ............ 339
Alternate Operation Method for Models with
“Keyless Access with Push-Button Start
System” ........................................................... 343
Entering the Vehicle While It Is Running via
Remote Start (Models without “Keyless Access
with Push-Button Start System”)....................... 343
Entering the Vehicle While It Is Running via
Remote Start (Models with “Keyless Access
with Push-Button Start System”) ...................... 344
Entering the Vehicle Following Remote Engine
Start Shutdown ................................................ 344
Pre-heating or Pre-cooling the Interior of
the Vehicle ....................................................... 344
Remote Transmitter Program (Remote Engine
Starter Transceiver).......................................... 344
System Maintenance .......................................... 345
Certification for Remote Engine Starter .............. 346
7-7. Continuously Variable Transmission .............347
Continuously Variable Transmission Features..... 347
Select Lever....................................................... 348
Shift Lock Function............................................ 349
Selection of Manual Mode .................................. 351
Driving Tips ....................................................... 352
7-8. SI-DRIVE (If Equipped)....................................353
Intelligent (I) Mode ............................................. 353
Sport Sharp (S#) Mode ....................................... 353
SI-DRIVE Switches ............................................. 353
7-9. Power Steering ................................................354
7-10. Braking ...........................................................355
Braking Tips ...................................................... 355
Brake System..................................................... 355
Disc Brake Pad Wear Warning Indicators............ 356
7-11. ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ....................356
ABS Self-Check.................................................. 357
ABS Warning Light............................................. 357
Starting and Operating
7
Starting and Operating
(326,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
7-12. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
System ........................................................... 357
EBD System Malfunctions................................... 357
7-13. Vehicle Dynamics Control System .............. 358
Vehicle Dynamics Control System Monitor .......... 359
To Turn On/Off the Vehicle Dynamics Control
System ............................................................. 359
7-14. X-MODE (Outback)........................................ 360
To Activate/Deactivate the X-MODE .....................361
Hill Descent Control Function ............................. 362
7-15. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(U.S.-Spec. Models) ...................................... 363
TPMS Screen...................................................... 365
7-16. Parking Your Vehicle .................................... 365
Electronic Parking Brake .................................... 366
Parking Tips ....................................................... 371
7-17. Auto Start Stop System ............................... 372
System Operation ...............................................372
Displaying the Auto Start Stop System Status..... 375
System Warning ................................................. 375
7-18. Front View Monitor (If Equipped) ................ 376
How to Access the Front View Monitor................ 377
How to Cancel the Front View Monitor ................ 377
Range of Image on Screen.................................. 377
Guiding Line....................................................... 378
Handling of Camera ............................................ 378
7-19. Rear View Camera ........................................ 379
How to Use the Rear View Camera...................... 380
Viewing Range on the Screen ............................. 381
Help Lines .......................................................... 382
7-20. BSD/RCTA (If Equipped) ...............................384
System Features ................................................ 384
System Operation .............................................. 386
BSD/RCTA Approach Indicator Light/Warning
Buzzer ............................................................. 388
BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator.................................... 389
BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator.............................. 390
To Turn On/Off the BSD/RCTA ............................ 390
Certification for the BSD/RCTA ........................... 391
Handling of Radar Sensors................................. 392
7-21. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
System (If Equipped) ....................................393
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
Overview.......................................................... 394
Operating Conditions ......................................... 396
Object Detection Warning Function .................... 399
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
Function Operation .......................................... 400
Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) System Operation .................................. 402
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
ON/OFF Setting ................................................ 402
RAB Warning Indicator....................................... 403
Handling of the Sonar Sensors........................... 403
7-22. Driver Monitoring System (If Equipped) ......404
User Recognition Function ................................. 408
Inattentive/Drowsy Driving Warning .................... 410
Driver Monitoring System Indicator/Warning ....... 411
Using the Driver Monitoring System ................... 412
Registering and Deleting a User ......................... 414
Starting and Operating
(327,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Registering and Deleting Driver Position
Personalization................................................. 414
Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF Settings......... 414
Certification for Driver Monitoring System
(U.S.-Spec. Models) .......................................... 415
Starting and Operating
7
Starting and Operating
(328,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
7-1. Fuel
s07aa
CAUTION
. Use of a fuel which is low in
quality or use of an inappropriate
fuel additive may cause damage
to the engine and/or fuel system.
. Some gas stations, particularly
those in high altitude areas, offer
fuels posted as regular octane
gasoline with an octane rating
below 87 AKI (90 RON). Use of
those fuels are not recom-
mended.
& Fuel Requirements
s07aa01
The engine is designed to operate using
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.
NOTE
When using the 2.4 L turbo engine
model to tow a trailer, SUBARU recom-
mends using unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) or
higher to reduce the risk of engine
overheat.
! Fuel octane rating
s07aa0103
Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating
can cause persistent and heavy knocking,
which can damage the engine. Do not be
concerned if your vehicle sometimes
knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or
when you accelerate. See your dealer or a
qualified service technician if you use a
fuel with the specified octane rating and
your vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.
! RON
s07aa010301
This octane rating is the Research Octane
Number.
! AKI
s07aa010302
This octane rating is the average of the
Research Octane and Motor Octane num-
bers and is commonly referred to as the
Anti Knock Index (AKI).
! Unleaded gasoline
s07aa0104
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed
to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
nozzle. Under no circumstances should
leaded gasoline be used because it will
damage the emission control system and
may impair driveability and fuel economy.
! Reformulated gasoline
s07aa0128
SUBARU supports the use of reformulated
gasoline when available. Reformulated
gasoline has been blended to burn more
cleanly and reduce vehicle emissions.
! MMT
s07aa0106
Some gasoline contains an octane-enhan-
cing additive called MMT (Methylcyclo-
pentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If
you use such fuels, your emission control
system performance may deteriorate and
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-
function indicator light may turn on. If this
happens, return to your authorized
SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is
determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be
covered by your warranty.
! Gasoline for cleaner air (2.4 L mod-
el)
s07aa0129
Your use of gasoline with detergent ad-
ditives will help prevent deposits from
forming in your engine and fuel system.
This helps keep your engine in tune and
your emission control system working
properly, and is a way of doing your part
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
high quality fuel with the proper detergent
and other additives, you should never
need to add any fuel system cleaning
agents to your fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with
materials called oxygenates. Use of these
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol
Fuel
326
(329,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your
vehicle, but should contain no more than
15% ethanol for the proper operation of
your SUBARU.
Do not use any gasoline that contains
more than 15% ethanol, including from any
pump labeled E30, E50 or E85 (which are
only some examples of fuel containing
more than 15% ethanol).
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
now producing reformulated gasolines,
which are designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of
reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
you should ask your service station op-
erators if their gasolines contain deter-
gents and oxygenates and if they have
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-
sions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels
suited for your vehicle as explained in the
following description.
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an
octane rating no lower than that specified
in this manual.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
Methanol can be used in your vehicle
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
mixture AND if it is accompanied by
sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-
vents and corrosion inhibitors required to
prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
under these conditions.
. If undesirable driveability problems are
experienced and you suspect they may be
fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-
line before seeking service at your
SUBARU dealer.
. Fuel system damage or driveability
problems which result from the use of
improper fuel are not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
! Gasoline for cleaner air (2.5 L mod-
el)
s07aa0107
Your use of gasoline with detergent ad-
ditives will help prevent deposits from
forming in your engine and fuel system.
This helps keep your engine in tune and
your emission control system working
properly, and is a way of doing your part
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
high quality fuel with the proper detergent
and other additives, you should never
need to add any fuel system cleaning
agents to your fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with
materials called oxygenates. Use of these
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your
vehicle, but should contain no more than
10% ethanol for the proper operation of
your SUBARU.
Do not use any gasoline that contains
more than 10% ethanol, including from any
pump labeled E15, E30, E50 or E85 (which
are only some examples of fuel containing
more than 10% ethanol).
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
now producing reformulated gasolines,
which are designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of
reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
you should ask your service station op-
erators if their gasolines contain deter-
gents and oxygenates and if they have
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-
sions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels
suited for your vehicle as explained in the
following.
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an
octane rating no lower than that specified
in this manual.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
Methanol can be used in your vehicle
– CONTINUED –
Fuel
327
7
Starting and Operating
(330,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
mixture AND if it is accompanied by
sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-
vents and corrosion inhibitors required to
prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
under these conditions.
. If undesirable driveability problems are
experienced and you suspect they may be
fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-
line before seeking service at your
SUBARU dealer.
. Fuel system damage or driveability
problems which result from the use of
improper fuel are not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
& Fuel Filler Lid and Cap
s07aa02
! Locations of the fuel filler lid
s07aa0202
! Refueling
s07aa0201
Only one person should be involved in
refueling. Do not allow others to approach
the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
pipe while refueling is in progress.
Be sure to observe any other precautions
that are posted at the service station.
1. To unlock the fuel filler lid, perform one
of the operations below.
– Press the “
” button on the key fob.
– Press the unlock side of the power
door locking switch.
– Turn the ignition switch to “ACC” or
“LOCK”/“OFF”.
2. Push the rear side of the fuel filler lid.
3. The fuel filler lid opens automatically.
Open it further by hand.
WARNING
Before opening the fuel filler cap,
first touch the vehicle body or a
metal portion of the fuel pump or
similar object to discharge any sta-
tic electricity that may be present on
your body. If your body is carrying
an electrostatic charge, there is a
possibility that an electric spark
could ignite the fuel, which could
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new
static electric charge, do not get
back into the vehicle while refueling
is in progress.
Fuel
328
(331,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1) Open
2) Close
4. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it
slowly counterclockwise.
WARNING
. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-
mable. Before refueling, always
turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position first and
then close all vehicle doors and
windows. Make sure that there
are no lighted cigarettes, open
flames or electrical sparks in the
adjacent area. Only handle fuel
outdoors. Quickly wipe up any
spilled fuel.
. When opening the cap, grasp it
firmly and turn it slowly to the left.
Do not remove the cap quickly.
Fuel may be under pressure and
spray out of the fuel filler neck,
especially in hot weather. If you
hear a hissing sound while you
are removing the cap, wait for the
sound to stop and then slowly
open the cap to prevent fuel from
spraying out and creating a fire
hazard.
5. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder
inside the fuel filler lid.
WARNING
. When refueling, insert the fuel
nozzle securely into the fuel filler
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not
fully inserted, its automatic stop-
ping mechanism may not func-
tion, causing fuel to overflow the
tank and creating a fire hazard.
. Stop refueling when the auto-
matic stop mechanism on the
fuel nozzle activates. If you con-
tinue to add fuel, temperature
changes or other conditions
may cause fuel to overflow from
the tank and create a fire hazard.
6. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler
pump automatically stops. Do not add any
more fuel.
7. Put the cap back on and turn it clock-
wise until you hear a clicking noise. Be
certain not to catch the tether under the
cap while tightening.
CAUTION
Make sure that the cap is tightened
until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage
in the event of an accident.
8. Close the fuel filler lid completely.
CAUTION
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
– CONTINUED –
Fuel
329
7
Starting and Operating
(332,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel
may damage the paint, be sure to
wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.
Paint damage caused by spilled fuel
is not covered under the SUBARU
Limited Warranty.
NOTE
. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
lid is located on the right side of the
vehicle.
. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened
until it clicks or if the tether is caught
under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE
warning light/malfunction indicator
light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK
ENGINE Warning Light/Malfunction In-
dicator Light” FP182.
. To lock the fuel filler lid, perform one
of the operations below. However if
these operations are performed when
the fuel filler lid is open, the fuel filler lid
will not lock when it is subsequently
closed.
– Press the “
” button on the key
fob.
– Press the lock side of the power
door locking switch.
. When the doors are locked or un-
locked using the automatic door lock
system, the fuel filler lid will be locked
or unlocked at the same time.
CAUTION
. Never add any cleaning agents to
the fuel tank. The addition of a
cleaning agent may cause da-
mage to the fuel system.
. After refueling, turn the cap to the
right until it clicks to ensure that
it is fully tightened. If the cap is
not securely tightened, fuel may
leak out while the vehicle is being
driven or fuel spillage could oc-
cur in the event of an accident,
creating a fire hazard.
. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
fuel may damage the paint, be
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
quickly. Paint damage caused by
spilled fuel is not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
. Always use a genuine SUBARU
fuel filler cap. If you use the
wrong cap, it may not fit or have
proper venting and your fuel tank
and emission control system
may be damaged. It could also
lead to fuel spillage and a fire.
. Immediately put fuel in the tank
whenever the low fuel warning
light illuminates. Engine misfires
as a result of an empty tank could
cause damage to the engine.
Continuing to operate your vehi-
cle at an extremely low fuel level
may result in a reduction of
engine performance.
! If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened
(Legacy)
s07aa0204
If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened due to
a malfunction or a dead battery, it can be
opened from the trunk.
1. Remove the access cover at the right-
side of the trunk trim.
Fuel
330
(333,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1) Clip
2. Remove the yellow clip from the trim.
3. Pull the yellow clip to unlock the fuel
filler lid.
! If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened
(Outback)
s07aa0203
If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened due to
a malfunction or a dead battery, it can be
opened from the cargo area.
1. Remove the access cover at the right-
side of the cargo area trim using a flat-
head screwdriver.
1) Clip
2. Remove the yellow clip from the trim.
3. Pull the yellow clip to unlock the fuel
filler lid.
Fuel
331
7
Starting and Operating
(334,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
7-2. State Emission Testing
(U.S. Only)
s07ab
WARNING
Only use a four-wheel dynamometer
when testing an All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) model.
Testing of an AWD model must
NEVER be performed on a single
two-wheel dynamometer. Attempt-
ing to do so will result in uncon-
trolled vehicle movement and may
cause an accident or injuries to
persons nearby.
CAUTION
. At state inspection time, remem-
ber to tell your inspection or
service station in advance not to
place your SUBARU AWD vehicle
on a two-wheel dynamometer.
Otherwise, serious transmission
damage will result.
. Resultant vehicle damage due to
improper testing is not covered
under the SUBARU Limited War-
ranty and is the responsibility of
the state inspection program or
its contractors or licensees.
California and a number of federal states
have Inspection/Maintenance programs to
inspect your vehicle’s emission control
system. If your vehicle does not pass this
test, some states may deny renewal of
your vehicle’s registration.
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
that monitors the performance of the
engine’s emission control system. Certi-
fied emission inspectors will inspect the
On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as
part of the state emission inspection
process. The OBDII system is designed
to detect engine and transmission pro-
blems that might cause the vehicle emis-
sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII
inspections apply to all 1996 model year
and newer passenger cars and trucks.
Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-
bia have implemented emission inspection
of the OBDII system.
. The inspection of the OBDII system
consists of a visual operational check of
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-
function indicator light (MIL) and an ex-
amination of the OBDII system with an
electronic scan tool.
. A vehicle passes the OBDII system
inspection if proper operation of the
“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob-
served, there are no stored diagnostic
trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness
monitors are all complete.
. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not
properly operating (light is illuminated or is
not working due to a burned out bulb) or
there is one or more diagnostic trouble
codes stored in the vehicle’s computer.
. A state emission inspection may reject
(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of
OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT
READY” is greater than one. If the
vehicle’s battery has been recently re-
placed or disconnected, the OBDII system
inspection may indicate that the vehicle is
not ready for the emission test. Under this
condition, the vehicle driver should be
instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a
few days to reset the readiness monitors
and return for an emission re-inspection.
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles
should contact their SUBARU Dealer for
service.
Some states still use dynamometers in
their emission inspection program. A
dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like
testing device that allows your vehicle’s
wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in
one place. Prior to your vehicle being put
on a dynamometer, tell your emission
State Emission Testing (U.S. Only)
332
(335,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
inspector not to place your SUBARU AWD
vehicle on a two-wheel dynamometer.
Otherwise, serious transmission da-
mage will result.
The U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
dynamometers in their emission testing
program have EXEMPTED SUBARU
AWD vehicles from the portion of the
testing program that involves a two-wheel
dynamometer. There are some states that
use four-wheel dynamometers in their
testing program. When properly used, this
equipment should not damage a SUBARU
AWD vehicle.
Under no circumstances should the rear
wheels be jacked off the ground, nor
should the driveshaft be disconnected in
an attempt to bypass AWD for state
emission testing. An AWD vehicle must
be tested using an AWD dynamometer
with all 4 wheels driven and loaded.
7-3. Preparing to Drive
s07ac
You should perform the following checks
and adjustments every day before you
start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
lights are clean and unobstructed.
2. Check the appearance and condition
of the tires. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
4. Check that no small animals enter the
engine compartment.
5. Check that the hood, trunk (Legacy)
and rear gate (Outback) are fully closed.
6. Check the adjustment of the seat.
7. Check the adjustment of the inside and
outside mirrors.
8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
9. Check the operation of the warning
and indicator lights when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
10. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-
ing lights after starting the engine.
CAUTION
Trapping small animals in the cool-
ing fan and belts of the engine may
result in a malfunction. Check that
no small animal enters the engine
compartment and under the vehicle
before starting the engine.
NOTE
. Engine oil, engine coolant, brake
fluid, washer fluid and other fluid levels
should be checked daily, weekly or at
fuel stops.
. When towing a trailer, refer to “Trai-
ler Hitch (Outback – If Equipped)”
FP436.
Preparing to Drive
333
7
Starting and Operating
(336,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
7-4. Starting and Stopping
the Engine (Models without
Push-Button Ignition Switch)
s07bd
& General Precautions When
Starting/Stopping Engine
s07bd06
WARNING
. Never start the engine from out-
side the vehicle (except when
using the remote engine start
system). It may result in an acci-
dent.
. Do not leave the engine running
in locations with poor ventilation,
such as a garage and indoors.
The exhaust gas may enter the
vehicle or indoors, and it may
result in carbon monoxide poi-
soning.
. Do not start the engine near dry
foliage, paper, or other flammable
substances. The exhaust pipe
and exhaust emissions can cre-
ate a fire hazard at high tempera-
tures.
CAUTION
. If the engine is stopped during
driving, the catalyst may over-
heat and burn.
. When starting the engine, be sure
to sit in the driver’s seat (except
when using the remote engine
start system).
NOTE
. Avoid racing and rapid acceleration
immediately after the engine has
started.
. Until the engine is warmed up suffi-
ciently, the engine speed is maintained
high. The engine speed will gradually
drop as the engine warms up.
. On rare occasions, it may be difficult
to start the engine depending on the
fuel used and the driving condition
(repeated short trips when the engine
is not warmed up sufficiently). In such a
case, it is recommended to switch to a
different brand of fuel.
. On rare occasions, transient knock-
ing may be heard from the engine when
the accelerator is operated rapidly such
as a rapid start-up and a rapid accel-
eration. This is not a malfunction.
. The engine starts more easily when
the headlights, air conditioner and rear
window defogger are turned off.
& Starting Engine
s07bd01
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter motor
continuously for more than 10 sec-
onds. If the engine fails to start after
operating the starter for 5 to 10
seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
more before trying again.
NOTE
. It may be difficult to start the engine
when the battery has been discon-
nected and reconnected (for mainte-
nance or other purposes). This diffi-
culty is caused by the electronically
controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis
function. To overcome it, keep the
ignition switch in the “ON” position
for approximately 10 seconds before
starting the engine.
. Do not shift the select lever while the
starter is cranking.
Starting and Stopping the Engine (Models without Push-Button Ignition Switch)
334
(337,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
CAUTION
If you restart the engine while the
vehicle is moving, shift the select
lever into the “N” position. Do not
attempt to place the select lever of a
moving vehicle into the “P” position.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-
sories.
3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”
position (preferably “P” position). The
starter will only operate when the select
lever is at the “P” or “N” position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and check the operation of the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to
“Warning and Indicator Lights” FP177.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, perform the
following procedure.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position and wait for at least
10 seconds. After checking that the
parking brake is applied, turn the
ignition switch to the “START” position
while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”
position and wait for at least 10
seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
erator pedal and turn the ignition
switch to the “START” position. If the
engine starts, quickly release the ac-
celerator pedal.
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”
position. After waiting for 10 seconds
or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
(4) If the engine still does not start,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
lights have turned off after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system auto-
matically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
While the engine is warming up, make sure
that the select lever is at the “P” or “N”
position and that the parking brake is
applied.
& Stopping the Engine
s07bd02
The ignition switch should be turned off
only when the vehicle is stopped and the
engine is idling.
WARNING
Do not stop the engine when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause
loss of power to the power steering
and the brake booster, making steer-
ing and braking more difficult. It
could also result in accidental acti-
vation of the “LOCK” position on the
ignition switch, causing the steering
wheel to lock.
1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. Move the select lever to the “P”
position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK/
OFF” position.
The engine will stop, and the power will be
switched off.
– CONTINUED –
Starting and Stopping the Engine (Models without Push-Button Ignition Switch)
335
7
Starting and Operating
(338,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Steering Lock
s07bd07
After stopping the engine and the key is
removed from ignition switch, the steering
wheel will be locked due to the steering
lock function.
When the engine is restarted, the steering
lock will be automatically released.
! When the steering lock cannot be
released
s07bd0701
When you cannot unlock the steering
wheel, perform the following steps.
1. Check that the parking brake is ap-
plied.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-
sories.
3. Check that the select lever is set in the
“P” position.
4. Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
If you cannot unlock the steering wheel by
doing the steps, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer.
7-5. Starting and Stopping
Engine (Models with Push-
Button Start System)
s07be
& Safety Precautions
s07be06
Refer to “Safety Precautions” FP116.
& Operating Range for Push-
Button Start System
s07be01
Refer to “Operating Range for Push-
Button Start System” FP170.
& Starting Engine
s07be03
WARNING
. There are some general precau-
tions when starting the engine.
Carefully read the precautions
described in “General Precau-
tions When Starting/Stopping
Engine” FP334.
. If the indicator on the push-but-
ton ignition switch flashes in
green after the engine has
started, never drive the vehicle.
The steering is still locked, and it
may result in an accident.
CAUTION
. When the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch is
flashing in orange, there may be a
malfunction with the vehicle.
Contact a SUBARU dealer imme-
diately.
. If the indicator on the push-but-
ton ignition switch is flashing in
green after the engine has
started, it means that the steering
is still locked. While moving the
steering wheel right and left,
depress the brake pedal, and
press the push-button ignition
switch.
. Do not continue pressing the
push-button ignition switch for
more than 10 seconds. Doing so
could cause a malfunction. If the
engine does not start, stop press-
ing the push-button ignition
switch. Instead, press the push-
button ignition switch without
depressing the brake pedal to
switch the power status to
“OFF”. Wait 10 seconds, and then
press the push-button ignition
switch to start the engine.
Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with Push-Button Start System)
336
(339,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
NOTE
. When pressing the push-button igni-
tion switch while depressing the brake
pedal:
– The engine starter operates for a
maximum of 10 seconds and after
starting the engine, the starter stops
automatically.
– The engine can be started regard-
less of the power status.
. If the engine does not start, check
the security indicator light. Then press
the push-button ignition switch without
depressing the brake pedal to switch
the power to “OFF”.
– If the light had illuminated, try to
start the engine again.
– If the light had been off, press the
push-button ignition switch while
depressing the brake pedal more
forcefully.
. The engine start procedures may not
function depending on the radio wave
conditions around the vehicle. In such
a case, refer to “Starting Engine”
FP466.
. If the vehicle battery is discharged,
the steering cannot be unlocked.
Charge the battery.
. Until the engine is warmed up suffi-
ciently, the engine speed will be main-
tained high. The engine speed will
decrease as the engine warms up.
. Do not shift the select lever while the
starter is cranking.
1) Operation indicator
2) Push-button ignition switch
When the push-button ignition switch is
pressed while depressing the brake pedal,
the engine will start. The starting proce-
dure for the engine is as follows.
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the
driver’s seat.
2. Make sure the parking brake is ap-
plied.
3. Make sure the select lever is in the “P”
position. The engine can also start when
the select lever is in the “N” position,
however, for safety reasons, start in the “P”
position.
4. Depress the brake pedal until the
operation indicator on the push-button
ignition switch turns green. When starting
with the select lever in the “N” position, the
indicator does not turn green.
5. While depressing the brake pedal,
press the push-button ignition switch.
NOTE
. While pressing the select lever but-
ton in, the indicator on the push-button
ignition switch will not turn green even
when the select lever is in the “P”
position.
. In case the engine does not start by
the normal engine start procedure,
move the select lever to the “P” posi-
tion, and switch the power to “ACC”.
Depress the brake pedal, and press the
push-button ignition switch for at least
15 seconds. The engine may start. Only
use this engine start procedure in case
of emergency.
. When the engine is not started, the
brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a
case, depress the brake pedal more
forcefully than usual. Check that the
operation indicator on the push-button
ignition switch turns green, and press
the push-button ignition switch to start
the engine.
– CONTINUED –
Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with Push-Button Start System)
337
7
Starting and Operating
(340,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Stopping Engine
s07be04
1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. Move the select lever to the “P”
position.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch.
The engine will stop, and the power will be
switched off.
WARNING
. Do not touch the push-button
ignition switch during driving.
When the push-button ignition
switch is operated as follows,
the engine will stop.
– The switch is pressed and held
for 3 seconds or longer.
– The switch is pressed briefly 3
times or more in succession.
When the engine stops, the brake
booster will not function. A great-
er foot pressure will be required
on the brake pedal.
The power steering system will
not operate either. A greater force
will be required to steer, and it
may result in an accident.
. If the engine stops during driving,
do not operate the push-button
ignition switch or open any of the
doors until the vehicle is stopped
in a safe location. It is dangerous
because the steering lock may be
activated. Stop the vehicle in a
safe place, and contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
CAUTION
. Do not stop the engine while the
select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
. If the engine is stopped while the
select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position, the power
will be in “ACC”. If the vehicle is
left in this condition, the battery
may be discharged.
NOTE
Although you can stop the engine by
operating the push-button ignition
switch, do not stop the engine during
driving except in an emergency.
& When Access Key Fob Does
Not Operate Properly
s07be05
Refer to “Access Key Fob – If Access Key
Fob Does Not Operate Properly” FP465.
& Steering Lock
s07be07
After stopping the engine and any door
including the rear gate is opened, the
steering wheel will be locked due to the
steering lock function.
When the engine is restarted, the steering
lock will be automatically released.
! When the steering lock cannot be
released
s07be0701
1) Operation indicator
2) Push-button ignition switch
When you cannot restart the engine due to
the steering lock, check the status of
operation indicator and perform the follow-
ing steps.
Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with Push-Button Start System)
338
(341,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Operation indicator flashing in
green
s07be070101
1. Check that the select lever is set in the
“P” position.
2. Depress the brake pedal and keep it.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
while turning the steering wheel left and
right.
! Operation indicator flashing in
orange
s07be070102
There may be a malfunction in the steering
lock function. Immediately contact your
nearest SUBARU dealer.
7-6. Remote Engine Start
System (Dealer Option)
s07az
WARNING
. There are some general precau-
tions when starting the engine.
Carefully read the precautions
described in “General Precau-
tions When Starting/Stopping
Engine” FP334.
. Do not remote start a vehicle in an
enclosed environment (e.g.
closed garage). Prolonged opera-
tion of a motor vehicle in an
enclosed environment can cause
a harmful build-up of carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is
harmful to your health. Exposure
to high levels of carbon monox-
ide can cause headaches, dizzi-
ness or in extreme cases uncon-
sciousness and/or death.
The remote engine start system allows you
to start the engine from outside the vehicle.
In addition, the remote engine start system
can activate the heater or air conditioner,
providing you with a comfortable cabin
upon entry. For more details, refer to the
Owner’s Manual supplement for the re-
mote engine start system.
NOTE
. The length of time for which it is
acceptable to allow the engine to
remain idling may be bound by local
laws and regulations. Check the local
rules when using the remote engine
start system.
. When taking your vehicle in for
service, it is recommended that you
inform the service personnel that your
vehicle is equipped with a remote
engine start system.
& Remote Engine Starter
Transceiver (Fob)
s07az21
1) Fob button
– CONTINUED –
Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)
339
7
Starting and Operating
(342,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Starting the engine
s07az2101
NOTE
All vehicle doors (including rear gate)
and the engine hood must be closed
prior to activating the remote engine
start system. Any open entry point will
prevent starting or cause the engine to
stop.
The remote engine start system is acti-
vated by pressing the fob button on your
remote engine starter transceiver (fob)
twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within
operating range of the system and the start
request is received, the following will
occur.
. The fob flashes and beeps once.
. The horn sounds once.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and
parking lights flash once.
If the fob is not within range (the user is too
far away from the vehicle), the fob will
indicate two long flashes without beeping.
The system will check certain safety
preconditions before starting, and if all
conditions are met, the engine will start
within 5 seconds. After the engine starts,
the following will occur.
. The fob flashes and beeps twice.
. The horn sounds once.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and
parking lights flash once.
While the engine is idling via the remote
engine start system, the following will
occur.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and
parking lights remain illuminated.
. The fob button flashes once every 3
seconds.
. The power windows are disabled.
If the engine turns over but does not start
(or starts and stalls) the remote engine
start system will power off and then
attempt to start the engine 3 additional
times. The system will not attempt to
restart the engine if it determines a vehicle
malfunction is preventing starting. If the
engine does not start after 3 additional
attempts, the remote engine start request
will be aborted.
! Stopping the engine
s07az2102
Press and hold the fob button for at least 2
seconds to stop the engine. The fob will
flash and beep three times, indicating the
engine has stopped. If the stop request is
not received (for example, if the user is too
far away from the vehicle), the fob will
continue to flash once every 3 seconds.
The system will automatically stop the
engine after 15 minutes.
! Remote start safety features
s07az2103
For safety and security reasons, the
remote engine start system will prevent
starting (or stop the engine if running) and
sound the horn twice if any of the following
conditions is detected. In addition, the fob
will flash and beep 3 times.
. The total run-time has exceeded 20
minutes.
. The brake pedal is depressed.
. A key is in the ignition switch.
. The engine hood is open.
. The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500
rpm.
. The security alarm is triggered.
. The select lever is not in the “P”
position.
If the system detects any door (including
the rear gate) open during operation, it will
prevent starting or stop the engine, and
sound the horn and flash side marker
lights, tail lights, and parking lights 6 times.
In addition to the items above, if the
vehicle’s engine management system
determines there is a safety risk due to a
vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will
power down and the horn will sound 3
times.
Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)
340
(343,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
NOTE
. If the alarm system is armed at the
time of remote engine starter activation
(the security indicator light on the
combination meter is flashing), the
alarm system will remain armed
throughout the remote start run cycle.
. If the alarm system is disarmed at
the time of remote engine starter acti-
vation (the security indicator light on
the combination meter is not flashing),
the alarm system will remain disarmed
throughout the remote start run cycle.
! Remote start operation - fob con-
firmation
s07az2104
Your remote engine starter fob is a
bidirectional transceiver that can confirm
system operation with several different
visual and audible indications. The fob’s
LED-backlit button and internal piezo
buzzer will indicate the status of the
system using the following the flash and
beep sequences, provided the fob is within
operational range of the system.
– CONTINUED –
Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)
341
7
Starting and Operating
(344,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Precondition
Fob Indication
Meaning
Flash Beep
Fob start button is being pressed
Continuous while button is
held down
— The fob is transmitting an RF signal
User attempts to start engine by pressing fob
button twice within 3 sec
1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received
2 flashes 2 beeps Engine started successfully
1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
3 flashes 3 beeps Vehicle is in range but engine not started
2 long flashes — Vehicle not in range (engine not started)
Engine idling by remote engine start operation
1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
3 flashes 3 beeps
Engine stopped by system time-out or for safety
reasons (see sections above)
User attempts to stop engine by pressing and
holding fob button for at least 2 sec
3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by user request
1 flash every 3 sec —
Stop request not received. Engine still idling.
Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)
342
(345,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Alternate Operation Method
for Models with “Keyless Ac-
cess with Push-Button Start
System”
s07az22
Access key fob
1) Lock button
An access key fob can be used as the
remote engine start transmitter. Operate
the lock button to start or stop the engine
as follows.
! Before starting the engine
s07az2201
Before using the remote engine start
system to start the engine, confirm the
following conditions.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
. All doors including the rear gate are
closed.
. The engine hood is closed.
. The push-button ignition switch is in the
“OFF” position.
! Starting the engine
s07az2202
To start the engine with remote engine
start system, briefly press the lock button
twice within 2 seconds, then press and
hold the lock button for 3 seconds.
1. Press the lock button briefly. The
hazard warning flashers then flash once
and the keyless buzzer chirps once.
2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock button
briefly again. The hazard warning flashers
then flash once again, and the keyless
buzzer chirps once again.
3. After step 2, immediately press and
hold the lock button. The hazard warning
flashers then flash three times, and the
horn will honk once.
4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3,
release the lock button. The engine will
then start successfully.
! Stopping the engine
s07az2203
Press and hold the lock button to stop the
engine with remote engine start system.
! Remote start safety features
s07az2204
For detailed information, refer to “Remote
start safety features” FP340.
& Entering the Vehicle While It
Is Running via Remote Start
(Models without “Keyless
Access with Push-Button
Start System”)
s07az03
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
remote keyless entry system.
NOTE
If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked
manually using the key, the vehicle’s
alarm system will trigger (if the alarm
system is armed prior to activating the
remote engine start system) and the
engine will turn off. Perform either of
the following procedures to disarm the
alarm system. Refer to “Alarm System”
FP141.
– Insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn it to the “ON”
position.
– Press any button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
2. Enter the vehicle. The engine will shut
down when any door or rear gate is
opened.
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn it to the “START” position to
restart the engine.
– CONTINUED –
Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)
343
7
Starting and Operating
(346,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Entering the Vehicle While It
Is Running via Remote Start
(Models with “Keyless Ac-
cess with Push-Button Start
System”)
s07az24
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
keyless access function and remote key-
less entry system.
NOTE
If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked
manually using the key, the vehicle’s
alarm system will trigger (if the alarm
system is armed prior to activating the
remote engine start system) and the
engine will turn off. Perform either of
the following procedures to disarm the
alarm system. Refer to “Alarm System”
FP141.
– Turn the push-button ignition
switch to the “ACC” or “ON” posi-
tion.
– Press any button on the access
key fob.
2. Enter the vehicle. The engine will
remain running provided the access key
fob is present and detected by the vehicle.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
once while depressing the brake pedal
before driving your vehicle. The remote
engine starter transceiver (fob) will flash
and beep 3 times to indicate that the
remote start system has been shut down.
& Entering the Vehicle Follow-
ing Remote Engine Start
Shutdown
s07az10
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is
opened by the remote keyless entry
transmitter within a few seconds immedi-
ately following remote engine start shut-
down.
& Pre-heating or Pre-cooling
the Interior of the Vehicle
s07az04
Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem-
perature controls to the desired setting and
operation. After the system starts the
engine, the heater or air conditioning will
activate and heat or cool the interior to
your setting.
& Remote Transmitter Program
(Remote Engine Starter
Transceiver)
s07az13
New transmitters can be programmed to
the remote engine start system in the
event that a transmitter is lost, stolen,
damaged or additional transmitters are
desired (the system will accept up to eight
transmitters). New remote engine start
transmitters can be programmed accord-
ing to the following procedure.
1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s
door must remain open throughout the
entire process).
2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then
“LOCK”/“OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/
“OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/“OFF”,
then back to “ON” again and leave the
ignition “ON” throughout the programming
process.
4. The system will flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and parking lights and
honk the horn three times, indicating that
the system has entered the transmitter
learn mode.
5. Press and release the “
” button on
the transmitter that you want to program.
6. The system will flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and parking lights and
honk the horn one time, indicating that the
system has learned the transmitter. Upon
successful programming, the remote start
confirmation transmitter button will flash
one time.
7. Repeat step 5 for any additional
transmitters (the system will accept up to
eight transmitters).
8. The system will exit the transmitter
learn mode if the key is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the door is closed
Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)
344
(347,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
or after 2 minutes.
& System Maintenance
s07az09
NOTE
For remote engine starter transceiver:
In the event that the vehicle’s battery is
replaced, discharged or disconnected,
it will be necessary to start the vehicle a
minimum of one time using the key
prior to activating the remote engine
start system. This is required to allow
the vehicle electronic systems to re-
synchronize.
! Changing the battery
s07az0901
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the remote engine start
transmitter when replacing the
battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the re-
mote engine start transmitter
when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of explosion if
an incorrect replacement battery
is used. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of bat-
tery.
. Battery should not be exposed to
excessive heat such as sunshine,
fire or the like.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
Perform the procedure described in “Re-
placing Battery of Access Key Fob”
FP526.
For remote engine starter transceiver:
The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-2450)
supplied in your remote engine start
transmitter should last approximately one
year, depending on usage. When the
battery begins to weaken, you will notice
a decrease in range (distance from the
vehicle that your remote control operates).
Follow the instructions below to change
the remote engine start transmitter battery.
1. Remove the small phillips screw lo-
cated on the back side lower left corner of
the transmitter.
2. Carefully pry the remote engine start
transmitter halves apart using a small flat-
head screwdriver.
– CONTINUED –
Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)
345
7
Starting and Operating
(348,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
3. Remove the circuit board from the
bottom half of the case and remove the
battery and replace with new one. Be sure
to observe the (+) sign on the old battery
before removing it to ensure that the new
battery is inserted properly (battery “+”
should be pointed away from the transmit-
ter circuit board on battery).
4. Carefully snap the case halves back
together, reinstall the phillips screw and
test the remote engine start system.
& Certification for Remote En-
gine Starter
s07az23
! U.S.-spec. models
s07az2301
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
! Canada-spec. models
s07az2302
Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)
346
(349,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
7-7. Continuously Variable
Transmission
s07bg
WARNING
Do not shift from the “P” or “N”
position into the “D” or “R” position
while depressing the accelerator
pedal. This may cause the vehicle
to lurch forward or backward.
CAUTION
. Observe the following precau-
tions. Failure to observe these
precautions could cause damage
to the transmission.
– Shift into the “P” or “R” posi-
tion only after the vehicle has
completely stopped.
– Do not shift from the “D”
position into the “R” position
or vice versa until the vehicle
has completely stopped.
. Do not race the engine for more
than 5 seconds in any position
except the “N” or “P” position
when the brake is applied or
when chocks are used in the
wheels. This may cause the
transmission fluid to overheat.
. Never move the vehicle rearward
by inertia with the select lever set
in a forward driving position or
move the vehicle forward by
inertia with the select lever set
in the “R” position. Doing so may
result in an unexpected accident
or malfunction.
. When parking the vehicle, first
securely apply the parking brake
and then place the select lever in
the “P” position. Do not park for a
long time with the select lever in
any other position as doing so
could result in a dead battery.
& Continuously Variable Trans-
mission Features
s07bg06
The continuously variable transmission is
electronically controlled and provides an
infinite number of forward speeds and 1
reverse speed. It also has a manual mode.
NOTE
. When the engine coolant tempera-
ture is still low, the transmission will
shift at higher engine speeds than
when the coolant temperature is suffi-
ciently high in order to shorten the
warm-up time and improve driveability.
The gearshift timing will automatically
shift to the normal timing after the
engine has warmed up.
. Immediately after transmission fluid
is replaced, you may feel that the
transmission operation is somewhat
unusual. This results from invalidation
of data which the on-board computer
has collected and stored in memory to
allow the transmission to shift at the
most appropriate times for the current
condition of your vehicle. Optimized
shifting will be restored as the vehicle
continues to be driven for a while.
. When driving under continuous hea-
vy load conditions such as towing a
camper or climbing a long, steep hill,
the engine speed, vehicle speed and air
conditioning system cooling perfor-
mance may automatically be reduced.
This is not a malfunction. This phenom-
enon results from the engine control
function maintaining the cooling per-
formance of the vehicle. The engine
and vehicle speed will return to a
normal speed when the engine is able
to maintain the optimum cooling per-
formance after the heavy load de-
creases. Driving under a heavy load
must be performed with extreme care.
Do not try to pass a vehicle in front
when driving on an uphill slope while
towing.
– CONTINUED –
Continuously Variable Transmission
347
7
Starting and Operating
(350,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. The continuously variable transmis-
sion is a chain type system that pro-
vides superior transmission efficiency
for maximum fuel economy. At times,
depending on varying driving condi-
tions, a chain operating noise may be
heard that is characteristic of this type
of system.
. Place the shift boot to the original
position after it is lifted. If the select
lever is operated with the shift boot in
the rolled up position, the shift boot
may have tension and it may disturb the
select lever operation.
& Select Lever
s07bg01
1) Select lever button
: With the brake pedal depressed, shift
while pressing the select lever button in
: Shift while pressing the select lever
button in
: Shift without pressing the select lever
button
The select lever has four positions, “P”,
“R”, “N”, “D” and also has a manual gate for
using the manual mode.
NOTE
For some models, to protect the engine
while the select lever is in the “P” or “N”
position, the engine is controlled so
that the engine speed may not become
too high even if the accelerator pedal is
depressed hard.
! P (Park)
s07bg0101
This position is for parking the vehicle and
starting the engine. In this position, the
transmission is mechanically locked to
prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first apply the
parking brake, then shift into the “P”
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
the mechanical friction of the transmission.
To shift the select lever from the “P” to any
other position, you should depress the
brake pedal fully then move the select
lever. This prevents the vehicle from
lurching when it is started.
! R (Reverse)
s07bg0102
This position is for backing the vehicle. To
shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the
vehicle completely then move the lever to
the “R” position while pressing the select
lever button in.
When the ignition switch has been turned
to the “ACC” position, the movement of the
select lever from the “N” to “R” position is
only possible by depressing the brake
pedal. For details, refer to “Shift Lock
Function” FP349.
! N (Neutral)
s07bg0103
This position is for restarting a stalled
engine. In this position, the transmission is
Continuously Variable Transmission
348
(351,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
neutral, meaning that the wheels and
transmission are not locked. Therefore,
the vehicle will roll freely, even on the
slightest incline unless the parking brake
or foot brake is applied.
Avoid coasting with the transmission in
neutral. Engine braking has no effect in
this condition.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the
select lever in the “N” (neutral)
position. Engine braking has no
effect in this condition and the risk
of an accident is consequently in-
creased.
! D (Drive)
s07bg0104
This position is for normal driving. The
transmission shifts automatically and con-
tinuously into a suitable gear according to
the vehicle speed and the acceleration you
require. Also, while driving up and down a
hill, the transmission assists and controls
the driving performance and engine brak-
ing while corresponding to the road grade.
When more acceleration is required in “D”
position, depress the accelerator pedal
fully to the floor and hold that position. The
transmission will automatically downshift.
In this case, the transmission will operate
like a conventional automatic transmis-
sion. When you release the pedal, the
transmission will return to the original gear
position.
If one of the shift paddles behind the
steering wheel is operated while driving in
the “D” position, the transmission will
temporarily switch to the manual mode.
In this mode, you can shift to any gear
position using the shift paddles. For details
about the manual mode, refer to “Selection
of Manual Mode” FP351. Once the
vehicle speed stabilizes, the transmission
will switch from the manual mode back to
the “D” position for normal driving.
! While climbing a grade
s07bg010401
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift is
prevented from taking place when the
accelerator is released. This minimizes
the chance of subsequent downshifting to
a lower gear when accelerating again. This
prevents repeated upshifting and down-
shifting resulting in a smoother operation
of the vehicle.
NOTE
The transmission may downshift, de-
pending on the way the accelerator
pedal is depressed to accelerate the
vehicle again.
& Shift Lock Function
s07bg04
The shift lock function helps prevent the
improper operation of the select lever.
. The select lever cannot be operated
unless the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
. The select lever cannot be moved from
the “P” position to any other position before
the brake pedal is depressed. Depress the
brake pedal first, and then operate the
select lever.
. Only the “P” position allows you to turn
the key from the “ACC” position to the
“LOCK” position and remove the key from
the ignition key cylinder (models without
“keyless access with push-button start
system”).
. Only the “P” position allows you to turn
the push-button ignition switch to the
“OFF” position (models with “keyless
access with push-button start system”).
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“ACC” position while the select lever is in
the “N” position, the select lever may not
be moved to the “P” position without
depressing the brake pedal and pressing
the select lever button.
– CONTINUED –
Continuously Variable Transmission
349
7
Starting and Operating
(352,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Shift lock release
s07bg0401
If the select lever cannot be operated, turn
the ignition switch back to the “ON”
position, then move the select lever to
the “P” position with the select lever button
pressed and the brake pedal depressed.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, check
and confirm the following and release the
shift lock accordingly.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “P” to “N”:
Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift
lock release portion” FP350.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “N” to “R” or “P”:
Place the ignition switch in the “ACC”
position, then move the select lever to the
“P” position with the brake pedal de-
pressed.
If the select lever still does not move, refer
to “Shift lock release using the shift lock
release portion” FP350.
If the shift lock cannot be released without
using the shift lock release button in the
above cases, there may be a malfunction
in the shift lock system or the vehicle
control system.
Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion as soon as possible.
! Shift lock release using the shift
lock release portion
s07bg0402
Perform the following procedure to release
the shift lock.
1. Apply the parking brake and stop the
engine.
1) Hole
2. Turn over the inner trim of the pocket.
3. Remove the grip portion of the screw-
driver.
4. While depressing the brake pedal,
insert the screwdriver into the hole, press
the shift lock release portion using the
screwdriver, and then move the select
Continuously Variable Transmission
350
(353,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
lever.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, the shift
lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-
tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as
soon as possible.
& Selection of Manual Mode
s07bg02
With the vehicle either moving or station-
ary, move the select lever from the “D”
position to the “M” position to select the
manual mode.
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator and upshift indica-
tor and/or downshift indicator on the
combination meter illuminate. The gear
position indicator shows the currently
selected gear in the 1st-to-8th gear range.
The upshift and downshift indicators show
when a gearshift is possible. When the
upshift indicator “
” is on, upshifting is
possible. When the downshift indicator
“
” is on, downshifting is possible. When
both indicators are on, upshifting and
downshifting are both possible. When the
vehicle stops (for example, at traffic
signals), the downshift indicator turns off.
Gearshifts can be performed using the
shift paddle behind the steering wheel.
To upshift to the next higher gear position,
pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated
on it. To downshift to the next lower gear
position, pull the shift paddle that has “−”
indicated on it.
To deselect the manual mode, return the
select lever to the “D” position from the “M”
position.
While driving with the select lever in the “D”
position, if you change gears by operating
the shift paddle, the gear position indicator
light illuminates and shows the current
gear condition.
– CONTINUED –
Continuously Variable Transmission
351
7
Starting and Operating
(354,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
CAUTION
Do not place or hang anything on the
shift paddles. Doing so may result in
accidental gear shifting.
NOTE
Please read the following points care-
fully and bear them in mind when using
the manual mode.
. If you attempt to shift down when the
engine speed is too high, i.e., when a
downshift would push the tachometer
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will
be emitted to warn you that the down-
shift is not possible.
. If you attempt to shift up when the
vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-
sion will not respond.
. You can perform a skip-shift (for
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating
the shift paddle twice in rapid succes-
sion.
. The transmission automatically se-
lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops
moving.
. If the temperature of the transmis-
sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT
OIL TEMP” warning light will illuminate.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and let the engine idle until the
warning light turns off.
For models with SI-DRIVE, by selecting
Sport Sharp (S#) mode, upshifting will
not occur automatically. According to
the road conditions, shift change
manually so that the tachometer needle
does not enter the red zone. Also, if the
engine revolutions reach the specified
number, the fuel supply will be cut. In
this case, perform shift up operation.
& Driving Tips
s07bg05
NOTE
If the accelerator and brake pedals are
depressed at the same time, driving
torque may be restrained. This is not a
malfunction.
. On a road surface where there is a risk
of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or
gravel-covered road), you can pull away
from a standstill safely and easily by first
selecting the 2nd gear of the manual
mode.
. Always apply the foot or parking brake
when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or
“R” position.
. Make sure to apply the parking brake
when parking your vehicle. Do not hold the
vehicle with only the transmission.
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
position on an uphill grade by using the “D”
position. Use the brake instead.
. The engine may, on rare occasions,
knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-
ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
This phenomenon does not indicate a
malfunction.
Continuously Variable Transmission
352
(355,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
7-8. SI-DRIVE (If Equipped)
s07bc
SI-DRIVE (SUBARU Intelligent Drive)
works to maximize engine performance,
control and efficiency.
This system consists of two modes:
Intelligent (I) and Sport Sharp (S#). By
operating the SI-DRIVE switches, the
character of the power unit changes.
& Intelligent (I) Mode
s07bc02
! For smooth, efficient performance
driving
s07bc0201
The linear acceleration characteristic of
the Intelligent (I) mode is ideal for normal
driving usage.
The Intelligent (I) mode provides well-
balanced performance with greater fuel
efficiency and smooth driveability without
stress. Power delivery is moderate during
acceleration for maximum fuel efficiency.
This is ideal for around-town driving and
situations that do not require full power
output. It provides better control in difficult
driving conditions, such as slippery roads
or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle
response.
& Sport Sharp (S#) Mode
s07bc04
! For maximum performance driving
s07bc0401
For sports-minded drivers, the Sport
Sharp (S#) mode offers an exhilarating
level of engine performance and control.
The throttle becomes more responsive
regardless of the engine speed. Delivering
maximum driving enjoyment, this mode is
ideal for tackling twisting roads and for
merging or overtaking other vehicles on
the freeway with confidence.
& SI-DRIVE Switches
s07bc01
. To select the Intelligent (I) mode, press
the “I” switch.
. To select the Sport Sharp (S#) mode,
press the “S#” switch.
NOTE
. While the engine is cool, you cannot
change to Sport Sharp (S#) mode.
. The next time you turn on the engine,
after you turned off the engine in the
Sport Sharp (S#) mode, the SI-DRIVE
mode changes to the Intelligent (I)
mode.
– CONTINUED –
SI-DRIVE
353
7
Starting and Operating
(356,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. While the engine is running, if the
CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunc-
tion indicator light illuminates, the
SI-DRIVE mode changes to the Sport
Sharp (S#) mode. In this case, it is not
possible to change to another mode.
. If any of the SI-DRIVE indicators
blink, the SI-DRIVE system may be
malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU
dealer.
7-9. Power Steering
s07aj
Power steering warning light
The vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering system. When the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
power steering warning light on the com-
bination meter illuminates to inform the
driver that the warning system is function-
ing properly. Then, if the engine started,
the warning light turns off to inform the
driver that the steering power assist is
operational.
CAUTION
While the power steering warning
light is illuminated, there may be
more resistance when the steering
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and
have the vehicle inspected immedi-
ately.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following ways, the power steering
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent the
system components, such as the con-
trol computer and drive motor, from
overheating.
. The steering wheel is operated fre-
quently and turned sharply while the
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
speeds, such as while frequently turn-
ing the steering wheel during parallel
parking.
. The steering wheel remains in the
fully turned position for a long period of
time.
At this time, there will be more resis-
tance when steering. However this is
not a malfunction. Normal steering
force will be restored after the steering
wheel is not operated for a while and
the power steering control system has
an opportunity to cool down. However,
if the power steering is operated in a
non-standard way which causes power
Power Steering
354
(357,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
assist limitation to occur too frequently,
this may result in a malfunction of the
power steering control system.
7-10. Braking
s07ak
& Braking Tips
s07ak01
WARNING
Never rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause
dangerous overheating of the
brakes and needless wear on the
brake pads.
! When the brakes get wet
s07ak0101
When driving in rain or after washing the
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a
result, brake stopping distance will be
longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle
at a safe speed while lightly depressing the
brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
! Use of engine braking
s07ak0102
Remember to make use of engine braking
in addition to foot braking. When descend-
ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,
the brakes may start working improperly
because of brake fluid overheating,
caused by overheated brake pads. To help
prevent this, shift into a lower gear to get
stronger engine braking.
! Braking when a tire is punctured
s07ak0103
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause
a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep
driving straight ahead while gradually
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place.
& Brake System
s07ak02
! Two separate circuits
s07ak0201
Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake
system. Each circuit works diagonally
across the vehicle. If one circuit of the
brake system should fail, the other half of
the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will go down much closer
to the floor than usual and you will need to
press it down much harder. And a much
longer distance will be needed to stop the
vehicle.
! Brake booster
s07ak0202
The brake booster uses engine manifold
vacuum to assist braking force. Do not turn
off the engine while driving because that
will turn off the brake booster, resulting in
poor braking power.
The brakes will continue to work even
when the brake booster completely stops
functioning. If this happens, however, you
will have to depress the pedal much harder
than normal and the braking distance will
increase.
– CONTINUED –
Braking
355
7
Starting and Operating
(358,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Brake assist system
s07ak0203
WARNING
Do not be overconfident about the
brake assist. It is not a system that
brings more braking ability to the
vehicle beyond its braking capabil-
ity. Always use the utmost care
when driving regarding vehicle
speed and safe distance.
CAUTION
When you need to brake suddenly,
continue depressing the brake pedal
strongly to bring the effect of the
brake assist.
Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
It assists the brake power when the driver
cannot depress the brake pedal strongly
and the brake power is insufficient.
Brake assist generates the brake power
according to the speed at which the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
NOTE
When you depress the brake pedal
strongly or suddenly, the following
phenomena occur. However, even
though these occur, they do not indi-
cate any malfunctions, and the brake
assist system is operating properly.
. You might feel that the brake pedal is
applied by lighter force and generates a
greater braking force.
. You might hear the sound of ABS
operating from the engine compart-
ment.
& Disc Brake Pad Wear Warning
Indicators
s07ak03
The disc brake pad wear warning indica-
tors on the disc brakes give a warning
noise when the brake pads are worn.
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard
from the disc brakes while braking, im-
mediately have your vehicle inspected by
the nearest SUBARU dealer.
7-11. ABS (Anti-Lock Brake
System)
s07al
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in driv-
ing – overconfidence because you
are driving with an ABS equipped
vehicle could easily lead to a serious
accident.
CAUTION
. The ABS does not always de-
crease stopping distance. You
should always maintain a safe
following distance from other
vehicles.
. When driving on badly surfaced
roads, gravel roads, icy road, or
over newly fallen snow, stopping
distances may be longer for a
vehicle with the ABS than one
without. When driving under
these conditions, therefore, re-
duce your speed and leave ample
distance from other vehicles.
. When you feel the ABS operating,
you should maintain constant
brake pedal pressure. Do not
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
356
(359,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
pump the brake pedal since
doing so may defeat the opera-
tion of the ABS.
The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels
which may occur during sudden braking or
braking on slippery road surfaces. This
helps prevent the loss of steering control
and directional stability caused by wheel
lock-up.
When the ABS is operating, you may hear
a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration
in the brake pedal. This is normal when the
ABS operates.
The ABS will not operate when the vehicle
speed is below approximately 6 mph (10
km/h).
& ABS Self-Check
s07al01
You may feel a slight shock in the brake
pedal and hear the operating noise of the
ABS from the engine compartment just
after the vehicle is started. This is caused
by an automatic functional test of the ABS
being carried out and does not indicate any
abnormal condition.
& ABS Warning Light
s07al02
Refer to “ABS Warning Light” FP185.
7-12. Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD) System
s07am
The EBD system maximizes the effective-
ness of the brakes by allowing the rear
brakes to supply a greater proportion of the
braking force. It functions by adjusting the
distribution of braking force to the rear
wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
loading condition and speed.
The EBD system is an integral part of the
ABS and uses some of the ABS compo-
nents to perform its function of optimizing
the distribution of braking force. If any of
the ABS components used by the EBD
function fails, the EBD system also stops
working.
When the EBD system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
and does not indicate a malfunction.
& EBD System Malfunctions
s07am01
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
the system stops working and the brake
system warning light and ABS warning
light illuminate simultaneously.
. Brake system warning light
. ABS warning light
. Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light
If the both warning light remains on even
though the parking brake is released, the
brake fluid level may be low or there could
be a problem with the EBD system. Park
the vehicle in a safe place immediately and
contact an SUBARU dealer.
– CONTINUED –
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System
357
7
Starting and Operating
(360,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
may not be working properly. If
the light remains on, have the
brakes inspected by a SUBARU
dealer immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether the
brakes are operating properly, do
not drive the vehicle. Have your
vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
7-13. Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol System
s07an
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in driv-
ing – overconfidence because you
are driving with a Vehicle Dynamics
Control system equipped vehicle
could easily lead to a serious acci-
dent.
CAUTION
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with Vehicle Dynamics Control
system, winter tires should be
used when driving on snow-cov-
ered or icy roads; in addition,
vehicle speed should be reduced
considerably. Simply having a
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem does not guarantee that the
vehicle will be able to avoid
accidents in any situation.
. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system is an
indication that the road being
travelled on has a slippery sur-
face; since having Vehicle Dy-
namics Control is no guarantee
that full vehicle control will be
maintained at all times and under
all conditions, its activation
should be seen as a sign that
the speed of the vehicle should
be reduced considerably.
. Whenever suspension compo-
nents, steering components, or
an axle are removed from a
vehicle equipped with the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system, have
an inspection of that system
performed by an authorized
SUBARU dealer.
. The following precautions should
be observed in order to ensure
that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system is operating properly.
– All four wheels should be
fitted with tires of the same
size, type, and brand. Further-
more, the amount of wear
should be the same for all four
tires.
– Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
vehicle placard attached to
the driver’s side door pillar.
– When replacing a flat tire, use
only the specified temporary
Vehicle Dynamics Control System
358
(361,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
spare tire. However, even with
the specified temporary spare
tire, the effectiveness of the
Vehicle Dynamics Control
system will be reduced.
. If non-matching tires are used,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system may not operate cor-
rectly.
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding
on a slippery road surface and/or during
cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
adjusts the engine’s output and the
wheels’ respective braking forces to help
maintain traction and directional control.
. Traction Control Function
The traction control function is designed to
prevent spinning of the driving wheels on
slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to
maintain traction and directional control.
Activation of this function is indicated by
flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light.
. Skid Suppression Function
The skid suppression function is designed
to help maintain directional stability by
suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide
sideways during steering operations. Acti-
vation of this function is indicated by
flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light.
NOTE
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem may be considered normal when
the following conditions occur.
– Slight twitching of the brake
pedal is felt.
– The vehicle or steering wheel
shakes to a small degree.
– An operating noise from the en-
gine compartment is heard briefly
when starting the engine and when
driving off after starting the engine.
– The brake pedal seems to jolt
when driving off after starting the
engine.
. In the following circumstances, the
vehicle may be less stable than it feels
to the driver. The Vehicle Dynamics
Control System may therefore operate.
Such operation does not indicate a
system malfunction.
– On gravel-covered or rutted
roads
– On unfinished roads
– When the vehicle is towing a
trailer (Outback)
– When the vehicle is fitted with
snow tires or winter tires
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will cause operation of
the steering wheel to feel slightly
different compared to that for normal
conditions.
. It is always important to reduce
speed when approaching a corner,
even if the vehicle is equipped with
Vehicle Dynamics Control.
. Always turn off the engine before
replacing a tire as failure to do so may
render the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system unable to operate correctly.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control
System Monitor
s07an01
Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control Warn-
ing Light/Vehicle Dynamics Control Op-
eration Indicator Light” FP190 and “Vehi-
cle Dynamics Control OFF Indicator Light”
FP191.
& To Turn On/Off the Vehicle
Dynamics Control System
s07an07
To turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control on
and off, operate the center information
display. Refer to “Car settings” FP220
(11.6-inch display models) or “Vehicle
setting icons” FP239 (dual 7.0-inch dis-
play models).
Creating an adequate driving wheel slip by
– CONTINUED –
Vehicle Dynamics Control System
359
7
Starting and Operating
(362,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
deactivating the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system temporarily may help to escape
from the following situations. Turn the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system off when
necessary.
. A standing start on a steeply sloping
road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or
otherwise slippery surface
. Extrication of the vehicle when its
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow
When turning off the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system during engine operation,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-
tor light on the combination meter illumi-
nates. The Vehicle Dynamics Control
system will be deactivated. When “Vehicle
Dynamics Control” has been touched
again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF indicator light turns off.
You should not deactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system except under
the above-mentioned situations.
CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem helps prevent unstable vehicle
motion such as skidding using con-
trol of the brakes and engine power.
Do not turn off the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system unless it is abso-
lutely necessary. If you must turn off
the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem, drive very carefully based on
the road surface condition.
NOTE
. When “Vehicle Dynamics Control”
has been touched to deactivate the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system auto-
matically reactivates itself the next time
the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position and the engine
is restarted.
. When “Vehicle Dynamics Control”
has been touched to deactivate the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the
vehicle’s running performance is com-
parable with that of a vehicle that does
not have a Vehicle Dynamics Control
system. Do not deactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system except when
absolutely necessary.
. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is deactivated, compo-
nents of the brake control system may
still activate. When the brake control
system is activated, the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control operation indicator
light flashes.
7-14. X-MODE (Outback)
s07bi
WARNING
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving a vehicle
with X-MODE could easily lead to
a serious accident.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving a vehicle
with hill descent control function
could easily lead to a serious
accident. Be especially careful,
and depress the brake pedal if
necessary when driving on ex-
tremely steep downhill, frozen,
muddy or sandy roads. Failure
to control the vehicle’s speed
may cause a loss of control and
result in a serious accident.
CAUTION
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with X-MODE, winter tires should
be used when driving on snow-
covered or icy roads; in addition,
vehicle speed should be reduced
considerably. Simply having
X-MODE (Outback)
360
(363,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
X-MODE does not guarantee that
the vehicle will be able to avoid
accidents in any situation.
. Activate the X-MODE when you
encounter a very slippery surface
at low speed. However, having
X-MODE is no guarantee that full
vehicle control will be maintained
at all times and under all condi-
tions. When activating X-MODE,
the speed of the vehicle should
be reduced considerably.
. Whenever suspension compo-
nents, steering components, or
an axle are removed from a
vehicle, have the system in-
spected by an authorized
SUBARU dealer.
. Observe the following precau-
tions in order to ensure that the
X-MODE is operating properly:
– All four wheels should be
fitted with tires of the same
size, type, and brand. Further-
more, the amount of wear
should be the same for all four
tires.
– Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
label attached to the vehicle’s
door pillar.
– Use only the special tempor-
ary spare tire to replace a flat
tire. With a normal temporary
spare tire, the effectiveness of
the X-MODE is reduced and
this should be taken into ac-
count when driving the vehi-
cle in such a condition.
. If the hill descent control function
has operated continuously for a
long time, the temperature of the
brake disc may increase and the
hill descent control function may
be temporarily disabled. In this
case, the hill descent control
indicator will disappear. When
the hill descent control indicator
disappears, the hill descent con-
trol function is disabled.
X-MODE is the integrated control system
of the engine, AWD and Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, etc. for driving with bad
road conditions. Using X-MODE, you can
drive more comfortably even in slippery
road conditions including uphill and down-
hill.
X-MODE has the following functions.
. Hill descent control function:
Using the hill descent control function, you
can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed
driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is
likely to increase, the brake control system
will be activated to adjust the vehicle
speed.
. Driving ability control:
This mode increases the hill-climbing
ability and driving ability as well as
enabling smooth application of torque for
easier control of the steering wheel.
& To Activate/Deactivate the
X-MODE
s07bi01
X-MODE indicator (models with 1 mode)
1) X-MODE indicator
– CONTINUED –
X-MODE (Outback)
361
7
Starting and Operating
(364,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
X-MODE indicator (models with 2 modes)
1) DEEP SNOW/MUD mode indicator
2) SNOW/DIRT mode indicator
To activate or deactivate the X-MODE,
operate the center information display.
Refer to “Car settings” FP220 (11.6-inch
display models) or “Vehicle setting icons”
FP239 (dual 7.0-inch display models).
NOTE
. Even if you try to activate the
X-MODE when the vehicle speed is 12
mph (20 km/h) or more, the X-MODE will
not be activated. At this time, a buzzer
will sound twice.
. If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more while the X-MODE is
activated, a buzzer will sound once and
the X-MODE will be deactivated.
. While the engine is running, if any of
the following conditions is met, the
X-MODE will be deactivated. In this
case, it is not possible to activate the
X-MODE.
– The CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light illu-
minates.
– The AT OIL TEMP warning light
flashes.
– The ABS warning light illumi-
nates.
– The Vehicle Dynamics Control
warning light illuminates.
. If the engine could overheat because
of a temperature increase of the engine
coolant, it may not be possible to
activate the X-MODE. Even while the
X-MODE is activated, the X-MODE will
be deactivated when the engine coolant
temperature increases.
. The Auto Start Stop system will be
stopped while the X-MODE is activated.
Models with 2 modes:
. SNOW/DIRT is suitable for driving
on a snow-covered road where the
points of contact between the tires
and road surface are visible, or for
driving on an unpaved road.
. D.SNOW/MUD is suitable for driving
on a road covered with deep snow
where the points of contact between
the tires and road surface are not
visible, or for driving on a muddy road.
& Hill Descent Control Function
s07bi03
The hill descent control function will be in
standby mode when the X-MODE is
activated and the vehicle speed is less
than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).
The function will operate when the vehicle
speed is less than approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less
than approximately 10%.
The function will turn off when the vehicle
speed is more than approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
CAUTION
The braking power of the hill des-
cent control function may not be
sufficient when strong braking
power is needed (e.g., when towing
a trailer).
X-MODE (Outback)
362
(365,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
NOTE
. Even while the hill descent control
function is operating, you can vary the
vehicle speed using the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
. During braking by the hill descent
control function, the hill descent con-
trol indicator will flash.
. The hill descent control function is
operable regardless of the gradient of
the road.
. The hill descent control function
may be considered normal when the
following conditions occur.
– An operating sound is heard
briefly from the engine compart-
ment while the hill descent control
function is operating.
– The sensation of depressing the
brake pedal is different, (harder than
usual etc.) when the brake pedal is
depressed during hill descent con-
trol function operation.
! Hill descent control indicator
s07bi0301
This indicator appears while the hill des-
cent control function is in the standby
mode. It flashes while the function is
operating. It will disappear when the
function is in the disabled mode. When
this function is changed from operational
to non-operational, it will disappear when
the vehicle speed reaches more than
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).
7-15. Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System (TPMS) (U.S.-
Spec. Models)
s07ao
Low tire pressure warning light
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message by
sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, this
system may not react immediately to a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,
a blow-out caused by running over a sharp
object).
– CONTINUED –
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models)
363
7
Starting and Operating
(366,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead,
perform the following procedure.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and ser-
ious personal injury could occur.
(1) Keep driving straight ahead
while gradually reducing
speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a
safe place.
(3) Check the pressure for all four
tires and adjust the pressure
to the COLD tire pressure
shown on the vehicle placard
on the door pillar on the
driver’s side.
Even when the vehicle is driven a
very short distance, the tires get
warm and their pressures in-
crease accordingly. Be sure to
let the tires cool thoroughly be-
fore adjusting their pressures to
the standard values shown on the
tire placard. Refer to “Tires and
Wheels” FP502. The tire pres-
sure monitoring system does not
function when the vehicle is sta-
tionary. After adjusting the tire
pressures, increase the vehicle
speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h)
to start the TPMS rechecking of
the tire inflation pressures. If the
tire pressures are now above the
severe low pressure threshold,
the low tire pressure warning
light should turn off a few min-
utes later.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may have signifi-
cant damage and a fast leak that
causes the tire to lose air rapidly.
If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low
tire pressure warning light will
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
This indicates the TPMS is unable
to monitor all four road wheels.
Contact your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible for tire and
sensor replacement and/or sys-
tem resetting.
. When a tire is repaired with liquid
sealant, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not
operate properly. If a liquid sea-
lant is used, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer or other qualified
service shop as soon as possi-
ble. Make sure to replace the tire
pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the
tire. You may reuse the wheel if
there is no damage to it and if the
sealant residue is properly
cleaned off. Do not inject any tire
liquid or aerosol tire sealant into
the tires, as this may cause a
malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors. If the light illuminates
steadily after blinking for ap-
proximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU
dealer to have the system in-
spected.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models)
364
(367,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
CAUTION
Do not place metal film or any metal
parts under the driver’s seat. This
may cause poor reception of the
signals from the tire pressure sen-
sors, and the tire pressure monitor-
ing system will not function prop-
erly.
FCC ID: CWTD1G141
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
& TPMS Screen
s07ao05
This screen displays each tire pressure.
Refer to “Basic Screens” FP205.
7-16. Parking Your Vehicle
s07ap
WARNING
. Never leave unattended children
or pets in the vehicle. They could
accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent op-
eration of the vehicle. Also, on
hot or sunny days, the tempera-
ture in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to them.
. Do not park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags, as
they may burn easily if they come
near hot engine or exhaust sys-
tem parts.
. Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If engine
exhaust gas enters the passen-
ger compartment, occupants in
the vehicle could die from carbon
monoxide (CO) contained in the
exhaust gas.
– CONTINUED –
Parking Your Vehicle
365
7
Starting and Operating
(368,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Electronic Parking Brake
s07ap03
1) Parking brake switch
2) Indicator light
3) Release the electronic parking brake
4) Apply the electronic parking brake
WARNING
. Before exiting the vehicle, make
sure that you turn off the engine.
Otherwise, the parking brake may
be released and an accident may
occur.
. If the brake system warning light
turns on, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunc-
tioning. Immediately stop your
vehicle in a safe location, use tire
stops under the tires to prevent
the vehicle from moving and
contact your SUBARU dealer.
. If the electronic parking brake is
operated under the following
conditions, the electronic park-
ing brake indicator light may
flash.
– The brake is overheated.
– The vehicle is on a steep
slope.
In such cases, the vehicle may
start to move which may lead to
an accident. Always use the tire
stops.
CAUTION
. When the electronic parking
brake cannot be applied due to a
malfunction, contact your
SUBARU dealer immediately for
an inspection. If you have to park
your vehicle in such conditions,
perform the following procedure.
– Stop your vehicle in a flat
location.
– Shift the select lever in the “P”
position. When the select le-
ver cannot be shifted into the
“P” position, you must release
shift lock. Refer to “Shift Lock
Function” FP349.
– Use tire stops under the tires
to prevent the vehicle from
moving.
. Never drive with the parking
brake applied. Doing so will
cause unnecessary brake pad
wear. Before driving off, always
make sure that the parking brake
has been released and the brake
system warning light has turned
off.
. The braking power of the electro-
nic parking brake may not be
sufficient when strong braking
power is needed (e.g., when park-
ing on a steep slope while towing
a trailer (Outback)).
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
parking brake. You can apply/release the
parking brake by operating the parking
brake switch.
To apply: Depress the brake pedal and
pull up the parking brake switch.
To release: Press the parking brake
switch firmly while the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
Parking Your Vehicle
366
(369,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Electronic parking brake indicator light
When the parking brake is applied while
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the following indicator lights illuminate.
. The indicator light on the parking brake
switch
. The electronic parking brake indicator
light on the combination meter (for details,
refer to “Electronic Parking Brake Indicator
Light” FP187.)
NOTE
. The parking brake will not be re-
leased under the following conditions
even if the parking brake switch is
pressed.
– The ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
– The brake pedal is not depressed.
. The electronic parking brake system
uses motors to apply the parking brake.
Therefore, operating sounds from the
motors will be heard when applying or
releasing the parking brake. Make sure
that the motor sounds are heard when
applying or releasing the parking
brake.
. When the electronic parking brake
system has a malfunction or the elec-
tronic parking brake operation is pro-
hibited temporarily, if the parking brake
switch is operated, a chirp sound is
heard and the electronic parking brake
indicator light flashes.
. When you cannot release the park-
ing brake due to, for example, a system
malfunction, contact your SUBARU
dealer and have your SUBARU dealer
release the parking brake.
. If the operation of the electronic
parking brake switch is stopped mid-
way or performed extremely slowly, the
system may detect an error and turn on
the brake system warning light. How-
ever, this does not indicate a malfunc-
tion if the warning light turns off after
operating the switch.
. When the electronic parking brake
has not been used for a long period of
time, the electronic parking brake may
operate automatically after the ignition
switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”
position. This occurs due to checking
the proper operation of the electronic
parking brake and does not indicate a
malfunction.
. If the electronic parking brake
switch is malfunctioning and the elec-
tronic parking brake cannot be re-
leased, refer to the instructions de-
scribed in “Automatic release function
by accelerator pedal” FP368.
. After activating the electronic park-
ing brake, you may hear a short sound
several minutes after the electronic
parking brake indicator light and the
indicator light on the electronic parking
brake switch illuminate as the system
confirms proper engagement. This
sound is different from the apply and
release sound.
This can occur:
– If the brakes are extremely hot.
– If the car is parked on a steep
incline.
– If the electronic parking brake is
applied after the ignition switch is
turned OFF.
This is a normal operating sound under
any of these conditions.
. The Auto Start Stop system is deac-
tivated while the electronic parking
brake is applied.
– CONTINUED –
Parking Your Vehicle
367
7
Starting and Operating
(370,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. If you operate the electronic parking
brake switch while the Auto Start Stop
system is activated, the Auto Start Stop
system will be deactivated. The elec-
tronic parking brake will activate after
the engine is restarted. After the elec-
tronic parking brake indicator light is
illuminated, release your foot from the
brake pedal.
. When starting the engine or restart-
ing the engine using the Auto Start Stop
system, if you operate the electronic
parking brake switch, the electronic
parking brake indicator light may flash
temporarily. However, this is not a
malfunction if the light turns off after
the electronic parking brake is deacti-
vated.
! Automatic release function by ac-
celerator pedal
s07ap0301
The electronic parking brake system has
an automatic release function. The parking
brake will be automatically released by
depressing the accelerator pedal. How-
ever, the automatic release function does
not operate under the following conditions.
. Any door (other than the trunk lid or rear
gate) is open.
. The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.
If the parking brake is automatically
released, the electronic parking brake
indicator light and the indicator light on
the parking brake switch turn off.
NOTE
Even if you have applied the parking
brake, the parking brake will be auto-
matically released when the accelera-
tor pedal is depressed.
! Auto Vehicle Hold function
s07ap0305
The Auto Vehicle Hold function will auto-
matically keep the vehicle stopped even
after releasing the brake pedal when the
vehicle is at a complete stop, such as at
traffic signals.
WARNING
. Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold
function on a steep hill or slip-
pery road. The vehicle may move
even when using the Auto Vehicle
Hold function, causing serious
injury or accidents.
. Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold
function to park the vehicle. The
vehicle may move unexpectedly,
causing serious injury or acci-
dents. Make sure to shift the
select lever to the “P” position
and apply the electronic parking
brake in the following cases.
– When you are going to park
your vehicle.
– When passengers are getting
in or out of the vehicle.
– When you are loading or un-
loading.
. When using the Auto Vehicle
Hold function, do not release the
brake pedal before the Auto Ve-
hicle Hold operation indicator
illuminates. The vehicle may
move unexpectedly, causing ser-
ious injury or accidents.
. Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold
function in the following cases.
Otherwise, the vehicle may move
unexpectedly, causing serious
injury or accidents.
– When washing your vehicle in
an automatic car wash
– When being towed
CAUTION
. When stopping on a steep slope
with the Auto Vehicle Hold func-
tion turned on, the electronic
parking brake may be automati-
cally applied. Then the electronic
parking brake indicator light will
Parking Your Vehicle
368
(371,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
flash. In such a case, depress and
hold the brake pedal while stop-
ping. Otherwise, the vehicle may
move.
. When being towed, turn off the
Auto Vehicle Hold function.
NOTE
We recommend turning on the Auto
Vehicle Hold function when stopping
on an incline. If the Auto Vehicle Hold
function is turned off, the vehicle may
roll backward when driving off.
! To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle
Hold function
s07ap030501
Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light
To turn the Auto Vehicle Hold function on
and off, operate the center information
display. Refer to “Car settings” FP220
(11.6-inch display models) or “Vehicle
setting icons” FP239 (dual 7.0-inch dis-
play models).
When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is
turned OFF, the Auto Vehicle Hold ON
indicator light will turn off.
NOTE
. When the electronic parking brake
system has a malfunction while the
Auto Vehicle Hold function is turned on,
a chirp will sound, the Auto Vehicle
Hold ON indicator light will turn off and
the brake system warning light will turn
on.
. Every time when starting the engine,
the Auto Vehicle Hold function will be
set to “OFF”.
! To operate the Auto Vehicle Hold
function
s07ap030503
Stop the vehicle by depressing the brake
pedal when all of the following conditions
are met. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold
function will operate.
. Driver’s door is closed.
. The driver’s seatbelt is fastened.
. The select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator light
While the vehicle is kept stopped by the
Auto Vehicle Hold function, the Auto
Vehicle Hold operation indicator light will
illuminate.
! To release the Auto Vehicle Hold
function
s07ap030504
Perform any of the following operations to
release the Auto Vehicle Hold function.
. Depress the accelerator pedal.
. Depress the brake pedal again.
. Apply the electronic parking brake.
. Shift the select lever to the “P” position
with the brake pedal pressed.
. Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold func-
tion operating with the center information
display while depressing the brake pedal.
– CONTINUED –
Parking Your Vehicle
369
7
Starting and Operating
(372,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is
released, the Auto Vehicle Hold operation
indicator light will turn off.
Under any of the following conditions, the
Auto Vehicle Hold function will be auto-
matically released and the electronic
parking brake will be automatically ap-
plied.
. The Auto Vehicle Hold function has
been in operation for 10 minutes.
. The driver’s seatbelt is unfastened.
. The ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position.
. The vehicle is stopped on a steep
slope.
. The Auto Vehicle Hold function is
malfunctioning.
In such cases, the Auto Vehicle Hold
operation indicator light will turn off and
the electronic parking brake indicator light
will illuminate.
! Tips
s07ap030505
. When the electronic parking brake is
automatically applied with the vehicle kept
stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold function,
release the electronic parking brake by
either of the following operations before
starting off. Then make sure that the
electronic parking brake indicator light is
off.
– Depress the accelerator pedal with
the driver’s seatbelt fastened and with
the doors closed.
– Press the electronic parking brake
switch with the brake pedal depressed.
. Under certain conditions, including a
malfunction of the Auto Vehicle Hold, a
warning buzzer will sound and a warning
message will appear on the combination
meter display (color LCD). All warning
messages should be strictly observed.
. On a steep slope, the vehicle cannot be
kept stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold
function. In such a case, depress and hold
the brake pedal.
. When stopping on a steep slope with
the Auto Vehicle Hold function activated,
the electronic parking brake may automa-
tically applied after stopping, then the
electronic parking brake indicator light
may flash. In such a case, depress and
hold the brake pedal while stopped.
Otherwise, the vehicle may move. When
getting out of the vehicle, stop the vehicle
on a flat surface, then apply the electronic
parking brake.
. If the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator
light does not illuminates even after
touching “Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)” with
the operating conditions met, the function
may have a malfunction. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
. You may hear a sound while the Auto
Vehicle Hold function is keeping your
vehicle stopped. This is normal, and does
not represent a malfunction.
. While the vehicle is kept stopped by the
Auto Vehicle Hold function, the brake
pedal may feel stiff. However, this is not a
malfunction.
. When using the Auto Vehicle Hold
function, depress the brake pedal firmly.
Otherwise, the Auto Vehicle Hold may not
operate.
! Emergency brake
s07ap0303
CAUTION
Use the emergency brake only in
case of an emergency. If the emer-
gency brake is excessively used, the
brake parts will wear down faster or
the brake may not work sufficiently
due to brake overheating.
NOTE
. While using the emergency brake,
the electronic parking brake indicator
light and the indicator light on the
parking brake switch illuminate and a
chirp sounds.
. While using the emergency brake, a
sound may be heard from the engine
Parking Your Vehicle
370
(373,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
compartment. This is the operating
sound of the brake that is activated by
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system,
and does not indicate a malfunction.
If the foot brake has a malfunction, you can
stop the vehicle by pulling the parking
brake switch continuously.
While applying the emergency brake, the
electronic parking brake indicator light and
the indicator light on the parking brake
switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.
! Electronic parking brake system
warning
s07ap0304
CAUTION
If the brake system warning light
turns on, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunction-
ing. Immediately stop your vehicle in
the nearest safe location and con-
tact your SUBARU dealer.
If a malfunction occurs in the electronic
parking brake system, the brake system
warning light turns on. Refer to “Electronic
parking brake system warning” FP187.
& Parking Tips
s07ap02
When parking your vehicle, always per-
form the following items.
. Apply the parking brake.
. Place the select lever in the “P” (Park)
position.
Never rely on the transmission alone to
hold the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, always turn the
steering wheel as described here. When
the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front
wheels should be turned away from the
curb.
When facing downhill, the front wheels
should be turned into the curb.
Parking Your Vehicle
371
7
Starting and Operating
(374,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
7-17. Auto Start Stop System
s07bh
The Auto Start Stop system is designed to
automatically stop and restart the engine
when the vehicle is stationary for a short
period of time (while waiting for a traffic
light or in a traffic jam) after the engine has
warmed up. The system operates in order
to reduce fuel consumption, exhaust emis-
sions and undesired idling noise.
& System Operation
s07bh01
CAUTION
The Auto Start Stop system is de-
signed to automatically stop and
restart the engine for a short period
of time during idling. Do not use the
system when parking the vehicle
normally.
So that it can be used safely and comfor-
tably, in addition to driver operations, the
Auto Start Stop system is designed to
constantly monitor the vehicle conditions
as well as the environment inside and
outside the vehicle, in order to control
stopping and restarting of the engine.
After the vehicle has been completely
stopped by depressing the brake pedal
with the select lever in the “D” position, the
engine will be automatically stopped.
If you release the brake pedal with the
select lever kept in the “D” position, the
engine will be automatically restarted.
However, when the Auto Vehicle Hold ON
indicator light illuminates, the engine will
not restart.
Auto Start Stop indicator light (green)
If the engine is temporarily stopped by the
system, the Auto Start Stop indicator light
on the combination meter will illuminate in
green. This indicator light will turn off when
the system restarts the engine.
NOTE
. After starting the engine, if the
vehicle is left idling without being
driven, the Auto Start Stop system will
not operate.
. Your vehicle is equipped with a
special high-performance battery.
When replacing the vehicle battery, be
sure to replace it with a genuine
SUBARU battery (or equivalent) de-
signed specifically for use in a vehicle
equipped with the Auto Start Stop
system. For details, consult your
SUBARU dealer.
! Operational conditions
s07bh0105
The engine can be automatically stopped
by the Auto Start Stop system when all of
the following conditions are met.
. The engine is sufficiently warmed up.
. The engine hood is closed.
. The driver’s door is closed.
. The driver’s seatbelt is fastened.
. The malfunction indicator light (Check
Engine light) is off.
. The airflow mode selection is set to a
mode other than “
” mode.
. The rear window defogger is not in use.
. The X-MODE has been turned off (if
equipped).
. The power rear gate has been turned
off (if equipped).
After the vehicle is stopped, the engine will
be automatically stopped when the follow-
ing conditions are met.
Auto Start Stop System
372
(375,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. The steering wheel is in the straight
ahead position.
. The steering wheel is not being oper-
ated.
NOTE
. After the vehicle is stopped, the
engine may not automatically stop
under the following conditions.
– The vehicle is stopped on a road
with a steep slope.
– The vehicle is stopped by hard
braking.
– Negative pressure in the brake
booster is not sufficient.
. After the vehicle is stopped, the
engine may not automatically stop if
the brake pedal is not fully depressed.
Make sure to depress the brake pedal
firmly when stopping the vehicle.
. In the following cases, it may take
some time for the Auto Start Stop
system to operate.
– When the battery is discharged
because the vehicle has not been
used for a long period of time, etc.
– The coolant temperature is low.
– When the battery terminals have
been reconnected after replacing
the battery, etc.
! Non-operational conditions
s07bh0106
In any of the following cases, the Auto
Start Stop system will not operate.
. When the Auto Start Stop warning light/
Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light is
illuminating.
. When the malfunction indicator light
(Check Engine light) is illuminating.
. The electronic parking brake is applied.
. When the engine hood is opened.
. When the vehicle is at an altitude of
more than approximately 10,000 ft (3,000
m).
. When the CVT fluid is not sufficiently
warmed up.
. When the temperature of the CVT fluid
is abnormally high.
. When the vehicle battery is not in good
condition.
. When using the climate control system,
the temperature difference between the
setting temperature and the temperature
inside the vehicle is significant.
. When using the climate control system,
the amount of air flow is significant.
NOTE
The Auto Start Stop system may not
operate if the malfunction indicator
light (Check Engine light) or other
warning lights on the combination
meter are illuminating.
! Engine restart operational condi-
tions
s07bh0107
In any one of the following cases, the
engine will be automatically restarted even
if the brake pedal is kept depressed.
. When slightly releasing the brake pedal
on road with a steep slope and the vehicle
begins rolling.
. When further depressing the brake
pedal.
. When depressing the accelerator ped-
al.
. When you move the select lever to the
“R” position.
. When turning the steering wheel.
. When operating the electronic parking
brake switch.
. When activating the X-MODE (if
equipped).
. When the air flow mode selection set to
“
” mode.
. When the climate control system can
no longer maintain the set temperature.
. When unbuckling the driver’s seatbelt.
. When opening the driver’s door.
. When activating the rear window de-
fogger.
. When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is
released, refer to “Auto Vehicle Hold
– CONTINUED –
Auto Start Stop System
373
7
Starting and Operating
(376,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
function” FP368.
! Engine restart non-operational
conditions
s07bh0108
To ensure safety, the engine will not be
automatically restarted if the engine hood
is opened when the Auto Start Stop
system is in operation, even if the brake
pedal is released. In this case, check the
surrounding area and restart the engine by
normal operation.
Also, when the Auto Vehicle Hold opera-
tion indicator light is illuminated, the
engine will not restart.
To ensure safety, the engine will not be
automatically restarted if you open the
engine hood when the Auto Start Stop
system is in operation, even if you release
the brake pedal. In this case, check the
surrounding area and restart the engine by
normal operation.
NOTE
. When the Auto Start Stop system is
in operation, the brake pedal may feel
stiff. However, this is not a malfunction.
. In the following conditions, the en-
gine will be automatically restarted
even if you keep the brake pedal
depressed.
– When the battery is discharged.
– When the negative pressure in
the brake booster has lowered
. In the following cases, the length of
time that the engine is temporarily
stopped by the Auto Start Stop system
may be shorter.
– When the climate control system
is in operation.
– When the outside temperature is
high, or when it is low (because the
climate control system can no long-
er maintain the set temperature).
– When consumption of electricity
by electrical components is high.
. When the engine is automatically
restarted by the Auto Start Stop sys-
tem, the power provided via the acces-
sory power outlet will be reduced.
Depending on the connected appli-
ance, the power of the appliance may
temporarily turn off.
! Auto Start Stop warning light
s07bh0109
Auto Start Stop warning light (yellow)
The Auto Start Stop warning light will
illuminate in yellow when initially turning
the ignition switch to the “ON” position. The
light will turn off after the engine has
started.
CAUTION
If the Auto Start Stop warning light
does not turn off after the engine has
started, the Auto Start Stop system
may be malfunctioning. We recom-
mend that you contact your author-
ized SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion.
Auto Start Stop System
374
(377,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! To turn on/off the Auto Start Stop
system
s07bh0111
Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light
To turn the Auto Start Stop system on and
off, operate the center information display.
Refer to “Car settings” FP220 (11.6-inch
display models) or “Vehicle setting icons”
FP239 (dual 7.0-inch display models).
When the Auto Start Stop system is turned
OFF, the Auto Start Stop OFF indicator
light on the combination meter display
(color LCD) will illuminate.
While the engine is temporarily stopped by
the system, if the Auto Start Stop system
turns off, the engine will be restarted even
if you do not release the brake pedal.
NOTE
. If the engine is restarted when the
Auto Start Stop system is not opera-
tional and the ignition switch has been
turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position,
the Auto Start Stop system will turn on
again.
. Be sure to turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position when leav-
ing the vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in the battery discharging.
! Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected
indicator light
s07bh0110
Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected
indicator light
If the operational conditions are not met
when the vehicle is stopped, the engine
will not stop and the Auto Start Stop No
Activity Detected indicator light will illumi-
nate. It will turn off when the vehicle begins
to drive.
& Displaying the Auto Start
Stop System Status
s07bh02
Approximate indications of the time that
the engine has been stopped by the Auto
Start Stop system and/or the amount of
fuel saved can be displayed on the
combination meter display (color LCD).
For details, refer to “Basic Screens”
FP205.
& System Warning
s07bh03
So that it can be used safely and comfor-
tably, the Auto Start Stop system is
designed to constantly monitor the vehicle
conditions as well as the environment
inside and outside the vehicle in addition
to driver operations, and to provide various
warnings to the driver via the warning light
and/or indicator light illuminating and a
buzzer sounding. For details about the
warning light and indicator light, refer to
“Auto Start Stop Warning Light (Yellow)”
FP198.
– CONTINUED –
Auto Start Stop System
375
7
Starting and Operating
(378,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Warning buzzer
s07bh0301
The buzzer will sound when the engine
hood is opened while the engine is
stopped by the Auto Start Stop system.
When this occurs, the buzzer will stop
sounding when the following operations
are performed.
. The engine is restarted by normal
operation. (Refer to “Preparing to Drive”
FP333.)
. The ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position.
! Display of warning messages
s07bh0302
If a warning message is displayed on the
combination meter display (color LCD)
while driving, a malfunction may have
occurred in the Auto Start Stop system.
In this case, the Auto Start Stop warning
light will illuminate. We recommend that
you have your vehicle inspected at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
7-18. Front View Monitor (If
Equipped)
s07bq
The image from the camera mounted
inside the front grille is displayed in the
center information display.
WARNING
. Never rely on only the Front View
Monitor when driving the vehicle.
The image on the monitor screen
may be different from the actual
situation. If you drive the vehicle
by viewing only the monitor im-
age, a collision or an unexpected
accident may occur. When driv-
ing the vehicle, always check the
traffic around the vehicle directly
with your eyes and the mirrors.
. Always operate the vehicle as
you would without the Front View
Monitor.
. Do not use the Front View Monitor
in the following situations.
– You are driving on a dirt road
or a road covered in snow.
– The camera malfunctions (e.g.
the lens or bracket is broken).
. If the outside temperature is low,
the monitor screen may become
dark or the image may become
dim. In particular, the image of a
moving object may be distorted
or disappear from the screen.
You must always check the traffic
around the vehicle directly with
your eyes when driving it.
NOTE
If there is a malfunction on the center
information display, refer to “Malfunc-
tions of the Center Information Dis-
play” FP468.
Front View Monitor
376
(379,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& How to Access the Front View
Monitor
s07bq01
1) Front view monitor switch
To change over to the camera screen,
make sure the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, then press the front view monitor
switch under the following conditions.
. The vehicle speed is below 12 mph (20
km/h).
. The select lever is in except “R”.
NOTE
The screen will change over to the rear
view image when the select lever is
moved to “R”. Refer to “Rear View
Camera” FP379.
& How to Cancel the Front View
Monitor
s07bq02
! Manual cancellation
s07bq0201
The Front View Monitor will be canceled by
either of the following operations.
. Press the front view monitor switch
again.
. Touch
(car settings icon).
. Touch
(HOME).
. Touch
(driver profiles icon).
! Automatic cancellation
s07bq0202
If any of the following conditions are met,
the Front View Monitor is canceled auto-
matically.
After accessing the Front View Monitor
by pressing the front view monitor
switch:
. Approximately 3 minutes have passed
since the last operation.
. The vehicle speed becomes 12.5 mph
(20 km/h) or higher.
. The select lever is shifted to the “P”
position.
. Pulling up the parking brake switch with
the brake pedal depressed to apply the
parking brake.
& Range of Image on Screen
s07bq03
A) Traffic intersection with a poor visibility
view
B) Parking facing a wall
1) Range of displayed image
2) Obstacles (e.g., buildings, fences or
other vehicles)
– CONTINUED –
Front View Monitor
377
7
Starting and Operating
(380,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
WARNING
Because the range of the image
captured by the camera is limited,
always check the traffic around the
vehicle directly with your eyes when
driving the vehicle.
NOTE
. The range of the displayed image
may differ depending on the vehicle
status or the road surface status.
. Because the Front View Monitor
system uses a specially designed lens,
the sense of distance in the displayed
image is different from the actual dis-
tance.
. The camera image may be difficult to
view in the following situations. This is
not a malfunction.
– Dark place (at night)
– High or low temperature around
the lens
– Water contacts lens or in high
humidity (rainy weather)
– There is foreign materials (such
as mud) around the camera
– Sunlight or headlight beam di-
rectly shines towards the camera
lens
. Under an artificial light such as a
fluorescent lamp, sodium-vapor lamp
or mercury lamp, the lighted portion
may look like it is flickering (flicker
phenomenon).
. While the display has cooled down,
the image may leave traces or become
darker than usual, causing a difficulty
in viewing the screen. Always check the
traffic around the vehicle directly with
your eyes while driving the vehicle.
. The following incidents should not
be deemed a malfunction.
– The camera lens may become
foggy when the humidity is high on
a rainy day.
– The light from a vehicle or build-
ing located ahead may be reflected
towards the camera image while
driving at night.
– In a dark place or while driving at
night, the camera image may be
adjusted to make noises less visi-
ble. Therefore, the image may look
like a monochromatic image or the
image colors may differ from the
actual colors. The camera image
may be deteriorated in regard to
sharpness at the center and four
corners of the screen. This is not a
malfunction.
& Guiding Line
s07bq04
1) Guiding line
2) Warning message
The guiding line that indicates the width
and the front end of your vehicle is
displayed on the display.
& Handling of Camera
s07bq05
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions.
Otherwise, the system may malfunc-
tion.
. Do not apply any strong impact to
the camera such as banging it or
hitting it with an object. The
mounting angle may change.
Front View Monitor
378
(381,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. The camera unit is a waterproof
structure. Do not attempt to re-
move, disassemble or modify the
unit.
. Do not rub strongly or polish the
camera lens with a hard brush or
abrasive compounds. The lens
may be scratched resulting in an
adverse effect to the camera
image.
. The camera lens is made of glass
or plastic. Do not allow any
organic solvent, body wax, oil
film remover or glass coating
agent to become attached on the
lens surface. If any becomes
attached, remove it immediately.
. Do not expose the camera lens to
any sudden temperature change,
for example, spraying hot water
on it in cold weather.
. Do not apply the water jet of a
high pressure washer to the cam-
era or the surrounding area when
cleaning the vehicle. The impact
by the strong water pressure may
cause the camera to come off.
Also, water may enter inside the
camera and cause a malfunction.
. If the camera is exposed to any
impact, it may lead to malfunction
of the camera. Have the camera
inspected by your SUBARU deal-
er as soon as possible.
. Do not use a steam cleaner under
any circumstances. Some types
of steam cleaners inject hot
steam.
. The camera surface may be da-
maged by a flying stone.
NOTE
If the camera lens is contaminated, no
sharp image is available. When the
camera is contaminated with water
drops, snow or mud, wash it with water
and wipe away any moisture with a soft
cloth. If it heavily gets dirty, wash it with
a neutral detergent.
7-19. Rear View Camera
s07br
A rear view camera is attached to the trunk
lid (Legacy) or rear gate (Outback). When
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position
and the select lever is set to “R”, the rear
view camera automatically displays the
rear view image behind the vehicle on the
center information display.
WARNING
. Since the rear view camera uses a
wide-angle lens, the image on the
monitor is different from the
actual view in terms of distance.
. Since the range of the image on
the monitor is limited, always
check the rear view and the
– CONTINUED –
Rear View Camera
379
7
Starting and Operating
(382,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
surrounding area with your eyes
and mirrors, and move backward
at a slow speed. Moving back-
ward only by checking the rear
view image from the camera
could cause an accident.
. Do not disassemble or modify the
camera, switch or wiring. If
smoke comes out or you smell a
strange odor, stop using the rear
view camera immediately. Con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for an
inspection. Continued use may
result in accident, fire or electric
shock.
CAUTION
. When washing your vehicle with
a high-pressure washer, do not
allow water to touch the camera
directly. Entry of water in the
camera lens may result in con-
densation, malfunction, fire or
electric shock.
. Since the camera is a precision
device, do not subject it to strong
impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,
fire or electric shock may occur.
. If mud or snow sticks to or is
frozen on the camera, you must
be very careful when removing it.
Otherwise, damage to the camera
may cause a fire or electric
shock. Pour water or lukewarm
water over the camera to remove
mud and ice, and wipe it with a
soft, dry cloth.
. Do not put a flame close to the
camera or wiring. Otherwise, da-
mage or fire may occur.
. When replacing the fuse, be sure
to use a fuse with the specified
rating. Use of a fuse with a
different rating may result in a
malfunction.
. If you use the rear view camera
for a long time while the engine is
not operated, the battery may
become completely discharged.
NOTE
. Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,
benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,
discoloration may occur. To remove
contamination, wipe the camera with a
cloth moistened with a diluted neutral
detergent. Then wipe it with a soft, dry
cloth.
. When waxing the vehicle, be careful
not to apply the wax to the camera. If it
comes in contact with the camera,
moisten a clean cloth with a diluted
neutral detergent to remove the wax.
. The camera lens has a hard coating
to help prevent scratches. However,
when washing the vehicle or cleaning
the camera lens, be careful not to
scratch the camera lens. Do not use a
washing brush directly on the camera
lens. The image quality of the rear view
camera may deteriorate.
. Strong light shined on the camera
lens may develop vertical lines around
the light source. This is not a malfunc-
tion.
. Under the fluorescent light, the dis-
play may flicker. However, this is not a
malfunction.
. The image of the rear view camera
may be slightly different from the actual
color of the objects.
. If there is a malfunction on the center
information display, refer to “Malfunc-
tions of the Center Information Dis-
play” FP468.
& How to Use the Rear View
Camera
s07br01
When the select lever is set to “R”, the rear
view camera automatically displays the
rear view image from the vehicle. When
the lever is set to other positions, the
image before setting to “R” is displayed.
Rear View Camera
380
(383,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.
2. Set the select lever to “R”.
NOTE
. The image of the rear view camera is
horizontally reversed as is the case
with the vehicle inside mirror or the
outside mirror.
. When “Rear Camera Delay Control”
is on, the rear view image will be
displayed on the center information
display for a certain period of time after
the select lever is shifted to a position
other than the “P” position from “R”. To
turn the function on and off, refer to
“General settings” FP216 (11.6-inch
display models) or “General settings”
FP234 (dual 7.0-inch display models).
. It may be difficult to see the image of
the rear view camera in the following
cases. This is not a malfunction of the
camera.
– The vehicle is in a dark place (at
night, in a tunnel, etc.).
– The vehicle is in an extremely hot
or cold place.
– An object (such as raindrops,
snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the
view of the rear view camera sticks
to the lens of the camera.
– Strong light is shining directly on
the camera lens (occasionally, there
are vertical lines on the screen).
& Viewing Range on the Screen
s07br02
CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with
the rear view camera is limited.
Always be sure to check with your
eyes when moving backward and
proceed slowly. Otherwise, it may
cause an accident or injury.
Range of view
Range of view
Image from camera
The area from the rear end of the bumper
can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the
bumper and areas just under the bumper
cannot be viewed.
– CONTINUED –
Rear View Camera
381
7
Starting and Operating
(384,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Also, the image from the rear view camera
looks shorter than the actual distance.
Range of view
Image from camera
The area above the camera cannot be
viewed. If there is an object that has a wide
projection on its upper part such as a sign
pole behind the vehicle, the projection
cannot be seen on the screen.
& Help Lines
s07br03
The help lines are a guide to help you
realize the actual distance from the screen
image.
NOTE
If you shift to the “R” range within
several seconds after turning on the
ignition switch, the warning message
may not be displayed. Wait for several
seconds after turning on the ignition
switch before shifting to the “R” range.
Then, the warning message will be
displayed.
Help lines
1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)
2) Approx. 10 ft (3 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
3) Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
4) Approx. 3 ft (1 m) from the bumper
(yellow horizontal line)
5) Approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) from the bumper
(red horizontal line)
6) Vehicle centerline
7) Dynamic guidelines
When the select lever is set to “R”, the
monitor screen displays the help lines
together with the rear view image.
CAUTION
. When moving backward, always
check the back with your eyes
without relying on the help lines.
Rear View Camera
382
(385,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Otherwise, it may cause an acci-
dent or injury.
. The actual position may be differ-
ent from the indication of the help
lines.
. Differences may occur due to the
number of passengers or the
loaded cargo.
. When the vehicle is on a slope or
inclined against the road, the
indication is different from the
actual position.
NOTE
When “Steering Angle Lines” is off, the
dynamic guidelines will be disappear
on the center information display. To
turn the dynamic guidelines on and off,
refer to “General settings” FP216
(11.6-inch display models) or “General
settings” FP234 (dual 7.0-inch display
models).
! Difference between screen image
and actual road
s07br0301
The distance markers show the distance
for a level road when the vehicle is not
loaded. It may be different from the actual
distance depending on the loading condi-
tions or road conditions.
! When there is an upward slope at
the back
s07br030101
1) 3 ft (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance.
! When there is a downward slope
at the back
s07br030102
1) 3 ft (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks nearer
than the actual distance.
NOTE
When cargo is loaded, the rear view
distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance as in an
upward slope.
– CONTINUED –
Rear View Camera
383
7
Starting and Operating
(386,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Feature of distance marker
s07br0302
1) 3 ft (1 m) line
2) 10 ft (3 m) line
The distance marker shows the distance
on the road. If there is a car or another
object close behind, distance cannot be
correctly displayed.
7-20. BSD/RCTA (If
Equipped)
s07bm
The BSD/RCTA consists of rear corner
radar with Blind Spot Detection and Rear
Cross Traffic Alert.
These functions of BSD/RCTA are the
systems that detect objects and vehicles to
the rear and draw attention to the driver
when changing a lane or when driving in
reverse.
WARNING
The driver is responsible for driving
safely. Always be sure to check the
surroundings with your eyes when
changing lanes or reversing the
vehicle.
The system is designed to assist the
driver in changing lanes or rever-
sing safely by monitoring the rear
and side areas of the vehicle. How-
ever, you cannot rely on this system
alone in assuring the safety during a
lane change or reversing. Overcon-
fidence in this system could result in
an accident and lead to serious
injury or death. Since the system
operation has various limitations,
the flashing or illumination of the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
may be delayed or it may not operate
at all even when a vehicle is present
in a neighboring lane or approach-
ing from either side.
The driver is responsible for paying
attention to the rear and side areas
of the vehicle.
& System Features
s07bm01
BSD/RCTA consists of the following func-
tions.
. To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an
adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at
high speed while driving the vehicle (Blind
Spot Detection)
. To detect a vehicle approaching from
the right or left while reversing the vehicle
(Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
The system uses radar sensors for the
following features.
NOTE
The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been
certified by the radio wave related laws
of the U.S. and other FCC compliant
countries, Canada and Mexico. When
driving in other countries, certification
of the country where the vehicle is
driven must be obtained. For certifica-
tion in the U.S. and other FCC compli-
BSD/RCTA
384
(387,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
ant countries, Canada and Mexico,
refer to “Certification for the BSD/
RCTA” FP391.
! Blind Spot Detection (BSD)
s07bm0101
1) Operating range
The system notifies the driver of the
presence of vehicles in its blind spot.
. If the system detects a vehicle in its
blind spot, it warns the driver by illuminat-
ing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
(s) on the outside mirror(s).
. If the driver operates the turn signal
lever in the direction where the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light is illuminating, the
system warns the driver of dangers by
flashing the BSD/RCTA approach indica-
tor light.
! Lane Change Assist (LCA)
s07bm010101
1) Operating range
The system notifies the driver of vehicles
approaching at a high speed in the
neighboring lanes.
. If the system detects a vehicle ap-
proaching at a high speed in the neighbor-
ing lanes, it warns the driver of dangers by
illuminating the BSD/RCTA approach in-
dicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s).
. If the driver operates the turn signal
lever in the direction where the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light is illuminating, the
system warns the driver of dangers by
flashing the BSD/RCTA approach indica-
tor light.
! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
s07bm0103
1) Operating range
The system notifies the driver of another
vehicle approaching from either side when
driving in reverse. This feature helps the
driver check the rear and side areas of the
vehicle when moving backward.
If the system detects a vehicle approach-
ing from either side while moving back-
ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the
following way.
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.
. A warning buzzer sounds.
. An icon appears on the center informa-
tion display.
– CONTINUED –
BSD/RCTA
385
7
Starting and Operating
(388,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Limitations of the detectability of
RCTA
s07bm010301
Since the detectability of RCTA is limited,
the RCTA may not operate properly in
angled parking.
Example 1
1) The detection range of the radar sensors
2) Area out of detection range of the radar
sensors
A) Vehicle that may not be detected
B) Parked vehicle
WARNING
An approaching vehicle (A) may not
be detected because the detection
range is limited by the parked vehi-
cle (B). Always be sure to check the
surroundings with your eyes when
reversing the vehicle.
Example 2
1) The detection range of the radar sensors
C) Vehicle that may be detected
NOTE
The system may detect that a vehicle
(C) is passing in front of your vehicle.
Always be sure to check the surround-
ings with your eyes when reversing the
vehicle.
& System Operation
s07bm02
! Operating conditions
s07bm0201
The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of the
following conditions are met.
. The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
. The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off.
. The vehicle is driven at speeds above 7
mph (12 km/h) (except when reversing).
. The select lever is in the “R” position
(RCTA only).
The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the
following situations.
. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears.
. The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10
km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF
indicator does not appear (except when
reversing).
NOTE
. In the following cases, the BSD/
RCTA will stop operating and the BSD/
RCTA warning indicator will appear.
– When a malfunction occurs in the
system, including the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light
. If the BSD/RCTA warning indicator
appears, exercise proper caution. For
details, refer to “BSD/RCTA Warning
BSD/RCTA
386
(389,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Indicator” FP390.
. In the following cases, the BSD/
RCTA will temporarily stop operating
(or may stop operating) and the BSD/
RCTA OFF indicator will appear.
– When the radar sensor becomes
significantly misaligned (If the or-
ientation of the radar sensor is
shifted for any reason, readjust-
ment is required. Have the sensor
adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)
– When a large amount of snow or
ice sticks to the rear bumper sur-
face around the radar sensors
– When the vehicle is driven on a
snow-covered road or in an envir-
onment in which there are no ob-
jects around (such as in a desert) for
a prolonged period of time
– When the temperature around the
radar sensors increases exces-
sively due to long driving on uphill
grades in the summer, etc.
– When the temperature around the
radar sensors becomes extremely
low
– When the vehicle battery voltage
lowers
– When the vehicle voltage ex-
ceeds the battery voltage rating
The BSD/RCTA will resume operation
once these conditions are corrected,
and the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will
disappear. However, if the BSD/RCTA
OFF indicator appears for a prolonged
period of time, have the system in-
spected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
. The detectability of the radar sen-
sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA de-
tection may be impaired and the system
may not operate properly under the
following conditions.
– When the rear bumper around the
radar sensors is distorted
– When ice, snow or mud adheres
to the rear bumper surface around
the radar sensors
– When stickers, etc. are affixed on
the areas of the radar sensors on
the rear bumper
– During adverse weather condi-
tions such as rain, snow or fog
– When driving on wet roads such
as snow-covered roads and through
puddles
. The radar sensors may not detect or
may have difficulty detecting the fol-
lowing vehicles and objects.
– Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe-
destrians, stationary objects on the
road or road side, etc.
– Vehicles with body shapes that
the radar may not reflect (vehicles
with lower body height such as a
trailer with no cargo and sports
cars)
– Vehicles that are not approaching
your vehicle even though they are in
the detection area (either on a
neighboring lane to the rear or be-
side your vehicle when reversing)
(The system determines the pre-
sence of approaching vehicles
based on data detected by the radar
sensors.)
– Vehicles traveling at significantly
different speeds
– Vehicles driving in parallel at al-
most the same speed as your vehi-
cle for a prolonged time
– Oncoming vehicles
– Vehicles in a lane beyond the
neighboring lane
– Vehicles travelling at a signifi-
cantly lower speed that you are
trying to overtake
. On a road with extremely narrow
lanes, the system may detect vehicles
driving in a lane next to the neighboring
lane.
– CONTINUED –
BSD/RCTA
387
7
Starting and Operating
(390,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& BSD/RCTA Approach Indica-
tor Light/Warning Buzzer
s07bm03
While the BSD/RCTA is active, the follow-
ing item(s) will operate to alert the driver:
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light (when there are vehicles in the
neighboring lanes).
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light and warning buzzer (when a vehicle
is approaching from the left or right side
while your vehicle is reversing)
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
s07bm0301
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
It is mounted on each side of the outside
mirrors.
The indicator light will illuminate when a
vehicle approaching from behind is de-
tected.
The indicator light will flash to warn the
driver of dangers under the following
conditions.
. While the indicator light is illuminating, if
the turn signal lever is operated toward the
side in which this light turned on
. When reversing the vehicle while the
system detects a vehicle approaching
from either side
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light dimming function
s07bm030101
When the headlights are turned on, the
brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach
indicator light will be reduced.
NOTE
. You may have difficulty seeing the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
under the following conditions.
– When sunlight shines directly on
it
– When the headlight beams from a
vehicle traveling behind shines di-
rectly on it
. While the illumination brightness
control dial is in the fully upward
position, even if the headlights are
turned on, the brightness of the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light will not
be reduced. For details about the
illumination brightness control dial,
refer to “Illumination Brightness Con-
trol” FP175.
! BSD/RCTA approach warning buz-
zer (only when reversing)
s07bm0302
A warning buzzer sounds along with
flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach in-
dicator light to warn the driver of dangers.
The setting of the warning buzzer volume
can be changed by operating the center
information display. For details, refer to
“Car settings” FP220 (11.6-inch display
models) or “Vehicle setting icons” FP239
(dual 7.0-inch display models).
! Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light/warning
buzzer
s07bm0303
. In the following cases, operation of the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and
the warning buzzer may be delayed or the
system may fail to issue these warnings.
– When a vehicle moves to the neigh-
boring lane from a lane next to the
neighboring lane
– When driving on a steep incline or
on repeated sharp uphill and downhill
grades
– When going beyond a pass
– When both your vehicle and a
vehicle driving on a neighboring lane
BSD/RCTA
388
(391,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
are driving on the far side of each lane.
– When several narrowly-spaced ve-
hicles are approaching in a row
– In low radius bends (tight bends or
when making turns at an intersection)
– When there is a difference in height
between your lane and the neighboring
lane
– Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is
activated by touching “BSD/RCTA”
– Immediately after the select lever is
shifted to the “R” position
– When extremely heavy cargo is
loaded in the trunk or cargo area
. During reversing, operation of the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light and the
warning buzzer may be delayed or the
system may fail to issue these warnings
under the following conditions.
– When backing out of an angled
parking space
– When a large-sized vehicle is
parked next to your vehicle (That
vehicle prevents the propagation of
radar waves.)
– When reversing on sloped roads
– When reversing at a high speed
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light may illuminate when driving close to
solid objects on the road or road side (such
as guardrails, tunnels and sidewalls).
. When turning at an intersection in
urban areas, or a multilane intersection,
the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
may flash.
. If a building or a wall exists in the
reversing direction, the BSD/RCTA ap-
proach indicator light may flash and the
warning buzzer may sound.
. In the following cases, the system may
detect a vehicle driving two lanes away
from your vehicle.
– When your vehicle drives on the
near side of its lane from the corre-
sponding vehicle
– When the vehicle driving two lanes
away drives on the near side of its lane
from your vehicle
& BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator
s07bm08
! System temporary stops
s07bm0801
1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message
2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
This display appears when the system is
used at extremely high or low tempera-
tures or when abnormal voltage exists.
Once these conditions are corrected, the
system will recover from the temporary
stop condition and the indicator will dis-
appear.
If the indicator remains displayed for a
prolonged time, have the system in-
spected at a SUBARU dealer.
– CONTINUED –
BSD/RCTA
389
7
Starting and Operating
(392,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! System temporary stops due to
reduced radar sensitivity
s07bm0802
1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message due
to reduced radar sensitivity
2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
This display appears when the detectabil-
ity of the radar sensors is reduced. Once
the condition is corrected, the system will
recover from the temporary stop condition
and the indicator will disappear.
If the indicator remains displayed for a
prolonged time, have the system in-
spected at a SUBARU dealer.
& BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator
s07bm04
! System malfunction
s07bm0403
1) BSD/RCTA malfunction message
2) At first, this message will appear
3) Then this message will appear
4) BSD/RCTA warning indicator
This display appears when a malfunction
occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU
dealer and have the system inspected.
& To Turn On/Off the BSD/RCTA
s07bm09
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
To turn the BSD/RCTA system on and off,
operate the center information display.
Refer to “Car settings” FP220 (11.6-inch
display models) or “Vehicle setting icons”
FP239 (dual 7.0-inch display models).
When the BSD/RCTA system is turned
OFF, the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator on the
combination meter display (color LCD) will
illuminate.
NOTE
. In the following cases, turn off the
BSD/RCTA system. The system may
not operate properly due to blocked
radar waves.
– When towing a trailer (Outback)
– When a bicycle carrier or other
BSD/RCTA
390
(393,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
item is fitted to the rear of the
vehicle
– When using a chassis dynam-
ometer or free roller device, etc.
– When running the engine and
making the wheels rotate while
lifting up the vehicle
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the last known
status of the system is maintained. For
example, if the ignition switch is turned
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the
BSD/RCTA deactivated, the BSD/RCTA
remains deactivated the next time the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
& Certification for the BSD/
RCTA
s07bm06
. The U.S. and other FCC compliant
countries
FCC ID: OAYSRR3A
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
. Canada-spec. models
– CONTINUED –
BSD/RCTA
391
7
Starting and Operating
(394,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. Mexico-spec. models
& Handling of Radar Sensors
s07bm07
Radar sensors (Legacy)
Radar sensors (Outback)
The radar sensors, one on each side of the
vehicle, are mounted inside the rear
bumper.
BSD/RCTA
392
(395,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
CAUTION
To ensure correct operation of the
BSD/RCTA, observe the following
precautions.
. Always keep the bumper surface
near the radar sensors clean.
. Do not affix any stickers or other
items on the bumper surface near
the radar sensors. For details,
consult your SUBARU dealer.
. Do not modify the bumper near
the radar sensors.
. Do not paint the bumper near the
radar sensors.
. Do not expose the bumper near
the radar sensors to strong im-
pacts. If a sensor becomes mis-
aligned, a system malfunction
may occur, including the inability
to detect vehicles entering the
detection areas. If any strong
shock is applied to the bumper,
be sure to contact your SUBARU
dealer for inspection.
. Do not disassemble the radar
sensors.
NOTE
If the radar sensors require repair or
replacement, or the bumper area
around the radar sensors requires
repair, paintwork or replacement, con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for assis-
tance.
7-21. Reverse Automatic
Braking (RAB) System (If
Equipped)
s07bn
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) is a
system designed to help avoid collisions or
reduce collision damage when reversing
the vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is
detected in the reversing direction, the
system will notify the driver with a warning
sound and may activate the vehicle’s
brakes automatically.
WARNING
. Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) is not a system intended
to replace the driver’s responsi-
bility to check their surroundings
for vehicles or obstacles to avoid
a collision.
. The driver is responsible for driv-
ing safely. Before reversing, be
sure to first depress the brake
pedal and visually check the
surroundings.
. There are some cases in which
the vehicle cannot avoid colli-
sion, because the system opera-
tion has limitations. The warning
sound or automatic braking may
– CONTINUED –
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
393
7
Starting and Operating
(396,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
be delayed or may not operate at
all even when an obstacle is
present.
. Make sure to set the Automatic
Braking System to OFF when the
vehicle is on the free roller or on
the chassis dynamometer. Other-
wise, the vehicle may move and it
may cause an accident.
. Make sure to set the Automatic
Braking System to OFF when
towing a trailer. Otherwise, the
vehicle may move and it may
cause an accident.
. The system is not designed to
detect people (including chil-
dren), animals or other moving
objects.
. Depending on the vehicle condi-
tion or the surrounding environ-
ment, the sonar sensor’s ability
to detect objects may become
unstable.
NOTE
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system records and stores the follow-
ing data when automatic braking oper-
ates. It does not record conversations,
personal information or other audio
data.
. Distance from the object
. Vehicle speed
. Accelerator pedal operation status
. Brake pedal operation status
. Select lever position
. Outside temperature
. The sensitivity setting of the sonar
sensors
SUBARU and third parties contracted
by SUBARU may acquire and use the
recorded data for the purpose of vehi-
cle research and development.
SUBARU and third parties contracted
by SUBARU will not disclose or provide
the acquired data to any other third
party except under the following con-
ditions.
. The vehicle owner has given his/her
consent.
. The disclosure/provision is based
on a court order or other legally en-
forceable request.
. Data that has been modified so that
the user and vehicle cannot be identi-
fied is provided to a research institution
for statistical processing or similar
purposes.
& Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) System Overview
s07bn01
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system will operate the following 2 func-
tions using 4 sonar sensors.
. Object detection warning function
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system detects objects rearward and
warns the driver by warning message on
the center information display and warning
beeps.
. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system function
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system function detects objects rearward
and if there is a high risk of a collision, the
system decelerates the vehicle and con-
trols the braking to reduce damage.
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
394
(397,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1) When reversing
2) When either strong automatic braking or
torque control is applied to prevent
collision (in this case, short warning
beeps or continuous warning beeps will
sound)
3) When the vehicle is stopped by the
system (in this case, the continuous
beep will remain sounding)
4) Object (e.g., a wall)
WARNING
If your vehicle is trapped on a rail-
road crossing and you are trying to
escape by reversing through the
crossing gate, the system may re-
cognize the crossing gate as an
obstacle and brake may activate. In
this case, remain calm and either
continue to depress the accelerator
pedal or cancel the system. To
cancel the system, refer to “Cancel-
ing the Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) System Operation” FP402.
– CONTINUED –
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
395
7
Starting and Operating
(398,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Operating Conditions
s07bn02
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system will operate when all of the follow-
ing conditions are met.
1) EyeSight warning indicator
2) RAB warning indicator
3) RAB OFF indicator
. The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
. The EyeSight warning indicator is off.
. The RAB warning indicator is off.
. The RAB OFF indicator is off.
. The select lever is in the “R” position.
Object detection warning function
. The object detection warning function is
set to “ON”.
. The vehicle speed is from 0 to 9 mph (0
to 15 km/h).
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) sys-
tem function
. The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system function is set to “ON”.
. The vehicle speed is from 1 to 9 mph
(1.5 to 15 km/h).
NOTE
. In the following cases, the Reverse
Automatic Braking (RAB) system will
not operate. Promptly contact a
SUBARU dealer to have the system
inspected.
– The EyeSight warning indicator
is illuminated.
– The RAB warning indicator is
illuminated.
. In the following cases, the Reverse
Automatic Braking (RAB) system can-
not be operated.
– The
(EyeSight Temporary Stop
indicator: White) is illuminated, and
the messages corresponding to the
EyeSight temporary stop are dis-
played on the combination meter
display (color LCD). For details,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the EyeSight system.
– The RAB OFF indicator is illumi-
nated.
. In the following cases, the functions
may not be able to properly work.
Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to
have the system inspected.
– A sticker, paint, or a chemical is
applied to the sonar sensors or the
rear bumper near the sonar sensor.
– The rear bumper is modified.
– The rear bumper has been re-
moved and attached.
– The ground clearance is changed
due to the vehicle’s loading condi-
tion or modification.
– There is damage to the sonar
sensors or the rear bumper near
the sonar sensor.
– The rear bumper is exposed to
strong impact, or the rear bumper is
deformed.
. On a steep hill, the system’s auto-
matic braking ability will be reduced.
. The system is designed to avoid
collisions by automatic hard braking
when the vehicle’s reversing speed is
less than approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).
However, the system does not guaran-
tee that the vehicle will be able to avoid
collisions in any situation.
. If the vehicle is reversed at an
extremely slow speed, the driver’s
operation may be prioritized. In this
case, automatic braking will not oper-
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
396
(399,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
ate.
. The system may not be able to detect
and apply the brake with the following
objects.
– Sharp or thin objects such as
poles, fences and ropes which may
not reflect the sound wave emitted
from the sonar sensor.
– Objects that are too close to the
rear bumper when the select lever is
set to the “R” position.
– Objects with a surface which may
not reflect the sound wave emitted
from the sonar sensor such as a
chain link fence.
. Objects the system is not designed
to detect and apply brake.
– Pedestrians.
– Moving objects including moving
vehicles.
– Objects which absorbs sound
waves such as cloth or snow.
– Objects whose surface has a
diagonal angle.
– Objects that are low to the ground
such as parking blocks.
– Objects that are high above the
ground such as objects hanging
from above.
– Objects that are out of range of
the center of the vehicle in the
horizontal direction.
– Objects that are not in a vertical
direction.
. When reversing the vehicle, the
functions may not be able to work
properly or may cause a system mal-
function if the following conditions
exist.
High frequency sound from other
sources are nearby:
– Horn sound from another vehicle.
– Engine sound from other vehi-
cles.
– Sound of an air brake.
– Vehicle detection equipment or a
sonar from another vehicle.
– A sound wave with a frequency
similar to the vehicle’s system is
transmitted near by.
– A vehicle equipped with the same
system is reversing toward your
reversing direction.
Weather conditions:
– Extremely high or extremely low
temperatures in which the area near
the sonar sensor becomes too hot
or too cold to operate.
– The sonar sensors or the rear
bumper near the sonar sensors are
exposed to heavy rain or a signifi-
cant amount of water.
– Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.
– Air is moving rapidly such as
when a strong wind is blowing.
Parts attached to the rear bumper
near the sonar sensor:
– Commercial electronic parts (fog
light, fender pole, radio antenna) or
commercial attachment parts (trai-
ler hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper
guard) are attached.
– Parts that emit high frequency
sound, such as a horn or speaker,
are attached.
Vehicle conditions:
– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to
the sonar sensors or the rear bum-
per near the sonar sensor.
– The vehicle is significantly in-
clined.
– The ground clearance is signifi-
cantly reduced due to the vehicle’s
loading condition, etc.
– When the sonar sensor is mis-
aligned due to a collision or an
accident.
Surrounding environment:
– A cloth banner, flag, hanging
branch or railroad crossing bars
are present in the reversing direc-
tion.
– CONTINUED –
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
397
7
Starting and Operating
(400,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
– When reversing on a gravel or
grassy area.
– When reversing in an area where
objects or walls are adjacent to the
vehicle such as narrow tunnels,
narrow bridges, narrow roads or
narrow garages.
– Wheel track or hole is present in
the ground of the reversing direc-
tion.
– When reversing over a drainage
cover (grating cover).
– The path of the reversing direc-
tion is inclined such as on a steep
uphill.
– When reversing downhill.
– A curb or step is present in the
reversing direction.
– Reversing in a garage with a low
ceiling or a tunnel.
– There is a patch of snow rear-
ward.
– There is a puddle of water.
– There is an obstacle that is next
to an object.
– Going back along a wall.
– The area where the road starts
touching dirt and snow
– When reversing on an uneven
road.
. In circumstances such as the follow-
ing, it may not be possible to avoid a
collision even when the system oper-
ates normally.
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
398
(401,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
– Roads are slippery.
– The tire air pressure is not cor-
rect.
– The tires have become worn.
– Tire chains are installed.
– Tires which are not the desig-
nated size are installed.
– Emergency repairs were per-
formed using a puncture repair kit.
– The suspension was modified.
– Vehicle driving is unstable due to
accident or malfunction.
– The brake warning light is illumi-
nated.
& Object Detection Warning
Function
s07bn03
When Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system is in operation, an audible warning
beeps will sound in 3 levels to warn the
driver of a potential collision.
NOTE
It may take time to display the wall and
sound warning beeps after the object
was recognized by the object detection
warning function.
Guideline of detecting range
Alert level Range of detected object* Distance indicator Alarm pattern
Long proximity (ob-
ject detected)
28 in (70 cm) or more Green No warning sound
Medium proximity
alert (approaching the
object)
20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm) Yellow Short beeps
Short proximity alert
(approaching closer
to the object)
12 to 20 in (30 to 50 cm) Orange Rapid short beeps
Closest proximity
alert (too close to the
object)
12 in (30 cm) or less Red
Continuous beep
*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.
– CONTINUED –
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
399
7
Starting and Operating
(402,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Obstacle detected and alert level
s07bn0301
Long proximity alert (object detected)
1) Green: 28 in (70 cm) or more
Medium proximity alert (approaching the
object)
1) Yellow: 20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm)
Short proximity alert (approaching the
object closer)
1) Orange: 12 to 20 in (30 to 50 cm)
Closest proximity alert (too close to the
object)
1) Red: 12 in (30 cm) or less
When an object is detected in the rever-
sing direction, the range of detected object
will be shown on the center information
display.
A warning alarm will sound and, depend-
ing on the speed, either torque control to
generate engine braking or automatic
braking will be applied.
& Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) System Function Op-
eration
s07bn08
! Object close behind warning
s07bn0801
Automatic braking warning
1) Warning message
If the system determine the risk of collision
with the object. Short warning beeps or
continuous warning beeps will sound and
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
400
(403,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
either strong automatic braking or torque
control will be applied to prevent collision.
At this time, a warning message is also
displayed on the combination meter dis-
play (color LCD).
Depress brake pedal warning
1) Warning message
Make sure to depress the brake pedal
once the vehicle has been stopped by
automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is
depressed, a message will be displayed
on the center information display and the
continuous beep will remain sounding.
At this time, a warning message is also
displayed on the combination meter dis-
play (color LCD).
NOTE
The object detection warning function
and Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system function are different in opera-
tion conditions. Therefore there are
cases in which only one of these
functions will activate.
WARNING
Depress the brake pedal immedi-
ately after the system stops the
vehicle by automatic braking. De-
pending on the conditions of the
road surface and tires, the vehicle
may not remain stopped, possibly
leading to an accident.
! After the vehicle is stopped by the
system
s07bn0802
After the brake pedal is depressed, the
RAB OFF indicator will illuminate and the
system will temporarily stop operating.
The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when
the select lever is shifted to a position other
than the “R” position.
The system will operate again the next
time the select lever is shifted to the “R”
position.
In circumstances such as the following, the
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
automatically stops operating and the RAB
OFF indicator illuminates.
– There is ice, snow, mud, or other
substance on the sonar sensors.
– The select lever was shifted to “R”
– CONTINUED –
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
401
7
Starting and Operating
(404,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
when there was an obstacle located close
to the rear bumper.
– A sound with a frequency close to that
of the sonar used by the Reverse Auto-
matic Braking (RAB) system was de-
tected.
NOTE
. In the following cases, after the
vehicle has been stopped by the Re-
verse Automatic Braking (RAB) sys-
tem, brake control is released and the
electronic parking brake operates. For
details about releasing the parking
brake, refer to “Electronic Parking
Brake” FP366.
– When 2 minutes pass after the
vehicle is stopped
– When any door is opened
. The Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system may stop operating tem-
porarily in the following cases and the
RAB OFF indicator will illuminate.
– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to
the sonar sensors or the rear bum-
per near the sonar sensor
– Objects are too close to the rear
bumper when the select lever is set
to the “R” position
– The system detects sounds of a
similar frequency to the RAB sonar
& Canceling the Reverse Auto-
matic Braking (RAB) System
Operation
s07bn04
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system can be temporarily canceled by
any of the following operation.
. While the vehicle is stopped by the
operation of automatic braking, the brake
pedal is depressed.
. While the vehicle is stopped by the
operation of automatic braking, the accel-
erator pedal is depressed.
. The accelerator pedal is depressed
continuously (In this case, limited accel-
eration will be canceled and the vehicle will
continue reversing.)
. The select lever is shifted to a position
other than the “R” position.
NOTE
The system will be canceled if the
object is no longer detected.
& Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) System ON/OFF
Setting
s07bn05
While the select lever is shifted to the “R”
position, the below functions of the Re-
verse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
can be set by operating the center in-
formation display.
1) ON setting key of Reverse Automatic
Braking (RAB) system function
2) OFF setting key of Reverse Automatic
Braking (RAB) system function
3) ON setting key of the object detection
warning function
4) OFF setting key of the object detection
warning function
When the ON setting key is shown, the
corresponding setting is ON.
Touch and hold the ON setting key to turn
the setting OFF.
When the OFF setting is shown, the
corresponding setting is OFF.
Touch and hold the OFF setting key to turn
the setting ON.
When the Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system function are turned OFF,
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
402
(405,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
the following indicator(s) will illuminate.
The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when
the corresponding function is turned ON.
NOTE
When the settings cannot be changed,
the ON/OFF setting key will be grayed
out.
Also, the following settings can be chan-
ged by operating the center information
display.
. Warning volume
. Sonar audible alarm
For details, refer to “Car settings” FP220.
& RAB Warning Indicator
s07bn07
1) RAB malfunction message
2) RAB warning indicator
If the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system malfunctions, the above indicator
illuminates on the combination meter.
Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for
details.
& Handling of the Sonar Sen-
sors
s07bn06
The 4 sonar sensors are located in the rear
bumper. To ensure the proper operation of
the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system, observe the following precau-
tions.
. Do not affix any stickers or other items
on the sonar sensor or the bumper surface
near the sonar sensors.
. Always keep the sonar sensor and the
rear bumper surface near the sonar
sensors clean.
. Do not modify rear bumper.
. Do not paint the bumper near the sonar
sensors.
. Do not apply high pressure water to the
sonar sensors with a high pressure car-
washing machine.
. Do not apply strong impacts to the rear
bumper near the sonar sensors. If a sensor
becomes misaligned, a system malfunc-
tion may occur, including inability to detect
objects in the reversing direction. If any
strong impact is applied to the rear
bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to
– CONTINUED –
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
403
7
Starting and Operating
(406,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
have the system inspected.
. Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.
NOTE
If the sonar sensors require repair or
replacement, or if the area of the rear
bumper near the sonar sensors re-
quires repair, paintwork or replace-
ment, contact your SUBARU dealer for
assistance.
7-22. Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem (If Equipped)
s07bp
Driver Monitoring System is introduced as
DriverFocus in some countries.
The Driver Monitoring System monitors
possible cases when the driver is not
paying attention to the forward direction,
and also recognizes individual users.
This system warns the driver of inattentive/
drowsy driving, and can support safe and
comfortable driving by automatically re-
trieving the following settings.
– Driver’s position
– Climate control setting
– Meter setting
– Center information display setting
When a user is registered, various settings
are automatically retrieved when the user
enters the vehicle.
1) Camera
CAUTION
. Always use the utmost care in
driving
– Overconfidence because you
are driving a vehicle with the
Driver Monitoring System
could easily lead to a serious
accident.
. This system cannot detect if the
driver is feeling drowsy or is
concentrating on safe driving.
. It cannot judge if the driver is
awake or asleep, if their driving
abilities have diminished, or if
they are concentrating on safe
Driver Monitoring System
404
(407,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
driving.
. In some circumstances, the sys-
tem may not be able to correctly
detect the driver state.
NOTE
. The user recognition camera does
not save images, audio, or video.
. The Driver Monitoring System may
not operate correctly when sunlight is
shining into the vehicle in the following
ways.
– Sunlight is shining directly (or
through glass) onto the user recog-
nition camera.
– There are shadows on the dri-
ver’s face caused by sunlight (or
any light with a strong infrared
component).
– There are large momentary fluc-
tuations in the strength of the sun-
light (or any light with a strong
infrared component) shining on the
face.
. Correct detection may not be possi-
ble when a device that includes an
infrared light source (such as a com-
mercially available Driver Monitoring
System) is installed in the vehicle
interior.
. The Driver Monitoring System may
not operate correctly at the following
times when the driver is wearing
glasses or sunglasses.
– The sunglasses do not allow the
easy passage of infrared light.
– The surrounding scenery is re-
flected strongly in the lenses of the
glasses or sunglasses.
– The eyes are hidden by the frame
of the glasses and the user recogni-
tion camera cannot detect the eyes.
– The light from an infrared light
source (LED) is reflected in the
lenses of the glasses or sunglasses.
– The driver is wearing an eye-
patch.
– The driver is wearing a hat set
deeply over the eyes.
. Depending on the type of mask,
correct detection of inattentive/drowsy
driving may not be possible.
. Correct user recognition is not pos-
sible if the eyes, nose, or mouth is
covered with a mask, muffler, sun-
glasses, or other item.
. The Driver Monitoring System may
not operate correctly when the eye-
brows, eyes, nose, or mouth is hidden
due to item that is between the face and
the system.
. If a thick cover is attached to the
steering wheel, then depending on the
position set for the tilt/telescopic steer-
ing wheel, the cover may block the
system’s view of the face, and the
system and the Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem may not operate correctly.
. Do not attach any stickers to the
user recognition camera or the infrared
light source (LED). If the user recogni-
tion camera or infrared light source
(LED) is covered by an obstruction, it
will not be possible to correctly monitor
the driver.
. If an accessory is hung from the
inside mirror, correct detection may not
be possible.
. Do not touch the user recognition
camera or the infrared light source
(LED) directly with your fingers. If there
is dirt or a fingerprint on these parts, it
will not be possible to correctly monitor
the driver. If there is dirt or a fingerprint
on these parts, either wipe them with a
soft dry cloth, or wipe gently with a
damp cloth after first firmly wringing
the water out.
. If the surface of the user recognition
camera or the infrared light source
(LED) becomes scratched, correct de-
tection may not be possible. Be careful
that hard objects do not contact these
parts.
– CONTINUED –
Driver Monitoring System
405
7
Starting and Operating
(408,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. If there is condensation on the user
recognition camera or the infrared light
source (LED), correct detection may
not be possible. If there is condensa-
tion on these parts, wipe it away with a
soft dry cloth.
. When registering a user for user
recognition, avoid closing your eyes
as much as possible.
. If the user recognition success rate
is low, it is possible that the user is not
correctly registered. Delete the regis-
tered data and perform registration
again.
. If a user frequently drives both with
glasses and contact lenses, it is re-
commended that registration be per-
formed both when wearing glasses and
when wearing contact lenses.
. User recognition starts immediately
after entering the vehicle, however if
the user looks downward or at the
driver side mirror for a long time, the
user may not be recognized.
. When one person among twins or
another pair of persons with similar
facial features is registered, the other
person may be incorrectly recognized
as the registered user when entering
the vehicle.
. If the person in the passenger’s seat
leans into the driver’s seat, or in other
cases when there are two or more faces
near the driver’s seat, the system may
not operate correctly.
. There are cases when the system
concludes that the user’s eyes are
closed when the user is looking down-
ward during driving, such as when
checking instruments or the navigation
screen. In such cases, the drowsy
driving warning buzzer may sound or
the system may otherwise not operate
correctly.
. If the eyes are narrowed when laugh-
ing or when there is a dazzling outside
light, the system may judge that the
eyes are closed and the drowsy driving
warning buzzer may sound or the
system may otherwise not operate
correctly.
. The drowsy driving or asleep warn-
ing states are recognized from the
length of time and percentage of time
that the eyes are closed. The drowsy
driving warning buzzer will not sound
simply when the driver feels sleepy or
yawns.
. Even when the driver does not feel
sleepy, if his or her eyes are closed or if
he or she blinks frequently, the drowsy
driving warning buzzer may sound.
. The inattentive driving warning buz-
zer may sound if the driver leans
forward or puts his or her head out of
the window while driving.
. The inattentive driving warning buz-
zer will not sound when the vehicle is
stopped or travelling at slow speed
even if the driver is not looking ahead.
. The Driver Monitoring System col-
lects and stores data regarding drivers’
facial features. Facial recognition data
is stored locally and does not leave the
vehicle. It is not transmitted to or stored
by SUBARU or anyone else. The Driver
Monitoring System may be disabled
and any stored driver data may be
deleted by following the instructions
below. If the Driver Monitoring System
is disabled, it will be unable to provide
any of its safety or convenience func-
tions.
Driver Monitoring System
406
(409,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
The functions which are available vary depending on the Driver Monitoring System
setting and the user recognition function setting.
Available functions
Driver Monitoring System*
1
ON OFF
User recognition
function*
2
ON
Inattentive/drowsy
driving warning
Available Not available
User recognition
function
Available Not available
OFF
Inattentive/drowsy
driving warning
Available Not available
User recognition
function
Not available
Not available
– CONTINUED –
Driver Monitoring System
407
7
Starting and Operating
(410,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Available function items
Driver Monitoring System*
1
ON OFF
User recognition
function*
2
ON
Register User Available Not available
Delete User Available Not available
Delete All Users Available Not available
Update Seat and
Mirror Position
Available Not available
Delete Driver Posi-
tion
Available Not available
OFF
Register User Not available Not available
Delete User Available Not available
Delete All Users Available Not available
Update Seat and
Mirror Position
Not available Not available
Delete Driver Posi-
tion
Not available
Not available
*1: The system can be turned ON/OFF with the center information display. Refer to “
Car settings”
FP220.
*2: The function can be turned ON/OFF in the center information display customization settings.
Refer to “
Car settings” FP220.
The functions which are available vary depending on whether or not the user is
registered.
Available functions
The user is registered. The user is not registered.
User recognition function Available
Not available
& User Recognition Function
s07bp01
WARNING
Perform registration, retrieving, or
delete of the seat position and out-
side mirror angle before beginning
driving. There is the risk of an
accident if registration, retrieving,
or delete is performed while driving.
When a user is registered, it is possible to
retrieve the following settings.
! Driver position personalization
s07bp0101
. Seat position and outside mirror angle
Retrieves the registered seat position and
outside mirror angle.
. Reverse tilt angle
Retrieves the registered reverse tilt-down
outside mirror angle.
! Meter personalization
s07bp0102
. Combination meter display (color LCD)
basic screen
Displays the screen which the user had
selected at the time when he/she last
exited the vehicle.
Driver Monitoring System
408
(411,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Center information display perso-
nalization
s07bp0103
. Center information display basic
screen
Displays the screen which the user had
selected at the time when he/she last
exited the vehicle.
. Fuel consumption screen
Displays the average fuel economy for
past driving by that user.
! Air conditioner personalization
s07bp0104
. Air conditioner settings
Retrieves the air conditioner temperature,
outlet mode, and other settings which the
user had selected at the time when he/she
last exited the vehicle.
NOTE
When a recognized user exits the
vehicle with the air conditioner set to
maximum cool or maximum heat, then
the setting which preceded maximum
cool or maximum heat is stored.
! Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF
status
s07bp0105
Retrieves the Driver Monitoring System
ON/OFF status which the user had se-
lected at the time when he/she last exited
the vehicle.
! Changing the personalization settings
s07bp0106
Item
Driver’s position personaliza-
tion
Seat position/outside mirror
angle
Change the setting by using the
center information display cus-
tomization function. Refer to
“
Car settings” FP220.
Reverse tilt-down outside mir-
ror angle
Meter personalization*
Combination meter display
(color LCD) basic screen
When the customization screen
linked with the synchronized
user function is selected and
the setting is changed, it is
automatically stored.
Center information display
personalization*
Center information display ba-
sic screen
Customization linked with syn-
chronized user function
Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF status
*: When the Driver Monitoring System is OFF, the Driver Monitoring System continues to store the
conditions from immediately before the Driver Monitoring System was turned OFF even if the
screen was selected and the setting was changed.
– CONTINUED –
Driver Monitoring System
409
7
Starting and Operating
(412,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Inattentive/Drowsy Driving
Warning
s07bp02
While driving, the Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem monitors possible cases of driver
inattention or drowsiness and warns the
driver.
When the inattentive/drowsy driving warn-
ing activates, the buzzer sounds and an
interrupt display appears.
NOTE
. The inattentive/drowsy driving warn-
ing operates regardless of the status of
the user recognition function.
. The inattentive driving warning does
not activate when the turn signal is
operating or when the select lever is in
the “R” position.
. When the pre-collision brake system
OFF indicator is illuminated on the
combination meter display (color
LCD), the inattentive driving warning
activates at the same timing as usual
even when a vehicle ahead or obstacle
is detected. For details about the
EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the EyeSight
system.
! Inattentive driving warning
s07bp0201
When the system monitors that the driver
may be inattentive, it warns the driver.
When the inattentive driving warning acti-
vates, the buzzer sounds and an interrupt
display appears on the combination meter
display (color LCD).
When the EyeSight system has detected a
vehicle ahead or obstacle in the forward
direction, the inattentive driving warning
may activate at earlier timing than usual.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for the EyeSight system.
Driver Monitoring System
410
(413,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Drowsy driving warning
s07bp0202
Possible drowsiness is detected from the amount of driver eyelid closure, and a warning
is given to the driver. When the drowsy driving warning activates, the buzzer sounds and
an interrupt display appears.
Combination meter
display (color LCD)
Center information
display
Warning chime
Drowsy driving
Beep, beep... (Con-
tinues until the driver’s
eyes open.)
Very drowsy
Beep, beep, beep,
beep, beep (5 times)
Slightly drowsy
— Beep
Not drowsy — —
—
& Driver Monitoring System In-
dicator/Warning
s07bp03
1) Driver Monitoring System operation in-
dicator light (green)
2) Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator
light
3) Driver Monitoring System temporary stop
indicator light
4) Driver Monitoring System warning light
(yellow)
The Driver Monitoring System indicator/
warning indicates the status of the Driver
Monitoring System on the combination
meter display (color LCD).
NOTE
When the Driver Monitoring System
OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem temporary stop indicator, or Driver
Monitoring System warning is illumi-
– CONTINUED –
Driver Monitoring System
411
7
Starting and Operating
(414,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
nated, the Driver Monitoring System
function cannot be used. In addition,
the following items cannot be selected.
. Register User
. Delete User
. Delete All Users
. Update Seat and Mirror Position
. Delete Driver Position
. Automatically retract seat on entry
! Driver Monitoring System operation
indicator light (green)
s07bp0301
This indicator illuminates when the Driver
Monitoring System is operating.
! Driver Monitoring System OFF in-
dicator light
s07bp0302
This indicator illuminates when the user
has turned off the Driver Monitoring
System and the Driver Monitoring System
is not operating.
! Driver Monitoring System tempor-
ary stop indicator light
s07bp0303
This indicator illuminates when the Driver
Monitoring System is temporarily stopped.
NOTE
The Driver Monitoring System stops
temporarily in the following circum-
stances.
. When the temperature of the main
unit of the Driver Monitoring System is
high or low.
. When the Driver Monitoring System
cannot monitor the driver’s eye move-
ment.
. When the Driver Monitoring System
cannot monitor the driver’s eyebrows,
eyes, nose or mouth.
. When the camera and the infrared
light source (LED) are covered and the
Driver Monitoring System cannot moni-
tor the driver correctly.
! Driver Monitoring System warning
light (yellow)
s07bp0304
This warning illuminates when there is a
problem with the Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem. Contact a SUBARU dealer to have
the system inspected.
& Using the Driver Monitoring
System
s07bp04
! User recognition
s07bp0401
When a user is registered with the user
recognition function, the Driver Monitoring
System performs the following.
1. When the door is opened and the
push-button ignition switch is OFF, the
user recognition screen appears and the
Driver Monitoring system starts user re-
cognition.
The user recognition screen may not
appear when the door is opened in some
cases, such as when only a short time has
passed after the push-button ignition
switch was turned OFF. In such cases,
user recognition starts when the door is
closed however the user recognition
screen does not appear.
Driver Monitoring System
412
(415,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
2. Sit in the driver’s seat and face forward
for a few moments.
3. When user recognition is completed,
the Hello screen appears on the center
information display.
At this time, the seat position, outside
mirror angle, air conditioner settings,
combination meter display (color LCD)
basic screen, center information display
basic screen, and customization settings
all change based on the user information.
NOTE
. When a center information display
operation switch is pressed, the user
recognition screen is canceled, how-
ever user recognition continues.
. When the select lever is not in the
“P” position, the seat position will not
change even when user recognition is
completed.
. If user recognition fails, perform
recognition again following the instruc-
tions, refer to “When a user is not
recognized” FP413.
. User recognition is not performed
while driving.
. If the seat position or outside mirror
angle are in motion at the time when
user recognition is completed, then it is
not possible to retrieve the seat posi-
tion, outside mirror angle, or reverse
tilt-down outside mirror angle.
. If any of the following operations is
performed while retrieving of the seat
position or outside mirror angle, re-
trieving of the seat position and outside
mirror angle is canceled.
– The power seat adjustment
switch was operated.
– The outside mirror adjustment
switch was operated.
– The “SET” button was pressed.
– The “1” or “2” button was
pressed.
– The select lever was moved to a
position other than “P” position.
! When a user is not recognized
s07bp0402
In the following case, user recognition may
not be possible and “User recognition
stopped” may be displayed.
. There is an object blocking the camera.
Remove the obstacle and follow the
reference procedure to perform user re-
cognition again.
Refer to “Driver Monitoring System”
FP227.
1) Camera
NOTE
. User recognition may not be possi-
ble when there is dirt or fingerprints on
the user recognition camera. To clean,
either wipe using a soft cloth or else
wipe gently using a moistened cloth
– CONTINUED –
Driver Monitoring System
413
7
Starting and Operating
(416,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
that has been thoroughly wrung out.
. When the synchronized user func-
tion is turned OFF, manual repeat facial
scan is not possible.
& Registering and Deleting a
User
s07bp05
Users can be registered in the Driver
Monitoring System, and registered users
can be deleted. For the user registration
and delete procedures, refer to “Driver
Monitoring System” FP227.
NOTE
. When the Driver Monitoring System
OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem temporary stop indicator, or Driver
Monitoring System warning is illumi-
nated, the following items cannot be
selected.
– Register User
– Delete User
– Delete All Users
. User information can also be deleted
by resetting the center information dis-
play to the factory default settings.
When the settings are reset to the
factory default settings, all user infor-
mation is deleted. The settings cannot
be reset to the factory default settings
when the Driver Monitoring System is
OFF.
& Registering and Deleting Dri-
ver Position Personalization
s07bp06
At the time when a user is registered, the
seat position, outside mirror angle, and
reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle are
registered at the same time. To change the
setting for the seat position, outside mirror
angle, or reverse tilt-down outside mirror
angle, refer to “Driver Monitoring System”
FP227.
NOTE
. Start the user registration after ad-
justing the seat position, outside mirror
angles, and reverse tilt-down outside
mirror angle. If they are adjusted during
user registration, it may be disrupted.
Refer to “Power Seat” FP32 or “Out-
side Mirrors” FP271.
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position before user registration
is complete, the information of the
adjusted seat position, outside mirror
angle, and reverse tilt-down outside
mirror angle will not be saved.
. When the user recognition setting is
OFF, or when the Driver Monitoring
System OFF indicator, Driver Monitor-
ing System temporary stop indicator, or
Driver Monitoring System warning is
illuminated, the following items cannot
be selected.
– Update Seat and Mirror Position
– Delete Driver Position
. The driver position can be registered
or deleted only when a registered user
is sitting in the driver’s seat and user
recognition is completed.
& Driver Monitoring System
ON/OFF Settings
s07bp07
NOTE
. When the vehicle is stopped and the
driver’s door is opened and closed, the
Driver Monitoring System automati-
cally turns ON regardless of the push-
button ignition switch status.
. After the Driver Monitoring System
was turned OFF, if the Driver Monitoring
System is turned ON while the driver’s
door is open, user recognition may not
occur correctly.
. When the Driver Monitoring System
is turned OFF after user recognition
was completed, the user recognition
function stores the Driver Monitoring
System ON/OFF state.
! To turn on/off the Driver Monitoring
System
s07bp0701
To turn the Driver Monitoring System on
and off, operate the center information
display. Refer to “Car settings” FP220.
Driver Monitoring System
414
(417,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
When the Driver Monitoring System is
turned OFF, the Driver Monitoring System
OFF indicator on the combination meter
display (color LCD) will illuminate.
! User recognition settings
s07bp0702
The Driver Monitoring System User recog-
nition function can be turned ON/OFF. For
the setting procedure, refer to “Car set-
tings” FP220.
NOTE
. The user recognition function
setting cannot be changed for each
individual user.
. The default setting for the user
recognition function is ON.
. When the user recognition function
is turned OFF, the following items
cannot be selected.
– Repeat facial scan
– Register User
– Update Seat and Mirror Position
– Delete Driver Position
! Automatically retract seat on entry
s07bp0704
The automatically retract seat on entry
which automatically slides back the dri-
ver’s seat when the driver’s door is
unlocked and opened.
This function can be turned ON/OFF. For
the setting procedure, refer to “Car set-
tings” FP220.
CAUTION
Sit in the seat after the power seat
movement backward has been com-
pleted. Not doing so could result in
injury.
NOTE
. If the seat position is not registered
in the access key fob memory, the
automatically retract seat on entry
function can be used.
. Even when the automatically retract
seat on entry setting is ON, the auto-
matically retract seat on entry function
automatically turns OFF when the user
recognition function is OFF.
. Automatically retract seat on entry
cannot be selected when the Driver
Monitoring System OFF indicator, Dri-
ver Monitoring System temporary stop
indicator, or Driver Monitoring System
warning is illuminated.
. This function will operate if the seat
is in front of the center of the seat
sliding mechanism.
& Certification for Driver Mon-
itoring System (U.S.-Spec.
Models)
s07bp08
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
– CONTINUED –
Driver Monitoring System
415
7
Starting and Operating
(418,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
– Canada-spec. models – Mexico-spec. models
Driver Monitoring System
416
(419,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
s08
8-1. New Vehicle Break-In Driving – the First
1,000 miles (1,600 km) .................................. 418
8-2. Fuel Economy Hints ....................................... 418
8-3. Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide)...... 418
8-4. Catalytic Converter......................................... 419
8-5. Periodic Inspections....................................... 420
8-6. Driving in Foreign Countries ......................... 420
8-7. Driving Tips for AWD Vehicles ...................... 421
8-8. Off Road Driving ............................................. 422
Legacy ............................................................... 422
Outback.............................................................. 423
8-9. Winter Driving ................................................. 424
Operation during Cold Weather........................... 424
Driving on Snowy and Icy Roads ........................ 426
Corrosion Protection .......................................... 427
Snow Tires ......................................................... 427
Tire Chains ......................................................... 428
Rocking the Vehicle ............................................ 428
8-10. Loading Your Vehicle ....................................428
Vehicle Capacity Weight ..................................... 429
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating).............. 430
Roof Molding and Crossbar (Legacy).................. 430
Roof Rails with Integrated Crossbars
(Outback) ......................................................... 432
8-11. Trailer Hitch (Outback – If Equipped) ..........436
Connecting a Trailer ........................................... 436
If Not Towing a Trailer ........................................ 438
8-12. Trailer Towing (Legacy).................................438
8-13. Trailer Towing (Outback)...............................438
Warranties and Maintenance............................... 439
Maximum Load Limits ........................................ 439
Trailer Hitches.................................................... 442
Connecting a Trailer ........................................... 442
Trailer Towing Tips............................................. 444
Driving Tips
8
Driving Tips
(420,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
8-1. New Vehicle Break-In
Driving – the First 1,000 miles
(1,600 km)
s08aa
The performance and long life of your
vehicle are dependent on how you handle
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
Follow these instructions during the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km):
. Do not race the engine. And do not
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm
except in an emergency.
. Do not drive at one constant engine or
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or
slow.
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid ac-
celeration, except in an emergency.
. Avoid hard braking, except in an emer-
gency.
The same break-in procedures should be
applied to a newly installed or overhauled
engine or when brake pads are replaced
with new ones.
8-2. Fuel Economy Hints
s08ab
The following suggestions will help to save
your fuel.
. Select the proper gear position for the
speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-
tion. Always accelerate gently until you
reach the desired speed. Then try to
maintain that speed for as long as possi-
ble.
. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid
racing the engine.
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
. Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure shown on the tire placard, which
is located under the door latch on the
driver’s side. Low pressure will increase
tire wear and fuel consumption.
. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
. Keep the front and rear wheels in
proper alignment.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo.
. The indication of the ECO gauge shows
a reference for saving fuel. For details,
refer to “ECO gauge” FP203.
8-3. Engine Exhaust Gas
(Carbon Monoxide)
s08ac
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is dan-
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en-
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering
the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoid remaining in a parked ve-
hicle for a long time while the
engine is running. If that is un-
avoidable, then use the ventila-
tion fan to force fresh air into the
vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
New Vehicle Break-In Driving – the First 1,000 miles (1,600 km)
418
(421,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. If at any time you suspect that
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the trunk lid (Legacy) or rear
gate (Outback) closed while driv-
ing to prevent exhaust gas from
entering the vehicle.
NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction
of the metals used in the manufacture
of the exhaust system, you may hear a
crackling sound coming from the ex-
haust system for a short time after the
engine has been shut off. This sound is
normal.
8-4. Catalytic Converter
s08ad
WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere
near flammable materials (e.g.
grass, paper, rags or leaves),
because the catalytic converter
operates at very high tempera-
tures.
. Keep everyone and flammable
materials away from the exhaust
pipe while the engine is running.
The exhaust gas is very hot.
2.5 L models
2.4 L models
The catalytic converter is installed in the
exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to
reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases,
thus providing cleaner exhaust.
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:
. Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a
small amount of leaded gasoline will
damage the catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn off the ignition switch while
the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
firing or incomplete combustion), have
your vehicle checked and repaired by an
– CONTINUED –
Catalytic Converter
419
8
Driving Tips
(422,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
authorized SUBARU dealer.
. Do not apply undercoating or rust
prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
tem.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.
8-5. Periodic Inspections
s08ae
To keep your vehicle in the best condition
at all times, always have the recom-
mended maintenance services listed in
the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per-
formed at the specified time or mileage
intervals.
8-6. Driving in Foreign Coun-
tries
s08af
When planning to use your vehicle in
another country:
. Confirm the availability of the correct
fuel. Refer to “Fuel Requirements”
FP326.
. Comply with all regulations and require-
ments of each country.
Periodic Inspections
420
(423,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
8-7. Driving Tips for AWD Ve-
hicles
s08ag
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
. When replacing or installing
tire(s), all four tires must be the
same for the following items.
(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For items (a) to (c), you must
obey the specification that is
printed on the tire placard. The
tire placard is located on the
driver’s door pillar.
If all four tires are not the same in
items (a) to (h), serious mechan-
ical damage could be caused to
the drivetrain of the car, and
affect the followings.
– Ride
– Handling
– Braking
– Speedometer/Odometer cali-
bration
– Clearance between the body
and the tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
CAUTION
If you use a temporary spare tire to
replace a flat tire, be sure to use the
original temporary spare tire stored
in the vehicle. Using other sizes may
result in severe mechanical damage
to the drive train of your vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine
power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles
provide better traction when driving on
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and
when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By
shifting power between the front and rear
wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide
added traction during acceleration, and
added engine braking force during decel-
eration.
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle
may handle differently than an ordinary
two wheel drive vehicle and it contains
some features unique to AWD. For safety
purposes as well as to avoid damaging the
AWD system, you should keep the follow-
ing tips in mind:
. An AWD vehicle is better able to climb
steeper roads under snowy or slippery
– CONTINUED –
Driving Tips for AWD Vehicles
421
8
Driving Tips
(424,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.
There is little difference in handling, how-
ever, during extremely sharp turns or
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
down a slope or turning corners, be sure to
reduce your speed and maintain an ample
distance from other vehicles.
. Always check the cold tire pressure
before starting to drive. The recommended
tire pressure is provided on the tire
placard, which is located on the door pillar
on the driver’s side.
. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle
under hard-driving conditions such as
steep hills or dusty roads will necessitate
more frequent replacement of the follow-
ing items than that specified in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet.”
– Engine oil
– Brake fluid
– Rear differential gear oil
– Continuously variable transmission
fluid
– Front differential gear oil
. There are some precautions that you
must observe when towing your vehicle.
For detailed information, refer to “Towing”
FP461.
8-8. Off Road Driving
s08ah
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wear-
ing a seatbelt. You the driver and
all your passengers should fas-
ten the seatbelts before starting
to drive in order to minimize the
chance of serious injury or death.
. Do not make sharp turns or quick
maneuvers unless absolutely un-
avoidable. Such actions are dan-
gerous as you may lose control,
possibly resulting in a rollover
which could cause death or ser-
ious injury.
. Whenever strong crosswinds are
present, slow down sufficiently
to maintain control of your vehi-
cle. Remember that your vehicle,
with its higher profile and center
of gravity, is more likely to be
affected by crosswinds than or-
dinary passenger cars.
& Legacy
s08ah03
Your AWD vehicle is neither a conven-
tional off-road vehicle nor an all terrain
vehicle. It is a passenger car designed
primarily for on-road use. The AWD
feature gives it some limited off-road
capabilities in situations in which the
driving surface is relatively level, obstruc-
tion-free and otherwise similar to on-road
driving conditions. Operating it under other
than those conditions could subject the
vehicle to excessive stress which might
result in damage not eligible for repair
under warranty. If you do take your
SUBARU off road, you should review the
common sense precautions in the next
section (applicable to the Outback) for
general guidance. But please keep in mind
that your vehicle’s off-road capabilities are
more limited than those of the Outback.
Never attempt to drive through pools and
puddles, or roads flooded with water.
Off Road Driving
422
(425,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Water entering the engine air intake or the
exhaust pipe or water splashing onto
electrical parts may damage your vehicle
and may cause it to stall.
& Outback
s08ah02
CAUTION
Frequent driving of an AWD model
under hard-driving conditions such
as rough roads or off roads will
necessitate more frequent replace-
ment of the following items than that
specified in the maintenance sche-
dule described in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet.”
. Engine oil
. Brake fluid
Remember that damage done to
your SUBARU while operating it
off-road and not using common
sense precautions such as those
listed above is not eligible for war-
ranty coverage.
Your vehicle is classified as a utility
vehicle. Utility vehicles feature a higher
ground clearance which enables them to
be used for wide applications including off-
road driving. But please keep in mind that
your vehicle is neither a conventional off-
road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. A
higher center of gravity in relation to the
tread width as compared with ordinary
passenger cars makes vehicles of this
type more likely to roll over. In reality, utility
vehicles have a significantly higher roll-
over rate than other types of vehicles. The
high ground clearance of this vehicle is a
real advantage, giving you a better view of
the road and allowing you to anticipate
problems earlier. However, remember that
your utility vehicle is not designed for high-
speed cornering comparable to ordinary
passenger cars and that your vehicle could
roll over if you make a sharp turn at high
speed. If you do take your SUBARU off-
road, certain common sense precautions
such as those in the following list should be
taken.
! Before driving
s08ah0201
. Make certain that you and all of your
passengers are wearing seatbelts.
. Carry some emergency equipment,
such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
citizens band radio.
. Secure all cargo carried inside the
vehicle and make certain that it is not piled
higher than the seatbacks. During sudden
stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could be
thrown around in the vehicle and cause
injury. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof.
Those loads raise the vehicle’s center of
gravity and make it more prone to tip over.
. Never equip your vehicle with tires
larger than those specified in this manual.
! During driving
s08ah0202
General precautions:
. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-
sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or
over rough terrain.
. Slow down and employ extra caution at
all times. When driving off-road, you will
not have the benefit of marked traffic
lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
the like.
. Do not drive across steep slopes.
Instead, drive either straight up or straight
down the slopes. A vehicle can much more
easily tip over sideways than it can end
over end. Avoid driving straight up or down
slopes that are too steep.
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-
cially at higher speeds.
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the
wheel and injure your hands. Instead,
drive with your fingers and thumbs on the
outside of the rim.
. Do not drive or park over or near
flammable materials such as dry grass or
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The
– CONTINUED –
Off Road Driving
423
8
Driving Tips
(426,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
exhaust system is very hot while the
engine is running and right after the engine
stops. This could create a fire hazard.
Precautions when driving under espe-
cially dangerous situations:
. If driving through water, such as when
crossing shallow streams:
– First, check the depth of the water
and the bottom of the stream bed for
firmness.
– Next, ensure that the bed of the
stream is flat.
– Then, drive slowly and completely
through the stream. The water should
be shallow enough that it does not
reach the vehicle’s undercarriage.
. Water entering the engine air intake or
the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto
electrical parts may damage your vehicle
and may cause it to stall. Never drive
through rushing water. Regardless of its
depth, it can wash away the ground from
under your tires, resulting in possible loss
of traction and even vehicle rollover.
. If you must rock the vehicle to free it
from sand or mud, depress the accelerator
pedal slightly and move the select lever
back and forth between “D” and “R”
repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For
the best possible traction, avoid spinning
the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
. When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission in
2nd than 1st. Refer to “Selection of Manual
Mode” FP351.
! After driving
s08ah0203
. Always check your brakes for effective-
ness immediately after driving in sand,
mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and
stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat that
process several times to dry out the brake
discs and brake pads.
. After driving through tall grass, mud,
rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is
no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand,
etc. adhering to or trapped on the under-
body. Clear off any such matter from the
underbody. If the vehicle is used with these
materials trapped or adhering to the
underbody, a mechanical breakdown or
fire could occur.
. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
road driving. Suspension components are
particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
need to be washed thoroughly.
8-9. Winter Driving
s08ai
& Operation during Cold
Weather
s08ai01
Carry some emergency equipment, such
as a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares,
a small shovel and jumper cables.
Check the battery and cables. Cold tem-
peratures reduce battery capacity. The
battery must be in good condition to
provide enough power for cold winter
starts.
It normally takes longer to start the engine
in very cold weather conditions. Use an
engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity
for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil
will make it harder to start the engine.
Keep the door locks from freezing by
squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage
or separate the rubber weather strips
around the door. If the door is frozen, use
hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards
thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that con-
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use
engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of
the vehicle.
Winter Driving
424
(427,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
If you fill the windshield washer tank with a
fluid with a different concentration from the
one used previously, purge the old fluid
from the piping between the windshield
washer tank and washer nozzles by
operating the washer for a certain period
of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of
the fluid remaining in the piping is too low
for the outside temperature, it may freeze
and block the nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the out-
side temperature. If the concen-
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the windshield washer tank.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol anti-
freeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
! Before driving your vehicle
s08ai0101
Before entering the vehicle, remove any
snow or ice from your shoes because that
could make the pedals slippery and driving
dangerous.
While warming up the vehicle before
driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
brake pedal, and all other controls operate
smoothly.
Clear away ice and snow that has accu-
mulated under the fenders to avoid making
steering difficult. During severe winter
driving, stop when and where it is safe to
do so and check under the fenders
periodically.
! Parking in cold weather
s08ai0102
WARNING
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around your vehicle if you park
the vehicle in snow with the engine
running.
CAUTION
. Do not use the parking brake
when parking for long periods in
cold weather since it could freeze
in that position.
. When the vehicle is parked in
snow or when it snows, raise the
wiper blades off the glass to
prevent damage to them.
. Under either of the following
conditions, icing may develop
on the brake system, which could
cause poor braking action.
– When the vehicle has been left
parked after use on roads
heavily covered with snow
– When the vehicle has been left
parked during a snowstorm
Check for snow or ice buildup on
the suspension, disc brakes and
brake hoses underneath the ve-
hicle. If there is caked snow or
ice, remove it, being careful not
to damage the disc brakes and
brake hoses and ABS harness.
When parking for long periods in cold
weather, you should observe the following
tips.
1. Place the select lever in the “P”
position.
2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent
the vehicle from moving.
– CONTINUED –
Winter Driving
425
8
Driving Tips
(428,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Refueling in cold weather
s08ai0103
To help prevent moisture from forming in
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel
tank is recommended during cold weather.
Use only additives that are specifically
designed for this purpose. When an anti-
freeze additive is used, its effect lasts
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
fuel level reaches half empty.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used for
an extended period, it is best to have the
fuel tank filled to capacity.
& Driving on Snowy and Icy
Roads
s08ai02
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads such as snowy or icy
roads. This may cause loss of vehi-
cle control.
CAUTION
Avoid prolonged continuous driving
in snowstorms. Snow will enter the
engine’s intake system and may
hinder the airflow, which could re-
sult in engine shutdown or even
breakdown.
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-
speed driving, and sharp turning when
driving on snowy or icy roads.
Always maintain ample distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
to avoid the need for sudden braking.
To supplement the foot brake, use the
engine brake effectively to control the
vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
when necessary.)
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-
vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
leading to loss of vehicle control.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-
hances your vehicle’s braking perfor-
mance on snowy and icy roads. For
information about braking on slippery
surfaces, refer to “ABS (Anti-Lock Brake
System)” FP356 and “Vehicle Dynamics
Control System” FP358.
! Wiper operation when snowing
s08ai0201
Before driving in cold weather, make sure
the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to
the windshield or rear window.
If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to the
windshield or rear window, perform the
following procedure.
. To thaw the windshield wiper blade
rubbers, use the defroster with the airflow
selection in “
” and the temperature set
for maximum warmth until the wiper blade
rubbers are completely thawed. Refer to
“Climate Control” FP277.
. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper
deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the
windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer to
“Defogger and Deicer” FP261.
. To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers,
use the rear window defogger. Refer to
“Defogger and Deicer” FP261.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts
to stick on the surface of the windshield
despite wiper operation, use the defroster
with the airflow selection in “
” and the
temperature set for maximum warmth.
After the windshield gets warmed enough
to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away
using the windshield washer. Refer to
“Windshield washer” FP259.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
wiper from working effectively. If snow is
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the
vehicle at road side, use the hazard
warning flasher to alert other drivers. Refer
to “Hazard Warning Flasher” FP172.
Winter Driving
426
(429,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
We recommend use of non-freezing type
wiper blades (winter blades) during the
seasons you could have snow and freez-
ing temperatures. Blades of this type give
superior wiping performance in snowy
conditions. Be sure to use blades that are
suitable for your vehicle.
CAUTION
During high-speed driving, non-
freezing type wiper blades may not
perform as well as standard wiper
blades. If this happens, reduce the
vehicle speed.
NOTE
When the season requiring non-freez-
ing type wiper blades is over, replace
them with standard wiper blades.
& Corrosion Protection
s08ai03
Refer to “Corrosion Protection” FP476.
& Snow Tires
s08ai04
WARNING
. When replacing or installing win-
ter tire(s), all four tires must be
the same for the following items.
(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For items (a) to (c), you must
obey the specification that is
printed on the tire placard. The
tire placard is located on the
driver’s door pillar.
If all four tires are not the same in
items (a) to (h), serious mechan-
ical damage could be caused to
the drivetrain of the car, and
affect the followings.
– Ride
– Handling
– Braking
– Speedometer/Odometer cali-
bration
– Clearance between the body
and the tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
. Do not use a combination of
radial, belted bias or bias tires
since it may cause dangerous
handling characteristics and lead
to an accident.
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season
tires” which are designed to provide an
adequate measure of traction, handling
and braking performance in year-round
driving. In winter, it may be possible to
enhance performance through use of tires
designed specifically for winter driving
conditions.
If you choose to install winter tires on your
vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size
and type. You must install four winter tires
that are of the same size, construction,
brand and load range and you should
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires
since this may result in dangerous hand-
ling characteristics. When you choose a
tire, make sure that there is enough
clearance between the tire and vehicle
body.
Remember to drive with care at all times
regardless of the type of tires on your
vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Winter Driving
427
8
Driving Tips
(430,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Tire Chains
s08ai05
CAUTION
Tire chains cannot be used on your
vehicle because of the lack of clear-
ance between the tires and vehicle
body.
NOTE
When tire chains cannot be used, use of
another type of traction device (such as
spring chains) may be acceptable if use
on your vehicle is recommended by the
device manufacturer, taking into ac-
count tire size and road conditions.
Follow the device manufacturer’s in-
structions, especially regarding max-
imum vehicle speed.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle,
drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle,
and do not spin your wheels. Damage
caused to your vehicle by use of a
traction device is not covered under
warranty.
Make certain that any traction device
you use is an SAE class S device, and
use it on the front wheels only. Always
use the utmost care when driving with a
traction device. Overconfidence be-
cause you are using a traction device
could easily lead to a serious accident.
& Rocking the Vehicle
s08ai06
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-
erator pedal slightly and move the select
lever back and forth between “D” and “R”
repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the
best possible traction, avoid spinning the
wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission in
2nd than 1st.
For information on holding the transmis-
sion in 2nd position, refer to “Selection of
Manual Mode” FP351.
8-10. Loading Your Vehicle
s08aj
WARNING
Never allow passengers to ride on a
folded rear seatback, in the trunk or
in the cargo area. Doing so may
result in serious injury.
Loading Your Vehicle
428
(431,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
WARNING
. Never stack luggage or other
cargo higher than the top of the
seatback because it could tumble
forward and injure passengers in
the event of a sudden stop or
accident. Keep luggage or cargo
low, as close to the floor as
possible.
. When you carry something inside
the vehicle, secure it whenever
you can to prevent it from being
thrown around inside the vehicle
during sudden stops, sharp turns
or in an accident.
. Do not pile heavy loads on the
roof. These loads raise the vehi-
cle’s center of gravity and make it
more prone to tip over.
. Secure long items properly to
prevent them from shooting for-
ward and causing serious injury
during a sudden stop.
. Never exceed the maximum load
limit. If you do, some parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss
of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
. Do not place anything on the rear
shelf behind the rear seatback
(Legacy) or the extended cargo
area cover (Outback – if
equipped). Such items could
tumble forward in the event of a
sudden stop or a collision. This
could cause serious injury.
CAUTION
Do not carry spray cans, containers
with flammable or corrosive liquids
or any other dangerous items inside
the vehicle.
NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry
unneeded cargo.
& Vehicle Capacity Weight
s08aj01
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by available
cargo space. The maximum load you can
carry in your vehicle is shown on the
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s
– CONTINUED –
Loading Your Vehicle
429
8
Driving Tips
(432,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
side door pillar. It includes the total weight
of the driver and all passengers and their
belongings, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,
etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross Ve-
hicle Weight Rating and
Gross Axle Weight Rating)
s08aj02
Certification label
The certification label attached to the
driver’s side door pillar shows GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR
(Gross Axle Weight Rating).
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must
never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the
combined total of weight of the vehicle,
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any
optional equipment and trailer tongue
load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-
pending on the situation.
In addition, the total weight applied to each
axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
should confirm that GVW and front and
rear GAWs are within the GVWR and
GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehicle
scale, found at a commercial weighing
station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower
load range than the originals because they
may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-
tions. Replacement tires with a higher load
range than the originals do not increase
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
& Roof Molding and Crossbar
(Legacy)
s08aj06
CAUTION
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
roof molding must be used to-
gether with a roof crossbar kit
and the appropriate carrying at-
tachment. Otherwise, damage to
the roof or paint or a road hazard
due to loss of cargo could result.
. When using the roof crossbar kit,
make sure that the total weight of
the crossbars, carrying attach-
ment and cargo does not exceed
the maximum load limit. Over-
loading may cause damage to
the vehicle and create a safety
Loading Your Vehicle
430
(433,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
hazard.
. Do not install a roof tent on the
vehicle. Doing so may damage
the vehicle and create a safety
hazard. SUBARU warranties do
not cover vehicle damage result-
ing from use of a roof tent.
Cargo can be carried after securing the
roof crossbar kit to the roof molding and
installing the appropriate carrying attach-
ment. When installing the roof crossbar kit,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
When carrying cargo on the roof using the
roof crossbar kit and carrying attachments,
never exceed the maximum load limit as
explained below. You should also be
careful that the vehicle does not exceed
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and front and rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). For information about
loading cargo into or onto your vehicle,
refer to “Loading Your Vehicle” FP428.
The maximum total load on the roof
(including crossbars, carrying attachments
and cargo) must not exceed 88 lbs (40
kg). Refer to the crossbar installation
instructions for the maximum crossbar
capacity. Place the heaviest load at the
bottom, close to the roof, and evenly
distribute the cargo. Always properly se-
cure all cargo.
! Installing carrying attachments on
the crossbars
s08aj0601
When installing any carrying attachments
such as the load carriers, crossbars, bike
carrier, ski carrier, kayak carrier, cargo
basket, etc., follow the manufacturer’s
instructions for the load capacity and make
sure that the attachments are securely
installed. Use only attachments designed
specifically for the crossbars. Before oper-
ating the vehicle, make sure that the cargo
is properly secured on the attachment.
NOTE
Remember that the vehicle’s center of
gravity is altered with the weight of the
load on the roof, thus affecting the
driving characteristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind
effects will be increased.
! Removal and installation of the
crossbars
s08aj0602
Each of the two roof moldings has two
mounting points for crossbars. Each
mounting point is fitted with a cover. Use
a screwdriver to open the covers. When
installing the crossbars on the roof mold-
ing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
– CONTINUED –
Loading Your Vehicle
431
8
Driving Tips
(434,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Roof Rails with Integrated
Crossbars (Outback)
s08aj08
1) Integrated crossbars
CAUTION
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
crossbars must be extended
across the roof and locked into
the roof rails. Cargo must be
attached to the crossbars using
genuine SUBARU accessory
crossbar attachments. The
crossbars must never be used
independently to carry cargo on
the roof. Otherwise, damage to
the roof or paint or a dangerous
road hazard due to loss of cargo
could result.
. When loading cargo on the cross-
bars, using the genuine SUBARU
accessory crossbar attach-
ments, make sure the total weight
of the crossbar attachments, and
loaded cargo, does not exceed
the maximum load limit of 150 lbs
(67.5 kg). Overloading may cause
damage to the vehicle and create
a safety hazard.
. Be careful not to damage the
vehicle body when passing the
rope through the front and rear
holes of the roof rails.
. Do not install a roof tent on the
vehicle. Doing so may damage
the vehicle and create a safety
hazard. SUBARU warranties do
not cover vehicle damage result-
ing from use of a roof tent.
The crossbars must be extended across
the roof and locked into the roof rails to
carry cargo on the roof. Cargo can only be
carried on the crossbars using the genuine
SUBARU accessory crossbar attach-
ments.
When you carry cargo on the roof using the
crossbars and a carrying attachment,
never exceed the maximum load limit
explained in the following. You should also
be careful that your vehicle does not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). For information
on loading cargo into or onto your vehicle,
refer to “Loading Your Vehicle” FP428.
The maximum load limit of the cargo and
carrying attachment must not exceed the
allowable load limit described in the Own-
er’s Manual of a genuine SUBARU carry-
ing attachment. Place the heaviest load at
the bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly
distribute the cargo. Always properly se-
cure all cargo.
! Installing carrying attachments on
the crossbars
s08aj0801
When installing any carrying attachments
such as the load carriers, crossbars, bike
carrier, ski carrier, kayak carrier, cargo
basket, etc., follow the manufacturer’s
instructions of the load capacity and make
sure that the attachments are securely
installed. Use only attachments designed
specifically for the crossbars. Before oper-
ating the vehicle, make sure that the cargo
is properly secured on the attachment.
NOTE
. Remember that the vehicle’s center
of gravity is altered with the weight of
the load on the roof, thus affecting the
driving characteristics. Drive carefully,
Loading Your Vehicle
432
(435,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and
abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be
increased.
. Restore the bars to the original
position when the bars are not used
as crossbars.
! How to use as crossbars
s08aj0802
CAUTION
. Do not raise the bar higher than
necessary. The base of the bar
may be damaged.
. Be careful not to contact the bars
while sliding them. Otherwise,
the bars may be scratched or
the latch portions may be da-
maged.
. Do not slide the bar more than
necessary when sliding the bar.
The base of the bar may be
damaged.
. Do not allow the bar to fall on or
contact the roof panel or the
moonroof when sliding the bar.
Otherwise the roof panel may be
dented or the glass of the moon-
roof may be damaged.
. Be careful hands do not become
pinched when operating the
cross bar. Hands becoming
pinched could result in injury.
1. Pull out the integrated crossbars from
the roof rail holders by pulling up the
covers.
2. Slide the bars in the direction shown in
the illustration.
3. Install the bars into the holders.
4. Make sure that the latches are fitted
securely.
! How to change the position of the
crossbar
s08aj080201
WARNING
Carefully read the warning label
attached to the roof rail.
You can change the position of the rear
crossbar. To change the position, perform
the following procedure.
1. Take out the torque wrench from the
under-floor storage compartment.
– CONTINUED –
Loading Your Vehicle
433
8
Driving Tips
(436,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
2. Remove the plastic plug of the roof rail
holder by using the torque wrench.
3. Remove the bolt of the crossbar by
using the torque wrench and pull this side
out.
4. Pull out the other side of the crossbar
from the roof rail holder by pulling up the
cover.
5. Install both ends of the crossbar into
the other holders.
1) Guide plate
2) Torque wrench
6. Using the torque wrench, tighten the
crossbar bolts until the torque wrench hits
the guide plate.
Loading Your Vehicle
434
(437,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
NOTE
The tightening torque is approximately
8.9 + 2.2 lbf·ft (12 + 3.0 N·m, 1.2 + 0.3
kgf·m).
7. Install the plastic plug by pushing it into
the hole until it is fully seated.
! How to re-stow bars
s08aj0803
CAUTION
Do not use the bars as roof rails
when the bars are stowed.
1. Check that the rear crossbar is stowed
in the front side holder.
2. Pull out the crossbars from the roof rail
holders by pulling up the covers.
3. Slide the bars in the direction shown in
the illustration.
4. Install the bars into the holders.
5. Make sure that the latches are fitted
securely.
Loading Your Vehicle
435
8
Driving Tips
(438,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
8-11. Trailer Hitch (Outback –
If Equipped)
s08ak
WARNING
. Never exceed the maximum
weight specified for the trailer
hitch. Exceeding the maximum
weight could cause an accident
resulting in serious personal in-
juries. Permissible trailer weight
changes depending on the situa-
tion. For possible recommenda-
tions and limitations, refer to
“Trailer Towing (Outback)”
FP438.
. Trailer brakes are required when
the towing load exceeds 1,000 lbs
(453 kg). Be sure your trailer has
safety chains and that each chain
will hold the trailer’s maximum
gross weight. Towing trailers
without safety chains could cre-
ate a traffic safety hazard if the
trailer separates from the hitch
due to coupling damage or hitch
ball damage.
. Be sure to check the hitch pin and
safety pin for positive locking
placement before towing a trailer.
If the ball mount comes off the
hitch receiver, the trailer could
get loose and create a traffic
safety hazard.
. Use only the ball mount supplied
with this hitch. Use the hitch only
as a weight carrying hitch. Do not
use with any type of weight dis-
tributing hitch.
. The standard bumper beam must
be installed after you remove the
trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU
dealer for purchase of a standard
bumper beam if you do not have
the original.
. If a trailer hitch is installed, it is
not possible to install the rear
towing hook.
The maximum gross trailer weight and
maximum gross tongue weight are indi-
cated in the following table.
Maximum
gross trailer
weight
Maximum
gross tongue
weight
2.4 L models
3,500 lbs
(1,588 kg)
350 lbs
(159 kg)
2.5 L models
2,700 lbs
(1,224 kg)
270 lbs
(122 kg)
When towing a trailer, refer to “Trailer
Towing (Outback)” FP438.
& Connecting a Trailer
s08ak01
1. Remove the receiver cover from the
hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball
mount into the hitch receiver tube.
2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole located
on the hitch receiver tube so that the pin
passes through the ball mount.
Trailer Hitch (Outback – If Equipped)
436
(439,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
3. Insert the safety pin through the pro-
vided hole on the hitch pin securely.
4. Check the ball mount assembly by
pulling on it to make sure it does not come
off the hitch receiver.
1) Hitch ball installation point
2) Hooks for safety chains
5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate
for the ball mount and your trailer. The
hitch ball must be securely installed on the
ball mount.
6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with
safety chains that will hold the trailer’s
maximum gross weight. The chains should
cross under the trailer tongue to prevent
the tongue from dropping onto the ground
in case it should disconnect from the hitch
ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains
taking tight turn situations into account;
however, be careful not to let them drag on
the ground.
WARNING
Do not connect safety chains to any
part of the vehicle other than the
safety chain hooks.
Hitch harness connector
8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black
four-pin wire connector to the towing
trailer’s wire harness.
9. Confirm proper function of the hitch
wire harness by individually activating the
brake, stop and turn signal lights on the
trailer.
NOTE
Always disconnect the trailer wire har-
ness before launching or retrieving a
– CONTINUED –
Trailer Hitch (Outback – If Equipped)
437
8
Driving Tips
(440,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
watercraft.
& If Not Towing a Trailer
s08ak02
. Remove the ball mount from the hitch
receiver tube and insert the receiver cover
onto the hitch receiver tube.
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin
connector of the hitch wire harness to
protect against possible damage.
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the
four-pin connector using terminal grease.
8-12. Trailer Towing (Legacy)
s08ar
CAUTION
Your vehicle is neither designed nor
intended to be used for trailer tow-
ing. Therefore, never tow a trailer
with your vehicle.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that may result
from trailer towing, from any trailer towing
equipment or from any errors or omissions
in the instructions accompanying such
equipment. SUBARU warranties do not
apply to vehicle damage or malfunction
caused by trailer towing.
8-13. Trailer Towing
(Outback)
s08al
Your vehicle is designed and intended to
be used primarily as a passenger-carrying
vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional
loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,
brakes, tires and suspension and has an
adverse effect on fuel economy and air
conditioning system cooling performance.
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety
and satisfaction depend upon proper use
of correct equipment and cautious opera-
tion of your vehicle. Drive carefully when
towing a trailer, and always consider the
following conditions.
. Road conditions
. Weather conditions
. Vehicle load weight
. Trailer load weight
Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer to
assist you in purchasing a hitch and other
necessary towing equipment appropriate
for your vehicle. Do not use towing equip-
ment other than genuine SUBARU towing
equipment. In addition, be sure to follow
the instructions on correct installation and
use provided by SUBARU.
Trailer Towing (Legacy)
438
(441,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that result from
trailer towing equipment, or from any
errors or omissions in the instructions
accompanying such equipment or for your
failure to follow the proper instructions.
Regularly check that the hitch mounting
bolts and nuts are tightened securely.
& Warranties and Maintenance
s08al01
SUBARU warranties do not apply to
vehicle damage or malfunction caused by
trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow
a trailer, more frequent maintenance will
be required due to the additional load.
(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under
severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet.”)
Under no circumstances should a trailer be
towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with
any new powertrain component (engine,
transmission, differential, wheel bearings,
etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
driving.
& Maximum Load Limits
s08al02
WARNING
Never exceed the maximum load
limits explained in the following.
Exceeding the maximum load limits
could cause personal injury and/or
vehicle damage.
CAUTION
Before towing a trailer, check the
trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs and
tongue load. Make sure the load and
its distribution in your vehicle and
trailer are acceptable.
! Total trailer weight
s08al0201
Total trailer weight
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus
its cargo load) must never exceed the
maximum total trailer weight. The max-
imum total trailer weight is indicated in the
following tables.
– CONTINUED –
Trailer Towing (Outback)
439
8
Driving Tips
(442,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
2.4 L models
Conditions Maximum total trailer weight Maximum tongue weight
When towing a trailer without
brakes.
1,000 lbs (453 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
When towing a trailer with
brakes.
3,500 lbs (1,588 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
2.5 L models
Conditions Maximum total trailer weight Maximum tongue weight
When towing a trailer without
brakes.
1,000 lbs (453 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
When towing a trailer with
brakes.
2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)
270 lbs (122 kg)
! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR)
s08al0202
Gross Vehicle Weight
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the com-
bined total of the weight of the vehicle,
driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,
trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment installed on your vehicle.
Therefore, the GVW changes depending
on the situation. Determine the GVW each
time before going on a trip by putting your
vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.
The GVWR of your vehicle that is set by
SUBARU is shown on the certification
label located on the driver’s door of your
Trailer Towing (Outback)
440
(443,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
vehicle.
Certification label
! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
s08al0203
Gross Axle Weight
The total weight applied to each axle
(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear
GAWs can be adjusted by relocating
passengers and luggage inside the vehi-
cle. The front and rear GAWR of your
vehicle that are set by SUBARU are also
shown on the certification label.
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
confirm that the total weight and weight
distribution are within safe driving limits,
you should have your vehicle and trailer
weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
! Tongue load
s08al0204
Tongue load
WARNING
If the trailer is loaded with more
weight in the back of trailer’s axle
than in the front, the load is taken off
the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
This may cause the rear wheels to
skid, especially during braking or
when vehicle speed is reduced dur-
ing cornering, resulting in over-
steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from
8% to 11% of the total trailer weight and
does not exceed the maximum value.
For details about the trailer tongue load,
refer to “Total trailer weight” FP439.
1) Jack
2) Bathroom scale
– CONTINUED –
Trailer Towing (Outback)
441
8
Driving Tips
(444,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
The tongue load can be weighed with a
bathroom scale as shown in the following
illustration. When weighing the tongue
load, be sure to position the towing coupler
at the height at which it would be during
actual towing, using a jack as shown.
F: Front
The tongue load can be adjusted by proper
distribution of the load in the trailer. Never
load the trailer with more weight in the
back than in the front; approximately 60%
of the trailer load should be in the front and
approximately 40% in the rear. Also,
distribute the load as evenly as possible
on both the left and right sides.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
& Trailer Hitches
s08al03
WARNING
Never drill the frame or under-body
of your vehicle to install a commer-
cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-
ous exhaust gas, water or mud may
enter the passenger compartment
through the drilled hole. Exhaust
gas contains carbon monoxide, a
colorless and odorless gas which is
dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
Also, drilling the frame or under-
body of your vehicle could cause
deterioration of strength of your
vehicle and cause corrosion around
the drilled hole.
CAUTION
. Do not modify the vehicle ex-
haust system, brake system, or
other systems when installing a
hitch or other trailer towing
equipment.
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches
as they can cause damage to the
axle housing, wheel bearings,
wheels or tires.
Do not use a trailer hitch other than
genuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuine
SUBARU hitch is available from your
SUBARU dealer.
& Connecting a Trailer
s08al04
! Trailer brakes
s08al0401
WARNING
Do not directly connect your trailer’s
hydraulic brake system to the hy-
draulic brake system in your vehicle.
Direct connection would cause the
vehicle’s brake performance to de-
teriorate and could lead to an acci-
dent.
Check that your trailer’s brakes conform
with Federal, state/province and/or other
applicable regulations. Your SUBARU’s
brake system is not designed to be tapped
into the trailer’s hydraulic brake system.
Please ask your SUBARU dealer and
professional trailer supplier for more in-
formation about the trailer’s brake system.
Trailer Towing (Outback)
442
(445,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Trailer safety chains
s08al0402
WARNING
Always use safety chains between
your vehicle and the trailer. Towing
trailer without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if the
trailer separates from the hitch due
to coupling damage or hitch ball
damage.
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch
ball should break or become discon-
nected, the trailer could get loose and
create a traffic safety hazard.
For safety, always connect the towing
vehicle and trailer with trailer safety
chains. Two chains should be used in
total, one to the right side and the other to
the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains
crossing each other under the trailer
tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping
onto the ground in case the trailer tongue
should disconnect from the hitch ball.
Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking
tight turn situations into account; however,
be careful not to let them drag on the
ground.
! Side mirrors
s08al0403
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,
check that the standard side mirrors
provide a good rearward field of view
without significant blind spots. If significant
blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan-
dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that
conform with Federal, state/province and/
or other applicable regulations.
! Trailer lights
s08al0404
CAUTION
Direct splicing or other improper
connection of trailer lights may
damage your vehicle’s electrical
system and cause a malfunction of
your vehicle’s lighting system.
Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s
electrical system requires modifications to
the vehicle’s lighting circuit to increase its
capacity and accommodate wiring
changes. To ensure the trailer lights are
connected properly, please consult your
SUBARU dealer. Check for proper opera-
tion of the turn signals and the stop lights
each time you connect a trailer to your
vehicle.
! Tires
s08al0405
WARNING
Never tow a trailer when the tempor-
ary spare tire is used. The temporary
spare tire is not designed to sustain
the towing load. Use of the tempor-
ary spare tire when towing can result
in failure of the spare tire and/or less
stability of the vehicle.
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle
are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires”
FP536.
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and
proper inflation pressure should be in
accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s
specifications.
In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
when towing a trailer, ask a commercial
– CONTINUED –
Trailer Towing (Outback)
443
8
Driving Tips
(446,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
road service representative or profes-
sional to repair the flat tire.
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your
vehicle or trailer as a precaution against
getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire
is firmly secured.
& Trailer Towing Tips
s08al05
CAUTION
. For models equipped with the
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
driving support systems, when
towing a trailer, touch “BSD/
RCTA” to deactivate the system.
The system may not operate
properly due to the blocked radar
waves. For details about how to
turn on/off the BSD/RCTA, refer
to “Car settings” FP220.
. For models equipped with Re-
verse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system, consult your SUBARU
dealer for additional information
about towing a trailer.
. Towing a trailer in high tempera-
tures, or on long or steep grades,
may cause the vehicle to over-
heat. Refer to “Engine Overheat-
ing” FP460.
. When towing a trailer, steering,
stability, stopping distance and
braking performance will be dif-
ferent when compared to normal
operation. You should never
drive at excessive speeds but
always employ extra caution
when towing a trailer. You should
also keep the following tips in
mind.
. When parking on a steep slope
with a trailer attached to your
vehicle, the braking power of the
electronic parking brake may not
be sufficient since strong braking
power is needed.
! Before starting out on a trip
s08al0501
. Check the towing regulations for trailer
or caravan vehicles that vary by state/
region. Failure to comply with the proce-
dures set forth will not only compromise
your safety, but will also negate your
insurance coverage and/or may violate
the state road and traffic acts and regula-
tions.
. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-
hitch mounting are in good condition. If any
problems are apparent, do not tow the
trailer.
. Check that the vehicle rests horizon-
tally with the trailer attached. If the vehicle
is tipped sharply up at the front and down
at the rear, check the total trailer weight,
GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then
confirm that the load and its distribution are
acceptable.
. Check that the tire pressures are
correct.
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are
connected properly. Confirm that
– The trailer tongue is connected
properly to the hitch ball.
– The trailer lights connector is con-
nected properly and trailer’s stop lights
illuminate when the vehicle’s brake
pedal is pressed, and that the trailer’s
turn signal lights flash when the vehi-
cle’s turn signal lever is operated.
– The safety chains are connected
properly.
– All cargo in the trailer is secured
safely in position.
– The side mirrors provide a good
rearward field of view without a sig-
nificant blind spot.
. Sufficient time should be taken to learn
the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination
before starting out on a trip. In an area free
of traffic, practice turning, stopping and
backing up.
Trailer Towing (Outback)
444
(447,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. When using the 2.4 L turbo engine
model to tow a trailer, SUBARU recom-
mends using unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) or higher
to reduce the risk of engine overheat.
! Driving with a trailer
s08al0502
. You should allow for considerably more
stopping distance when towing a trailer.
Avoid sudden braking because it may
result in skidding or jackknifing and loss
of control.
. Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-
erations.
. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
rapid lane changes.
. Slow down before turning. Make a
longer than normal turning radius because
the trailer wheels will be closer than the
vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In a
tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.
. Crosswinds will adversely affect the
handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-
ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to
weather conditions or the passing of large
trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly
grip the steering wheel and promptly begin
decelerating your vehicle at a gradual
pace.
. When passing other vehicles, consider-
able distance is required because of the
added weight and length caused by
attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
. Reversing the vehicle with a trailer can
be difficult and requires experience. Never
accelerate or steer rapidly, and grip the
bottom of the steering wheel with one
hand.
To reverse around a corner, perform the
following procedure.
1. Reverse slowly and steer in the oppo-
site direction to the way you want to turn.
2. Once the trailer begins to swing
around, straighten the steering wheel.
3. Turn the wheel in the opposite direc-
tion.
4. Steer the vehicle around to be in line
with the trailer, then straighten the steering
again.
. If the ABS warning light illuminates
while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing
the trailer and have repairs performed
immediately by your nearest SUBARU
dealer.
! Driving on grades
s08al0503
. Before going down a steep hill, slow
down and shift into lower gear (if neces-
sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the
engine braking effect and prevent over-
heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not
make sudden downshifts.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the
air conditioner may turn off automatically
to protect the engine from overheating.
. When driving uphill in hot weather,
because the engine and transmission are
relatively prone to overheating, pay atten-
tion to the following items.
– CONTINUED –
Trailer Towing (Outback)
445
8
Driving Tips
(448,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
– Engine coolant temperature gauge
– AT OIL TEMP warning light
. If any of the following conditions occur,
immediately turn off the air conditioner and
stop the vehicle in the nearest safe
location. Refer to “If You Park Your Vehicle
in an Emergency” FP448 and “Engine
Overheating” FP460.
– Engine coolant temperature gauge
needle approaches the OVERHEAT
zone. Refer to “Engine Coolant Tem-
perature Gauge” FP175.
– AT OIL TEMP warning light illumi-
nates. Refer to “AT OIL TEMP Warning
Light” FP184.
. Do not use the accelerator pedal to stay
stationary on an uphill slope instead of
using the parking brake or foot brake. That
may cause the transmission fluid to over-
heat.
! Parking on a grade
s08al0504
Always block the wheels under both
vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
the parking brake. You should not park on
a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or slope
cannot be avoided, you should take the
following steps:
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release the regular brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the regular brakes and then
apply the parking brake; slowly release
the regular brakes.
5. Shift into “P” and shut off the engine.
Trailer Towing (Outback)
446
(449,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
s09
9-1. If You Park Your Vehicle in an Emergency ... 448
9-2. Temporary Spare Tire..................................... 448
9-3. Maintenance Tools.......................................... 449
Legacy ............................................................... 450
Outback.............................................................. 451
9-4. Flat Tires ......................................................... 452
Changing a Flat Tire ........................................... 452
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(U.S.-Spec. Models) .......................................... 456
TPMS Screen (U.S.-Spec. Models) .......................457
9-5. Jump Starting ................................................. 457
How to Jump Start.............................................. 458
9-6. Engine Overheating ........................................ 460
If Steam Is Coming from the Engine
Compartment.................................................... 460
If No Steam Is Coming from the Engine
Compartment.................................................... 460
9-7. Towing ............................................................. 461
Towing Hook and Tie-Down Hooks/Holes ............ 461
Using a Flat-Bed Truck ....................................... 464
Towing with All Wheels on the Ground ............... 464
9-8. Electronic Parking Brake – If the Electronic
Parking Brake Cannot Be Released ............465
9-9. Access Key Fob – If Access Key Fob
Does Not Operate Properly ..........................465
Locking and Unlocking....................................... 466
Switching Power Status ..................................... 466
Starting Engine .................................................. 466
9-10. Rear Gate (Outback) – If the Rear Gate
Cannot Be Opened........................................467
9-11. Malfunctions of the Center Information
Display ...........................................................468
9-12. If Your Vehicle Is Involved in
an Accident....................................................470
To Restart the Engine When Involved in
an Accident...................................................... 470
Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking Operation
When Involved in an Accident .......................... 470
In Case of Emergency
9
In Case of Emergency
(450,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
9-1. If You Park Your Vehicle
in an Emergency
s09aa
The hazard warning flasher should be
used in day or night to warn other drivers
when you have to park your vehicle under
emergency conditions.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be acti-
vated regardless of the ignition switch
position.
Turn on the hazard warning by pressing
the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it
off by pressing the switch again.
When the hazard warning flasher are
flashing, the corresponding turn signal
indicator will also flash.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
9-2. Temporary Spare Tire
s09ab
WARNING
. Never tow a trailer when the
temporary spare tire is used.
The temporary spare tire is not
designed to sustain the towing
load. Use of the temporary spare
tire when towing can result in
failure of the spare tire and/or
less stability of the vehicle and
may lead to an accident.
. U.S.-spec. models, when a spare
tire is mounted or a wheel rim is
replaced without the original
pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire
pressure warning light will illumi-
nate steadily after blinking for
approximately one minute. This
indicates the tire pressure mon-
itoring system (TPMS) is unable
to monitor all four road wheels.
Contact your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible for tire and
sensor replacement and/or sys-
tem resetting.
If You Park Your Vehicle in an Emergency
448
(451,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
CAUTION
Never use any temporary spare tire
other than the original. Using other
sizes may result in severe mechan-
ical damage to the drive train of your
vehicle.
The temporary spare tire is stored under
the under-floor storage compartment.
The temporary spare tire is smaller and
lighter than a conventional tire and is
designed for emergency use only. Re-
move the temporary spare tire and re-
install the conventional tire as soon as
possible because the spare tire is de-
signed only for temporary use.
Check the inflation pressure of the tem-
porary spare tire periodically to keep the
tire ready for use. For the correct tire
pressure, refer to “Tires” FP536.
When using the temporary spare tire, note
the following precautions.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
a tire chain will not fit properly.
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time.
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire
has a smaller diameter, so road clearance
is reduced.
1) Tread wear indicator bar
2) Indicator location mark
. When the wear indicator appears on
the tread, replace the tire.
. The temporary spare tire must be used
only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire
gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
rear wheel and install the temporary spare
tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
9-3. Maintenance Tools
s09ah
Your vehicle is equipped with the following
maintenance tools.
. Jack
. Jack handle
. Screwdriver
. Towing hook (eye bolt) (Outback)
. Wheel nut wrench
. Torque wrench (Outback)
CAUTION
The torque wrench is designed to be
used only when changing the posi-
tion of the crossbar. Do not use the
torque wrench in other cases. Other-
wise, the torque wrench may be
deformed.
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance Tools
449
9
In Case of Emergency
(452,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
NOTE
To use the jack handle, insert the jack
handle into the hole of the wheel nut
wrench.
& Legacy
s09ah10
1) Under-floor storage compartment (Refer
to “Under-Floor Storage Compartment”
FP320.)
2) Wheel nut wrench
3) Screwdriver
4) Jack handle
5) Jack
The maintenance tools are stored in the
under-floor storage compartment.
For the method to use the jack, refer to
“Flat Tires” FP452.
Maintenance Tools
450
(453,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Outback
s09ah11
! Type A
s09ah1103
1) Under-floor storage compartment (Refer
to “Under-Floor Storage Compartment”
FP320.)
2) Torque wrench for roof rails
3) Wheel nut wrench
4) Towing hook (eye bolt)
5) Jack
6) Jack handle
7) Screwdriver
The maintenance tools are stored in the
under-floor storage compartment.
For the method to use the jack, refer to
“Flat Tires” FP452.
! Type B
s09ah1104
1) Torque wrench for roof rails
2) Wheel nut wrench
3) Jack
4) Jack handle
5) Towing hook (eye bolt)
6) Screwdriver
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance Tools
451
9
In Case of Emergency
(454,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
For the method to use the jack, refer to
“Flat Tires” FP452.
9-4. Flat Tires
s09ac
If you have a flat tire while driving, never
brake suddenly; keep driving straight
ahead while gradually reducing speed.
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
& Changing a Flat Tire
s09ac01
WARNING
. Use only the jack and the jack
handle provided with your vehi-
cle. The jack supplied with the
vehicle is designed only for chan-
ging a tire. Never get under the
vehicle while supporting the ve-
hicle with this jack.
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an
incline or a loose road surface.
The jack can come out of the
jacking point or sink into the
ground and this can result in
serious injury or death.
. Before jacking up the vehicle, be
sure that there are no occupants
or cargo on board.
. Do not jack up the vehicle with an
object on or underneath the jack.
The jack can be unstable and this
can result in a severe accident.
. Always turn off the engine before
raising the flat tire off the ground
using the jack. Never swing or
push the vehicle supported with
the jack. The jack can come out of
the jacking point due to a jolt and
this can result in serious injury or
death.
. All passengers must exit the
vehicle before you raise it with
the jack. Raising the vehicle with
someone inside of it could result
in serious injury or death.
. Do not start the vehicle while it is
supported by the jack. Doing so
could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION
Do not hit and bend the disc rotor
backing plate when removing and
installing the tire. A bent backing
plate may scrape against the disc
rotor and cause noise while the
vehicle is in motion.
Flat Tires
452
(455,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
NOTE
Contact a SUBARU dealer when jacking
up the vehicle using a garage jack.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake and shift the
select lever in the “P” (Park) position.
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and
unload all occupants and luggage from the
vehicle.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.
5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
wheel nut wrench.
The tools and the spare tire are stored
under the floor of the trunk (Legacy) or the
cargo area (Outback). Refer to “Mainte-
nance Tools” FP449.
NOTE
. Make sure that the jack is well
lubricated before using it.
. To take out the tools and spare tire,
store the cargo area cover to the
original position and open the under-
floor storage. Refer to “Under-Floor
Storage Compartment” FP320.
6. Take out the under-floor storage com-
partment and turn the attaching bolt
counterclockwise, then take the spare tire
out.
NOTE
Carefully read “Temporary Spare Tire”
FP448 and strictly follow the instruc-
tions.
1) Notch
2) Valve hole
7. If your vehicle has wheel covers, insert
a flat-head screwdriver into the notch on
the opposite side of the valve hole and pry
the wheel cover to remove it.
– CONTINUED –
Flat Tires
453
9
In Case of Emergency
(456,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
8. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel
nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
9. Place the jack under the side sill at the
front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat
tire.
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
10. Insert the jack handle into the hole of
the wheel nut wrench.
11. Insert the jack handle into the jack-
screw, and turn the handle until the tire
clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
higher than necessary.
12. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat
tire.
Flat Tires
454
(457,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
13. Before putting the spare tire on, clean
the mounting surface of the wheel and hub
with a cloth.
14. Put on the spare tire. Replace the
wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts when the spare tire is
installed. This could cause the nuts
to become loose and lead to an
accident.
15. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
to lower the vehicle.
16. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely
tighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque, following the tightening order in the
illustration.
For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer
to “Tires” FP536. Never use your foot on
the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension
on the wrench because you may exceed
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut
torque checked at the nearest automotive
service facility.
1) Support holder
17. Store the flat tire in the spare tire
compartment. Install with the support
holder facing upward and secure the flat
tire by firmly tightening the attaching bolt.
NOTE
If you cannot fix the flat tire firmly, try
turning the support holder upside
down.
18. Store the jack, jack handle and wheel
nut wrench in their storage locations.
– CONTINUED –
Flat Tires
455
9
In Case of Emergency
(458,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
WARNING
Never place a tire or tire changing
tools in the passenger compartment
after changing wheels. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in
the proper place.
& Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec.
Models)
s09ac02
Low tire pressure warning light
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with the warning message
indicated by sending a signal from a
sensor that is installed in each wheel when
tire pressure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven.
Also, this system may not react immedi-
ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example, a blow-out caused by running
over a sharp object).
WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead,
perform the following procedure.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and ser-
ious personal injury could occur.
(1) Keep driving straight ahead
while gradually reducing
speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a
safe place.
(3) Check the pressure for all four
tires and adjust the pressure
to the COLD tire pressure
shown on the vehicle placard
on the door pillar on the
driver’s side.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may have signifi-
cant damage and a fast leak that
causes the tire to lose air rapidly.
If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low
tire pressure warning light will
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
This indicates the TPMS is unable
to monitor all four road wheels.
Contact your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible for tire and
sensor replacement and/or sys-
tem resetting.
. When a tire is repaired with liquid
sealant, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not
operate properly. If a liquid sea-
lant is used, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer or other qualified
service shop as soon as possi-
ble. Make sure to replace the tire
pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the
tire. You may reuse the wheel if
there is no damage to it and if the
sealant residue is properly
cleaned off.
Flat Tires
456
(459,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
If the light illuminates steadily
after blinking for approximately
one minute, promptly contact a
SUBARU dealer to have the sys-
tem inspected.
& TPMS Screen (U.S.-Spec.
Models)
s09ac05
This screen displays each tire pressure.
Refer to “Basic Screens” FP205.
9-5. Jump Starting
s09ad
WARNING
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
Do not let it come in contact with
the eyes, skin, clothing or the
vehicle.
If battery fluid gets on you, thor-
oughly flush the exposed area
with water immediately. Get med-
ical help if the fluid has entered
your eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and obtain immediate medical
help.
Keep everyone including chil-
dren away from the battery.
. The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is
brought near it. Do not smoke or
light a match while jump starting.
. Never attempt jump starting if the
discharged battery is frozen. It
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
. Whenever working on or around a
battery, always wear suitable eye
protectors, and remove metal
objects such as rings, bands or
other metal jewelry.
. Be sure the jumper cables and
clamps on them do not have
loose or missing insulation.
. Do not jump start unless cables in
suitable condition are available.
. A running engine can be danger-
ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away
from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
Removing rings, watches and
ties is advisable.
. Jump starting is dangerous if it is
done incorrectly. If you are un-
sure about the proper procedure
for jump starting, consult a com-
petent mechanic.
When your vehicle does not start due to a
run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
may be jump started by connecting your
battery to another battery (called the
booster battery) with jumper cables.
– CONTINUED –
Jump Starting
457
9
In Case of Emergency
(460,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& How to Jump Start
s09ad01
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
volts and the negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
the sequence illustrated.
Jump Starting
458
(461,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
A) Booster battery
B) Strut mounting nut
1) Connect one jumper cable to the positive
(+) terminal on the discharged battery.
2) Connect the other end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
booster battery.
3) Connect one end of the other cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the booster
battery.
4) Connect the other end of the cable to the
strut mounting nut.
Make sure that the cables are not near any
moving parts and that the cable clamps are
not in contact with any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
Jump Starting
459
9
In Case of Emergency
(462,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
9-6. Engine Overheating
s09ae
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radiator
cap until the engine has been shut
off and has fully cooled down. When
the engine is hot, the coolant is
under pressure. Removing the cap
while the engine is still hot could
release a spray of boiling hot cool-
ant, which could burn you very
seriously.
CAUTION
If the engine overheats, the engine
speed or the vehicle speed may be
reduced. Stop the vehicle in a safe
place immediately.
& If Steam Is Coming from the
Engine Compartment
s09ae01
Turn off the engine and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down.
& If No Steam Is Coming from
the Engine Compartment
s09ae02
NOTE
For details about how to check the
coolant level or how to add coolant,
refer to “Engine Coolant” FP495.
1. Keep the engine running at idling
speed.
2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine
compartment. Refer to “Engine Hood”
FP487.
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If
the fan is not turning, immediately turn off
the engine and contact your authorized
dealer for repair.
3. After the engine coolant temperature
has dropped, turn off the engine.
If the temperature gauge stays in the
overheated zone, turn off the engine.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
check the coolant level in the reserve tank.
If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. Then
remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator
with coolant.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-
clockwise slowly without pressing down
until it stops. Release the pressure from
the radiator. After the pressure has been
fully released, remove the cap by pressing
down and turning it.
Engine Overheating
460
(463,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
9-7. Towing
s09af
WARNING
Never tow AWD vehicles with the
front wheels raised off the ground
while the rear wheels are on the
ground, or with the rear wheels
raised off the ground while the front
wheels are on the ground. This will
cause the vehicle to spin away due
to the operation or deterioration of
the center differential.
If towing is necessary, SUBARU recom-
mends it be done by your SUBARU dealer
or a commercial towing service.
& Towing Hook and Tie-Down
Hooks/Holes
s09af01
The towing hooks should be used only in
an emergency.
A towing hook is supplied with Outback
only. Legacy is not supplied with a towing
hook (the towing hook can be purchased at
a SUBARU dealer). On Legacy, the towing
access cover is on the rear bumper only.
SUBARU recommends towing be done
by your SUBARU dealer or a commer-
cial towing service.
CAUTION
. Use only the specified towing
hook and tie-down hooks/holes.
Never use suspension parts or
other parts of the body for towing
or tie-down purposes.
. Never use the tie-down hole clo-
sest to the muffler under the
vehicle for towing purposes.
Front towing hook (Outback):
1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hook,
wheel nut wrench and jack handle from the
under-floor storage compartment.
2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-head
screwdriver into the cutout of the cover and
pry open the cover.
3. Screw the towing hook into the
– CONTINUED –
Towing
461
9
In Case of Emergency
(464,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
threaded hole until the threads can no
longer be seen.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely using
the jack handle and wheel nut wrench.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the under-floor
storage compartment.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook for
purposes other than towing your
vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the SRS airbag
system in a frontal collision.
CAUTION
To prevent deformation to the bum-
per and the towing hook, do not
apply excessive load to the towing
hook.
Rear towing hook:
1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hook,
wheel nut wrench and jack handle from the
under-floor storage compartment.
Legacy
Outback
2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper
using a screwdriver, and you will find a
threaded hole for attaching the towing
hook.
3. Screw the towing hook into the
Towing
462
(465,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
threaded hole until its thread can no longer
be seen.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely using
the jack handle and wheel nut wrench.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the under-floor
storage compartment.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook for
purposes other than towing your
vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the fuel pump
shut off function when the vehi-
cle is struck from behind.
CAUTION
To prevent deformation to the bum-
per and the towing hook, do not
apply excessive load to the towing
hook.
Front tie-down hooks:
The front tie-down hooks are located
between each of the front tires and the
front bumper.
Front Tie-down Hooks are for tying down
the vehicle. They are not for towing.
Rear tie-down holes:
1) Rear tie-down hole
The rear tie-down holes are located near
each of the jack-up reinforcements.
There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.
To use the rear tie-down holes, remove the
– CONTINUED –
Towing
463
9
In Case of Emergency
(466,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
plugs. After using the rear tie-down holes,
return the plugs to their original places.
WARNING
Use the rear tie-down holes only for
downward anchoring. If they are
used to anchor the vehicle in any
other direction, cables may slip out
of the holes, possibly causing a
dangerous situation.
& Using a Flat-Bed Truck
s09af02
This is the best way to transport your
vehicle. Use the following procedures to
ensure safe transportation.
1. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position.
2. Apply the parking brake firmly.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier
properly with safety chains. Each safety
chain should be equally tightened and care
must be taken not to pull the chains so
tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
CAUTION
Transport by flat-bed truck may
cause the headlights to become
misaligned. In such a case, have
the headlight alignment checked by
a SUBARU dealer after transporting
the vehicle by flat-bed truck.
& Towing with All Wheels on the
Ground
s09af03
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while
the vehicle is being towed be-
cause the steering wheel and the
direction of the wheels will be
locked.
. Remember that the brake booster
and power steering do not func-
tion when the engine is not run-
ning. Because the engine is
turned off, it will take greater
effort to operate the brake pedal
and steering wheel.
CAUTION
. If transmission failure occurs,
transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
. Sometime damaged vehicles can-
not be towed because of their
damaged condition. In that case,
use a flat-bed truck for transpor-
tation.
. The traveling speed must be
limited to less than 20 mph (32
km/h) and the traveling distance
to less than 31 miles (50 km). For
greater speeds and distances,
Towing
464
(467,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
. Use a flat-bed truck if there are
long distance downgrades or
steep slopes. However, do not
apply the brake pedal for a long
time because the engine braking
will not work while towing. Doing
so could overheat the brake.
. Drive carefully and do not make
an impact on the towing rope by
suddenly starting.
. Use a specific towing rope for
towing. If wire ropes and metal
chains are needed to be used for
towing, wrap the contact portion
of the bumper with cloth to pro-
tect it from damage.
1. Release the parking brake and put the
transmission in neutral.
2. The ignition switch should be in the
“ON” position while the vehicle is being
towed.
3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
9-8. Electronic Parking Brake
– If the Electronic Parking
Brake Cannot Be Released
s09an
Contact your SUBARU dealer and have
your SUBARU dealer release the electro-
nic parking brake.
9-9. Access Key Fob – If Ac-
cess Key Fob Does Not Op-
erate Properly
s09ap
CAUTION
Keep metallic objects, magnetic
sources and signal transmitters
away from the area between the
access key fob and the push-button
ignition switch. They may interfere
with the communication between
the access key fob and the push-
button ignition switch.
The following functions may be inoperable
because of strong radio signals in the
surrounding area or a low battery condition
of the access key fob.
. Locking/unlocking doors including rear
gate
. Switching power status
. Starting engine
In such cases, perform the following
procedure. When the battery of the access
key fob is discharged, replace it with a new
one. Refer to “Replacing Battery of Access
Key Fob” FP526.
– CONTINUED –
Electronic Parking Brake – If the Electronic Parking Brake Cannot Be Released
465
9
In Case of Emergency
(468,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Locking and Unlocking
s09ap01
1) Release button
2) Emergency key
While pressing the release button of the
access key fob, take out the emergency
key.
Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the
emergency key in the procedure described
in “Locking and Unlocking from the Out-
side” FP137.
NOTE
After locking or unlocking, be sure to
attach the emergency key back to the
access key fob.
& Switching Power Status
s09ap02
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Hold the access key fob with the
buttons facing you, and touch the push-
button ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key fob and the vehicle is com-
pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the
same time, the status of the push-button
ignition switch changes to either of the
following.
. When the keyless access with push-
button start system is deactivated:
“ACC”
. Under other conditions: “ON”
5. When the keyless access with push-
button start system is deactivated, press
the push-button ignition switch with the
brake pedal released. The status of the
push-button ignition switch then changes
to “ON”.
NOTE
If the power does not switch even
though the above procedure was fol-
lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
& Starting Engine
s09ap03
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
Access Key Fob – If Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly
466
(469,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
4. Hold the access key fob with the
buttons facing you, and touch the push-
button ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key fob and the vehicle is com-
pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the
same time, the push-button ignition switch
turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position.
5. After the push-button ignition switch
turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position, while
depressing the brake pedal, press the
push-button ignition switch.
NOTE
If the engine does not start even though
the above procedure was followed
precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.
9-10. Rear Gate (Outback) – If
the Rear Gate Cannot Be
Opened
s09au
In the event that you cannot open the rear
gate by pressing the rear gate opener
button (all models) or using the power rear
gate (if equipped), you can open it from
inside the cargo area.
1. Remove the access cover at the
bottom-center of the rear gate trim using
flat-head screwdriver.
CAUTION
Never operate the rear gate lock
release lever with your fingers be-
cause doing so may cause an injury.
Always use a flat-head screwdriver
or a similar tool.
Models without power rear gate
1) Rear gate lock release lever
– CONTINUED –
Rear Gate (Outback) – If the Rear Gate Cannot Be Opened
467
9
In Case of Emergency
(470,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Models with power rear gate
1) Rear gate lock release lever
2. Turn the rear gate lock release lever to
the right position using a flat-head screw-
driver or a similar tool. Then the rear gate
will open.
9-11. Malfunctions of the
Center Information Display
s09av
If the following screens are displayed,
temporary errors or malfunctions may
occur in the center information display.
If they are only temporary errors, the
following procedure may help to eliminate
them.
Shutting down the screen
Freezing the screen
Blacking out the screen
Malfunctions of the Center Information Display
468
(471,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Error A
Error B
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn the ignition switch once to the
“LOCK/OFF” position, then start the en-
gine.
1) Volume button (dual 7.0-inch display
models)
1) Volume button (11.6-inch display models)
3. If the center information display cannot
be recovered even though the engine has
been restarted, press and hold the volume
button for more than 10 seconds. The
center information display will start up
again.
4. If the center information display is not
recovered by restarting it, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
Malfunctions of the Center Information Display
469
9
In Case of Emergency
(472,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
9-12. If Your Vehicle Is In-
volved in an Accident
s09ar
& To Restart the Engine When
Involved in an Accident
s09ar02
CAUTION
If your vehicle is involved in an
accident, be sure to inspect the
ground under the vehicle before
restarting the engine. If you find that
fuel has leaked on the ground, do
not try to restart the engine. The fuel
system has been damaged and is in
need of repair. Immediately contact
the nearest automotive service facil-
ity. We recommend that you consult
your SUBARU dealer.
Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off
system. When the vehicle sustains an
impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump
shut off system stops supplying the fuel in
order to minimize fuel leakage.
Perform the following procedures to restart
the engine after the system is activated.
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
or “ACC” position.
2. Restart the engine.
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
2. Restart the engine.
& Automatic Door Locking/Un-
locking Operation When In-
volved in an Accident
s09ar03
When the automatic door locking/unlock-
ing function is ON, all the doors will be
locked automatically while driving. For
further details, refer to “Automatic Door
Locking/Unlocking” FP140.
When the vehicle sustains a strong impact
which may trigger the airbags to deploy,
the door locks may be unlocked automa-
tically to enable emergency escape. Gen-
erally, an impact sustained from a rear end
collision does not trigger the airbags to
deploy. However if the impact is strong
enough to deploy the airbags, it can also
trigger the unlocking function.
Under such circumstance, the automatic
door locking/unlocking function will be
suspended and the doors will remain
unlocked.
Confirm the safety of the surroundings first
and carry out the following to retrieve the
automatic door locking/unlocking function.
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “OFF” position.
2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ON” position.
NOTE
Depending on the severity of the im-
pact, the emergency unlocking may not
function.
CAUTION
If the following occur, there may be a
malfunction in the system.
Have the system inspected by a
SUBARU dealer.
. The doors unlock automatically
while driving.
. With all doors shut, the doors
unlock when pressing the lock
side of the power door locking
switch.
If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an Accident
470
(473,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. The automatic door locking/un-
locking function does not oper-
ate.
If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an Accident
471
9
In Case of Emergency
(474,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(475,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
s10
10-1. Exterior Care ................................................. 474
Washing ............................................................. 474
Waxing and Polishing ......................................... 475
Cleaning Alloy Wheels ........................................475
10-2. Corrosion Protection .................................... 476
Most Common Causes of Corrosion....................476
To Help Prevent Corrosion..................................476
10-3. Cleaning the Interior .....................................477
Seat Fabric Material ........................................... 477
Leather Seat Materials........................................ 477
Synthetic Leather Upholstery ............................. 478
Instrument Panel, Console Panel, Switches,
Combination Meter, and Other Plastic
Surface ............................................................ 478
Center Information Display ................................. 478
Appearance Care
10
Appearance Care
(476,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
10-1. Exterior Care
s10aa
& Washing
s10aa01
CAUTION
. When washing the vehicle, the
brakes may get wet. As a result,
the brake stopping distance will
be longer. To dry the brakes, drive
the vehicle at a safe speed while
lightly pressing the brake pedal
to heat up the brakes.
. Do not wash the engine compart-
ment and areas adjacent to it. If
water enters the engine air intake
or electrical parts, it will cause
engine trouble or a malfunction
of the power steering.
. When washing inner fenders, un-
derbody, bumpers and protrud-
ing objects such as exhaust
pipes and exhaust finishers, be
careful to prevent injuries from
contacting sharp ends.
. Do not use any organic solvents
when washing the surface of the
bulb assembly cover. However, if
a detergent with organic solvents
is used to wash the cover sur-
face, completely rinse off the
detergent with water. Otherwise,
the cover surface may be da-
maged.
. Outback: Since your vehicle is
equipped with a rear wiper, auto-
matic car-wash brushes could
become tangled around it, dama-
ging the wiper arm and other
components. Ask the automatic
car-wash operator not to let the
brushes touch the wiper arm or to
fix the wiper arm on the rear
window glass with adhesive tape
before operating the machine.
NOTE
When having your vehicle washed in an
automatic car wash, make sure before-
hand that the car wash is of suitable
type.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the
vehicle at least once a month to avoid
contamination by road grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the
vehicle with hot water and in direct sun-
light.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap,
and bird droppings should be washed off
by using a light detergent, as required. If
you use a light detergent, make certain
that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
strong soap or chemical detergents. All
cleaning agents should be promptly
flushed from the surface and not allowed
to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
remaining water off with a chamois or soft
cloth. Wear rubber gloves and use a hand
brush when washing down underbody,
inner fenders and suspension to effec-
tively remove mud and dirt off.
! Washing the underbody
s10aa0101
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-
rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-
derbody components, such as the exhaust
system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables,
floor pan and fenders, and suspension.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside
of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water
at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful
effects of such agents.
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
components may accelerate their corro-
sion.
After driving off-road or on muddy or sandy
roads, wash the mud and sand off the
underbody.
Carefully flush the suspension and axle
parts, as they are particularly prone to mud
Exterior Care
474
(477,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
and sand buildup. Do not use a sharp-
edged tool to remove caked mud.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to damage brake
hoses, sensor harnesses, and
other parts when washing sus-
pension components.
. Be careful not to flush the engine
bottom for a long time. It may
cause damage of some electrical
parts.
! Using a warm water washer
s10aa0102
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)
or more between the washer nozzle and
the vehicle.
. Do not wash the same area continu-
ously.
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash
by hand. Some warm water washers are of
the high temperature, high pressure type,
and they can damage or deform the resin
parts such as mouldings, or cause water to
leak into the vehicle.
& Waxing and Polishing
s10aa02
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing and polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and
apply them according to the manufac-
turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when
the painted surface is cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of
the original luster and also quickens the
deterioration of the surface. It is recom-
mended that a coat of wax be applied at
least once a month, or whenever the
surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has dimin-
ished to the point where the luster or tone
cannot be restored, lightly polish the sur-
face with a fine-grained compound. Never
polish just the affected area, but include
the surrounding area as well. Always
polish in only one direction. A No. 2000
grain compound is recommended. Never
use a coarse-grained compound. Coarser
grained compounds have a smaller grain-
size number and could damage the paint.
After polishing with a compound, coat with
wax to restore the original luster. Frequent
polishing with a compound or an incorrect
polishing technique will result in removing
the paint layer and exposing the under-
coat. When in doubt, it is always best to
contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto
paint specialist.
CAUTION
Do not use any agents with organic
solvents on the surface of the bulb
assembly cover. However, if a polish
or wax with organic solvents is
applied to the cover surface, com-
pletely wipe off the polish or wax.
Otherwise, the cover surface may be
damaged.
NOTE
Be careful not to block the windshield
washer nozzles with wax when waxing
the vehicle.
& Cleaning Alloy Wheels
s10aa04
. Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean of
any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on
too long, it may be difficult to clean off.
. Do not use soap containing grit to clean
the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
washing device.
– CONTINUED –
Exterior Care
475
10
Appearance Care
(478,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. Clean the vehicle (including the alloy
wheels) with water as soon as possible
when it has been splashed with sea water,
exposed to sea breezes, or driven on
roads treated with salt or other agents.
10-2. Corrosion Protection
s10ab
Your SUBARU has been designed and
built to resist corrosion. Special materials
and protective finishes have been used on
most parts of the vehicle to help maintain
fine appearance, strength, and reliable
operation.
& Most Common Causes of
Corrosion
s10ab01
The most common causes of corrosion
are:
. The accumulation of moisture retaining
dirt and debris in body panel sections,
cavities, and other areas.
. Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone chips
or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle
when:
. It is exposed to road salt or dust control
chemicals, or used in coastal areas where
there is more salt in the air, or in areas
where there is considerable industrial
pollution.
. It is driven in areas of high humidity,
especially when temperatures range just
above freezing.
. Dampness in certain parts of the
vehicle remains for a long time, even
though other parts of the vehicle may be
dry.
. High temperatures will cause corrosion
to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry
quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.
& To Help Prevent Corrosion
s10ab02
Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent
corrosion of the body and suspension
components. Also, wash the vehicle
promptly after driving on any of the
following surfaces.
. Roads that have been salted to prevent
them from freezing in winter
. Mud, sand, or gravel
. Coastal roads
After the winter has ended, it is recom-
mended that the underbody be given a
very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the
condition of underbody components, such
as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
lines, brake cables, suspension, steering
system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
them are found to be rusted, they should
be given an appropriate rust prevention
treatment or should be replaced. Contact
your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind
Corrosion Protection
476
(479,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
of maintenance and treatment if you need
assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
soon as you find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water
and dirt accumulation under the floor mats
because that could cause corrosion. Oc-
casionally check under the mats to make
sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated gar-
age. In such a garage, corrosion can be
caused by dampness. If you wash the
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into
the garage when wet or covered with
snow, that can cause dampness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
and/or in areas where road salts and other
corrosive materials are used, the door
hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood
latch should be inspected and lubricated
periodically.
10-3. Cleaning the Interior
s10ac
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use
organic solvents.)
& Seat Fabric Material
s10ac01
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung
cloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If
the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution
of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry
thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a
commercially available fabric cleaner.
Use the cleaner on a hidden place and
make sure it does not affect the fabric
adversely. Use the cleaner according to its
instructions.
CAUTION
When cleaning the seat, do not use
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
materials. Doing so could damage
the surface and cause the color to
deteriorate.
& Leather Seat Materials
s10ac02
The leather used by SUBARU is a high
quality natural product which will retain its
distinctive appearance and feel for many
years with proper care.
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the
surface can cause leather to become
brittle and wear prematurely. To maintain
its resiliency, leather should be cleaned
monthly or whenever it becomes soiled.
Before cleaning leather upholstery, va-
cuum it to remove dust. Use a soft and
lint-free cloth dampened with lukewarm
water and mild soap, taking care not to
soak the leather or allow water to pene-
trate the stitched seams. Use a gentle
circular motion while cleaning the leather -
do not rub or apply extreme pressure.
Wipe the leather again with another clean,
slightly damp cloth to remove soap residue
and dry with a soft cloth.
Minor surface blemishes or difficult dirt
spots may be treated with a commercial
leather spray. Never use alcohol, cleaning
solvents, leather oils, varnishes or
polishes on your leather as it will dry out
the leather finish.
– CONTINUED –
Cleaning the Interior
477
10
Appearance Care
(480,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
If your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and headrests be covered,
or the windows shaded, to prevent fading
or shrinkage.
You will discover that each leather seat
section will develop soft folds or wrinkles,
which is characteristic of genuine leather.
& Synthetic Leather Upholstery
s10ac03
The synthetic leather material used on the
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
or detergent and water, after first vacuum-
ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
leather materials may be used when
necessary.
CAUTION
Strong cleaning agents such as
solvents, paint thinners, window
cleaner or gasoline must never be
used on leather or synthetic interior
materials. Doing so could damage
the surface and cause the color to
deteriorate.
& Instrument Panel, Console
Panel, Switches, Combina-
tion Meter, and Other Plastic
Surface
s10ac04
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the
instrument panel, center console, combi-
nation meter panel, and switches.
CAUTION
. Do not use organic solvents such
as paint thinners or gasoline, or
strong cleaning agents that con-
tain those solvents. Doing so
could damage the surface and
cause the color to deteriorate.
. Do not use chemical solvents that
contain silicone on the vehicle
audio system, electrical compo-
nents of the air-conditioner or
any switches. If silicone adheres
to these parts, it may cause
damage to electrical compo-
nents.
& Center Information Display
s10ac11
To clean the center information display,
wipe it with a silicone cloth or with a soft
cloth. If the display(s) is/are extremely
dirty, clean it with a soft cloth moistened
with neutral detergent then carefully wipe
off any remaining detergent.
CAUTION
. Do not spray neutral detergent
directly onto the display(s).
Doing so could damage the moni-
tor’s components.
. Do not wipe the display(s) with a
hard cloth. Doing so could
scratch the monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that
contains thinner, gasoline, or
any other volatile substance.
Such cleaning fluid could erase
the lettering on the switches on
the display(s).
Cleaning the Interior
478
(481,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(482,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(483,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
s11
11-1. Maintenance Schedule ................................. 483
11-2. Maintenance Precautions ............................. 483
Before Checking or Servicing in the Engine
Compartment.................................................... 484
When Checking or Servicing in the Engine
Compartment.................................................... 485
When Checking or Servicing in the Engine
Compartment While the Engine Is Running .......485
11-3. Maintenance Tips.......................................... 485
Removing and Reinstalling Clips ........................ 485
11-4. Engine Hood.................................................. 487
11-5. Engine Compartment Overview ................... 489
2.5 L Models ....................................................... 489
2.4 L Models ....................................................... 490
11-6. Engine Oil ...................................................... 491
Engine Oil Consumption ..................................... 491
Checking the Oil Level........................................ 491
Changing the Oil and Oil Filter ............................493
Recommended Grade and Viscosity.................... 493
Synthetic Oil....................................................... 493
11-7. Cooling System............................................. 494
Cooling Fan, Hose and Connections ................... 494
Engine Coolant................................................... 495
11-8. Air Cleaner Element...................................... 496
Replacing the Air Cleaner Element......................496
11-9. Spark Plugs ................................................... 498
Recommended Spark Plugs ................................ 498
11-10. Drive Belts ................................................... 499
11-11. Continuously Variable Transmission
Fluid ............................................................... 499
11-12. Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear
Differential Gear Oil ......................................499
Recommended Grade and Viscosity ................... 499
11-13. Brake Fluid ...................................................500
Checking the Fluid Level .................................... 500
Recommended Brake Fluid................................. 500
11-14. Brake Booster ..............................................501
11-15. Brake Pedal ..................................................501
11-16. Replacement of Brake Pad .........................501
11-17. Tires and Wheels .........................................502
Types of Tires .................................................... 502
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(U.S.-Spec. Models) .......................................... 502
Tire Inspection ................................................... 504
Tire Pressures and Wear .................................... 504
Wheel Balance ................................................... 506
Wear Indicators.................................................. 507
Rotational Direction of Tires............................... 507
Tire Rotation ...................................................... 508
Tire Replacement ............................................... 509
Wheel Replacement............................................ 510
11-18. Alloy Wheels ................................................510
11-19. Windshield Washer Fluid ............................510
11-20. Replacement of Wiper Blades ....................511
Windshield Wiper Blade Assembly ..................... 512
Window Wiper Blade Rubber .............................. 513
Rear Window Wiper Blade Assembly
(Outback) ......................................................... 514
Rear Window Wiper Blade Rubber (Outback) ...... 514
11-21. Battery ..........................................................516
Maintenance and Service
11
Maintenance and Service
(484,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
11-22. Fuses ........................................................... 517
11-23. Installation of Accessories......................... 518
11-24. Replacing Bulbs.......................................... 518
Headlights .......................................................... 519
Front Turn Signal Light ....................................... 519
Rear Combination Lights .................................... 519
Backup Light ...................................................... 522
Dome Light......................................................... 523
Map Lights......................................................... 524
Door Step Light.................................................. 524
Cargo Area Light (Outback)................................ 524
Trunk Light (Legacy) .......................................... 524
Other Bulbs ....................................................... 525
11-25. Replacing Battery ........................................525
Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob................. 526
Replacing Battery of Transmitter ........................ 527
Maintenance and Service
(485,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
11-1. Maintenance Schedule
s11aa
U.S. models
The scheduled maintenance items re-
quired to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the “Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet.” For details, read the
separate “Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet.”
Canada models
The scheduled maintenance items re-
quired to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the “Warranty and Service
Booklet.” For details, read the separate
“Warranty and Service Booklet.”
Except for U.S. and Canada models
Some items of your vehicle are required to
be serviced at scheduled intervals. For
details about your maintenance schedule,
read the separate “Warranty and Main-
tenance Booklet.”
11-2. Maintenance Precau-
tions
s11ab
When maintenance and service are re-
quired, it is recommended that all work be
done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service by
yourself, you should familiarize yourself
with the information provided in this sec-
tion on general maintenance and service
for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could
cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-
tion. Any problems caused by improper
maintenance and service performed by
you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
WARNING
. Testing of an All-Wheel Drive
vehicle must NEVER be per-
formed on a single two-wheel
dynamometer or similar appara-
tus. Attempting to do so will
result in transmission damage
and in uncontrolled vehicle
movement and may cause an
accident or injuries to persons
nearby.
. Always select a safe area when
performing maintenance on your
vehicle.
. Always be very careful to avoid
injury when working on the vehi-
cle. Remember that some of the
materials in the vehicle may be
hazardous if improperly used or
handled, for example, battery
acid.
. Your vehicle should only be ser-
viced by persons fully competent
to do so. Serious personal injury
may result to persons not experi-
enced in servicing vehicles.
. Always use the proper tools and
make certain that they are well
maintained.
. Never get under the vehicle sup-
ported only by a jack. Always use
safety stands to support the
vehicle.
. Never keep the engine running in
a poorly ventilated area, such as
a garage or other closed areas.
. Do not smoke or allow open
flames around the fuel or battery.
This will cause a fire.
. Because the fuel system is under
pressure, replacement of the fuel
filter should be performed only
by your SUBARU dealer.
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance Schedule
483
11
Maintenance and Service
(486,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. Wear adequate eye protection to
guard against getting oil or fluids
in your eyes. If something does
get in your eyes, thoroughly
wash them out with clean water.
. Do not tamper with the wiring of
the SRS airbag system or seat-
belt pretensioner system, or at-
tempt to take its connectors
apart, as that may activate the
system or it can render it inop-
erative. NEVER use a circuit tes-
ter for these wiring. If your SRS
airbag or seatbelt pretensioner
needs service, consult your near-
est SUBARU dealer.
. Check the inside of the engine
compartment to see if there are
any cloths and tools left. If they
are left inside, they may be a
cause of malfunction and fire.
NOTE
SUBARU does not endorse the use of
non-SUBARU approved flushing sys-
tems and strongly advises against
performing these services on a
SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap-
proved flushing systems use chemi-
cals and/or solvents which have not
been tested or approved by SUBARU.
SUBARU warranties do not cover any
part of the vehicle which is damaged by
adding or applying chemicals and/or
solvents other than those approved or
recommended by SUBARU.
& Before Checking or Servicing
in the Engine Compartment
s11ab01
WARNING
. Always stop the engine and apply
the parking brake to prevent the
vehicle from moving.
. Always let the engine cool down.
Engine parts become very hot
when the engine is running and
remain hot for some time after the
engine is stopped.
. Do not spill engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components.
This may cause a fire.
. When the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position, the cooling fan
may operate suddenly even when
the engine is stopped. If your
body or clothes come into con-
tact with a rotating fan, that could
result in serious injury. To avoid
risk of injury, perform the follow-
ing precautions.
– Models with push-button start
system:
Always turn the push-button
ignition switch to the “OFF”
position and confirm that the
operation indicator on the
switch is turned off. Then take
the access key fob out from
the vehicle.
– Models without push-button
start system:
Always remove the key from
the ignition switch.
. Before performing any servicing
on a vehicle equipped with a
remote engine start system tem-
porarily place that system in the
service mode to prevent it from
unexpectedly starting the engine.
Maintenance Precautions
484
(487,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& When Checking or Servicing
in the Engine Compartment
s11ab03
CAUTION
. Do not contact the belt cover
while checking the components
in the engine compartment.
Doing so may cause your hand
to slip off the belt cover and
result in an unexpected injury.
. Do not touch the oil filter until the
engine has cooled down comple-
tely. Doing so may result in a burn
or other injury. Note that the oil
filter becomes very hot when the
engine is running and remains
hot for some time after the engine
has stopped.
& When Checking or Servicing
in the Engine Compartment
While the Engine Is Running
s11ab02
WARNING
A running engine can be dangerous.
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from the cooling
fan, belts and any other moving
engine parts. Removing rings,
watches and ties is advisable.
11-3. Maintenance Tips
s11bi
Some clips and fender linings must be
removed before replacing the air cleaner
elements or specific bulbs.
& Removing and Reinstalling
Clips
s11bi01
! Removing clips
s11bi0101
There are several types of clips used for
your vehicle.
! Type A and D clips
s11bi010107
Type A clips
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance Tips
485
11
Maintenance and Service
(488,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Type D clips
1. Turn the clips counterclockwise using
a flat-head screwdriver until the center
portion of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the clips with a flat-head
screwdriver using leverage.
! Type B clips
s11bi010102
1. Pull out the center portion of the clip
using a flat-head screwdriver as shown in
the illustration.
2. Pull the protruded center portion to
remove the entire body of the clip.
! Type C clips
s11bi010103
1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a
Phillips screwdriver until the center portion
of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.
Maintenance Tips
486
(489,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Reinstalling clips
s11bi0102
Type A clips
Type B clips
Type C clips
Type D clips
Insert the clip without the center portion
first and then push the center portion of the
clip into the hole.
11-4. Engine Hood
s11ac
CAUTION
. Be extremely careful not to catch
fingers or other objects when
closing the engine hood.
. Do not push the hood forcibly to
close it. It could deform the metal.
. Be extremely careful opening the
engine hood when the wind is
strong. The engine hood could
close suddenly, possibly causing
injuries from slamming.
. Do not install accessories other
than genuine SUBARU parts to
the engine hood. If the engine
hood becomes too heavy, the
stay may not be able to support
holding it open.
. Check that the end of the hood
stay is inserted into the slot. If it is
not inserted properly, the hood
may drop and cause injury.
– CONTINUED –
Engine Hood
487
11
Maintenance and Service
(490,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
To open the hood:
1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
windshield, return them to their original
positions.
2. Pull the hood release knob under the
instrument panel.
3. Release the secondary hood lock by
moving the lever between the front grille
and the hood toward the left.
4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop
from its retainer and put the end of the
hood prop into the slot in the engine
compartment.
To close the hood:
1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the
hood prop from the slot in the engine
compartment and return the prop to its
retainer.
2. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-
mately 5.9 in (15 cm) above its closed
position and then let it drop.
3. After closing the hood, be sure the
hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it
from a slightly higher position.
WARNING
Always check that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in-
jury.
Engine Hood
488
(491,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
11-5. Engine Compartment Overview
s11ad
& 2.5 L Models
s11ad08
1) Brake fluid reservoir (page 500)
2) Main fuse box (page 517)
3) Battery (page 516)
4) Windshield washer tank (page 510)
5) Engine oil filler cap (page 491)
6) Engine coolant reservoir (page 495)
7) Radiator cap (page 495)
8) Engine oil filter (page 493)
9) Engine oil level gauge (page 491)
10) Air cleaner case (page 496)
– CONTINUED –
Engine Compartment Overview
489
11
Maintenance and Service
(492,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& 2.4 L Models
s11ad17
1) Brake fluid reservoir (page 500)
2) Main fuse box (page 517)
3) Battery (page 516)
4) Windshield washer tank (page 510)
5) Engine oil filler cap (page 491)
6) Engine coolant reservoir (page 495)
7) Radiator cap (page 495)
8) Engine oil filter (page 493)
9) Engine oil level gauge (page 491)
10) Air cleaner case (page 496)
Engine Compartment Overview
490
(493,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
11-6. Engine Oil
s11ae
CAUTION
. If the level gauge is not pulled out
easily, twist the level gauge right
and left, then pull it out. Other-
wise, you may be injured acci-
dentally straining yourself.
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and vis-
cosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
& Engine Oil Consumption
s11ae07
Some engine oil will be consumed while
driving. The rate of consumption can be
affected by such factors as transmission
type, driving style, terrain and tempera-
ture. Under the following conditions, oil
consumption can be increased and thus
require refilling between maintenance in-
tervals:
. When the engine is new and within the
break-in period
. When the engine oil is of lower quality
. When the incorrect oil viscosity is used
. When engine braking is employed
(repeatedly)
. When the engine is operated at high
engine speeds (for extended periods of
time)
. When the engine is operated under
heavy loads (for extended periods of time)
. When towing a trailer (Outback)
. When the engine idles for extended
periods of time
. When the vehicle is operated in stop
and go and/or heavy traffic situations
. When the vehicle is used under severe
thermal conditions
. When the vehicle accelerates and
decelerates frequently
Under these or similar conditions, you
should check your oil at least every 2nd
fuel fill-up and change your engine oil more
frequently. Different drivers in the same
car may experience different results. If
your oil consumption rate is greater than
expected, contact your authorized
SUBARU retailer who may perform a test
under controlled conditions.
& Checking the Oil Level
s11ae01
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine. If you check the oil level
just after stopping the engine, wait for at
least 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan before checking the level.
2.5 L models
1) Oil level gauge
2) Oil filler cap
3) Oil filter
– CONTINUED –
Engine Oil
491
11
Maintenance and Service
(494,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
2.4 L models
1) Oil level gauge
2) Oil filler cap
3) Oil filter
CAUTION
If the level gauge is not pulled out
easily, twist the level gauge right and
left, then pull it out. Otherwise, you
may be injured accidentally strain-
ing yourself.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
and insert it again.
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly
inserted until it stops.
2.5 L models
1) Full level
2) Low level
3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp
qt) from low level to full level
2.4 L models
1) Full level
2) Low level
3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp
qt) from low level to full level
4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.
5. Check the oil level on the gauge. If the
oil level is below the low level mark, add oil
so that the full level is reached.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to touch the engine
oil filter when removing the oil
filler cap. Doing so may result in a
burn, a pinched finger, or may
cause some other injury.
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and vis-
Engine Oil
492
(495,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
cosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
To add engine oil, remove the engine oil
filler cap and slowly pour engine oil
through the filler neck. After pouring oil
into the engine, you must use the level
gauge to confirm that the oil level is
correct.
NOTE
. To prevent overfilling the engine oil,
do not add any additional oil above the
full level when the engine is cold.
. After adding or changing the engine
oil, warm up the engine and stop it on a
level surface, then start the engine after
a lapse of 1 minute or more. Confirm
that the warning light has turned off
after the engine has started. Refer to
“Engine Low Oil Level Warning Indica-
tor” FP183.
& Changing the Oil and Oil Filter
s11ae02
Change the oil and oil filter according to
the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet.”
NOTE
. Changing the engine oil and oil filter
should be performed by a well-trained
expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for changing the engine oil and oil filter.
Fully trained mechanics are on standby
at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the
special tools, spare parts and recom-
mended oil for this work, and also, used
oils are properly disposed of.
. If performing oil replacement your-
self, observe the local regulations and
dispose of waste oil properly.
& Recommended Grade and
Viscosity
s11ae03
CAUTION
Use only engine oil with the recom-
mended grade and viscosity.
Refer to “Engine Oil” FP532.
NOTE
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects
fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity
provide better fuel economy. However,
in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is
required to properly lubricate the en-
gine.
& Synthetic Oil
s11ae05
You should use synthetic engine oil that
meets the same requirements given for
conventional engine oil. When using syn-
thetic oil, you must use oil of the same
classification, viscosity and grade shown
in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine
Oil” FP532. Also, you must follow the oil
and filter changing intervals shown in the
“Warranty and Maintenance booklet.”
NOTE
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity
noted in chapter 12 is the recom-
mended engine oil for optimum engine
performance. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
Engine Oil
493
11
Maintenance and Service
(496,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
11-7. Cooling System
s11af
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radiator
cap until the engine has been shut
off and has cooled down completely.
Since the coolant is under pressure,
you may suffer serious burns from a
spray of boiling hot coolant when
the cap is removed.
CAUTION
. Vehicles are filled at the factory
with SUBARU SUPER COOLANT
that does not require the first
change for 11 years/137,500
miles (11 years/220,000 km). This
coolant should not be mixed with
any other brand or type of cool-
ant during this period. Mixing
with a different coolant will re-
duce the life of the coolant.
Should it be necessary to top off
the coolant for any reason, use
only SUBARU SUPER COOLANT.
If SUBARU SUPER COOLANT is
diluted with another brand or
type, the maintenance interval is
shortened to that of the mixing
coolant.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
& Cooling Fan, Hose and Con-
nections
s11af03
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
fan which is thermostatically controlled to
operate when the engine coolant reaches
a specific temperature.
1) Normal operating range
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
even when the engine coolant tempera-
ture gauge exceeds the normal operating
range, the cooling fan circuit may be
defective. Refer to “Engine Coolant Tem-
perature Gauge” FP175.
Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
Refer to “Fuses” FP517 and “Fuses and
Circuits” FP538. If the fuse is not blown,
have the cooling system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is necessary,
there may be a leak in the engine cooling
system. It is recommended that the cooling
system and connections be checked for
leaks, damage, or looseness.
Cooling System
494
(497,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Engine Coolant
s11af02
! Checking the coolant level
s11af0201
1) “FULL” level mark
2) “LOW” level mark
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
1. Check the coolant level on the outside
of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the
“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
coolant up to just below the filler neck as
shown in the following illustration.
1) Fill up to this level.
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the
radiator, reinstall the cap and check that
the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap
are in the proper position.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
! Changing the coolant
s11af0202
It may be difficult to change the coolant.
Have the coolant changed by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
The coolant should be changed according
to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet.”
Cooling System
495
11
Maintenance and Service
(498,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
11-8. Air Cleaner Element
s11ag
WARNING
Do not operate the engine with the
air cleaner element removed. The air
cleaner element not only filters in-
take air but also stops flames if the
engine backfires. If the air cleaner
element is not installed when the
engine backfires, you could be
burned.
CAUTION
When replacing the air cleaner ele-
ment, use a genuine SUBARU air
cleaner element. If it is not used,
there is the possibility of causing a
negative effect to the engine.
The air cleaner element functions as a filter
screen. When the element is perforated or
removed, engine wear will be excessive
and engine life shortened.
The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is
unnecessary to clean or wash the element.
& Replacing the Air Cleaner
Element
s11ag01
Replace the air cleaner element according
to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet.” Under
extremely dusty conditions, replace it
more frequently. It is recommended that
you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
! 2.5 L models
s11ag0111
1) Clips
1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
cleaner case (rear).
2. Open the air cleaner case and pull the
cover rearward while lifting it up.
3. Remove the air cleaner element.
CAUTION
If the inside of the air cleaner case is
extremely soiled (for example, by
sand), contact a SUBARU dealer and
have the air cleaner case cleaned.
4. If you find large foreign objects such as
leaves inside the air cleaner case, remove
the foreign objects.
Air Cleaner Element
496
(499,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
5. Install a new air cleaner element in the
way the longitudinal side and the trans-
verse side face as shown in the illustration.
6. To install the air cleaner case (rear),
insert the three projections on the air
cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the air
cleaner case (front).
7. Install in the reverse order of removal.
! 2.4 L models
s11ag0112
1) Clips
1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
cleaner case (rear).
2. Open the air cleaner case and pull the
cover rearward while lifting it up.
3. Remove the air cleaner element.
CAUTION
If the inside of the air cleaner case is
extremely soiled (for example, by
sand), contact a SUBARU dealer and
have the air cleaner case cleaned.
4. If you find large foreign objects such as
leaves inside the air cleaner case, remove
the foreign objects.
– CONTINUED –
Air Cleaner Element
497
11
Maintenance and Service
(500,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
5. Install a new air cleaner element in the
way the longitudinal side and the trans-
verse side face as shown in the illustration.
6. To install the air cleaner case (rear),
insert the three projections on the air
cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the air
cleaner case (front).
7. Install the removed parts in the reverse
order of removal.
11-9. Spark Plugs
s11ah
It may be difficult to replace the spark
plugs. It is recommended that you have the
spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced
according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let.”
& Recommended Spark Plugs
s11ah01
Refer to “Electrical System” FP536.
Spark Plugs
498
(501,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
11-10. Drive Belts
s11ai
It is unnecessary to check the deflection of
the drive belt periodically because your
engine is equipped with an automatic belt
tension adjuster. However, replacement of
the belt should be done according to the
maintenance schedule in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet.” Consult your
SUBARU dealer for replacement.
If the belt is loose, cracked or worn,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
11-11. Continuously Variable
Transmission Fluid
s11ay
There is no fluid level gauge. It is un-
necessary to check the continuously vari-
able transmission fluid level. However, if
necessary, consult your SUBARU dealer
for inspection.
11-12. Front Differential Gear
Oil and Rear Differential Gear
Oil
s11bl
It is not necessary to check the gear oil
level. Check that there are no cracks,
damage or leakage. However, the oil
inspection should be performed according
to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet.” Consult
your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Recommended Grade and
Viscosity
s11bl01
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to “Front
Differential and Rear Differential Gear Oil”
FP534.
CAUTION
Using a differential gear oil other
than the specified oil may cause a
decline in vehicle performance.
Drive Belts
499
11
Maintenance and Service
(502,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
11-13. Brake Fluid
s11ao
& Checking the Fluid Level
s11ao01
WARNING
. Never let brake fluid contact your
eyes because brake fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If brake
fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
ately flush them thoroughly with
clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing
eye protection is advisable.
. Brake fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause a dangerous loss
of braking performance.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
CAUTION
. When adding brake fluid, be care-
ful not to allow any dirt into the
reservoir.
. Never splash the brake fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the brake
fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
when adding it. If brake fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
Visually check the brake fluid level of the
reservoir monthly on the even surface.
1) “MAX” level line
2) “MIN” level line
Be sure to check the brake fluid level from
the outside of the reservoir. If the fluid level
is below “MIN”, top up brake fluid to “MAX”.
Use only brake fluid from a sealed contain-
er.
& Recommended Brake Fluid
s11ao02
Refer to “Fluids” FP535.
CAUTION
Never use different brands of brake
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand.
Brake Fluid
500
(503,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
11-14. Brake Booster
s11aq
The brake booster utilizes the vacuum
produced by the engine manifold to reduce
the force required to depress the brake
pedal.
The vacuum in the brake booster may be
insufficient if the brake pedal is depressed
when the engine is stopped or after the
vehicle has been parked for a long period
of time. It such cases, it is necessary to
depress the brake pedal using greater
force than usual.
11-15. Brake Pedal
s11ar
Check the brake pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
11-16. Replacement of Brake
Pad
s11at
CAUTION
. If you continue to drive despite
the scraping noise from the audi-
ble brake pad wear indicator, it
will result in the need for costly
brake rotor repair or replace-
ment.
. It is recommended that you dis-
connect the vehicle battery be-
fore replacing the brake pad.
However, it is dangerous to dis-
connect the vehicle battery. We
recommend that you have your
SUBARU dealer replace the brake
pad.
– CONTINUED –
Brake Booster
501
11
Maintenance and Service
(504,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
The disc brakes have audible wear in-
dicators on the brake pads. If the brake
pads wear close to their service limit, the
wear indicator makes a very audible
scraping noise when the brake pedal is
applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
11-17. Tires and Wheels
s11av
& Types of Tires
s11av01
You should be familiar with type of tires
present on your vehicle.
! All season tires
s11av0101
The factory-installed tires on your new
vehicle are all season tires.
All season tires are designed to provide an
adequate measure of traction, handling
and braking performance in year-round
driving including snowy and icy road
conditions. However all season tires do
not offer as much traction performance as
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow
or on icy roads.
All season tires are identified by “ALL
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
the tire sidewall.
! Summer tires
s11av0102
Summer tires are high-speed capability
tires best suited for highway driving under
dry conditions.
Summer tires are inadequate for driving on
slippery roads such as on snow-covered or
icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the
use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to
replace all four tires.
! Winter (snow) tires
s11av0103
Winter tires are best suited for driving on
snow-covered and icy roads. However
winter tires do not perform as well as
summer tires and all season tires on roads
other than snow-covered and icy roads.
& Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec.
Models)
s11av02
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message by
sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-
ing system will activate only when the
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not
react immediately to a sudden drop in tire
pressure (for example, a blow-out caused
by running over a sharp object).
If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm
garage and will then drive the vehicle in
cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire
pressures may cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate. To avoid this
problem when adjusting the tire pressures
in a warm garage, inflate the tires to
pressures higher than those shown on
the tire placard. Specifically, inflate them
Tires and Wheels
502
(505,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
by an extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm
2
) for
every difference of 108F (5.68C) between
the temperature in the garage and the
temperature outside. By way of example,
the following table shows the required tire
pressures that correspond to various out-
side temperatures when the temperature
in the garage is 608F (15.68C).
Example:
Tire size: 225/55R17 97V, 225/50R18 95V
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
Outside
temperature
Adjusted pressure
[psi (kPa, kgf/cm
2
)]
Front Rear
308F (−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)
108F (−128C) 38 (265, 2.65) 37 (255, 2.55)
−108F (−238C) 41 (280, 2.8)
39 (270, 2.7)
Example:
Tire size: 225/65R17 102H, 225/60R18
100H
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
Outside
temperature
Adjusted pressure
[psi (kPa, kgf/cm
2
)]
Front Rear
308F (−18C) 38 (260, 2.65) 36 (250, 2.5)
108F (−128C) 40 (275, 2.8) 38 (265, 2.65)
−108F (−238C) 42 (290, 2.95)
41 (280, 2.8)
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates when you drive the vehicle in
cold outside air after adjusting the tire
pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the
tire pressures using the method described
above. Then, increase the vehicle speed
to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to
see that the low tire pressure warning light
goes off a few minutes later. If the low tire
pressure warning light does not go off, the
tire pressure monitoring system may not
be functioning normally. In this event, go to
a SUBARU dealer to have the system
inspected as soon as possible.
While the vehicle is driven, friction be-
tween tires and the road surface causes
the tires to warm up. After illumination of
the low tire pressure warning light, any
increase in the tire pressures caused by an
increase in the outside air temperature or
by an increase in the temperature in the
tires can cause the low tire pressure
warning light to go off.
System resetting is necessary when the
wheels are changed (for example, a switch
to snow tires) and new TPMS valves are
installed on the newly fitted wheels. Have
this work performed by a SUBARU dealer
following wheel replacement.
It may not be possible to install TPMS
valves on certain wheels that are on the
market. Therefore, if you change the
wheels (for example, a switch to snow
tires), use wheels that have the same part
number as the standard-equipment
wheels. Without four operational TPMS
valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS
will not fully function and the warning light
in the instrument panel will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approximately
one minute.
When a tire is replaced, adjustments are
necessary to ensure continued normal
operation of the tire pressure monitoring
system. As with wheel replacement, there-
fore, you should have the work performed
by a SUBARU dealer.
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
does not illuminate briefly after the
ignition switch is turned ON or the
light illuminates steadily after blink-
ing for approximately one minute,
– CONTINUED –
Tires and Wheels
503
11
Maintenance and Service
(506,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
you should have your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System checked at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead, per-
form the following procedure. Other-
wise an accident involving serious
vehicle damage and serious perso-
nal injury could occur.
1) Keep driving straight ahead while
gradually reducing speed.
2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
to have the system inspected.
& Tire Inspection
s11av03
Check on a daily basis that the tires
are free from serious damage,
nails, and stones. At the same time,
check the tires for abnormal wear.
Contact your SUBARU dealer im-
mediately if you find any problem.
NOTE
. When the wheels and tires
strike curbs or are subjected to
harsh treatment as when the
vehicle is driven on a rough
surface, they can suffer damage
that cannot be seen with the
naked eye. This type of damage
does not become evident until
time has passed. Try not to drive
over curbs, potholes or on other
rough surfaces. If doing so is
unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s
speed down to a walking pace or
less, and approach the curbs as
squarely as possible. Also, make
sure the tires are not pressed
against the curb when you park
the vehicle.
. If you feel unusual vibration
while driving or find it difficult to
steer the vehicle in a straight line,
one of the tires and/or wheels
may be damaged. Drive slowly to
the nearest authorized SUBARU
dealer and have the vehicle in-
spected.
& Tire Pressures and Wear
s11av04
Maintaining the correct tire pres-
sures helps to maximize the tires’
service lives and is essential for
good running performance. Check
and, if necessary, adjust the pres-
sure of each tire and the spare (if
equipped) at least once a month
and before any long journey.
Tires and Wheels
504
(507,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Tire placard
Check the tire pressures when the
tires are cold. Use a pressure
gauge to adjust the tire pressures
to the values shown on the tire
placard. The tire placard is located
on the door pillar on the driver’s
side.
Driving even a short distance
warms up the tires and increases
the tire pressures. Also, the tire
pressures are affected by the out-
side temperature. It is best to check
tire pressure outdoors before driv-
ing the vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air
inside it expands, causing the tire
pressure to increase. Be careful not
to mistakenly release air from a
warm tire to reduce its pressure.
NOTE
. The air pressure in a tire
increases by approximately 4.3
psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm
2
) when the
tire becomes warm.
. The tires are considered cold
when the vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours or
has been driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires
to adjust pressure. Doing so
will result in low tire pressure.
Incorrect tire pressures detract from
controllability and ride comfort, and
they cause the tires to wear abnor-
mally.
. Correctly inflated tires (tread
worn evenly)
Roadholding is good, and steering
is responsive. Rolling resistance is
low, so fuel consumption is also
lower.
– CONTINUED –
Tires and Wheels
505
11
Maintenance and Service
(508,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. Under inflated tires (tread worn at
shoulders)
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel
consumption is also higher.
. Over inflated tires (tread worn in
center)
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire
magnifies the effects of road sur-
face bumps and dips, possibly
resulting in vehicle damage.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with
excessively low tire pressures
can cause the tires to deform
severely and to rapidly be-
come hot. A sharp increase in
temperature could cause tread
separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to
an accident.
& Wheel Balance
s11av05
Each wheel was correctly balanced
when your vehicle was new, but the
wheels will become unbalanced as
the tires become worn during use.
Wheel imbalance causes the steer-
ing wheel to vibrate slightly at
certain vehicle speeds and detracts
from the vehicle’s straight-line sta-
bility. It can also cause steering and
suspension system problems and
abnormal tire wear. If you suspect
that the wheels are not correctly
balanced, have them checked and
adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.
Also have them adjusted after tire
repairs and after tire rotation.
CAUTION
Loss of correct wheel align-
ment causes the tires to wear
on one side and reduces the
vehicle’s running stability.
Tires and Wheels
506
(509,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Contact your SUBARU dealer
if you notice abnormal tire
wear.
NOTE
The suspension system is de-
signed to hold each wheel at a
certain alignment (relative to the
other wheels and to the road) for
optimum straight-line stability
and cornering performance.
& Wear Indicators
s11av06
1) New tread
2) Worn tread
3) Tread wear indicator
Each tire incorporates a tread wear
indicator, which becomes visible
when the depth of the tread grooves
decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A
tire must be replaced when the
tread wear indicator appears as a
solid band across the tread.
WARNING
When a tire’s tread wear indi-
cator becomes visible, the tire
is worn beyond the acceptable
limit and must be replaced
immediately. With a tire in this
condition, driving at high
speeds in wet weather can
cause the vehicle to hydro-
plane. The resulting loss of
vehicle control can lead to an
accident
.
NOTE
For safety, inspect the tire tread
regularly and replace the tires
before their tread wear indicators
become visible.
& Rotational Direction of Tires
s11av11
Example of rotational direction
marked on the sidewall
1) Front
If the tires have specific rotational
direction, refer to the arrow marked
on the side wall.
The arrow should be pointing for-
ward direction when the wheels are
fitted.
– CONTINUED –
Tires and Wheels
507
11
Maintenance and Service
(510,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Tire Rotation
s11av07
Vehicles equipped with 4 non-
unidirectional tires
1) Front
Vehicles equipped with unidi-
rectional tires
1) Front
Models with a spare tire of the
same wheel type as the in-
stalled tires
1) Front
NOTE
In prior to carrying out a tire
rotation, check the side wall of
the tires and confirm the follow-
ing.
. All 5 tires are the same in
brand and tread pattern.
. The rotational directions and
sizes match.
Tire wear varies from wheel to
wheel. Move the tires to the posi-
Tires and Wheels
508
(511,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
tions shown in the illustration each
time they are rotated. For the tire
rotation schedule, refer to the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet.”
Replace any damaged or unevenly
worn tire at the time of rotation. After
tire rotation, adjust the tire pres-
sures and make sure the wheel nuts
are correctly tightened.
After driving approximately 600
miles (1,000 km), check the wheel
nuts again and retighten any nut
that has become loose.
& Tire Replacement
s11av08
The wheels and tires are important and
integral parts of your vehicle’s design; they
cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires
fitted as standard equipment are optimally
matched to the characteristics of the
vehicle and were selected to give the best
possible combination of running perfor-
mance, ride comfort, and service life. It is
essential for every tire to have a size and
construction matching those shown on the
tire placard and to have a speed symbol
and load index matching those shown on
the tire placard.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts
from controllability, ride comfort, braking
performance, speedometer accuracy and
odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-
rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-
priately changes the vehicle’s ground
clearance.
All four tires must be the same in terms of
manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-
struction, and size. You are advised to
replace the tires with new ones that are
identical to those fitted as standard equip-
ment.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU
recommends replacing all four tires at the
same time.
WARNING
. When replacing or installing
tire(s), all four tires must be the
same for the following items.
(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For items (a) to (c), you must
obey the specification that is
printed on the tire placard. The
tire placard is located on the
driver’s door pillar.
If all four tires are not the same in
items (a) to (h), serious mechan-
ical damage could be caused to
the drivetrain of the car, and
affect the followings.
– Ride
– Handling
– Braking
– Speedometer/Odometer cali-
bration
– Clearance between the body
and the tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
. Use only radial tires. Do not use
radial tires together with belted
bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.
Doing so can dangerously re-
duce controllability, resulting in
an accident.
– CONTINUED –
Tires and Wheels
509
11
Maintenance and Service
(512,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Wheel Replacement
s11av09
When replacing wheels due, for example,
to damage, make sure the replacement
wheels match the specifications of the
wheels that are fitted as standard equip-
ment. Replacement wheels are available
from SUBARU dealers.
WARNING
Use only those wheels that are
specified for your vehicle. Wheels
not meeting specifications could
interfere with brake caliper opera-
tion and may cause the tires to rub
against the wheel well housing dur-
ing turns. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
11-18. Alloy Wheels
s11bm
Alloy wheels can be scratched and da-
maged easily. Handle them carefully to
maintain their appearance, performance,
and safety.
. When any of the wheels is removed and
replaced for tire rotation or to change a flat,
always check the tightness of the wheel
nuts after driving approximately 600 miles
(1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tighten it to
the specified torque.
. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
wheel.
. Never let the wheel rub against sharp
protrusions or curbs.
. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
the center cap is replaced, be sure to
replace them with genuine SUBARU parts
designed for alloy wheels.
11-19. Windshield Washer
Fluid
s11ax
Windshield washer fluid warning light
When there is only a small amount of
washer fluid remaining, the windshield
washer fluid warning light will appear.
When this occurs, refill the washer fluid
as follows.
Alloy Wheels
510
(513,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1) “FULL” mark
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then
add fluid until it reaches the “FULL” mark
on the tank.
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield
washer fluid is unavailable use clean
water.
In areas where water freezes in winter, use
an anti-freeze type windshield washer
fluid.
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
damage.
If you fill the windshield washer tank with a
fluid with a different concentration from the
one used previously, purge the old fluid
from the piping between the windshield
washer tank and washer nozzles by
operating the washer for a certain period
of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of
the fluid remaining in the piping is too low
for the outside temperature, it may freeze
and block the nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the out-
side temperature. If the concen-
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the windshield washer tank.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol anti-
freeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
11-20. Replacement of Wiper
Blades
s11az
Grease, wax, insects, or other materials on
the windshield or the wiper blade results in
jerky wiper operation and streaking on the
glass. If you cannot remove the streaks
after operating the windshield washer or if
the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer
surface of the windshield (or rear window)
and the wiper blades using a sponge or
soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild
abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the
windshield and wiper blades with clean
water. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
CAUTION
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
. When you wish to raise the pas-
senger-side wiper arm, first raise
the driver-side wiper arm. Other-
wise, the passenger-side wiper
assembly and driver-side wiper
assembly will touch each other,
possibly resulting in scratches.
– CONTINUED –
Replacement of Wiper Blades
511
11
Maintenance and Service
(514,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. Return the passenger-side wiper
arm to its original position before
returning the driver-side wiper
arm to its original position. Other-
wise, the passenger-side wiper
assembly and driver-side wiper
assembly will touch each other,
possibly resulting in scratches.
. When returning the raised wipers
to the original positions, return
the wipers slowly on the wind-
shield by hand. Returning the
wipers from the detached posi-
tions by the spring operation
might change the shape of the
wiper arm or scratch the wind-
shield.
. While removing the wiper blades
from the wiper arms, do not
return the wiper arms to the
original positions. Otherwise,
the windshield surface may be
scratched.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even
after following this method, replace the
wiper blades using the following proce-
dures.
& Windshield Wiper Blade As-
sembly
s11az01
NOTE
Do not lower the wiper arm while the
wiper blade assembly is removed.
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
First raise the driver’s side wiper arm and
then raise the front passenger’s side wiper
arm.
CAUTION
Hold the wiper arm when replacing
the wiper blade. Holding the wiper
blade, may result in blade deforma-
tion.
1) Lock knob
2. Hold the wiper blade connection by
hand, push the lock knob to release the
lock, and then pull out the wiper blade
assembly.
NOTE
Do not use a hard object to push the
lock knob. The lock knob may be
scratched.
Replacement of Wiper Blades
512
(515,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
3. When installing the wiper blade as-
sembly, align it with the wiper arm connec-
tion part and then slide it in the opposite
direction of removal to install. After instal-
ling the wiper blade assembly, check that
the connection part is locked completely.
4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
& Window Wiper Blade Rubber
s11az05
Replace the wiper blade rubber according
to the following procedure.
1. Pull the wiper blade rubber until the slit
on the underside of the wiper blade is in
the removal position, as shown in the
illustration, so that it can be removed.
2. Pull the end of the wiper blade rubber
through the slit to remove it.
3. To install a new wiper blade rubber,
perform the removal procedure in the
reverse order. After installation, check that
the tip of the wiper rubber has reached the
end of the cap.
NOTE
It may be difficult to perform the wiper
blade rubber replacement. We recom-
mend that you contact your SUBARU
dealer for wiper blade rubber replace-
ment if necessary.
– CONTINUED –
Replacement of Wiper Blades
513
11
Maintenance and Service
(516,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Rear Window Wiper Blade
Assembly (Outback)
s11az03
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-
terclockwise.
3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward
you to remove it from the wiper arm.
& Rear Window Wiper Blade
Rubber (Outback)
s11az04
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber
assembly to unlock it from the plastic
support.
Replacement of Wiper Blades
514
(517,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
the plastic support.
1) Metal spines
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided
with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and install
them in the new blade rubber.
4. Align the claws of the plastic support
with the grooves in the blade rubber
assembly, then slide the blade rubber
assembly into place.
Securely retain both ends of the rubber
with the stoppers on the plastic support
ends. If the rubber is not retained properly,
the wiper may scratch the rear window
glass.
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
Replacement of Wiper Blades
515
11
Maintenance and Service
(518,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
11-21. Battery
s11ba
WARNING
. Before beginning work on or near
any battery, be sure to extinguish
all cigarettes, matches, and light-
ers. Never expose a battery to an
open flame or electric sparks.
Batteries give off a gas which is
highly flammable and explosive.
. For safety, in case an explosion
does occur, wear eye protection
or shield your eyes when working
near any battery. Never lean over
a battery.
. Do not let battery fluid contact
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-
cause battery fluid is a corrosive
acid. If battery fluid gets on your
skin or in your eyes, immediately
flush the area with water thor-
oughly. Seek medical help imme-
diately if acid has entered the
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention im-
mediately.
. To lessen the risk of sparks,
remove rings, metal watchbands,
and other metal jewelry. Never
allow metal tools to contact the
positive battery terminal and any-
thing connected to it WHILE you
are at the same time in contact
with any other metallic portion of
the vehicle because a short cir-
cuit will result.
. Keep everyone including children
away from the battery.
. Charge the battery in a well-
ventilated area.
. Battery posts, terminals, and re-
lated accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the
State of California to cause can-
cer. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because
it will shorten battery life.
It is unnecessary to periodically check the
battery fluid level or periodically refill with
distilled water.
Battery
516
(519,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
11-22. Fuses
s11bb
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one having
a higher rating or with material other
than a fuse because serious damage
or a fire could result.
The fuses are designed to melt during an
overload to prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. The
fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
One is located under the instrument panel
behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.
1) Spare fuses
2) Fuse puller
The other one (main fuse box) is housed in
the engine compartment. Also, the spare
fuses and fuse puller are stored in the fuse
box cover.
Pinch the upper part of the fuse puller
when removing it from the main fuse box.
1) Good
2) Blown
If any lights, accessories or other electrical
controls do not operate, inspect the corre-
sponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace
it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position and turn off all electrical
accessories.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
Look at the back side of each fuse box
cover and refer to “Fuses and Circuits”
FP538.
– CONTINUED –
Fuses
517
11
Maintenance and Service
(520,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
replace it with a spare fuse of the same
rating.
6. If the same fuse blows again, this
indicates that its system has a problem.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
11-23. Installation of Acces-
sories
s11bd
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing fog lights or any other
electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
accessories may cause the electronic
system to malfunction if they are incor-
rectly installed or if they are not suited for
the vehicle. We recommend that you
install only genuine SUBARU accessories
on your vehicle.
11-24. Replacing Bulbs
s11be
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down, Otherwise, there is
the risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire. For the specified
wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb
Chart” FP542. For replacement,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
Installation of Accessories
518
(521,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Headlights
s11be18
The LED headlight warning light illumi-
nates if the LED headlights malfunction.
Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
& Front Turn Signal Light
s11be03
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
1. Turn the socket counterclockwise and
pull it out.
2. Pull out the bulb from the socket and
replace the bulb with a new one.
& Rear Combination Lights
s11be05
! Legacy
s11be0501
NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
1. Undo the clips. For the method to undo
the clips, refer to “Type C clips” FP486.
– CONTINUED –
Replacing Bulbs
519
11
Maintenance and Service
(522,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
2. Remove the side cover.
3. Remove the upper and lower screws.
4. Slide the rear combination light as-
sembly straight rearward and remove it
from the vehicle.
1) Rear turn signal light
5. Remove the bulb holder from the rear
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
6. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and
replace it with a new one.
7. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
8. Reinstall the rear combination light
assembly by sliding the two-pronged part
of the combination light assembly securely
to each holder of the vehicle side.
Replacing Bulbs
520
(523,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
9. Tighten the upper and lower screws.
10. Reinstall the side cover.
! Outback
s11be0502
1. Undo the clips. For the method to undo
the clips, refer to “Type C clips” FP486.
2. Remove the side cover.
3. Remove the upper and lower screws.
4. Slide the rear combination light as-
sembly straight rearward and remove it
from the vehicle.
1) Rear turn signal light
2) Rear side marker light
5. Remove the bulb holder from the rear
– CONTINUED –
Replacing Bulbs
521
11
Maintenance and Service
(524,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
6. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and
replace it with a new one.
7. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
8. Reinstall the rear combination light
assembly by sliding the two-pronged part
of the combination light assembly securely
to each holder of the vehicle side.
9. Tighten the upper and lower screws.
10. Reinstall the side cover.
& Backup Light
s11be06
! Legacy
s11be0601
NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the trunk trim lining by remov-
ing the clips indicated in the illustration.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and remove it.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
Replacing Bulbs
522
(525,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
5. Install the bulb socket by turning it
clockwise.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the trunk trim lining.
! Outback
s11be0602
1. Apply a flat-head screwdriver to the
light cover as shown in the illustration, and
pry the light cover off from the rear gate
trim.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
4. Install the bulb socket by turning it
clockwise.
5. Install the light cover on the rear gate.
& Dome Light
s11be08
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
– CONTINUED –
Replacing Bulbs
523
11
Maintenance and Service
(526,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at
its ends are aligned vertically.
3. Pull the bulb straight downward to
remove it.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens.
& Map Lights
s11be09
CAUTION
Replacing the bulb could cause
burns since the bulb may be very
hot. Have the bulb replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
& Door Step Light
s11be10
CAUTION
Replacing the bulb could cause a
short circuit. Have the bulb replaced
by your SUBARU dealer.
& Cargo Area Light (Outback)
s11be11
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
& Trunk Light (Legacy)
s11be12
CAUTION
Replacing the bulb could cause
burns since the bulb may be very
hot. Have the bulb replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
Replacing Bulbs
524
(527,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Other Bulbs
s11be29
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
11-25. Replacing Battery
s11bk
The access key fob/transmitter battery
may be discharged under the following
conditions.
. The operation of the keyless access
function is unstable.
. The operating distance of the remote
keyless entry system is unstable.
. The transmitter does not operate prop-
erly when used within the standard dis-
tance.
Replace the battery with a new one.
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the access key fob/transmit-
ter when replacing battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the ac-
cess key fob/transmitter when
replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of an explosion
if the battery is incorrectly re-
placed. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of the
battery.
. Batteries shall not be exposed to
excessive heat such as bright
sunlight, fire or the like.
NOTE
. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type of battery recom-
mended by the manufacturer.
. Dispose of used batteries according
to the local laws.
. Mount the battery in the correct
orientation to prevent fluid leakage.
Be careful not to bend the terminals. It
may result in a malfunction.
. It is recommended that the battery
should be replaced by a SUBARU deal-
er.
. Use a new battery.
. After replacing the battery, confirm
that the access key fob/transmitter
functions properly.
– CONTINUED –
Replacing Battery
525
11
Maintenance and Service
(528,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Replacing Battery of Access
Key Fob
s11bk01
CAUTION
. When removing or fitting the
access key fob cover, make sure
that the plastic part does not
come off or become misaligned.
. Before replacing the battery, re-
move any static electricity.
Battery: Button battery CR2032 or
equivalent
1) Release button
2) Emergency key
1. Take out the emergency key.
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl
tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to
remove the cover.
3. Take out the battery using a flat-head
screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.
4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)
side facing upward as shown in the figure.
5. Attach the cover to the access key fob
by fitting the projections and recesses
together.
Replacing Battery
526
(529,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Replacing Battery of Trans-
mitter
s11bk02
CAUTION
Before replacing the battery, remove
any static electricity.
Battery: Button battery CR1620 or
equivalent
1. Open the key head using a flat-head
screwdriver.
2. Remove the transmitter case from the
key head.
3. Open the transmitter case by releasing
the hooks.
1) Negative (−) side facing up
4. Replace the old battery with a new
battery (type CR1620 or equivalent) mak-
ing sure to install the new battery with the
negative (−) side facing up.
5. Put together the transmitter case by
fitting the hooks on the case.
6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the
key head.
7. Refit the removed half of the key head.
After the battery is replaced, the trans-
mitter must be synchronized with the
remote keyless entry system’s control
unit. Press either the “
” or “ ” button
six times to synchronize the unit.
Replacing Battery
527
11
Maintenance and Service
(530,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(531,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
s12
12-1. Specifications ............................................... 530
Dimensions ........................................................ 530
Engine................................................................ 531
Fuel.................................................................... 531
Engine Oil ..........................................................532
Front Differential and Rear Differential Gear Oil... 534
Fluids ................................................................. 535
Engine Coolant................................................... 535
Electrical System................................................536
Tires................................................................... 536
Brake Pedal........................................................537
Brake Disc..........................................................537
Brake Pad...........................................................537
12-2. Fuses and Circuits ........................................538
Fuse Panel Located in the Passenger
Compartment ................................................... 538
Main Fuse Panel Located in the Engine
Compartment ................................................... 540
12-3. Bulb Chart......................................................542
Safety Precautions ............................................. 542
Bulb Chart ......................................................... 543
12-4. Vehicle Identification.....................................545
12-5. Function Settings ..........................................546
Function Settings and Adjustments on
the Center Information Display ......................... 546
Individual Settings and Adjustments Excluding
Center Information Display ............................... 546
Function Settings and Adjustments Performed
by a Dealer ...................................................... 546
Specifications
12
Specifications
(532,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
12-1. Specifications s12aa
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
s12aa01
in (mm)
Item
Legacy Outback
2.5 L 2.4 L 2.5 L 2.4 L
Drive system AWD
Transmission type CVT
Overall length 190.6 (4,840) 191.3 (4,860)
Overall width 72.4 (1,840) 73.0 (1,855)
Overall height 59.1 (1,500) 66.1 (1,680)
Wheelbase 108.3 (2,750) 108.1 (2,745)
Tread
Front 62.2 (1,580) 61.8 (1,570)
Rear 63.4 (1,610) 62.8 (1,595)
Ground clearance*
1
5.9 (150)
8.7 (220)
*1: Measured with vehicle empty
CVT: Continuously variable transmission
AWD: All-Wheel Drive
Specifications
530
(533,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Engine
s12aa02
Engine model FB25 (2.5 L, DOHC, non-turbo) FA24 (2.4 L, DOHC, turbo)
Engine type
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder,
4 stroke direct injection gasoline engine
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder,
4-stroke direct injection gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 152 (2,498) 146 (2,387)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.70 6 3.54 (94.0 6 90.0) 3.70 6 3.39 (94.0 6 86.0)
Compression ratio 12.0 : 1 10.6 : 1
Firing order 1 – 3 – 2 – 4
1 – 3 – 2 – 4
& Fuel
s12aa08
Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity
Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher
18.5 US gal (70 liters, 15.4 Imp gal)
– CONTINUED –
Specifications
531
12
Specifications
(534,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Engine Oil
s12aa12
For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine Oil” FP491.
NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended
that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
! Approved engine oil
s12aa1201
Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer. If the approved engine oil is
unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.
! Alternative engine oil
s12aa1202
If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.
NOTE
. Each quantity indicated is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
. In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that will enhance fuel economy. Oils of lower
viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the
engine. The following table lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures.
. When adding oil, different brands may be used together as long as they are the same API classification and SAE viscosity
as those recommended by SUBARU.
Specifications
532
(535,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Oil grade
SAE viscosity No. and
applicable temperature
Engine oil capacity
API (American Petroleum Insti-
tute) classification SN with the
words “RESOURCE CONSER-
VING” or SN PLUS with the
words “RESOURCE CONSER-
VING”
or
ILSAC (International Lubricant
Specification Advisory Commit-
tee) GF-5, which can be identi-
fied with the ILSAC certification
mark (Starburst mark)
0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil
for optimum engine performance and
protection. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available,
5W-30 conventional oil may be used
if you need to add oil. However, you
should change to 0W-20 synthetic oil
at the next oil change.
2.5 L models
– Adding the oil from low level to
full level:
1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
– Changing the oil and oil filter:
4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)
2.4 L models
– Adding the oil from L to F level:
1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
– Changing the oil and oil filter:
4.8 US qt (4.5 liters, 4.0 Imp qt)
– CONTINUED –
Specifications
533
12
Specifications
(536,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Front Differential and Rear Differential Gear Oil
s12aa13
Oil Front differential gear oil Rear differential gear oil
Oil grade
. SUBARU Extra MT*
3
. API classification GL-5 (75W-90)*
4
2.5 L models and 2.4 L for Legacy: SUBARU Extra MT*
3
or API
classification GL-5 (75W-90*
4
)
2.4 L for Outback: API classification GL-5 (75W-90*
3
or 90*
4
)
SAE viscosity No.
and applicable
temperature
. 75W-90*
. 90
*: Recommended
Oil capacity*
1
1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt) 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
Remarks*
2
“Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear Differential Gear Oil” FP499
“Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear Differential Gear Oil” FP499
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of differential gear oil.
*4: You may use this type of differential gear oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from fuel efficiency.
Specifications
534
(537,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Fluids
s12aa10
Fluid Fluid type*
1
Fluid capacity*
2
Remarks*
3
Continuously variable transmis-
sion fluid
Consult your SUBARU dealer.
2.5 L models:
· Legacy: 11.9 US qt (11.3 liters, 9.9 Imp qt)
· Outback: 12.4 US qt (11.7 liters, 10.3 Imp qt)
2.4 L models:
· Legacy: 12.3 US qt (11.6 liters, 10.2 Imp qt)
· Outback: 12.6 US qt (11.9 liters, 10.5 Imp qt)
“
Continuously Variable Trans-
mission Fluid” FP499
Brake fluid
FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4
brake fluid
—
“
Brake Fluid” FP500
*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.
*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
& Engine Coolant
s12aa11
Vehicle model Coolant capacity Coolant type
2.5 L models 9.5 US qt (9.0 liters, 7.9 Imp qt)
SUBARU SUPER COOLANT
2.4 L models
9.2 US qt (8.7 liters, 7.7 Imp qt)
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “
Cooling System” FP494.
– CONTINUED –
Specifications
535
12
Specifications
(538,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Electrical System
s12aa03
Battery type LN2
Alternator
2.5 L models: 12 V-150 A
2.4 L models: 12 V-190 A
Spark plugs
2.5 L models DILKAR7Q8 (NGK)
2.4 L models
SILKFR8A6 (NGK)
& Tires
s12aa05
Item Legacy Outback
Tire size
225/55R17
97V
225/50R18
95V
225/65R17
102H
225/60R18
100H
Wheel size
17 6 7J
17 6 7 1/2J
18 6 7 1/2J 17 6 7J 18 6 7J
Pressure
Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
) 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Temporary spare tire/
Conventional tire
Size T155/70 D17 110M
T155/80 D17 101M*
2
225/60 R18 100H*
3
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
)
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
)*
2
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
)*
3
Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)*
3
Wheel nut tightening torque
88.5 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12.2 kgf·m)*
1
*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts
by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening procedure,
refer to “
Changing a Flat Tire” FP452.
*2: Models with temporary spare tire
*3: Models with conventional tire
Specifications
536
(539,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Brake Pedal
s12aa27
in (mm)
Pedal clearance 2.68 (68)*
Pedal free play
0.02 - 0.11 (0.5 - 2.7)
*: Minimum value when pedal is operated with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50 kgf)
& Brake Disc
s12aa18
If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, we recommend that you consult your
SUBARU dealer.
& Brake Pad
s12aa28
in (mm)
Brake pad wear limit
0.06 (1.5)
Specifications
537
12
Specifications
(540,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
12-2. Fuses and Circuits
s12ab
& Fuse Panel Located in the Passenger Compartment
s12ab01
Fuse
panel
Fuse rating Circuit
1 Empty
2 20 A CIGAR
3 7.5 A IG A-1
4 15 A AUDIO NAVI
5 10 A IG B-2
6 7.5 A METER IG (DCDC)
7 20 A 12 V SOCKET
8 10 A A/C IG
9 7.5 A ACC
10 7.5 A IG B-1
11 7.5 A EYE SIGHT (DCDC)
12 Empty
13 7.5 A IG A-3
14 Empty
15 Empty
16 7.5 A UNIT IG (DCDC)
17 7.5 A MIRROR ACC
18 Empty
19 10 A IG A-2
Fuses and Circuits
538
(541,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Fuse
panel
Fuse rating Circuit
20 10 A SRS AIR BAG
21 7.5 A A/C IG (DCDC)
22 10 A EYE SIGHT
23 7.5 A IG A-4
24 7.5 A A/C ACC (DCDC)
25 7.5 A UNIT +B (DCDC)
26 10 A BACK UP
27 15 A SEAT HTR R
28 20 A TRAIL R.FOG
29 Empty
30 7.5 A BACK UP (DCDC)
31 7.5 A SMT (DCDC)
32 15 A MIRROR +B
33 7.5 A KEY SW A
34 Empty
35 7.5 A ILLUMI (DCDC)
36 7.5 A KEY SW B
37 15 A UNIT +B1
38 7.5 A
UNIT +B2
– CONTINUED –
Fuses and Circuits
539
12
Specifications
(542,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Main Fuse Panel Located in the Engine Compartment
s12ab02
Fuse
panel
Fuse rating Circuit
1 Empty
2 7.5 A OBD
3 7.5 A STOP
4 10 A MB-B
5 7.5 A PU B/UP
6 30 A JB-B2
7 7.5 A M/B-IG1
8 7.5 A M/B-IG2
9 10 A M/B-IG3
10 7.5 A M/B-IG4
11 7.5 A HORN1
12 7.5 A HORN2
13 10 A TAIL
14 15 A HAZARD
15 20 A D/L
16 20 A F/P
17 Empty
18 Empty
19 10 A
AVCS
Fuses and Circuits
540
(543,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Fuse
panel
Fuse rating Circuit
20 15 A ETC
21 15 A TCU
22 7.5 A CVT SSR
23 10 A E/G2
24 15 A IG COIL
25 20 A O2 HTR
26 20 A DI
27 15 A E/G1
28 25 A MAIN FAN
29 15 A DEICER
30 30 A VDC SOL
31 15 A F-END
32 30 A F.WIP
33 25 A R.DEF
34 30 A BACKUP
35 20 A HTR
36 25 A SUB FAN
37 15 A R.WIP
38 20 A BLOWER
39 20 A BLOWER
40 10 A MB-A
41 Empty
Fuses and Circuits
541
12
Specifications
(544,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
12-3. Bulb Chart
s12ac
& Safety Precautions
s12ac03
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
a risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.
Bulb Chart
542
(545,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
& Bulb Chart
s12ac04
NOTE
Lights A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J and K are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
– CONTINUED –
Bulb Chart
543
12
Specifications
(546,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Wattage Bulb No.
1) Front turn signal lights 12 V-28 W 7444NA
2) Dome light 12 V-8 W —
3) Vanity mirror lights 14 V-1.4 W HTU
4) Door step lights (if equipped) 12 V-5 W W5W
5) Cargo area light (Outback) 12 V-13 W SAE #912
6) Rear side marker lights (Outback) 12 V-5 W W5W
7) Backup lights 12 V-16 W W16W
8) Rear turn signal lights 12 V-21 W WY21W
9) Trunk light (Legacy) 12 V-3.8 W SAE #194
A) Front position lights — —
Daytime running lights — —
B) Map lights — —
C) Low and high beam headlights — —
D) Front fog lights (if equipped) — —
E) Front side marker lights — —
F) Side turn signal lights (if equipped) — —
G) High-mounted stop light — —
H) Tail lights (if equipped) — —
I) License plate lights — —
J) Tail and stop lights — —
K) Rear side marker lights (Legacy) — —
Bulb Chart
544
(547,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
12-4. Vehicle Identification
s12ad
1) Emission control label
2) Certification and bar code label
3) Tire inflation pressure label (tire placard)
4) Vehicle identification number plate
5) Model number label
6) Fuel label
7) Air conditioner label
Vehicle Identification
545
12
Specifications
(548,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
12-5. Function Settings s12ag
& Function Settings and Adjustments on the Center Information Display
s12ag01
Setting adjustments can be manually changed within the center information display to meet your personal requirements. Refer to
“Center Information Display (CID)” FP209.
& Individual Settings and Adjustments Excluding Center Information Display
s12ag02
For setting adjustments to the following items, refer to the appropriate page for details.
Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Page
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 144
Remote keyless entry system Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation
135
& Function Settings and Adjustments Performed by a Dealer
s12ag03
Item Function Available settings
Factory default
setting
Alarm system
Monitoring start delay time (after closing
doors)
0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds
Map lights/Dome light/Cargo area light
(Outback) illumination
ON/OFF OFF
Keyless access with push-button
Audible signal volume*
2
Level 1 to 7 Level 5
Trunk open without key (Legacy) ON/OFF ON
Remote keyless entry system Audible signal volume*
2
Level 1 to 7 Level 5
Remote trunk open/power rear gate
open function*
1
Operation of trunk opening/power rear
gate opening by remote transmitter/ac-
cess key fob
Non-operation/Pressing twice/Pressing
and holding
Pressing and holding
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation
Battery drainage prevention function Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation
Function Settings
546
(549,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Item Function Available settings
Factory default
setting
Auto dimmer cancel
Sensitivity of the operation of the auto
dimmer cancel
OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max Mid
High beam assist function*
1
High beam assist function Operation/Non-operation Operation
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper*
1
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper op-
eration
Operation/Non-operation
U.S.-spec. models:
Non-operation
Other models: Op-
eration
*1: If equipped
*2: The audible signal volume cannot be set under level 5 for the warning chime.
Function Settings
547
12
Specifications
(550,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(551,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
s13
13-1. For U.S.A. ...................................................... 550
13-2. Tire Information ............................................ 550
Tire Labeling ...................................................... 550
Recommended Tire Inflation Pressure................. 552
Glossary of Tire Terminology .............................. 553
Tire Care – Maintenance and Safety Practices ..... 557
Vehicle Load Limit – How to Determine ...............558
Determining Compatibility of Tire and Vehicle
Load Capacities................................................ 561
Adverse Safety Consequences of Overloading
on Handling and Stopping and on Tires ............ 561
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit........... 562
13-3. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards.....562
TREADWEAR ..................................................... 563
TRACTION AA, A, B, C ....................................... 563
TEMPERATURE A, B, C ...................................... 563
13-4. Reporting Safety Defects (USA)...................564
13-5. How to Contact Transport Canada in
Order to Report a Safety Concern
Relating to the Vehicle (Canada) .................564
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
13
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
(552,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
13-1. For U.S.A.
s13aa
The following information has been
compiled according to Code of
Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part
575”.
13-2. Tire Information
s13ab
& Tire Labeling
s13ab01
Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Identification Number or TIN) are
placed on the sidewall of a tire by
tire manufacturers. These marking
can provide you with useful infor-
mation on the tire.
! Tire size
s13ab0101
Your vehicle comes equipped with
P-Metric tire size. It is important to
understand the sizing system in
selecting the proper tire for your
vehicles. Here is a brief review of
the tire sizing system with a break-
down of its individual elements.
! P Metric
s13ab010101
With the P-Metric system, Section
Width is measured in millimeters.
To convert millimeters into inches,
divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio
(Section Height divided by Section
Width) helps provide more dimen-
sional information about the tire
size.
Example:
(1) P = Certain tire type used on
light duty vehicles such as passen-
ger cars
(2) Section Width in millimeters
(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height
7 section width).
(4) R = Radial Construction
(5) Rim diameter in inches
! Load and Speed Rating
Descriptions
s13ab010102
The load and speed rating descrip-
tions will appear following the size
designation.
They provide two important facts
about the tire. First, the number
designation is its load index. Sec-
ond, the letter designation indicates
the tire’s speed rating.
For U.S.A.
550
(553,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Example:
(6) Load Index: A numerical code
which specifies the maximum load
a tire can carry at the speed
indicated by its speed symbol, at
maximum inflation pressure.
For example, “91” means 1,356 lbs
(615 kg), “90” means 1,323 lbs (600
kg), “89” means 1,279 lbs (580 kg)
WARNING
Load indices apply only to the
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting
a load rated tire on any vehicle
does not mean the vehicle can
be loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical
system describing a tire’s capability
to travel at established and prede-
termined speeds.
For example, “V” means 149 mph
(240 km/h)
WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle.
Putting a speed rated tire on
any vehicle does not mean
the vehicle can be operated
at the tire’s rated speed.
. The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, da-
maged, repaired, retreaded,
or otherwise altered from
their original condition. If
tires are repaired, re-
treaded, or otherwise al-
tered, they may not be sui-
table for original equipment
tire designed loads and
speeds.
! Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
s13ab0102
Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
marked on the intended outboard
sidewall. The TIN is composed of
four groups. Here is a brief review of
the TIN with a breakdown of its
individual elements.
(1) DOT symbol*
(2) Manufacturer’s Identification
Mark
(3) Tire Size
(4) Tire Type Code
(5) Date of Manufacture
The first two figures identify the
week, starting with “01” to represent
the first full week of the calendar
year; the second two figures repre-
sent the year. For example, 0101
means the 1st week of 2001.
*: The DOT symbol certifies that the
tire conforms to applicable Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards.
– CONTINUED –
Tire Information
551
13
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
(554,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
! Other markings
s13ab0103
The following makings are also
placed on the sidewall.
! Maximum permissible infla-
tion pressure
s13ab010301
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which this tire may be
inflated. For example, “350 kPa
(51 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
! Maximum load rating
s13ab010302
The load rating at the maximum
permissible weight load for this tire.
For example, “MAX. LOAD 615 kg
(1,356 LBS) @ 350 kPa (51 PSI)
MAX. PRESS.”
WARNING
Maximum load rating applies
only to the tire, not to the
vehicle. Putting a load rated
tire on any vehicle does not
mean the vehicle can be
loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
! Construction type
s13ab010303
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL
BELTED RADIAL”
! Construction
s13ab010304
The generic name of each cord
material used in the plies (both
sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2
STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1
NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLYE-
STER”
! Uniform Tire Quality Grad-
ing (UTQG)
s13ab010305
For details, refer to “Uniform Tire
Quality Grading Standards” FP562.
& Recommended Tire Inflation
Pressure
s13ab02
! Recommended cold tire in-
flation pressure
s13ab0201
For the recommended cold tire
inflation pressure for your vehicle’s
tires, refer to “
Tires” FP536.
! Vehicle placard
s13ab0202
The vehicle placard is affixed to the
driver’s side B-pillar.
Example:
Tire Information
552
(555,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
The vehicle placard shows original
tire size, recommended cold tire
inflation pressure on each tire at
maximum loaded vehicle weight,
seating capacity and loading infor-
mation.
! Adverse safety conse-
quences of under-inflation
s13ab0203
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to flex severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and failure of the
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
! Measuring and adjusting air
pressure to achieve proper
inflation
s13ab0204
Check and, if necessary, adjust the
pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month and
before any long journey. Check the
tire pressures when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to
adjust the tire pressures to the
specific values. Driving even a short
distance warms up the tires and
increases the tire pressures. Also,
the tire pressures are affected by
the outside temperature. It is best to
check tire pressure outdoors before
driving the vehicle. When a tire
becomes warm, the air inside it
expands, causing the tire pressure
to increase. Be careful not to mis-
takenly release air from a warm tire
to reduce its pressure.
& Glossary of Tire Terminology
s13ab03
. Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of
those standard items which may be
replaced) of automatic transmis-
sion, power steering, power brakes,
power windows, power seats, radio,
and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-in-
stalled equipment (whether in-
stalled or not).
. Bead
The part of the tire that is made of
steel wires, wrapped or reinforced
by ply cords and that is shaped to fit
the rim.
. Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between
components in the bead.
. Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the center-
line of the tread.
. Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and
sidewall rubber which, when in-
flated, bears the load.
. Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the
tread or sidewall.
. Cold tire pressure
The pressure in a tire that has been
driven less than 1 mile or has been
standing for three hours or more.
. Cord
The strands forming the plies in the
tire.
– CONTINUED –
Tire Information
553
13
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
(556,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent
rubber compounds.
. Cracking
Any parting within the tread, side-
wall, or inner liner of the tire
extending to cord material.
. Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight
optional engine.
. Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and higher inflation pressure
than the corresponding standard
tire.
. Groove
The space between two adjacent
tread ribs.
. Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside sur-
face of a tubeless tire that contains
the inflating medium within the tire.
. Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from
cord material in the carcass.
. Intended outboard sidewall
(1) The sidewall that contains a
whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that
is higher or deeper than the
same molding on the other side-
wall of the tire, or
(2) The outward facing sidewall
of an asymmetrical tire that has a
particular side that must always
face outward when mounting on
a vehicle.
. Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufac-
turer as primarily intended for use
on lightweight trucks or multipur-
pose passenger vehicles.
. Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is
rated to carry for a given inflation
pressure.
. Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
. Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
physical dimension requirements.
. Normal occupant weight
150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of
occupants specified in the second
column of Table 1 that is appended
to the end of this section.
. Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehi-
cle as specified in the third column
of Table 1 that is appended to the
Tire Information
554
(557,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
end of this section.
. Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread,
sidewall, or innerliner that extends
to cord material.
. Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated
new tire.
. Overall width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, including elevations
due to labeling, decorations, or
protective bands or ribs.
. Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passen-
ger cars, multipurpose passenger
vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)
of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.
. Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords.
. Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound
between adjacent plies.
. Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rub-
ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or
other materials, that, when
mounted on an automotive wheel,
provides the traction and contains
the gas or fluid that sustains the
load.
. Production options weight
The combined weight of those
installed regular production options
weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in
excess of those standard items
which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or acces-
sory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim.
. Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at substantially 90 degrees to
the centerline of the tread.
. Recommended inflation pres-
sure
The cold inflation pressure recom-
mended by a vehicle manufacturer.
. Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and at higher inflation pres-
sures than the corresponding stan-
dard tire.
. Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire
and tube assembly upon which the
tire beads are seated.
. Rim diameter
Nominal diameter of the bead seat.
. Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width.
. Rim type designation
The industry of manufacturer’s des-
ignation for a rim by style or code.
. Rim width
Nominal distance between rim
flanges.
. Section width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, excluding elevations
due to labeling, decoration, or pro-
tective bands.
– CONTINUED –
Tire Information
555
13
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
(558,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the
tread and bead.
. Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound
from the cord material in the side-
wall.
. Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index
equal to or greater than 110, com-
pared to the ASTM E1136-93 Stan-
dard Reference Test Tire, when
using the snow traction test as
described in ASTM F-1805-00,
Standard Test Method for Single
Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight
Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered
Surfaces, and that is marked with
an Alpine Symbol “
” on at least
one sidewall.
. Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
testing, and it may be any rim listed
as appropriate for use with that tire.
. Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
. Tread rib
A tread section running circumfer-
entially around a tire.
. Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the
tire carcass.
. Treadwear indicators (TWI)
The projections within the principal
grooves designed to give a visual
indication of the degrees of wear of
the tread.
. Vehicle capacity weight
The rated cargo and luggage load
plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
vehicle’s designated seating capa-
city.
. Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight and dividing
by two.
. Vehicle normal load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal oc-
cupant weight (distributed in accor-
dance with Table 1 that is appended
to the end of this section) and
dividing by 2.
. Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel
and tire assembly securely during
testing.
Tire Information
556
(559,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating
capacity, number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
number of occupants
Occupant distribution in a
normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front.
5 through 10 3
2 in front, 1 in second
seat.
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
16 through 22 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
& Tire Care – Maintenance and
Safety Practices
s13ab04
. Check on a daily basis that the
tires are free from serious damage,
nails, and stones. At the same time,
check the tires for abnormal wear.
. Inspect the tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their
tread wear indicators become visi-
ble. When a tire’s tread wear in-
dicator becomes visible, the tire is
worn beyond the acceptable limit
and must be replaced immediately.
With a tire in this condition, driving
at even low speeds in wet weather
can cause the vehicle to hydro-
plane. Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control can lead to an
accident.
– CONTINUED –
Tire Information
557
13
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
(560,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
. To maximize the life of each tire
and ensure that the tires wear
uniformly, it is best to rotate the
tires every 6,000 miles (10,000 km).
Rotating the tires involves switching
the front and rear tires on the right-
hand side of the vehicle and simi-
larly switching the front and rear
tires on the left-hand side of the
vehicle. (Each tire must be kept on
its original side of the vehicle.)
Replace any damaged or unevenly
worn tire at the time of rotation. After
tire rotation, adjust the tire pres-
sures and make sure the wheel nuts
are correctly tightened. For informa-
tion about the tightening torque and
tightening sequence for the wheel
nuts, refer to “
Flat Tires” FP452.
& Vehicle Load Limit – How to
Determine
s13ab05
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by avail-
able cargo space. The load limit of
your vehicle is shown on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s side
B-pillar. Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s
placard.
The vehicle placard also shows
seating capacity of your vehicle.
The total load capacity includes the
total weight of driver and all pas-
sengers and their belongings, any
cargo, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
can be calculated by the following
method.
Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
weight of occupants + total weight
of optional equipment + tongue load
of a trailer (if applicable))
For towing capacity information and
weight limits, refer to “
Trailer Towing
(Outback)” FP438.
! Calculating total and load ca-
pacities varying seating con-
figurations
s13ab0501
Calculate the available load capa-
city as shown in the following
examples:
Example 1A
Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-
hicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is
indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 363 kg or
800 lbs”.
Tire Information
558
(561,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
For example, if the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)
plus cargo weighing 551 lbs (250
kg).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity by subtracting the total
weight from the vehicle capacity
weight of 800 lbs (363 kg).
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 95 lbs (43 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
Example 1B
For example, if a person weighing
176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same
vehicle (bringing the number of
occupants to two), the calculations
are as follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 81 lbs (37
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 81 lbs (37 kg) or more.
Example 2A (Outback only)
CAUTION
Legacy: Your vehicle is neither
designed nor intended to be
used for trailer towing. There-
fore, never tow a trailer with
your vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Tire Information
559
13
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
(562,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-
hicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is
indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 363 kg or
800 lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs
(10 kg), to which is attached a trailer
weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of
the trailer weight is applied to the
trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load =
176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
Example 2B (Outback only)
CAUTION
Legacy: Your vehicle is neither
designed nor intended to be
used for trailer towing. There-
fore, never tow a trailer with
your vehicle.
For example, if a person weighing
143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing
40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same
vehicle (bringing the number of
occupants to three), and a child
restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5
kg) is installed in the vehicle for the
Tire Information
560
(563,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
child to use, the calculations are as
follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 22 lbs (10
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 22 lbs (10 kg) or more.
& Determining Compatibility of
Tire and Vehicle Load Capa-
cities
s13ab06
The sum of four tires’ maximum
load ratings must exceed the max-
imum loaded vehicle weight
(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the
maximum load ratings of two front
tires and of two rear tires must
exceed each axle’s maximum
loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original
equipment tires are designed to
fulfill those conditions.
The maximum loaded vehicle
weight is referred to Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). And each
axle’s maximum loaded capacity is
referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-
ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each
axle’s GAWR are shown on the
vehicle certification label affixed to
the driver’s door.
The GVWR and front and rear
GAWRs are determined by not only
the maximum load rating of tires but
also loaded capacities of the vehi-
cle’s suspension, axles and other
parts of the body.
Therefore, this means that the
vehicle cannot necessarily be
loaded up to the tire’s maximum
load rating on the tire sidewall.
& Adverse Safety Conse-
quences of Overloading on
Handling and Stopping and
on Tires
s13ab07
Overloading could affect vehicle
handling, stopping distance, vehicle
and tire as shown in the following.
This could lead to an accident and
possibly result in severe personal
injury.
. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
. Heavy and/or high-mounted
loads could increase the risk of
rollover.
. Stopping distance will increase.
. Brakes could overheat and fail.
. Suspension, bearings, axles and
other parts of the body could break
or experience accelerated wear that
– CONTINUED –
Tire Information
561
13
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
(564,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
will shorten vehicle life.
. Tires could fail.
. Tread separation could occur.
. Tire could separate from its rim.
& Steps for Determining Cor-
rect Load Limit
s13ab08
1. Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For exam-
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be
five 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capa-
city is 650 lbs (1,400 − 750 (5 6
150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your ve-
hicle.
13-3. Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards
s13ac
This information indicates the rela-
tive performance of passenger car
tires in the area of treadwear,
traction, and temperature resis-
tance. This is to aid the consumer
in making an informed choice in the
purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall be-
tween tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
The quality grades apply to new
pneumatic tires for use on passen-
ger cars. However, they do not
apply to deep tread, winter type
snow tires, space-saver or tempor-
ary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 12 inches
or less, or to some limited produc-
tion tires.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
562
(565,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
All passenger car tires must con-
form to Federal Safety Require-
ments in addition to these grades.
& TREADWEAR
s13ac02
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under con-
trolled conditions on a specified
government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1-
1/2) times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
& TRACTION AA, A, B, C
s13ac03
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spe-
cified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteris-
tics.
& TEMPERATURE A, B, C
s13ac04
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified indoor labora-
tory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perfor-
mance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
563
13
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
(566,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
13-4. Reporting Safety De-
fects (USA)
s13ah
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the Na-
tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad-
ministration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Subaru of America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA can-
not become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer,
or Subaru of America, Inc. To
contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.
gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
SE, West Building, Washington, DC
20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.
gov.
13-5. How to Contact Trans-
port Canada in Order to Re-
port a Safety Concern
Relating to the Vehicle
(Canada)
s13cf
Reporting Safety Defects (USA)
564
(567,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(568,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(569,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
s14
Index
14
Index
(570,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
1
11.6-inch display models.......................................... P211
A
Abbreviation .............................................................. P4
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ................................. P356
Warning light ..................................................... P185
Access key
Warning indicator............................................... P191
Access key fob ....................................................... P115
Accessories .......................................................... P518
Accessory power outlet .......................................... P308
Adjustable storage net............................................ P320
Air cleaner element ................................................ P496
Air conditioner
Automatic climate control .................................... P285
Manual climate control system ............................ P287
Air filtration system ................................................ P293
Airflow mode selection............................................ P287
Alarm system ........................................................ P141
All season tires...................................................... P502
All-Wheel Drive warning light................................... P189
Alloy wheel ........................................................... P510
Cleaning ........................................................... P475
Antenna................................................................ P298
Printed antenna ................................................. P298
Roof antenna .................................................... P298
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................................. P356
Arming the system ................................................. P142
Armrest .................................................................. P46
Ashtray.................................................................. P311
Assist grip ............................................................. P312
AT OIL TEMP warning light...................................... P184
Audio
Antenna ............................................................ P298
Set ................................................................... P298
Auto dimmer cancel function.................................... P176
Auto on/off headlights ............................................. P248
Sensor.............................................................. P250
Auto Start Stop system ........................................... P372
Indicator light........................................... P199, P372
No Activity Detected indicator light ............. P199, P375
OFF indicator light.................................... P198, P375
Warning light ........................................... P198, P374
Auto Vehicle Hold................................................... P368
ON indicator light ............................................... P188
Operation indicator light ...................................... P188
Auto Vehicle Hold function....................................... P368
Auto-dimming mirror/compass.................................. P263
Automatic climate control operation .......................... P285
Automatic headlight beam leveler ............................. P255
Warning light ..................................................... P198
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor (ALR/ELR).............................................. P48
B
Backup light........................................................... P522
Battery .................................................................. P516
Drainage prevention function ............................... P141
Jump starting..................................................... P457
Replacement (access key fob)................... P130, P526
Replacement (remote engine start transmitter) ...... P345
Index
568
(571,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Replacement (transmitter).......................... P136, P527
Vehicle battery................................................... P516
Blind Spot Detection (BSD)..................................... P385
Booster seat............................................................ P68
Bottle holder.......................................................... P307
Brake
Assist ............................................................... P356
Booster.................................................... P355, P501
Disc ................................................................. P537
Fluid........................................................ P500, P535
Pad .................................................................. P537
Parking............................................................. P366
Pedal ............................................................... P501
Brake system ........................................................ P355
Warning light ..................................................... P186
Braking................................................................. P355
Tips.................................................................. P355
BSD/RCTA............................................................ P384
Approach indicator light/warning buzzer................ P388
OFF indicator ........................................... P199, P389
Warning indicator...................................... P199, P390
Warning volume................................................. P388
Bulb
Chart................................................................ P542
Replacement..................................................... P518
C
Camera
Front View Monitor............................................. P376
Rear view camera.............................................. P379
Cargo area
Cover ............................................................... P314
Light ....................................................... P303, P524
Tie-down hooks ................................................. P319
Catalytic converter.................................................. P419
Center console....................................................... P305
Center information display (CID) .............................. P209
11.6-inch display models ..................................... P211
Cleaning ........................................................... P478
Dual 7.0-inch display models ............................... P232
Changing
Coolant ............................................................. P495
Flat tire ............................................................. P452
Oil and oil filter .................................................. P493
Charge warning light............................................... P183
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator
light ................................................................... P182
Checking
Coolant level ..................................................... P495
Fluid level (brake fluid)........................................ P500
Fluid level (washer fluid) ..................................... P510
Oil level (engine oil)............................................ P491
Child restraint systems .............................................. P58
Installation of a booster seat................................. P68
Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt......................... P63
Lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .................. P69
Top tether anchorages ......................................... P74
Child safety .............................................................. P5
Locks................................................................ P145
Chime
Key reminder..................................................... P169
Index
569
14
Index
(572,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Light................................................................. P248
Seatbelt ..................................................... P48, P177
Cleaning
Alloy wheels...................................................... P475
Center information display .................................. P478
Interior.............................................................. P477
Ventilation grille ................................................. P292
Climate control system ........................................... P279
Automatic ......................................................... P285
Manual ............................................................. P287
Clock.................................................................... P245
Coat hook............................................................. P312
Combination meter display (color LCD) .................... P201
Compass .............................................................. P263
Console
Center .............................................................. P305
Overhead.......................................................... P305
Continuously variable transmission (CVT)................. P347
Fluid........................................................ P499, P535
Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ........ P184
Control switch light................................................. P248
Convenient tie-down hooks ..................................... P319
Coolant........................................................ P495, P535
Cooling system...................................................... P494
Corrosion protection............................................... P476
Crossbars ............................................................. P432
Cup holder............................................................ P306
Front passenger’s .............................................. P306
Rear passenger’s .............................................. P307
D
Daytime running light (DRL) system.......................... P254
Defogger ............................................................... P261
Defrosting.............................................................. P291
Deicer ................................................................... P261
Differential gear oil
Front ...................................................... P499, P534
Rear ....................................................... P499, P534
Dimensions............................................................ P530
Disarming the alarm system .................................... P143
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators .................... P356
Dome light................................................... P302, P523
Door
Locks................................................................ P137
Open indicator ................................................... P189
Step light........................................................... P524
Unlock selection function..................................... P124
Double trip meter.................................................... P174
Drive belts ............................................................. P499
Driver Focus .......................................................... P404
Driver Monitoring System ........................................ P404
OFF indicator light.............................................. P200
Operation indicator light ...................................... P200
Temporary stop indicator light .............................. P200
Warning light ..................................................... P200
Driving
All-Wheel Drive model ........................................ P421
Drinking ............................................................... P7
Drugs .................................................................. P7
Foreign countries ............................................... P420
Off road ............................................................ P422
Index
570
(573,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Pets ..................................................................... P8
Snowy and icy roads.......................................... P426
Tips......................................................... P352, P421
Tired or sleepy ...................................................... P8
Winter .............................................................. P424
Dual 7.0-inch display models................................... P232
E
Electrical system.................................................... P536
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system...... P357
Warning............................................................ P187
Electronic parking brake ......................................... P366
Automatic release function by accelerator pedal .... P368
Indicator light..................................................... P187
Switch .............................................................. P366
Warning................................................... P187, P371
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .......................... P47
Engine.................................................................. P531
Compartment overview....................................... P489
Coolant.................................................... P495, P535
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..................... P6, P418
Hood ................................................................ P487
Hood open warning light ..................................... P189
Hood release knob............................................. P487
Low oil level warning indicator............................. P183
Oil........................................................... P491, P532
Overheating ...................................................... P460
Starting & stopping ................................... P334, P336
Event data recorder ................................................. P10
Exterior care ......................................................... P474
F
Flat tires................................................................ P452
Floor mat............................................................... P314
Fluid level
Brake................................................................ P500
Continuously variable transmission....................... P499
Fog light................................................................ P256
Indicator light..................................................... P198
Switch............................................................... P256
Front
Differential gear oil ................................... P499, P534
Fog light............................................................ P256
Fog light indicator light........................................ P198
Fog light switch.................................................. P256
Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF
indicators ........................................................ P181
Passenger’s seatbelt warning light ....................... P177
Seatbelt pretensioners ......................................... P55
Turn signal light ................................................. P519
View Monitor ..................................................... P376
View monitor switch............................................ P377
Front seats .............................................................. P28
Forward and backward adjustment........................ P31
Head restraint adjustment .................................... P37
Manual seat ....................................................... P31
Memory function ................................................. P33
Power seat......................................................... P32
Reclining............................................................ P31
Seat heater ............................................... P39, P290
Seat height adjustment (driver's seat).................... P31
Seat ventilation .......................................... P40, P290
Index
571
14
Index
(574,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Fuel ............................................................ P326, P531
Consumption indicator........................................ P205
Economy hints................................................... P418
Filler lid and cap ................................................ P328
Gauge .............................................................. P174
Requirements........................................... P326, P531
Tank capacity .................................................... P531
Fuses ................................................................... P517
Fuses and circuits.................................................. P538
G
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).......................... P430
Glove box ............................................................. P305
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)...................... P430
H
Hands-free Power Rear Gate function...................... P159
Hazard warning flasher.................................. P172, P448
Head restraint adjustment
Front seat ........................................................... P37
Rear seat............................................................ P44
Headlight .............................................................. P248
Beam leveler..................................................... P255
Control switch ................................................... P248
Flasher ............................................................. P250
Indicator light..................................................... P198
Welcome lighting function ................................... P249
Heated Steering Wheel system ............................... P275
High Beam Assist
Function ........................................................... P251
Indicator ........................................................... P197
High beam indicator light......................................... P197
High/low beam change (dimmer) .............................. P250
Hill descent control ................................................. P362
Indicator............................................................ P199
HomeLink
®
............................................................. P263
Hook
Coat ................................................................. P312
Convenient tie-down........................................... P319
Shopping bag .................................................... P313
Towing and tie-down........................................... P461
Horn ..................................................................... P276
Hose and connections............................................. P494
I
Icy road surface warning indicator ............................ P200
Ignition switch ........................................................ P168
Light ................................................................. P169
Illumination brightness control .................................. P175
Immobilizer ............................................................ P131
Indicator light
Auto Start Stop .................................................. P199
Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected .................... P199
Auto Start Stop OFF........................................... P198
Auto Vehicle Hold ON......................................... P188
Auto Vehicle Hold operation ................................ P188
BSD/RCTA OFF....................................... P199, P389
Door open......................................................... P189
Driver Monitoring System OFF............................. P200
Driver Monitoring System operation...................... P200
Driver Monitoring System temporary stop.............. P200
Electronic parking brake...................................... P187
Index
572
(575,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Front fog light.................................................... P198
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF....... P181
Headlight .......................................................... P198
High beam ........................................................ P197
High beam assist ...................................... P197, P251
Hill descent control ............................................ P199
Immobilizer ....................................................... P196
Intelligent (I) mode .................................... P197, P353
Malfunction ....................................................... P182
RAB OFF.......................................................... P200
Security ................................................... P132, P196
Select lever/Gear position ................................... P197
SI-DRIVE.......................................................... P197
Sonar audible alarm OFF ................................... P201
Sport Sharp (S#) mode ............................. P197, P353
Steering Responsive Headlight OFF .................... P198
Turn signal........................................................ P197
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF............................ P191
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation ..................... P190
X-MODE........................................................... P199
Inside mirror.......................................................... P263
Interior lights ......................................................... P302
Internal trunk lid release handle............................... P149
J
Jack and jack handle ............................................. P449
Jack-up point......................................................... P452
Jump starting ........................................................ P457
K
Key ....................................................................... P115
Number plate..................................................... P115
Positions ........................................................... P168
Reminder chime................................................. P169
Replacement ..................................................... P132
Keyless access with push-button start system ........... P115
Disabling keyless access functions....................... P127
Locking and unlocking doors ............................... P120
Warning chimes and warning indicator........ P130, P191
When access key fob does not operate
properly .............................. P130, P172, P338, P465
Keyless entry system .............................................. P133
L
Lane Change Assist (LCA) ...................................... P385
Lap belt pretensioner ................................................ P56
Leather seat materials............................................. P477
LED headlight warning light ........................... P198, P519
LED headlights....................................................... P519
Lifting Cargo Cover................................................. P314
Light
Backup ............................................................. P522
Cargo area.............................................. P303, P524
Control switch.................................................... P248
Daytime running................................................. P254
Dome ..................................................... P302, P523
Door step .......................................................... P524
Front fog ........................................................... P256
Front side marker............................................... P248
Ignition switch.................................................... P169
Map........................................................ P302, P524
Rear combination............................................... P519
Index
573
14
Index
(576,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Rear side marker light ........................................ P521
Rear turn signal ........................................ P256, P519
Side turn signal ................................................. P543
Trunk................................................................ P524
Turn signal............................................... P256, P519
Vanity mirror...................................................... P304
Loading your vehicle .............................................. P428
Low fuel warning light............................................. P189
Low tire pressure warning light ................................ P184
Lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) ......... P69
Lower and top tether anchorage ................................ P69
M
Maintenance
Precautions....................................................... P483
Schedule .......................................................... P483
Seatbelt .............................................................. P54
Tips.................................................................. P485
Tools ................................................................ P449
Malfunction indicator light (CHECK ENGINE
warning light)...................................................... P182
Manual
Climate control .................................................. P287
Mode (continuously variable transmission) ............ P351
Rear gate ......................................................... P151
Seat ................................................................... P31
Map light ..................................................... P302, P524
Maximum load limits............................................... P439
Meters and gauges ................................................ P173
Mirror defogger...................................................... P261
Mirrors.................................................................. P263
Moonroof............................................................... P161
Switch............................................................... P161
N
New vehicle break-in driving .................................... P418
O
Odometer .............................................................. P173
Off road driving ...................................................... P422
Oil filter ................................................................. P493
Oil level
Engine .............................................................. P491
Front differential gear ......................................... P499
Rear differential gear .......................................... P499
Warning light ..................................................... P183
Oil pressure warning light ........................................ P183
On-road and off-road driving ....................................... P9
One-touch lane changer .......................................... P257
Outside
Mirror defogger .................................................. P261
Mirrors .............................................................. P271
Overhead console .................................................. P305
Overheating engine ................................................ P460
P
Parking ................................................................. P365
Brake................................................................ P366
Tips .................................................................. P371
Passenger seatbelt reminder ................................... P177
Periodic inspections................................................ P420
Petrol fuel.............................................................. P326
Index
574
(577,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
PIN code Access ................................................... P124
Power
Folding mirror switch .......................................... P273
Outlets ............................................................. P308
Outside mirrors......................................... P271, P273
Rear gate ......................................................... P152
Seat ................................................................... P32
Steering............................................................ P354
Steering warning light......................................... P189
Window switches ............................................... P146
Windows........................................................... P145
Precautions against vehicle modification............ P57, P109
Preparing to drive .................................................. P333
Printed antenna ..................................................... P298
Push-button
Ignition switch ................................................... P170
Starting and stopping engine............................... P336
R
Rear
Combination lights ............................................. P519
Differential gear oil.................................... P499, P534
Turn signal light ................................................. P519
View camera ..................................................... P379
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)............................... P385
Rear gate .................................................... P151, P467
Manual ............................................................. P151
Power............................................................... P152
Rear Seat Reminder ................................................ P58
Rear seatbelt warning light...................................... P179
Rear seats .............................................................. P40
Armrest.............................................................. P46
Folding down...................................................... P42
Head restraint adjustment .................................... P44
Heater ............................................................... P39
Reclining............................................................ P41
Rear view camera .................................................. P379
Rear window
Defogger........................................................... P261
Wiper and washer switch .................................... P260
Wiper blade rubber............................................. P514
Wiper blades ..................................................... P514
Recommended
Brake fluid......................................................... P535
Continuously variable transmission fluid................ P535
Engine oil.......................................................... P532
Front differential gear oil ........................... P499, P534
Rear differential gear oil............................ P499, P534
Spark plugs ....................................................... P536
Refueling............................................................... P328
Remote control mirror switch ................................... P271
Remote engine start system .................................... P339
Remote keyless entry system .................................. P133
Replacing battery ..................................... P136, P525
Replacement
Access key fob battery.............................. P130, P526
Air cleaner element ............................................ P496
Brake pad ......................................................... P501
Cabin air filter .................................................... P293
Key .................................................................. P132
Remote engine start transmitter battery ................ P345
Remote keyless entry transmitter battery .... P136, P527
Index
575
14
Index
(578,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Tire .................................................................. P509
Wheel............................................................... P510
Wiper blade rubber ............................................. P511
Wiper blades...................................................... P511
Replacing bulbs..................................................... P518
Backup light ...................................................... P522
Cargo area light................................................. P524
Dome light ........................................................ P523
Door step light................................................... P524
Front turn signal light ......................................... P519
Headlight .......................................................... P519
LED headlight ................................................... P519
Map light .......................................................... P524
Rear combination light........................................ P519
Rear side marker light ........................................ P521
Rear turn signal light .......................................... P519
Trunk light......................................................... P524
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System................ P393
OFF indicator .................................................... P200
ON/OFF setting ................................................. P402
Warning indicator...................................... P200, P403
Rocking the vehicle................................................ P428
Roof
Antenna............................................................ P298
Molding and crossbar ......................................... P430
Rails with integrated crossbars ............................ P432
S
Safety
Precautions when driving ........................................ P5
Symbol ................................................................. P4
Warnings.............................................................. P3
Seat
Fabric ............................................................... P477
Front ................................................................. P28
Heater ............................................................... P38
Height adjustment ............................................... P31
Manual .............................................................. P31
Memory function ................................................. P33
Power ................................................................ P32
Rear .................................................................. P40
Ventilation .......................................................... P40
Seatbelt............................................................. P5, P46
Fastening ........................................................... P48
Maintenance....................................................... P54
Pretensioners ..................................................... P55
Safety tips.......................................................... P46
Warning light and chime.............................. P48, P177
Security
Alarm system..................................................... P141
Immobilizer........................................................ P131
Indicator light........................................... P132, P196
Select lever ........................................................... P348
Position indicator................................................ P197
Shift lock function............................................... P349
Shift paddle ........................................................... P351
Shopping bag hook................................................. P313
Shoulder pretensioners ............................................. P55
SI-DRIVE .............................................................. P353
Indicator light..................................................... P197
Intelligent (I) mode indicator ...................... P197, P353
Mode ................................................................ P353
Index
576
(579,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Sport Sharp (S#) mode indicator ................ P197, P353
Switches........................................................... P353
Snow tires.................................................... P427, P502
Snowy and icy roads.............................................. P426
Sonar audible alarm OFF indicator .......................... P201
Sounding a panic alarm.......................................... P136
Spark plugs.................................................. P498, P536
Specifications ........................................................ P530
Speedometer......................................................... P173
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System
airbag)........................................................... P5, P77
System monitors................................................ P107
System servicing ............................................... P108
System warning light .......................... P86, P107, P181
Starting & stopping engine ............................. P334, P336
State emission testing (U.S. only) ............................ P332
Steering lock ................................................ P336, P338
Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) ...................... P254
OFF indicator light .................................... P198, P254
OFF switch ....................................................... P254
Warning light ..................................................... P198
Steering wheel
Heater .............................................................. P275
Lock........................................................ P336, P338
Power............................................................... P354
Tilt/telescopic .................................................... P274
Storage compartment............................................. P304
Summer tires......................................................... P502
Sun visors............................................................. P303
Sunshade ............................................................. P162
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ............. P77
Curtain airbag.................................................... P100
Frontal airbag ..................................................... P86
Knee airbag........................................................ P86
Side airbag........................................................ P100
Synthetic leather upholstery..................................... P478
T
Tachometer............................................................ P173
Temperature gauge................................................. P175
Temperature warning light
AT OIL TEMP .................................................... P184
Temporary spare tire............................................... P448
Tether (child restraint system) ............................ P69, P74
Tie-down hooks...................................................... P461
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ................................... P274
Tire............................................................. P502, P536
All season ......................................................... P502
Chains .............................................................. P428
Information ........................................................ P550
Inspection ......................................................... P504
Pressures and wear ........................................... P504
Replacement ..................................................... P509
Rotation ............................................................ P508
Size and pressure .............................................. P536
Summer ............................................................ P502
Types ............................................................... P502
Winter (snow) .................................................... P502
Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) .................................. P184, P363, P456, P502
Screen.............................................................. P365
Warning light ..................................................... P184
Index
577
14
Index
(580,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Tires and wheels ................................................... P502
Tools .................................................................... P449
Top tether anchorages....................................... P69, P74
Towing.................................................................. P461
All wheels on the ground .................................... P464
Flat-bed truck .................................................... P464
Hooks............................................................... P461
Tie-down hooks ................................................. P461
Weight.............................................................. P439
Trailer
Connecting ....................................................... P436
Hitch (Outback) ........................................ P436, P442
Towing (Legacy) ................................................ P438
Towing (Outback)............................................... P438
Towing tips........................................................ P444
Trip meter ............................................................. P174
Trunk lid ............................................................... P148
Opener button ................................................... P149
Release handle ................................................. P149
Trunk light............................................................. P524
Turn signal
Indicator lights ................................................... P197
Lever................................................................ P256
U
Under-floor storage compartment............................. P320
USB power supply ................................................. P310
V
Valet mode............................................................ P144
Vanity mirror.......................................................... P304
Light ................................................................. P304
Vehicle
Capacity weight ................................................. P429
Identification ...................................................... P545
Symbols............................................................... P5
Vehicle Dynamics Control system............................. P358
OFF indicator light.............................................. P191
Operation indicator light ...................................... P190
Warning light ..................................................... P190
Ventilator ............................................................... P278
W
Warning and indicator lights..................................... P177
Warning chimes
Driver Monitoring System .................................... P411
Keyless access with push-button start system ....... P191
Seatbelt .................................................... P48, P177
Warning indicator
Access key.............................................. P130, P191
BSD/RCTA ........................................................ P199
Engine low oil level ............................................ P183
Icy road surface ................................................. P200
Keyless access with push-button start
system.................................................. P130, P191
RAB ....................................................... P200, P403
Warning light
ABS.................................................................. P185
All-Wheel Drive.................................................. P189
AT OIL TEMP .................................................... P184
Auto Start Stop .................................................. P198
Automatic headlight beam leveler......................... P198
Index
578
(581,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 1
Brake system .................................................... P186
Charge ............................................................. P183
CHECK ENGINE ............................................... P182
Driver Monitoring System.................................... P200
Engine hood open ............................................. P189
Front passenger’s seatbelt.................................. P177
LED headlight ................................................... P198
Low fuel............................................................ P189
Low tire pressure ............................................... P184
Oil pressure ...................................................... P183
Power steering .................................................. P189
Rear seatbelt..................................................... P179
Seatbelt ............................................................ P177
SRS airbag system ............................................ P181
Steering Responsive Headlight............................ P198
Vehicle Dynamics Control ................................... P190
Windshield washer fluid ...................................... P189
Warranties ................................................................ P2
Warranties and maintenance ................................... P439
Washing ............................................................... P474
Waxing and polishing ............................................. P475
Wear indicators ..................................................... P507
Welcome lighting function ....................................... P249
Wheel
Alloy................................................................. P510
Balance ............................................................ P506
Nut tightening torque.......................................... P536
Replacement..................................................... P510
Windows............................................................... P145
Windshield
Washer fluid...................................................... P510
Washer fluid warning light ................................... P189
Wiper and washer switches................................. P258
Wiper blades ..................................................... P512
Wiper deicer ...................................................... P261
Winter
Driving .............................................................. P424
Tires ....................................................... P427, P502
Wiper and washer .................................................. P257
Wiper deicer .......................................................... P261
X
X-MODE................................................................ P360
Indicator............................................................ P199
Index
579
14
Index
(2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Left Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(1,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Right Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Left Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(1,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Right Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Left Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(1,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Right Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(2,1)
北米Model "A2600BE-B" EDITED: 2020/ 9/ 16
GAS STATION REFERENCE
S99AA
& Fuel
S99AA01
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90
RON) or higher.
& Fuel Octane Rating
S99AA02
! RON
S99AA0201
This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.
! AKI
S99AA0202
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and
Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti
Knock Index (AKI).
& Limit of Ethanol Content
S99AA09
2.5 L models: no more than 10%
2.4 L models: no more than 15%
& Fuel Tank Capacity
S99AA03
18.5 US gal (70 liters, 15.4 Imp gal)
& Engine Oil
S99AA04
Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further
details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative
engine oil described as follows.
. API classification SN with the words “RESOURCE CON-
SERVING” or SN PLUS with the words “RESOURCE CON-
SERVING”
. or ILSAC GF-5, which can be identified with the ILSAC
certification mark (Starburst mark)
For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine Oil”
FP532.
& Engine Oil Capacity
S99AA05
2.5 L models: 4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)
2.4 L models: 4.8 US qt (4.5 liters, 4.0 Imp qt)
The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated
based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil filter.
After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be checked
using an oil level gauge. For more details about maintenance
and service, refer to “Engine Oil” FP491.
& Cold Tire Pressure
S99AA06
Refer to “Tires” FP536.
